JP7775014B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that variably displays first or second identification information based on the establishment of a start condition, and can be controlled to create an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result.

Conventional gaming machines have been proposed that display a title to announce the type of reach effect when the reach effect begins (see, for example, Patent Document 1). There are also machines that variably display multiple types of decorative identification information (decorative patterns) in response to the variably displayed specific identification information (special patterns) (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-118411 JP 2017-86392 A

There was room for improving the marketability of gaming machines with the functions and configurations described in Patent Documents 1 and 2.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

The gaming machine of claim 1 comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player by executing variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
a display means;
The game control means
It is possible to determine whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state based on the game medium entering the start area,
The specific identification information can be variably displayed,
Based on the result of the determination, it is possible to determine one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command can be transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command can be transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command can be transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command can be transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state will be achieved in a first reach,
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state will be achieved in a second reach,
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The execution time of the title display corresponding to the first reach is different from the execution time of the title display corresponding to the second reach,
The title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach are:
a first part from the start of a title display corresponding to the first reach or a title display corresponding to the second reach to the display in a specific area;
a second part in which a title display corresponding to the first reach or a title display corresponding to the second reach is displayed in the specific area;
a third part that ends the display of the title display corresponding to the first reach or the title display corresponding to the second reach,
The display means
displaying a title display corresponding to the first reach such that the second part is longer than the first part and the third part, and the first part is longer than the third part;
displaying a title display corresponding to the second reach such that the second part is longer than the first part and the third part, and the first part is longer than the third part;
before displaying the title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach, a prompting character display for urging a player to take an action can be displayed,
a title display corresponding to the first reach and a title display corresponding to the second reach being displayed larger than the promotion character display;
the display means is capable of displaying a prompting character display for urging a player to take an action before displaying a title display corresponding to the second reach;
The time period during which the title display corresponding to the second reach is displayed is longer than the time period during which the promotion character display is displayed without the player making any action after the promotion character display is displayed,
the performance control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variably displayed specific identification information;
In one rendering mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed;
When switching the background image from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display can be executed by gradually increasing the transparency of the first background image, and a background fade-in display can be executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the second background image,
When starting the variable display of the decorative identification information, an identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased,
The identification information fade-out display and the background fade-out display can be executed at the same time,
a period during which the background fade-out display is executed is longer than a period during which the identification information fade-out display is executed;
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, an identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually decreased in accordance with the deceleration of the variable display of the decorative identification information,
The identification information fade-in display and the background fade-in display can be executed at the same time,
a period during which the background fade-in display is executed is longer than a period during which the identification information fade-in display is executed;
It is characterized by the following.

The present invention may have only the specific features of the invention set forth in the claims of the present invention, or it may have both the specific features of the invention set forth in the claims of the present invention and features other than those specific features.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. This is a diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time reduction in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time reduction state. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view showing a pachinko gaming machine in characteristic section 131SG. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic section 131SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table, (C1) and (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table, and (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. An explanatory diagram showing a time-saving number determination table for each transition trigger. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern type determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing the expectation level of the reach effect of the super reach. This is an explanatory diagram showing the difference in expectation between the reach effects of super reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a game control data storage area. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance control data storage area. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal special symbol processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal special symbol processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. FIG. 2 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. An explanatory diagram showing the execution rate of the pre-reading preview performance. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display start setting process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the determination ratio of the stopping symbols. An explanatory diagram showing the performance control patterns for each variation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing the performance control patterns for each variation pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow of effects during variable display in the normal state. This figure shows the flow of presentation during variable display in time-saving state A and special state. A diagram showing the flow of presentation during variable display in time-saving state B. A figure showing the progression of images when the low base weak reach A performance is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach A performance. A figure showing the progression of images when the low base weak reach B performance is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach B performance. A figure showing the progression of images when the low base strong reach A performance is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A performance. A figure showing the progression of images showing a bad example of a low-base strong reach A presentation. A figure showing the progression of images when the low base strong reach B performance is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A performance. A figure showing the transition of images when the low-base strongest reach effect is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low-base strongest reach effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the transition of an image in a modified example of the title display part. This figure shows the progression of images when high-base super reach A to D effects are executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of high base super reach A to D effects. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the position where title characters are displayed in the display area of the image display device. An explanatory diagram showing the presentation time of the super reach presentation. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the presentation times of super reach presentations. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title characters and decorative patterns of the super reach performance. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution status of the expectation level suggestion display. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the transition of images when a selection effect is executed. An explanatory diagram showing the number of operations required to switch to the next title in the selection effect and the execution rate of the super reach effect when the selection effect is executed. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of effects that can be performed during variable display. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the execution rate of effects that can be executed during variable display. A figure showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display performance. This is a timing chart showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display performance. A diagram showing the execution status of the title color change effect. A diagram showing the timing at which the color of the title characters changes in the title color change effect. A diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion performance A. A diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion presentation B. A diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion presentation C. A diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion performance D. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display mode of an operation prompting image. A diagram showing the execution status of the jackpot start effect. A diagram showing the display status of the remaining number of times until Yu-time. A diagram showing the execution status of the Yu-time start effect. There is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title text of the super reach effect, the explanatory text, the title text of the jackpot start effect, and the operation prompt text. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title characters of the Super Reach effect and the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the arrangement of game effect lamps. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to an LED driver. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of a child table. FIG. A figure showing a brightness data table used in super reach effects. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table for weak reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a child table for weak reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of weak reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of weak reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of weak reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table for the title common chance up red. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of the title common chance up red child table. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the title common chance up red. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the title common chance up red. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the title common chance up red. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table for the title common chance up money. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a title-wide chance-up golden child table. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the title common chance up money. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the title common chance up money. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the title common chance up money. This figure shows the settings of the parent table for the weak reach system weak reach A introduction. A diagram showing the settings of a child table for the weak reach system weak reach A introduction. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. This figure shows the settings of the parent table for the weak reach system weak reach B introduction. A diagram showing the settings of a child table for the weak reach system weak reach B introduction. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of strong reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a child table for a strong reach common title. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a grandchild table for strong reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a grandchild table for strong reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a grandchild table for strong reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a grandchild table for strong reach common titles. This figure shows the setting contents of the parent table for the strong reach system strong reach A introduction. A diagram showing the settings of a child table for the strong reach system with strong reach A introduced. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach A is introduced in the strong reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach A is introduced in the strong reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach A is introduced in the strong reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach A is introduced in the strong reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach A is introduced in the strong reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach A is introduced in the strong reach system. This is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table for the strong reach system strong reach B introduction. A diagram showing the settings of a child table for the strong reach system strong reach B introduction. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach B is introduced. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach B is introduced. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach B is introduced. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach B is introduced. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach B is introduced. This figure shows the settings of the parent table for the strongest reach title introduction of the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the child table for the strongest reach title introduction of the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table of high base reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the child table of the high base reach common title. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of high base reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of high base reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of high base reach common titles. This figure shows the settings of the parent table for the introduction of high base reach type reach A. A diagram showing the settings of the child table for the introduction of high base reach type reach A. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when high base reach type reach A is introduced. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when high base reach type reach A is introduced. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when high base reach type reach A is introduced. This figure shows the settings of the parent table for the introduction of high base reach type reach B. A diagram showing the settings of the child table for the introduction of high base reach type reach B. This figure shows the settings of the parent table for the introduction of high base reach type reach C. A diagram showing the settings of the child table for the introduction of high base reach type reach C. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table for the introduction of high base reach reach D. A diagram showing the settings of the child table for the introduction of high base reach reach D. This figure shows the relationship between the timing and brightness data that make up the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances. FIG. 1 is a front view showing a gaming machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a game control data storage area. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal special symbol processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display start setting process. This is a diagram for explaining decorative patterns and small patterns. (A1) and (A2) are figures showing the first presentation mode, (B1) and (B2) are figures showing the second presentation mode, (C1) and (C2) are figures showing the third presentation mode, and (D1) and (D2) are figures showing the fourth presentation mode. (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative pattern in the first presentation mode, and (B1) and (B2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative pattern in the second presentation mode. (C1) and (C2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative symbols in the third presentation mode, (D1) and (D2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative symbols in the fourth presentation mode, and (E) is a diagram for explaining the manner in which the decorative symbols and the small symbols are displayed. 1A is a diagram showing the decorative pattern change start action, (B) is a change stop action, and (C) is a loop action. FIG. 10A is a diagram comparing various decorative pattern actions with the duration of lamp light emission control, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of loop lamp light emission control. (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams illustrating examples of the operation of the hold display. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the first presentation mode. This is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following Figure 37. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the second presentation mode. This is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following Figure 39. A diagram showing details of the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in Figure 39. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns as modified example 1. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following FIG. 42. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the third presentation mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining how the decorative pattern appears. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the fourth presentation mode. A diagram showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). This figure shows the flow of decorative pattern stop display following Figure 47. (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of decorative pattern stop displays when the number of reserved memories is three in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). (A) and (B) are diagrams showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns in the fourth presentation mode (third presentation mode). (A1) is a diagram showing a first background image, (A2) is a diagram showing a first predetermined background image, and (B) is a diagram explaining a change in background. A diagram showing the flow of background changes in the first presentation mode. This is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the first presentation mode. This is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the second presentation mode. This is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the third and fourth presentation modes. (A) is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in the first presentation mode, (B) is the second presentation mode, and (C) is the third and fourth presentation modes. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a customer waiting demo performance. This figure shows an example of operation when a start winning occurs during a customer waiting demo performance. A diagram showing the flow of pseudo-consecutive announcements. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the pseudo consecutive number of times displayed and the pattern color, (B) is a diagram showing the types of pseudo consecutive number of times displayed and the pattern color, and (C) is a diagram showing the pseudo consecutive number of times displayed color determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow of reach effects. A diagram showing the flow of reach effects following Figure 61. 10A to 10C are diagrams showing examples of the operation of each part in reach performance. A diagram showing the flow of SP reach presentation. This is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach presentation following Figure 64. A diagram showing an example of the operation of each part in the SP reach performance. (A1) to (A7) are diagrams showing a second modification of the present invention. 10A to 10D are diagrams showing a third modified example of the present invention.

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special design, second special design),
The feature of this invention is that decorative identification information (decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and in the title display part in the specific reach, a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed so as to use the display position of the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) that has become a reach state.
According to this feature, when decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative identification information has become a reach state. Therefore, by displaying the title display corresponding to the specific reach using the display position of the decorative identification information that has become a reach state in the title display part of the specific reach, attention can naturally be drawn to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form 1-2 is the gaming machine according to form 1-1,
The decorative identification information is displayed in a reach mode of a first size (decorative pattern (large)) before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and then the decorative identification information (decorative pattern (large)) displayed in the reach mode is displayed in a second size (decorative pattern (small)) smaller than the first size, and the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed so as to use the display position of the decorative identification information (decorative pattern (small)) displayed in the second size.
According to this feature, the decorative identification information that was displayed in the first size becomes the second size, attracting the player's attention, and by using the display position of the decorative identification information that has become the second size to display a title display corresponding to a specific reach, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of form 1-3 is the gaming machine according to form 1-1 or 1-2,
In the title display part in the specific reach, at the timing when the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) that has become a reach state is displayed, a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) that has become a reach state.
According to this feature, at the timing when decorative identification information that has become a reach state is displayed in the title display part of a specific reach, the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative identification information that has become a reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title display.

A gaming machine of form 1-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-3,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) and a second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach,
The title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach are characterized in that they appear overlapping with one of the decorative identification information (the decorative pattern on the left) of the decorative identification information that has become a reach state.
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach appear overlapping with one of the decorative identification information of the decorative identification information that has reached the reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-5 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1-4,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a third reach (low base strongest reach effect) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect),
The title display corresponding to the third reach is characterized in that it appears overlapping with both decoration identification information (decorative patterns on both sides) that have become reach states.
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the third reach, which has a higher expectation of being controlled to a more advantageous state than the first reach and the second reach, appears overlapping with the decorative identification information of both of the reach states, so that the title display corresponding to the third reach can be displayed in a more impactful manner.

A gaming machine according to aspect 1-6 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1-5,
The title display corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), the title display corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect), and the title display corresponding to the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) are characterized in that they appear overlapping with one of the decorative identification information (decorative pattern on the left) or both of the decorative identification information (decorative patterns on both sides) of the decorative identification information that has reached the reach state, and then are displayed in a fixed position, and are displayed overlapping with part of the decorative identification information (decorative patterns on both sides) that has reached the reach state even during the period when they are displayed in the fixed position.
According to this feature, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display even after the title display has been displayed in its fixed position.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means;
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the gaming medium (gaming ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium (gaming ball) is controlled to the advantageous state;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2, PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special design, second special design),
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
In the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), second decoration identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part, and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The second decorative identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), and in the title display part, the title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decorative identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state.
According to this feature, when decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative identification information has become a reach state. Therefore, by using the display position of the decorative identification information that has become a reach state in the title display part in the first reach and second reach to display the title display corresponding to the first reach and second reach, the player can naturally pay attention to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be displayed in an optimal manner.

The gaming machine of form 2-2 is the gaming machine according to form 2-1,
The feature of this invention is that the expectation level controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) differs between when the first decorative identification information (odd number decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state and when the second decorative identification information (even number decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state.
According to this feature, when decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state, the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on which decorative identification information has become the reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title display.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means;
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the gaming medium (gaming ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium (gaming ball) is controlled to the advantageous state;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PB2-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to PB1-13) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to PB2-15) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-11 to PB1-13) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-13 to PA2-15) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strongest reach presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strongest reach presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The third reach (low-base strongest reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special design, second special design),
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
In the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), second decoration identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part, and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The second decoration identification information (even-numbered decorative symbols) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even-numbered decorative symbols) that has become the reach state,
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The second decorative identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach presentation), and in the title display part, the title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decorative identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state.
According to this feature, when decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative identification information has become a reach state. Therefore, by using the display position of the decorative identification information that has become a reach state in the title display part in the first reach, second reach, and third reach, the title display corresponding to the first reach, second reach, and third reach can be displayed, which naturally draws attention to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be displayed in an optimal manner.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special design, second special design),
Displaying decorative identification information (decorative patterns) in a reach state before a title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and displaying a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach in the title display part in the specific reach so as to use the display position of the decorative identification information (decorative patterns) that has become a reach state,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, when decoration identification information is displayed in a reach state, the player focuses on which decoration identification information has reached the reach state, so by displaying the title display corresponding to the specific reach using the display position of the decoration identification information that has reached the reach state in the title display part of the specific reach, the player can naturally focus on the title display as well. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the light-emitting means can emit light in an appropriate lighting mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in an appropriate manner.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the gaming medium (gaming ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium (gaming ball) is controlled to the advantageous state;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to PB1-7) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern (variation pattern designation command designating PA2-3) is determined, a second command is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB7) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to PA2-9) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach B presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach B effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The first reach (low base weak reach B effect) and the second reach (low base strong reach B effect) are reaches in which a plurality of characters are used,
The first reach (low base weak reach B effect) is a reach in which a first character in the first reach (ally character "Yume Yume") and a second character in the first reach (enemy character "Boingo") are used, and it is announced that the first character (ally character "Yume Yume") will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) is a reach in which a first character in the second reach (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") and a second character in the second reach (enemy character "Robo") are used, and it is announced that the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means (image display device 5)
The introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach B performance) starts with a display in which the first character in the second reach (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") is positioned in the foreground and the second character in the second reach (enemy character "Robo") is positioned in the background,
The introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is characterized in that it starts with a display in which the first character in the first reach (ally character "Yume Yume") is not in the foreground and the second character in the second reach (enemy character "Boingo") is not in the background.
According to this feature, for the second reach, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, the first character, which is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, starts from an arrangement in which the first character is at the front and the second character is at the back, which allows the player to empathize and makes it easier for the player to intuitively recognize that the degree of expectation is high, resulting in an appropriate title display.

The gaming machine of form 5-2 is the gaming machine according to form 5-1,
The first characters are characters who receive a benefit if they win a battle (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana");
The second character is a character (enemy character "robot") to which no benefit is given if the character wins the battle,
At the start of the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation), the first characters (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") are displayed in a position in front with their backs to the player, and the second character (enemy character "Robo") is displayed in a position in the back with their backs to the player, with the first and second characters facing each other.
According to this feature, for the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, the player's direction and the first character's direction are the same, making it easier for the player to empathize with the character and to recognize that the expectation is high.

The gaming machine of form 5-3 is the gaming machine according to form 5-1 or 5-2,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation), the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") and the second character (enemy character "Robo") are displayed at a position including the display area where the title display (title characters) was displayed in the title display part.
According to this feature, when the title display disappears, a player who has been paying attention to the title display will naturally turn his or her gaze to the first and second characters.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the gaming medium (gaming ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium (gaming ball) is controlled to the advantageous state;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern (variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2, PA2-3) is determined, a second command is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) has a higher expectation of being controlled into the advantageous state (jackpot game state) than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) has a longer execution time than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The first reach and the second reach are reaches in which dialogue subtitles are used,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), a title display (title characters) and dialogue subtitles are displayed,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the dialogue subtitles that were displayed in the title display part of the first reach are continuously displayed,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), no dialogue subtitles are displayed, but the title display (title text) is displayed.
According to this feature, during the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation and a long execution time, the title display and dialogue subtitles are displayed so as not to overlap as much as possible, while during the first reach, which has a relatively low expectation and a short execution time, even if the dialogue subtitles and title display overlap, the title display is ended first so that the player can also pay attention to the dialogue subtitles, making it possible to provide the title display and dialogue subtitles to the player in an appropriate manner, and as a result, the title display can be performed in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 6-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 6-1,
When the title display (title characters) and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the first reach are displayed in the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the performance scene is not switched in the subsequent introductory part until the display of the dialogue subtitles that were displayed simultaneously with the title display (title characters) has ended.
According to this feature, when the title display corresponding to the first reach and the dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part in the first reach, the scene of the performance does not change in the subsequent introductory part until the display of the dialogue subtitles that were displayed simultaneously with the title display has ended, so that the viewer can focus on the title display and then on the dialogue subtitles.

The gaming machine of aspect 6-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 6-1 or 6-2,
When a title display (title characters) and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the first reach are displayed in the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output, while audio corresponding to the title display (title characters) is not output.
According to this feature, when a title display and dialogue subtitles are displayed simultaneously, the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output, while the audio corresponding to the title display is not output, making it easier to hear the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The title display of the specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect) is composed of multiple characters ("Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!", "Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B to D)"),
The display means (image display device 5) starts displaying the title display (title characters) of the specific reach in the title display part of the specific reach at a first size (enlarged size) in which only a part of the plurality of characters is visible, and then gradually reduces the display size from the first size to a second size (reduced size) in which all of the plurality of characters are visible, and displays the title display (title characters) of the specific reach;
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach titles for the strongest reach series, and common titles for the high base reach series);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of strongest reach of the strongest reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A (introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D)).
According to this feature, in the title display part in a specific reach, the display is performed at a first size in which only some of the characters are visible, and then the size gradually decreases until all the characters are visible, thereby attracting the player's attention to the title display. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in an appropriate light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 7-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 7-1,
Before the title display part of the specific reach (low base strongest reach effect) starts, the movable object (movable body 32) operates to overlap with the front side of the display means (image display device 5),
During the period from when the movable object moves to when it returns to its initial position (falling effect), a background corresponding to the movement of the movable object (background dedicated to the falling effect) is displayed, and when the movable object returns to its initial position, the title display (title characters) begins to be displayed at a first size (enlarged size) in which not all of the multiple characters are visible and the display area of the display means is filled so that the background becomes invisible, and then the title display at a second size (reduced size) and the background corresponding to the title display (background dedicated to the title display) are displayed.
According to this feature, the method of displaying the reach title makes an impact, while at the same time switching the background can be performed without creating a sense of incongruity, and the title display can be presented to the player in an appropriate manner.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The title display of the specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect) is composed of multiple characters ("Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!", "Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B to D)"),
The display means (image display device 5) ends the title display part in the specific reach by enlarging and displaying the plurality of characters (enlarging the characters until the entire display area is filled with some of the title characters) from a state in which the plurality of characters are displayed (a state in which the characters are displayed in a reduced size at a fixed position) and displays a display corresponding to the introduction part in the specific reach (the background at the start of the introduction part) so that it can be seen,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach titles for the strongest reach series, and common titles for the high base reach series);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of strongest reach of the strongest reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A (introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D)).
According to this feature, the player pays attention to the title display during the title display part, and by using the title display appropriately, the player can seamlessly switch to the display corresponding to the next introductory part. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the light-emitting means can emit light in an appropriate light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

[Form 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the gaming medium (gaming ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium (gaming ball) is controlled to the advantageous state;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The execution time (T1-1 to T2-2) of the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) and the execution time (T2-1 to T2-3) of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) are different,
The title display part is made up of a first part (title start period) from the start of displaying the title display until it is displayed at a fixed position, a second part (title display period) displayed at the fixed position, and a third part (title end period) from the display at the fixed position until it ends,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), a title display (title characters) is displayed so that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), the title display (title characters) is displayed so that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
According to this feature, even if the execution times of the title display parts differ between the first reach and the second reach, the second part displayed in the fixed position is made the longest, thereby drawing attention to the type of title display. Furthermore, even if the execution times of the title display parts differ between the first reach and the second reach, the first part, which takes place before the title display in the fixed position, is made longer than the third part, which takes place from the display in the fixed position until the display ends, thereby making it possible to tease which title display will be displayed. Furthermore, even if the execution times of the title display parts differ between the first reach and the second reach, the title display parts can be made easier to understand by making the relationship between the execution times of the first, second, and third parts the same.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the gaming medium (gaming ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium (gaming ball) is controlled to the advantageous state;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern in normal state) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern in normal state) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern in probability variable state) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern in probability variable state) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state,
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a normal state) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a deviation variation pattern in a normal state) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating a jackpot variation pattern in a probability variation state) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern in a probability variation state) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach effect in a normal state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state will be controlled by the second reach (super reach effect in the probability variable state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (super reach effect in a normal state) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The execution time (T1-1 to T2-1 to T3) of the title display part in the first reach (super reach effect in normal state) and the execution time (T4) of the title display part in the second reach (super reach effect in probability variable state) are different,
The first reach (super reach effect in normal state) is a reach executed in normal state, and the second reach (super reach effect in probability variable state) is a reach executed in a special state (probability variable state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The title display part is made up of a first part (title start period) from the start of displaying the title display until it is displayed at a fixed position, a second part (title display period) displayed at the fixed position, and a third part (title end period) from the display at the fixed position until it ends,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the first reach (the super reach effect in the normal state), a title display (title characters) is displayed so that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
In the title display part in the second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state), the title display (title characters) is displayed so that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
According to this feature, even if the execution times of the title display parts differ between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the second part displayed in the fixed position is made the longest, thereby drawing attention to the type of title display. Furthermore, even if the execution times of the title display parts differ between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the first part, which takes place before the title display in the fixed position, is made longer than the third part, which takes place from the display in the fixed position until the display ends, thereby making it possible to tease which title display will be displayed. Furthermore, even if the execution times of the title display parts differ between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the title display parts can be made easier to understand by making the relationship between the execution times of the first part, second part, and third part the same.

A gaming machine according to aspect 10-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 10-1,
The execution time (T4) of the title display part in the second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is shorter than the execution time (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) of the title display part in the first reach (super reach effect in a normal state).
According to this feature, the execution time of the title display part in the second reach executed in the special state is relatively short, so the special state can be advanced at a good pace, while the execution time of the title display part in the first reach executed in the normal state is relatively long, so it can be well hyped.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The title display part is made up of a first part (title start period) from the start of displaying the title display until it is displayed at a fixed position, a second part (title display period) displayed at the fixed position, and a third part (title end period) from the display at the fixed position until it ends,
the display means (image display device 5) displays a title display (title characters) in a title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect) so that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, by making the second part displayed in the fixed position the longest, attention can be drawn to the type of title display. Furthermore, by making the first part, which is displayed in the fixed position, longer than the third part, which is displayed from the fixed position until the display ends, it is possible to arouse interest in which title display will be displayed. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the light-emitting means can be illuminated in a suitable lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be displayed in a suitable manner.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects) can be displayed in a first mode (white mode), and the title display corresponding to the specific reach can be displayed in a second mode (red mode) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first mode,
In the title display part (title display part shown in FIG. 11-43) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects), an expectation suggestion display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in a first size, and then a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in a second size larger than the first size,
In both cases of displaying the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach in the first mode (white mode) and displaying the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach in the second mode (red mode), the expectation suggestion display is displayed in a common mode,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach titles for the strongest reach series, strong reach common titles for the strong reach series),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (strong reach system strong reach C introduction, strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the specific reach is larger in size than the expectation suggestion display, and its appearance suggests the expectation, so it attracts the player's attention, but by displaying the expectation suggestion display before the title display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the expectation suggestion first. Also, whether the title display is displayed in the first appearance or the second appearance, the expectation suggestion display is displayed in a common manner, so the player can focus their attention on the appearance of the subsequent title display.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to PB1-7) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to PB2-9) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-8 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-10 to PB2-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state is determined,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB7) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to PA2-9) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-8 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-10 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach B presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach C presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach C presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base strong reach B effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach C effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach C effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base strong reach B effect),
The display means
In the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach B performance), an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the first mode (3.5 stars),
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach C effect), the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the second mode (four stars),
A highlight display is displayed so that it is common between the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach B effect) and the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach C effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach B effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach B title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach C effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach C title) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base strong reach B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach B introduction) for the introductory part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach C presentation), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach C introduction) for the introductory part of the second reach.
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by using the same highlighting whether the expectation level indication is displayed in the first mode in the title display part of the first reach or the second mode in the title display part of the second reach. Furthermore, in the title display parts of the first reach and the second reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display of the first reach or the second reach that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part of the first reach or the second reach, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

A gaming machine of aspect 13-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 13-1,
The expectation suggestion display is composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects),
The first reach (low base strong reach B effect) is indicated by N (N is an integer) + 0.5 (3.5) objects,
The second reach (low base strong reach C effect) is indicated by N+1 (4) objects,
The expectation suggestion display is characterized in that each object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and the highlighting is performed in a common manner whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted.
According to this feature, whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted, the highlighting is performed in a common manner, thereby reducing development costs.

A gaming machine of aspect 13-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 13-2,
The expectation suggestion display is characterized in that the time period during which one object (star-shaped object) is highlighted and the time period during which 0.5 objects (star-shaped objects) are highlighted are the same.
According to this feature, the time for highlighting one object and the time for highlighting 0.5 objects are common, thereby reducing development costs.

A gaming machine according to aspect 13-4 is the gaming machine according to aspect 13-2 or 13-3,
The expectation suggestion display is characterized in that a common emphasis sound (expectation suggestion sound) is output whether one object (star-shaped object) is highlighted or 0.5 objects (star-shaped objects) are highlighted.
According to this feature, the same sound is output whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted, thereby reducing development costs.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, high base reach A to D effects) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reaches (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, high base reach A to D effects) are configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, high base reach A to D effects), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) can be displayed,
In the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, high base reach A to D effects), the first object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, then, while continuing to highlight the first object (star-shaped object), the second object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and then the highlighting of the first object (star-shaped object) is ended and the third object (star-shaped object) is highlighted.
According to this feature, in the title display part in a specific reach, it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display consisting of multiple objects, and in the expectation suggestion display, the highlighting of the second object begins before the highlighting of the first object ends, but the highlighting of the third object does not begin until the highlighting of the first object ends, making it easier to recognize the number of objects suggesting the expectation.

A gaming machine of aspect 14-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 14-1,
The expectation level suggestion display is characterized in that an emphasis sound (expectation level suggestion sound) is output each time an object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and after the output of the emphasis sound (expectation level suggestion sound) for highlighting one object (star-shaped object) has finished, an emphasis sound (expectation level suggestion sound) for highlighting the next object is output.
According to this feature, the emphasis sound for highlighting one object and the emphasis sound for highlighting the next object do not overlap, making it easier to recognize the number of objects that suggests the degree of expectation.

A gaming machine of aspect 14-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 14-1 or 14-2,
The expectation suggestion display is composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) and characters (characters "expectation");
The object (star-shaped object) is highlighted in a size that overlaps with the text (text "Expectation Level").
According to this feature, by highlighting the objects, it is possible to draw attention to both the multiple objects and the characters that make up the expectation suggestion display.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, high base reach A to D effects) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reaches (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, high base reach A to D effects) are configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display multiple pending displays corresponding to variable displays that have not yet started,
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, high base reach A to D effects), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) can be displayed,
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance), the hold display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation suggestion display,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a common title for strong reach systems, a common title for strongest reach systems, and a common title for high base reach systems);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of strongest reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, in the title display part of a specific reach, an expectation indication display composed of multiple objects is displayed, while by not displaying the hold indication simultaneously with the expectation indication display, it is possible to prevent the hold indication from being mistakenly recognized as an expectation indication display. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

A gaming machine of aspect 15-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 15-1,
The maximum number of active displays corresponding to the pending display and the variable display that has been started is characterized by being equal to the maximum number (five) of objects (star-shaped objects) that make up the expectation indication display.
According to this feature, even if a specific reach occurs when the maximum number of pending displays and active displays are displayed, it is possible to prevent the pending displays and active displays from being mistakenly recognized as the maximum number of objects that make up the expectation indication display being displayed.

A gaming machine of aspect 15-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 15-1 or 15-2,
The hold display is terminated when the display means (image display device 5) displays in monochrome before the title display part starts.
This feature allows the hold display to end without any discomfort.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the gaming medium (gaming ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium (gaming ball) is controlled to the advantageous state;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to 4/PB1-14) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 6/PA2-16) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-15) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-17) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-8 to 10/PB1-16) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-10 to 12/PA2-18) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state is determined,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-4/PB1-14) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-6/PA2-16) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB1-7/PB1-15) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to PA2-9/PA2-17) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-8 to PB1-10/PB1-16) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-10 to 12/PA2-18) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A presentation/high base reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A presentation/high base reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach B effect / high base reach B effect),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation/high base reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base strong reach A effect/high base reach A effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state will be reached is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach A effect/high base reach A effect), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a first number (3) of objects (star-shaped objects) can be displayed,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a second number (3.5) of objects (star-shaped objects) that is greater than the first number can be displayed,
In the title display part of the third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a third number (4) of objects (star-shaped objects) which is greater than the second number can be displayed,
the difference between the first number and the second number is the same as the difference between the second number and the third number (0.5);
The difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) is executed and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect) is executed is greater than the difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect) is executed and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the first reach (low base strong reach A effect/high base reach A effect) is executed.
According to this feature, when the number of objects displayed as an expectation suggestion display in the title display part increases from the first number to the second number, the increase in the number of objects is the same as when it increases from the second number to the third number, but when it increases from the second number to the third number, the increase in the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is greater than when it increases from the first number to the second number.Therefore, as the number of objects increases, it can be expected that the number of objects will be controlled to an advantageous state more than the number of objects that has increased, while when the number of objects is small, excessive expectations of being controlled to an advantageous state are not raised.

A gaming machine of aspect 16-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 16-1,
The plurality of fluctuation patterns include a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to 13/PB1-17) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled by the advantageous state, and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to 15/PA2-19) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled by the advantageous state,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-11 to PB1-13/PB1-17) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-13 to 15/PA2-19) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strongest reach effect / high base reach D effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strongest reach effect/high base reach D effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The fourth reach (low base strongest reach effect/high base reach D effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled is notified,
The display means is capable of displaying an expectation suggestion display constituted by a fourth number (4.5) object (star-shaped object) that is greater than the third number in a title display part in the fourth reach (low base strongest reach effect/high base reach D effect),
The difference between the third number and the fourth number (0.5) is smaller than the difference between the first number and the third number (1);
The difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the fourth reach (low base strongest reach effect/high base reach D effect) is executed and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) is executed is greater than the difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) is executed and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the first reach (low base strong reach A effect/high base reach A effect) is executed.
According to this feature, the increase in the number of objects displayed as an expectation suggestion display in the title display part is smaller when the number of objects increases from the third number to the fourth number than when it increases from the first number to the third number, but the increase in the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is greater when it increases from the third number to the fourth number than when it increases from the first number to the third number, so the more the number of objects increases, the more it can be expected that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state even if the number of added objects is small.

A gaming machine of aspect 16-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 16-2,
The difference between the third number and the fourth number is 0.5, and the difference between the first number and the third number is 1.
According to this feature, it can be expected that the number of objects displayed as an expectation suggestion display in the title display part will be controlled in a more advantageous state when it increases from the third number by 0.5 to the fourth number, rather than when it increases from the first number by 1 to the third number.
A gaming machine of aspect 16-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 16-1 to 16-3,
The difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (high base reach C presentation) is executed in a special state (probable change state) that is more advantageous than the normal state and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (high base reach B presentation) is executed is greater than the difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C presentation) is executed in the normal state and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation) is executed.
According to this feature, it can be expected that a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state will be controlled to be an advantageous state when the number of objects displayed as an expectation suggestion display in the title display part increases.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) are both reaches that are executed in a normal state, and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) has a higher expectation of being controlled into the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is longer than the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The display means (image display device 5)
An expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects),
The expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (common title for strong reach systems) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introductory part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, the title display part in the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, is longer than the title display part in the first reach, which has a relatively low expectation, and while an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the second reach, an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach, so the player can intuitively recognize that the expectation is higher in the second reach than in the first reach. Furthermore, in the title display parts in the first reach and the second reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using brightness data tables for the title displays of the first reach and the second reach that are different from the brightness data tables for the introductory parts of the first reach and the second reach, so the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

A gaming machine of aspect 17-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 17-1,
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is composed of a prologue part (prologue display period) and a character display part (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) does not have a prologue part (prologue display period), and is composed only of character display parts (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The character display part of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect).
According to this feature, since the character display part of the title display part in the second reach is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the first reach, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the second reach has a higher expectation than the first reach.

A gaming machine of aspect 17-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 17-1 or 17-2,
The reach is executed in the normal state, and includes a third reach (low base strongest reach effect) that has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect),
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is composed of a prologue part (prologue display period) and a character display part (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) does not have a prologue part (prologue display period), and is composed only of character display parts (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The character display part of the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect).
According to this feature, since the character display part of the title display part in the third reach is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the second reach, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the third reach has a higher expectation than the second reach.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2, 5, 8) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2 to 3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2, 5, 8) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 to PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) can be executed,
When the second command is received, the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) can be executed,
When the third command is received, the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) can be executed,
When the fourth command is received, the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) can be executed,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) are both reaches that are executed in a normal state,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is a reach that does not result in a notification that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) as a result of the effect, and may result in a notification that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) as a result of the effect, or may result in another reach (super reach effect) being executed.
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is a reach that has, as a result of the effect, a case where it is announced that it will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) and a case where it is announced that it will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the other reach will be executed,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
An expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects),
The expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (common title for strong reach systems) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introductory part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, while an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of the second reach, which may directly notify that control will be made into an advantageous state, an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part of the first reach, which does not directly notify that control will be made into an advantageous state, so that it is possible to prevent excessive expectations from being created by the first reach. Furthermore, in the title display parts of the first reach and the second reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using brightness data tables for the title displays of the first reach and the second reach that are different from the brightness data tables for the introductory parts of the first reach and the second reach, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be made to be suitable.

A gaming machine of aspect 18-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 18-1,
The title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is characterized in that it is possible to display the title display (title text) in a confirmed state (gold) that confirms that another reach (super reach effect) will be executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention even to the title display part in the first reach where the expectation indication display is not displayed.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled is notified,
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) may be executed via a selection effect using a title display (title characters) corresponding to multiple reaches (super reach effects) including the specific reach,
The display means
It is possible to display an expectation suggestion display together with the title display (title characters) in the title display part and the selection performance of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach),
When displaying the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach), the expectation suggestion display composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) is displayed in stages,
When the expectation indication display is displayed in the selection performance, the expectation indication display made up of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) is not displayed in stages.
According to this feature, when the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of a specific reach, the expectation suggestion display made up of multiple objects is displayed in stages, whereas when the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the selection performance, the expectation suggestion display made up of multiple objects is not displayed in stages, so that the annoyance caused by the expectation suggestion display being displayed in stages not only in the title display part but also in the selection performance that precedes it can be eliminated.

A gaming machine of aspect 19-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 19-1,
The selection effect is an effect that changes in stages from a low-expectation reach (super reach effect) to a high-expectation reach (super reach effect) by operating the effect operation means (push button 31B),
The time required for the selection effect to change by one level (the minimum time required to switch to the title image of the next super reach effect) may be shorter than the time required for the expectation suggestion display of the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) to display by one level (the time required for the star-shaped object to change from black to highlighted and then to gold).
This feature allows for a sense of speed to be imparted to the gradual changes in the selection presentation.

A gaming machine of aspect 19-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 19-2,
The selection effect is an effect that changes step by step from the current reach (super reach effect) to a reach (super reach effect) with one step higher expectation, and is characterized in that the number of operations of the effect operating means (push button 31B) required to change to the next step increases with each step change.
According to this feature, the higher the expectation of reaching a winning jackpot, the more impatient the player can be.

A gaming machine of aspect 19-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 19-1 to 19-3,
When the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) is selected by the selection effect, the game starts from the title display part.
According to this feature, even when a specific reach is executed via a selection effect, it starts from the title display part, so that it is easy for the player to determine which reach has ultimately been executed.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) is displayed in a manner with larger movement than the title display (title character of the super reach effect) corresponding to the specific reach,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by moving the advantageous state name display more significantly, the game player can celebrate being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 20-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 20-1,
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach B, C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D), when the title display (title character) is displayed, a background dedicated to the title display is displayed,
The background of the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is characterized by being displayed in a manner with greater movement than the background dedicated to the title display.
According to this feature, the background of the advantageous state name display can also be moved more dramatically to celebrate being controlled into an advantageous state.

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introductory part (operation prompting performance B, D) of the specific reach (super reach performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) that prompts the player to take an action can be displayed,
The promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is displayed in a manner with larger movement than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, the prompting character display displayed in the introductory part prompts the player to take an action, and by moving it more than the title display displayed in the title display part, it is possible to intuitively prompt the player to take an action. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

A gaming machine of aspect 21-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 21-1,
In the introductory part of the specific reach (super reach effect), a special prompting character display (operation prompting character (large)) that prompts the player to take an action and suggests a more advantageous situation than the prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) can be displayed;
The feature is that both the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) and the special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) are displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, whether the prompting character display or the special prompting character display is moved more than the title display displayed in the title display part, the player can be intuitively encouraged to take action.

A gaming machine of aspect 21-3 is a gaming machine according to aspect 21-1 or 21-2,
The number of characters (3) of the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is less than the number of characters (7 to 13) of the title display (title character).
According to this feature, the number of characters in the promotional character display is smaller than the number of characters in the title display, so that the content of the characters can be recognized even if the user moves the display widely.

[Form 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display an explanatory character display (explanatory character) that is different from the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) and that explains the content of the specific reach,
The explanatory character display (explanatory character) is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, by displaying the additional explanatory text display in a manner that moves more rapidly than the title display, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that explanatory text display has been added in addition to the title display. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can emit light in a suitable lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

A gaming machine of aspect 22-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 22-1,
The explanatory text display (explanatory text) is characterized by the content suggesting that the specific reach (super reach effect) is advantageous.
This feature can draw more attention to the fact that the explanatory text display has been added.

[Form 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title letters) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is displayed in a larger font size than the title display (title letters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (common title for strong reach systems) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introductory part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, is displayed in larger font size than the title display corresponding to the first reach, which has a relatively low expectation, so that the title display alone can intuitively recognize that the second reach has a higher expectation than the first reach. Also, in the title display parts of the first reach and the second reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using brightness data tables for the title displays of the first reach and the second reach that are different from the brightness data tables for the introductory parts of the first reach and the second reach, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in an appropriate light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 23-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 23-1,
The number of characters (10) constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is greater than the number of characters (7, 8) constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach B, C effect), but the display area (display area size) of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach B, C effect) is larger than the display area (display area size) of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect).
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the second reach occupies a larger display area per character, so that the player can intuitively recognize that the second reach has a higher expectation than the first reach.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of multiple characters,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special design, second special design),
The decoration identification information (decorative pattern (large)) of a first size is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and then the decoration identification information (decorative pattern (small)) of a second size smaller than the first size is displayed in a reach state;
At least one character of the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed in a size larger than the second size (decorative pattern (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, at least one character of the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in a size larger than the decorative identification information reduced to the second size, so that the title display can be focused on in the title display part. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

A gaming machine of aspect 24-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 24-1,
The present invention is characterized in that all characters of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) are displayed in a size smaller than the first size (decorative pattern (large)) and larger than the second size (decorative pattern (small)).
According to this feature, the decorative identification information can be reliably recognized when a reach state is reached, and thereafter the decorative identification information is reduced in size and each character that makes up the title display is displayed in a size larger than the decorative identification information, so that attention can be drawn to the title display in the title display part.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introductory part (operation prompting performance B, D) of the specific reach (super reach performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) that prompts the player to take an action can be displayed,
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance) is displayed larger than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the promotion character display is performed is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is a situation in which it has already been notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display larger than the promotion character display, it is possible to celebrate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed suitably.

The gaming machine of aspect 25-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 25-1,
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is composed of a first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") and a second character string ("BONUS");
The first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") is displayed in the first position (the upper fixed position), and then the second character string ("BONUS") is displayed in the second position (the lower fixed position);
After the second character string ("BONUS") is displayed at the second position (lower fixed position), the first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") displayed at the first position (upper fixed position) and the second character string ("BONUS") displayed at the second position (lower fixed position) are gradually enlarged and displayed,
the first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") and the second character string ("BONUS") are displayed in the smallest character size when displayed at the first position (top fixed position) and the second position (bottom fixed position);
The size of the characters when the first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") and the second character string ("BONUS") are displayed at the first position (upper fixed position) and the second position (lower fixed position) is larger than the size of the characters that make up the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)).
According to this feature, the characters that make up the advantageous state name display are always displayed larger than the characters that make up the promotion character display, so that being controlled in an advantageous state can be more congratulated.

The gaming machine of aspect 25-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 25-1 or 25-2,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance) is larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the characters constituting the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the largest character among the characters constituting the promotion character display, so that no matter which character you focus on, the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the promotion character display, making it possible to more congratulate yourself on being controlled into an advantageous state.

A gaming machine of aspect 25-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 25-1 to 25-3,
A special prompt character display (large operation prompt character) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the prompt character display (small operation prompt character) can be displayed;
The special prompt character display (operation prompt character (large)) is characterized by being displayed larger than the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect).
According to this feature, the special promotion character display, which suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion character display, can be displayed larger than the advantageous state name display, allowing the player to sense the advantageous situation.

A gaming machine of aspect 25-5 is the gaming machine according to aspect 25-4,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) is larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the character strings constituting the special promotion character display is displayed larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the advantageous state name display, so that no matter which character the player focuses on, the special promotion character display is displayed larger than the advantageous state name display, allowing the player to sense the advantageous situation.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is displayed larger than the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display larger than the title display, it is possible to celebrate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 26-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 26-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a plurality of types of specific reaches with different title displays (title characters),
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is characterized by being displayed larger than the title display (title characters) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach, so that the player can celebrate being controlled into an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of aspect 26-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 26-2,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) is larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the title display (title character) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the characters constituting the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the largest character among the characters constituting the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach, so that no matter which character you focus on, the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, making it possible to more fully celebrate being controlled into an advantageous state.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
Before the title display part (operation prompting performance A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) to prompt the player to take action can be displayed,
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is displayed larger than the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the promotional text display is displayed before the title display part, and the title display that is displayed afterwards is displayed larger than the promotional text display, thereby drawing attention to the title display. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, resulting in suitable title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 27-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 27-1,
After the prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is displayed, the game progresses to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), and the title display part of the specific reach begins.
According to this feature, the promotional text display is displayed before the title display part in the series of steps, and the title display to be displayed thereafter is displayed larger than the promotional text display, thereby drawing attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 27-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 27-1 or 27-2,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the character strings constituting the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the promotion character display, so that no matter which character is focused on, the title display can be focused on.

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of form 28-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
Before the title display part (operation prompting performance A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) to prompt the player to take action can be displayed,
After it is notified that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will control the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is displayed larger than the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is displayed larger than the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is one in which it is not yet clear whether the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display larger than the title display, it is possible to celebrate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Furthermore, by displaying a promotional character display before the title display part and displaying the title display displayed thereafter larger than the promotional character display, it is possible to draw attention to the title display. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be illuminated in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, resulting in a suitable title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 28-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 28-1,
After the prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is displayed, the game progresses to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), the title display part in the specific reach starts, and after it is announced that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will control the game to the advantageous state, the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) is displayed.
According to this feature, a promotional character display is displayed before the title display part in a series of events, and the title display that is displayed afterwards is displayed larger than the promotional character display, thereby drawing attention to the title display, and after it is notified that a specific reach will result in control to an advantageous state, a display of the advantageous state name is displayed larger than the title display, allowing the player to celebrate being controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of form 29-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is displayed for a longer time than the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display for a longer period of time than the title display, it is possible to celebrate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

A gaming machine of aspect 29-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 29-1,
The time from when all the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) are displayed until at least a part of the character string disappears is longer than the time from when a part of the character string constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed until all of the character string disappears.
According to this feature, the time during which the advantageous state name display, which is intended to congratulate the player, is clearly visible is made longer than the time during which the title display, which is intended to increase the possibility of being controlled into an advantageous state, is displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

The gaming machine of aspect 29-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 29-1 or 28-2,
After the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is displayed, the advantageous state name display is switched to an operation suggestion display (right hit promotion image (small) and right hit promotion image (large)) that suggests an operation method during the advantageous state, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the switch to the operation suggestion display, control is performed to gain an advantage by operating the operation method suggested by the operation suggestion display (an operation method for shooting the game ball toward the right game area 2R),
The time required to switch from the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) to the operation suggestion display (right hit promotion image (small) and right hit promotion image (large)) is shorter than the time required to end the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, the advantageous state name display switches to the operation suggestion display in a short time, and then after a predetermined period of time has passed, control is performed to give an advantage by operating using the operation method suggested by the operation suggestion display, thereby preventing the player from being disadvantaged by changing the operation method during the period when the advantageous state name display ends.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introductory part (operation prompting performance B, D) of the specific reach (super reach performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) that prompts the player to take an action can be displayed,
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance) is displayed for a longer time than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the promotion character display is performed is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is a situation in which it has already been notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display for a longer period of time than the promotion character display, it is possible to celebrate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed suitably.

The gaming machine of aspect 30-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 30-1,
The prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is displayed until the prompted action is performed or until the valid time for the prompted action has elapsed;
The time for which the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is displayed is characterized by being longer than the time for which the prompted action is not taken and the effective time for the prompted action has elapsed after the prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) is displayed.
According to this feature, after the prompting character display is displayed, the advantageous state name display is displayed for a longer period of time than the period of time when the prompted action is not taken, thereby making it possible to celebrate the player being controlled into the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of aspect 30-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 30-1 or 30-2,
The time from when all the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) are displayed until at least a part of the character string disappears is longer than the time when the prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is displayed.
According to this feature, the time during which the congratulatory advantageous state name display is clearly visible is made longer than the time during which the promotional text display, which is intended to encourage the player to take action, is displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

A gaming machine of aspect 30-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 30-1 to 30-3,
A special prompt character display (large operation prompt character) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the prompt character display (small operation prompt character) can be displayed;
The promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is a promotion character (character that encourages operation) displayed without accompanying a promotion introduction display (promotion introduction effect),
The special operation prompt display (operation prompt character (large)) is displayed after the prompt introduction display (promotion introduction effect) is displayed, and the prompt character (character encouraging the operation) is displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title character of the big win start performance) is displayed for a longer time than the special prompt character display (operation prompt character (large)).
According to this feature, the time for which the congratulatory advantageous state name display is displayed is longer than the time for which the special promotion character display accompanied by the promotion introduction display is displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

[Form 31]
The gaming machine of form 31-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
Before the title display part (operation prompting performance A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) to prompt the player to take action can be displayed,
A title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is displayed for a longer time than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the promotional text display is displayed before the title display part, and the subsequent title display is displayed for a longer period of time than the promotional text display, thereby drawing attention to the title display. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, thereby enabling the title display to be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 31-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 31-1,
The time from when all the characters constituting the title display (title characters) are displayed until at least a part of the characters disappears is longer than the time when the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) is displayed.
According to this feature, the time during which the title display is clearly visible is made longer than the time during which the promotional text display, which is intended to encourage the player to take an action, is displayed, thereby drawing attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 31-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 31-1 or 31-2,
A special prompt character display (large operation prompt character) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the prompt character display (small operation prompt character) can be displayed;
The promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is a promotion character (character that encourages operation) displayed without accompanying a promotion introduction display (promotion introduction effect),
The special operation prompt display (operation prompt character (large)) is displayed after the prompt introduction display (promotion introduction effect) is displayed, and the prompt character (character encouraging the operation) is displayed,
The time period during which the title display (title characters) is displayed is longer than the time period during which the special prompt character display (operation prompt characters (large)) is displayed.
According to this feature, the title display can be drawn to by making the time for which the title display is displayed longer than the time for which the special promotion character display accompanying the promotion introduction display is displayed.

[Form 32]
The gaming machine of form 32-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
Before the title display part (operation prompting performance A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) to prompt the player to take action can be displayed,
After it is notified that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will control the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is displayed for a longer time than the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
A title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is displayed for a longer time than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is one in which it is not yet clear whether the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display for a longer period of time than the title display, it is possible to celebrate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Furthermore, by displaying a promotional character display before the title display part and displaying the subsequent title display for a longer period of time than the promotional character display, it is possible to draw attention to the title display. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be illuminated in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, resulting in a suitable title display.

[Form 33]
The gaming machine of form 33-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PB2-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-14) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-16) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-15 to PB1-17) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-17 to PB2-19) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state are determined as one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-14) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-16) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-15 to PB1-17) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-17 to PA2-19) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (high base reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (high base reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (high base reach B to D performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (high base reach B to D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The third reach (high base reach A effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The fourth reach (high base reach B to D effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) are reaches executed in a normal state,
The third reach (high base reach A effect) and the fourth reach (high base reach B to D effect) are reaches that are executed in a special state (probable change state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The fourth reach (high base reach B to D effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the third reach (high base reach A effect),
The third reach (high base reach A effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
The display means
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) can be displayed,
The expectation suggestion display can be displayed in the title display part in the third reach (high base reach A performance),
The expectation suggestion display can be displayed in the title display part in the fourth reach (high base reach A performance),
The feature of this invention is that the expectation indication display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance).
According to this feature, the first reach in the normal state has a lower expectation level than the second reach in the normal state, so the expectation level suggestion display is displayed for the second reach, but the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed for the first reach, thereby preventing excessive expectations of the first reach controlling the game to an advantageous state. On the other hand, the third reach in the special state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, has a lower expectation level than the fourth reach in the special state, but is higher expectation level than the first reach in the normal state, so by displaying the expectation level suggestion display for both the third reach and the fourth reach, it is possible to expect that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state in both the third reach and the fourth reach.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern in normal state) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern in normal state) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern in probability variable state) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern in probability variable state) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state,
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a normal state) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a deviation variation pattern in a normal state) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating a jackpot variation pattern in a probability variation state) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern in a probability variation state) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach effect in a normal state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state will be controlled by the second reach (super reach effect in the probability variable state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (super reach effect in a normal state) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) is a reach executed in the normal state,
The second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is a reach executed in a special state (probability variable state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The title display part in the second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is shorter than the title display part in the first reach (super reach effect in a normal state),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part of the first reach (the super reach effect in the normal state), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part in the second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (high base reach common title) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introductory part of the first reach (the super reach presentation in the normal state), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction),
In the introductory part of the second reach (super reach presentation in a probability variable state), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (introduction of high base reach type reach A, introduction of high base reach type reach B, introduction of high base reach type reach C, introduction of high base reach type reach D) for the introductory part of the second reach.
According to this feature, the title display part of the second reach in the special state is shorter than the title display part of the first reach in the normal state, allowing the special state to progress at a good tempo. Also, in the title display parts of the first reach and the second reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using brightness data tables for the title display of the first reach and the second reach that are different from the brightness data tables for the introductory parts of the first reach and the second reach, respectively, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 34-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 34-1,
The frequency with which the second reach (super reach effect in the special state) occurs in the special state (probable chance state) is higher than the frequency with which the first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) occurs in the normal state.
According to this feature, even if the frequency of the second reach occurring in the special state increases, the special state can be progressed at a good pace.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the gaming medium (gaming ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium (gaming ball) is controlled to the advantageous state;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PB2-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to PB1-13) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to PB2-15) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-11 to PB1-13) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-13 to PA2-15) is transmitted to the performance control means,
It can be controlled to a plurality of states including a normal state, a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) in which the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result (a special display result of "jackpot"), which is controlled based on the variable display being executed a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strongest reach presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strongest reach presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strongest reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strongest reach effect) has a higher expectation of becoming the advantageous state than the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effect),
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach is displayed in a first display operation mode (a display mode in which the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side to the center of the display area),
In the title display part of the second reach (low-base strongest reach presentation), a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach is displayed in a second display operation mode (a display mode in which the title characters are displayed reduced from an enlarged display) different from the first display operation mode,
When the special state (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) is entered after the specific number of times has been reached, a display indicating that the special state will be entered after the specific number of times has been reached (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) is displayed in the second display operation mode (a display mode in which the title characters are displayed reduced from an enlarged display).
According to this feature, when the special state is entered after a specific number of times has been reached, the display indicating that the special state will be entered after a specific number of times has been reached is displayed in the same second display operation mode as the title display of the second reach, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, so that the player can recognize that the special state after a specific number of times has a high degree of advantage.

The gaming machine of aspect 35-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 35-1,
When the display (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the special state (time-shortening state B (Yu-time)) will be entered after the specific number of times has been reached is ended, the display is ended in the same display operation mode as the display operation mode (display mode in which the title characters are erased while expanding) when ending the title display (title characters) of the title display part in the second reach (low-base strongest reach effect).
According to this feature, even when the display indicating that control will be made to a special state after a specific number of times is reached is ended, it is ended in the same display operation mode as when ending the title display of the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, so that it can be recognized that the special state after a specific number of times is highly advantageous.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
It can be controlled to a plurality of states including a normal state, a state in which the start condition is more easily established than in the normal state, and a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) in which the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result (a special display result of "jackpot"), which is controlled based on the variable display being executed a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
When the specific number of times is reached and the special state (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) is controlled, a display (title character of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the specific number of times is reached and the special state is controlled can be displayed,
The size of the characters constituting the display (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times has been reached is larger than the size of the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title display is performed in a specific reach is one in which it is not yet clear whether the player will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times is one in which the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times, and by making the size of the characters constituting the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times larger than the size of the characters constituting the title display corresponding to the specific reach, it is possible to celebrate the player being controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 36-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 36-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a plurality of types of specific reaches with different title displays (title characters),
The characters constituting the display (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times has been reached are characterized by being larger than the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, the characters constituting the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times are displayed larger than the characters constituting the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach, thereby allowing the player to celebrate being controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times.

The gaming machine of aspect 36-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 36-2,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the display (title character of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the special state will be entered after the specific number of times has been reached is larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the title display (title character) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the characters constituting the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times is displayed larger than the largest character among the characters constituting the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach, so no matter which character you focus on, the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, making it even more congratulatory that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times.

[Form 37]
The gaming machine of form 37-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
It can be controlled to a plurality of states including a normal state, a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) in which the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result (a special display result of "jackpot"), which is controlled based on the variable display being executed a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
When the specific number of times is reached and the special state (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) is controlled, a display indicating that the specific number of times is reached and the special state is controlled (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) can be displayed.
The display time of the display (title character of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the state will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times has been reached is longer than the display time of the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title display is performed in a specific reach is one in which it is not yet clear whether the player will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times is one in which the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times, and by displaying the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times longer than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, the player can celebrate being controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 37-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 37-1,
The time from when all the characters constituting the display (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the state will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is reached to when at least a part of the characters disappears is longer than the time from when a part of the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed to when all of the characters disappear.
According to this feature, the time during which the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a certain number of congratulatory times is clearly visible is longer than the time during which the title display, whose purpose is to increase the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state, is displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

[Form 38]
The gaming machine of form 38-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
It can be controlled to a plurality of states including a normal state, a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) in which the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result (a special display result of "jackpot"), which is controlled based on the variable display being executed a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the normal state, after the specific number of times has been reached, a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state (characters indicating the number of times remaining until the play time) can be displayed,
The size of the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the display (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time) indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, by making the size of the characters constituting the title display corresponding to the specific reach larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times has been reached, it is possible to draw attention to the title display corresponding to the specific reach. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in an appropriate light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 38-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 38-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) and a second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach,
The display showing the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (characters indicating the remaining number of times until Yu-time) is displayed while the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is being executed, but is not displayed while the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is being executed.
According to this feature, in the first reach, which has a low expectation, the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times is reached is displayed, making it possible to make the player aware of the number of times until the special state is reached after the specific number of times is reached, while in the second reach, which has a high expectation, the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times is not displayed, making it possible to draw attention to the presentation and alleviating the player's disappointment when the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times is low.

The gaming machine of aspect 38-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 38-2,
When it is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) without displaying again the display (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time) indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached,
When it is notified that the advantageous state will not be achieved in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times has been reached (characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time) is displayed again after the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects).
According to this feature, when it is notified that the advantageous state will be reached in the second reach, the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached is not displayed again, thereby alleviating the player's disappointment when there are only a few times left until the special state after the specific number of times is reached. Also, when it is notified that the advantageous state will not be reached in the second reach, the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached is displayed again after the second reach ends, so the player can feel relieved quickly when there are only a few times left until the special state after the specific number of times is reached.

[Form 39]
The gaming machine of form 39-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
It can be controlled to a plurality of states including a normal state, a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) in which the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result (a special display result of "jackpot"), which is controlled based on the variable display being executed a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
At the timing (operation prompting effects A to D) related to the specific reach (super reach effect), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) that prompts the player to take an action can be displayed,
In the normal state, after the specific number of times has been reached, a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state (characters indicating the number of times remaining until the play time) can be displayed,
The size of the characters constituting the prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the display (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time) indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times has been reached,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, by making the size of the characters constituting the prompting character display that prompts the player to take an action at a timing related to a specific reach larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times has been reached, it is possible to draw attention to the prompting character display and effectively prompt the player to take an action. Also, in the title display part, since the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, it is possible to make the light-emitting means emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, it is possible to display the title in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 39-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 39-1,
When the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is displayed before the title display part (operation promotion effect A) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect), a display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (remaining number of times until play time character) is displayed at the same time,
When the prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is displayed in the introductory part (operation prompt effect D) of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached (characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time) is not displayed.
According to this feature, before the development into a specific reach, the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached is displayed at the same time as the promotion character display, so that the player can be made aware of the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached, and by not displaying the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached in the operation promotion display of the introductory part, it is possible to notify whether or not the player is being controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
It can be controlled to a plurality of states including a normal state, a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) in which the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result (a special display result of "jackpot"), which is controlled based on the variable display being executed a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
In the normal state, after the specific number of times has been reached, a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state (characters indicating the number of times remaining until the play time) can be displayed,
Before displaying the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect), the display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time) is ended,
The size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is a situation in which it has already been notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and therefore a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times has been reached is unnecessary, and therefore the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times has been reached is terminated before the advantageous state name display is displayed, and the size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display is made larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times has been reached, thereby allowing the game player to celebrate being controlled to the advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 40-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 40-1,
Regardless of the number of times remaining until the special state (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) after reaching the specific number of times, the size of the characters constituting the display (characters of the remaining number of times until Yu-time) indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after reaching the specific number of times is the same,
The size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the display showing the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times has been reached (characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time).
According to this feature, regardless of the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times has been reached, the size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display can be made larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times has been reached, thereby making it possible to celebrate being controlled to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of aspect 40-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 40-1 or 40-2,
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is characterized in that it determines a special fluctuation pattern (time-saving B start fluctuation pattern) when the game medium (game ball) first enters the start area (first start winning port, second start winning port) in a special state (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) after a specific number of times has been reached.
According to this feature, when the game medium first enters the starting area in the special state after reaching a specific number of times, a presentation according to the special variation pattern can be executed.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) can be changed from a first mode (white mode) to a second mode (red or gold mode) and displayed.
In the title display part that displays the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), when the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is changed from the first mode (white mode) to the second mode (red or gold mode), the time during which the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is displayed in the second mode (red or gold mode) is longer than the time during which the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is displayed in the first mode (white mode),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, when the title display corresponding to a specific reach is changed from the first mode to the second mode in a title display part that displays a title display corresponding to the specific reach, the change to the second mode can be reliably recognized by making the time during which the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the second mode longer than the time during which the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the first mode. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 41-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 41-1,
In the title display part that displays the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) may be changed from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red or gold aspect), or may remain unchanged in the first aspect (white aspect),
When changing the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) from the first mode (white mode) to the second mode (red or gold mode), at a specific timing (when a time t1 has elapsed since the start of the title display period), the title display (title letters) is changed from the first mode (white mode) to the second mode (red or gold mode) and a specific sound effect (specific sound) is output,
When the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is not changed from the first state (white state), when the specific timing is reached (when time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period), the specific sound effect (specific sound) is output without being changed from the first state (white state).
According to this feature, a specific sound effect is output when the title display corresponding to a specific reach changes from the first state to the second state at a specific timing, and also when the title display remains in the first state at the specific timing and does not change, so that the output of the specific sound effect can give the player hope that the display will change to the second state.

A gaming machine of aspect 41-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 41-1 or 41-2,
The second aspect includes a plurality of aspects (red and gold aspects),
When the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is changed from the first mode (white mode) to the second mode (red, gold mode), a specific sound effect (specific sound) is output regardless of the type of second mode (red, gold mode) to which it is changed.
According to this feature, when the title display corresponding to a specific reach changes from the first state to the second state at a specific timing, a specific sound effect is output regardless of the type of second state to which it is changed, so that the output of the specific sound effect can draw attention to the type of second state to which it is changed.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) can be changed from a first mode (white mode) to a second mode (red mode) and displayed.
The title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) can be changed and displayed from the first mode (white mode) to a third mode (gold mode) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state than the second mode (red mode),
In the title display part that displays the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), in either case where the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is changed from the first mode (white mode) to the second mode (red mode) or the third mode (gold mode), the display is characterized in that it is changed from the first mode (white mode) to a common display mode (a mode that appears to glow) and then changed to the second mode (red mode) or the third mode (gold mode).
According to this feature, in the title display part that displays the title display corresponding to a specific reach, whether the title display corresponding to the specific reach is changed from the first mode to the second mode or from the first mode to the third mode, the display is changed to a common display mode and then to the second mode or the third mode. Therefore, by changing from the first mode to the common display mode, the player can expect to see a change to the third mode, which has a higher expectation than the second mode, until the change from the common display mode to the second mode or the third mode.

The gaming machine of aspect 42-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 42-1,
The common display mode is a mode in which the characters constituting the title display (title characters) are illuminated, and is characterized in that when the light clears, the characters change to the second mode (red mode) or the third mode (gold mode).
According to this feature, the characters constituting the title display light up, thereby encouraging the change to the second or third mode.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base weak reach B effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) and the title display part in the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), a brightness data table for a common title display part (weak reach common title) is used to control the light emitting means,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction) for the introductory part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introductory part of the second reach.
According to this feature, by using a common brightness data table corresponding to the title display part for two different reaches, an increase in cost and capacity can be prevented, and by using a brightness data table corresponding to each introductory part, the period until notification of whether or not an advantageous state has been achieved can be appropriately stimulated, resulting in an appropriate title display.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-4) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 6) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to PB1-7/PB1-8 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state is determined,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB4) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-6) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB1-7 / PB1-8 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect / low base strong reach C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect / low base strong reach C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The third reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation), and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The fourth reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The third reach (low base strong reach A effect) and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect) have a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) and the second reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) and the title display part in the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the first title display part which is common to both the first reach and the second reach,
In the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach A effect) and the title display part in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach common title) for the second title display part which is common to the third reach,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction) for the introductory part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introductory part of the second reach,
In the introductory part of the third reach (low base strong reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach A introduction) for the introductory part of the third reach,
In the introductory part of the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the fourth reach (strong reach system strong reach B introduction/strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, by using a common brightness data table corresponding to the title display part for the high expectation 2 reach and the low expectation 2 reach, an increase in cost and capacity is prevented, and by using a brightness data table corresponding to each of the introductory parts, the period until notification of whether or not an advantageous state will be achieved can be appropriately stimulated, resulting in an appropriate title display.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-4) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a sixth fluctuation pattern (PB1-J) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state. A fluctuation pattern is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 6), a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-8 to 10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled by the advantageous state, an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled by the advantageous state, a ninth fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to 13) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled by the advantageous state, and a tenth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to 15) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled by the advantageous state,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB4) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-6) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB1-7 / PB1-8 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the ninth variation pattern is determined, a ninth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-11 to PB1-13) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the tenth variation pattern is determined, a tenth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-13 to PA2-15) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect / low base strong reach C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect / low base strong reach C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the ninth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the tenth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fifth reach (low base strongest reach presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The third reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation), and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The fourth reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The fifth reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fifth reach (low-base strongest reach presentation), and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The third reach (low base strong reach A effect) and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect) have a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) and the second reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled into the advantageous state than any of the first reach (low base weak reach A effect), the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), the third reach (low base strong reach A effect), and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) and the title display part in the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the first title display part which is common to both the first reach and the second reach,
In the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach A effect) and the title display part in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach common title) for the second title display part which is common to the third reach,
In the title display part of the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strongest reach title of the strongest reach system) for the third title display part for the fifth reach,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction) for the introductory part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introductory part of the second reach,
In the introductory part of the third reach (low base strong reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach A introduction) for the introductory part of the third reach,
In the introductory part of the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach B introduction/strong reach system strong reach C introduction) for the introductory part of the fourth reach,
In the introductory part of the fifth reach (low base strongest reach presentation), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction) for the introductory part of the fifth reach.
According to this feature, by using a common brightness data table corresponding to the title display part for the high expectation 2 reach and the low expectation 2 reach, an increase in cost and capacity can be prevented, and by using a brightness data table corresponding to each of the introductory parts, it is possible to appropriately stimulate the period until notification of whether or not an advantageous state will be achieved, and further, by providing a dedicated brightness data table for the title display part and the introductory part for the reach with the highest expectation, interest is heightened, and as a result, an appropriate title display can be achieved.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) can be changed from a first state (white) to a second state (red or gold) and displayed.
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), when the title display (title characters) is not changed to the second mode (red or gold), the light emitting means is controlled using a first brightness data table (weak reach common title (white)),
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), when the title display (title characters) is changed to a second mode (red or gold), the light emitting means is controlled using a second brightness data table (weak reach common title (red) or weak reach common title (gold)),
In the introductory part of the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), regardless of whether the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach has changed to the second form (red or gold), the light emitting means is controlled using a common brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, whether the title display is not changed to the second mode in the title display part of a specific reach or whether it is changed to the second mode, the brightness data table corresponding to each introductory part is common, thereby preventing an increase in cost and capacity, and by using the brightness data table corresponding to each title display part, it is possible to appropriately present the title display whether it is not changed to the second mode or whether it is changed to the second mode, and as a result, an appropriate title display can be achieved.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is
A first part (title start period) from the start of displaying the title display corresponding to the specific reach to the display at a fixed position;
A second part (title display period, title end period) after the title display corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is displayed at the fixed position,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the first part (title start period) of the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the first part (weak reach title start),
In the second part (title display period, title end period) of the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the second part (weak reach title display),
In the introductory part of the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, by using a brightness data table corresponding to the first part from when the title display starts to be displayed until it is displayed in the fixed position in a specific reach, a brightness data table corresponding to the second part after the title display is displayed in the fixed position, and a brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part, it is possible to suitably stimulate the period during which the title display is performed and the period until it is announced whether or not an advantageous state will be achieved, and as a result, it is possible to perform a suitable title display.

[Example]
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the following examples.

[Basic explanation]
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

[Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1]
1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that forms the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls, which serve as gaming media, are launched into this gaming area by a predetermined ball launching device.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. When special symbols or the normal symbols described below vary, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. When decorative symbols described below vary, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variation also includes the display of a certain symbol flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that variable display is sometimes referred to as variable display or variation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special symbol," and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special symbol." A special symbol game using the first special symbol is also referred to as the "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbol is also referred to as the "second special symbol game." There may be only one type of special symbol display device that variably displays special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a variable display of multiple types of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is currently being executed. The pending display and active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to a variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each consisting of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first hold memories by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second hold memories by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable prize ball device 6B (a standard electric device) forms a second start prize opening that changes between a closed and an open state due to the solenoid 81 (see Figure 3). The variable prize ball device 6B, for example, comprises an electric tulip-type device with a pair of movable pieces. When the solenoid 81 is off, the movable pieces are in a vertical position, bringing the tip of the movable pieces close to the prize ball device 6A, creating a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is on, the movable pieces of the variable prize ball device 6B are in a tilted position, creating an open state in which game balls can enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start prize opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three) are paid out, and the second special game can be initiated. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed and an open state, and is not limited to devices equipped with an electric tulip-type device.

General winning openings 10 are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, three locations at the bottom left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), and are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 with a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door (for the special electric device) is in the off state, the large prize door closes the large prize door, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the large prize door. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door is in the on state, the large prize door opens the large prize door, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize door.

When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 14) are paid out as prize balls. When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a gaming ball enters, for example, the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10.

When a game ball enters any of the prize slots, including the general prize slot 10, it is also referred to as a "win." In particular, a win at a start slot (first start slot, second start slot) is also referred to as a start slot.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, at the bottom left of the play area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and displays a variety of normal symbols as normal identification information that differs from special symbols. Normal symbols are represented by numbers from "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". Normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This type of variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

To the right of the image display device 5, there is a passing gate 41 through which the game ball can pass. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending indicator 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls as they flow down, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3 for playing and outputting sound effects, etc. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

A movable body 32 (described below) that operates in response to the effects is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in Figure 1). The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, along with the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c described above, may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each constructed using an LED.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. The ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is operated by the player or the like to launch gaming balls toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. Operation of the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, which the player can press to issue a specific command. Operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see Figure 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11 housed in a board case 201. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching between the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. The setting switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing setting values such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the ball payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and setting switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is located in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is located to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and display changeover switch 31 are located directly in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratios, winning combination ratios, and base wins. The consecutive win ratio is the proportion of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning slot (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the proportion of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning slot (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning slot (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls. The base wins is the proportion of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls that have been shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a with a glass window, which allows the gaming area to be opened and closed. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the circuit board case 201, which includes the setting key 51 and setting switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

[Outline of game progress]
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 while the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on that passage cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on that passage is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed, the normal symbol display result will be "normal winning." On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the normal symbol display result will be "normal losing." When a "normal winning" occurs, opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when a special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the execution of the special game based on that entry will be suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot," and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a stopped symbol, it is a "miss." Note that "misses" in this pachinko gaming machine 1 include "misses with time reduction," in which the next variable display is controlled to a high base state (time-reduced state) without going through a jackpot game.

Once the display result in the special game shows "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls entering the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). This predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can win prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is advantageous to the player. The more rounds played in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of jackpot opening modes (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot (normal state, time-saving state, probability variable state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set accordingly. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may enter a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning slot by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state and by increasing the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in a regular symbol game compared to the normal state. The time-saving state is advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols (especially the second special symbol).

In the probability variable state (probability variable state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is implemented, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for players, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuations, but also makes it easier to win a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability variation state will continue until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined number of special games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. A state in which the condition for the special game to end is played a predetermined number of times is also called a count-cut state (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability variation state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a gaming state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot gaming state that are advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability variable state. It is a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability that the displayed result in a normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the displayed result in a special game will be a "jackpot," is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified recovery process is not executed after power is turned on).

A state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and a state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability/high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability/high base state, and the normal state is a low probability/low base state. A high probability state and a low base state is also called a high probability/low base state.

The game state may also change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within the jackpot opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special state after the jackpot game state.

[Progress of the production, etc.]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (such as notifying the progress of the game or adding excitement to the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed by audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or by using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 begin to display variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) in the first or second special symbol game is statically displayed, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is also statically displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins to when it ends, the variable display of the decorative symbols may assume a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, as described below.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach mode is reached during the variable display of decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. Pachinko gaming machine 1 executes multiple types of reach effects, with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the effect mode. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot," a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is displayed stopped and aligned on a predetermined effective line in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" where the game state is controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line-up, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (regular jackpot)" where the game state is not controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line-up. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (regular symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot."

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. Other effects, such as preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Preview effects include preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the currently executing variable display, and pre-read preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is reserved). Pre-read preview effects may also be executed that change the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode that is different from normal.

Furthermore, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative symbols while they are being displayed in a variable manner, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo-consecutive effect that makes a single variable display appear as multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot effect is executed to notify the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot effect may include an effect to notify the number of rounds or an upgrade effect to indicate that the value of the jackpot gaming state is increasing.

Also, for example, when a special game or the like is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

[Board configuration]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a firing control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source, such as an external power source like a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the program stored in ROM 101 to control the progress of the game (processing that realizes the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in ROM 101 (such as data on variation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) is used, and RAM 102 is used as the main memory. RAM 102 serves as backup RAM, where the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if part or all of the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in ROM 101 may be deployed to RAM 102 and executed on RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specified computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals that control (drive) the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first hold display device 25A, second hold display device 25B, normal symbol hold display device 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), and count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal that stops control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and turns on when the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value for a period of time that exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 or solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of its control of the game's progress, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the game's progress, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. These presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various decisions made by the main board 11 (e.g., the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable patterns used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (e.g., the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot slot, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, error notifications, and notifications of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes programs stored in ROM 121, and performs processing to execute performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). During this processing, various data (such as data from various tables) stored in ROM 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute an effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes presentations based on instructions to execute presentations from the presentation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying the image display unit 5 with a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 also supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the audio control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal that designates the lamp on/off state) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and turn the game effect lamp 9 on/off. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal that operates the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to the drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off of the lamp.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to perform control of audio output, turning on/off of lamps (such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals), and control of the movable body 32 (such as supplying signals to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (performance random numbers) used to execute various performances. The performance random numbers may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, sound control board 13, and lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

[Operation]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

[Major operations of the main board 11]
First, we will explain the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in Figure 4, the CPU 103 first disables interrupts (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and making RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is available, and the backup RAM is normal. When power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example, is pressed, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is sufficient to determine in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be able to be saved in RAM 102, which serves as backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is sufficient to check or inspect the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc., to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is met (Step S3; Yes), recovery processing (Step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (Step S5). The recovery processing of Step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the power supply was stopped.

If the recovery condition is not met (Step S3: No), an initialization process (Step S6) is performed, followed by a setting change process (Step S7). The initialization process in Step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the clearing process sets initial values in the work area.

The setting confirmation process in step S5 determines whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is pressed ON. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, the setting confirmation condition can only be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, so the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set therein can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may enter a game stop state in which the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is halted. In the game stop state, the firing of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle and the detection of game balls by various switches are halted, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to display a frozen losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with this may also end.

The setting change process in step S7 determines whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

If the setting change conditions are met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting values set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and the values displayed on the display monitor 29 are updated sequentially each time operation of the setting change switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an arcade attendant or the like, the setting values displayed on the display monitor 29 are stored (updated and memorized) in the backup area of RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be placed in a play-stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying play-stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting element such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, allowing control to the setting change state. If the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, allowing control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off when power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the setting change state is not controlled. If the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, it sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time interval (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and enables the interrupt (step S10). After that, it enters a loop process. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

After executing this game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 5 begins, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main error processing to diagnose abnormalities in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and, if necessary, issue a warning based on the diagnosis results (step S22). After this, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output processing to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start wins), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the game has entered a probability variable state) to be supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 is able to manage the execution and reservation of special symbol games, control the jackpot gaming state, control the gaming state, and so on.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, it is possible to execute the normal symbol game and manage reserves based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), as well as control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reserve display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a presentation control command to be sent during each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the set presentation control command is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the presentation control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

The start winning determination process detects the occurrence of a start winning, stores pending information in a specified area of RAM 102, and updates the number of pending memories. When a start winning occurs, a random number value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and variation pattern, and this is stored as pending information. A process may also be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. After the pending information and number of pending memories are stored, transmission settings are made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the determination results, such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of pending memories, and the predictive determination. The performance control command thus transmitted and set for the start winning is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in Figure 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag stored in RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), transmission settings are made to transmit the corresponding effect control command to the effect control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). This normal special symbol processing determines whether to start the first or second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines (predetermines) whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and, if so, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed, based on a random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines a fixed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be displayed in the special symbol game in accordance with the determined display result. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "1," and the normal special symbol processing ends. The special symbol game using the second special symbol may be executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also known as special symbol 2 priority consumption). Additionally, the order in which game balls enter the first and second starting winning slots may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision value compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern to determine one of several types of fluctuation pattern, based on the results of a pre-determined decision on whether or not the display result will be a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes processes for making settings to change the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change reaches the special symbol change time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3." This special symbol stop process includes a setting process to stop the variation of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and to stop displaying (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will result in the display of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4." If the display result is a "miss," the game state is also updated if the game is in a time-saving state or a special probability state and the end of the number-cutting period is confirmed. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-jackpot opening process in step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "4." This pre-jackpot opening process includes processing to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and set the large prize opening to an open state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot." When the large prize opening is set to an open state, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door. At this time, the maximum open period for the large prize opening to be set and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set, depending on, for example, the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5," and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "5." This jackpot opening process includes processes such as measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the large prize opening is to be returned to a closed state, processes such as stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door are executed, and then the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "6," and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6." This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of rounds that open the large prize slot has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. If the number of rounds executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5." However, if the number of rounds executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7." Once the value of the special symbol process flag has been updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7." This jackpot end process includes processes such as waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation, which serves as a presentation operation to notify players of the end of the jackpot game state, has elapsed, and making various settings to initiate variable rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0," and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the normal special symbol processing of the special symbol process, the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate change by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value consists of six levels, from 1 to 6, with 6 representing the highest probability of winning a jackpot, and the probability of winning a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, a setting value of 6 provides the highest advantage to the player, and the advantage decreases progressively as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the probability of winning a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the payout rate may also change according to the setting value. While the probability of winning a jackpot remains constant regardless of the setting value, the number of rounds in a jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set one of several setting values that differ in the degree of advantage to the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table. Figure 7(A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7(B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result determination table, a win determination value that is compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value used to determine the display result, and its value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

As shown in Figure 7(A), when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can range from 0 to 65535. Of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 used to determine the special symbol display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot," 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving," and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss." Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the aforementioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot," and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss." Note that when the setting value for the first variable special symbol is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the situation is as shown in Figure 7(A).

As shown in Figure 7(B), when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can range from 0 to 65535. Of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 used to determine the special symbol display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot," 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving," and the rest of the numerical range is assigned to "miss." Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the aforementioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot," and the rest of the numerical range is assigned to "miss." Note that when the setting value for the variable special symbol in the second special symbol is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the results are as shown in Figure 7(B).

Here, if we look at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpot" and "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in Figure 8, in the display result determination table for the first special symbol when the game state is normal or time-saving, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"); whereas, for setting values 2 to 6, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to a numerical range corresponding to each setting value, starting from 1238, so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special symbol display result determination table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, of the hit determination values that can take on a value between 0 and 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to a "jackpot," while when the setting value is 2 or higher, of the jackpot determination values, values within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to a "jackpot." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, with 1020 as the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value), the probability of a jackpot increases as the set value increases, as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases.

Furthermore, in the first special symbol display result determination table when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of 65317 to 65535 among the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range for the time-saving loss determination value used to determine a time-saving loss regardless of the setting value. Focusing on the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, when the setting value is 6, the hit determination value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range for the jackpot determination value, and the time-saving loss determination value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for time-saving losses (time-saving loss reference value), in a numerical range different from the range of jackpot determination values for the setting value of 6 (1020 to 1346). This prevents the numerical range of the time-saving loss determination value from overlapping with the range of jackpot determination values that changes depending on each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result determination table when the game state is in the probability variable state, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"); whereas, for setting values 2 to 6, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to a numerical range corresponding to each setting value, starting from 1347, so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in the probability variable state, when the setting value is 1, of the hit determination values that can take on a value between 0 and 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to a "jackpot," while when the setting value is 2 or greater, of the jackpot determination values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to a "jackpot." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, with 1020 as the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value), the probability of a jackpot increases as the set value increases, as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases.

In the second special chart display result determination table when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"); whereas, for setting values 2 to 6, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to a numerical range corresponding to each setting value, starting from 1238, so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game state is normal or time-saving, in the second special symbol display result determination table, of the hit determination values that can take on a value between 0 and 65535, when the set value is 1, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to a "jackpot," while when the set value is 2 or greater, of the jackpot determination values, values within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to a "jackpot." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, with 1020 as the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value), the probability of a jackpot increases as the set value increases, as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases.

Furthermore, in the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving loss determination value for determining a time-saving loss regardless of the setting value. Focusing on the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, when the setting value is 6, the hit determination value is set to 1020 to 1346 among the jackpot determination value numerical range, and the time-saving loss determination value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for time-saving losses (time-saving loss reference value), in a numerical range different from the range of jackpot determination values for the setting value of 6 (1020 to 1346). This prevents the numerical range of the time-saving loss determination value from overlapping with the range of jackpot determination values that changes depending on each setting value.

In the display result determination table for the second special symbol when the game state is in a probability variable state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the display result determination table for the second special symbol are the same as those of the display result determination table for the first special symbol.

As described above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the common numerical range for a time-saving miss is set to 65317 to 65535 regardless of the setting value, whether the game state is normal or time-saving. When the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the common numerical range for a time-saving miss is set to 65317 to 65425 regardless of the setting value, whether the game state is normal or time-saving. In other words, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the rate at which the variable display result is a time-saving miss is the same regardless of the setting value, preventing the setting value from excessively increasing gambling. Furthermore, for time-saving misses to which a common judgment value is assigned for each setting value, the numerical range is set to a continuous range from 65317, the time-saving miss reference value, regardless of the setting value, thereby reducing the processing load on the CPU 103 related to determining whether the variable display result is a time-saving miss.

Note that while this pachinko gaming machine 1 has six settable values, from 1 to 6, the number of settable values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or fewer, or seven or more. Furthermore, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value is suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute any setting suggestion effect at different rates depending on the set value.

[Major operations of the performance control board 12]
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 9. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 9 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting registers for the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. It also executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its origin position and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, the register settings of the CTC. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns on. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 automatically disables the interrupt. However, if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable command (DI command). In response to the interrupt due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a specified command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, the performance control command is captured from a specified input port included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The captured performance control command is stored in a performance control command reception buffer, for example, provided in RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then enables interrupts and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 may be turned on, so that the effect control process process can confirm which effect control command was received and the content specified by the effect control command. Furthermore, if the effect control command specifies the game status, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game status.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). The performance control process controls the operation of various performance devices, such as the display of performance images in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving of the movable body 32. In addition, the control content of performance operations using the various performance devices is judged, determined, and set in accordance with the performance control commands sent from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 is updated by software. Then, processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

Figure 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 9 as the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Figure 10, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a preview setting process (step S161). In the preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, and settings are made to execute a preview performance based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning. In addition, processing is executed to display a hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processing steps S170 to S175, depending on the value of a performance process flag stored in RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various effects such as reach effects and various preview effects will be executed, their mode, and the start timing of execution are determined based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) that reflects the determined results is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing of step S172 is executed when the effect process flag value is "2." In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable body 32, output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs in response to a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 displays the fixed decorative pattern, which is the result of the display of the decorative pattern, in a static state, for example, in response to reading an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the effect control pattern or receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the static display of the fixed decorative pattern. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" and the variable display effect processing ends.

The special symbol win wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special symbol win wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. When a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Furthermore, if a command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving said command has elapsed, the display result in the special symbol game is determined to be a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to its initial value of "0". Once the value of the presentation process flag has been updated, the special symbol win wait process ends.

The jackpot presentation processing of step S174 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "6." In this jackpot presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. Furthermore, in the jackpot presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the jackpot gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5," which corresponds to the ending presentation processing, and the jackpot presentation processing ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

[Variations of the basic description]
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible within the scope of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol showing "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing that symbol. Furthermore, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display stops (the display result may not show the symbol showing "-").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (for example, slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 via a removable recording medium, but may also be distributed by being pre-installed on a storage device of the computer device. Furthermore, by providing a communications processing unit, the programs and data for realizing the present invention may also be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communications line, etc.

Games can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by downloading programs and data via a communication line, temporarily storing them in internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line. Furthermore, the game can also be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In this specification, expressions used to compare various percentages, such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high," "low," and "different") may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%."

[Explanation of characteristic part 131SG]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with respect to the characteristic section 131SG. In the description of each step in the flowchart of the characteristic section 131SG, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "131SG S1," and "Normal Reach" may be abbreviated as "N Reach" and "Super Reach" as "SP Reach." In the characteristic section 131SG, "variable" may be referred to as "variable display." Furthermore, components similar to those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description or that have similar functions but differ in form or location are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the following description, the near side of FIG. 11-1 is the front (front face) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the far side is the back (rear) side, and the description will be based on the up, down, left, and right directions when viewing the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side. In this embodiment, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the surface facing the player playing the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Unlike the description in Figure 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is not one that can be set to one of multiple setting values (e.g., 1 to 6) that have different display rates for the jackpot display result, and is described as a gaming machine that does not have a "miss with time reduction" as a variable display result, and has a jackpot probability set to approximately 1/319.

Furthermore, after the gaming machine is powered on (when RAM clear processing is executed) or after a jackpot occurs, if the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (900 times in this embodiment) in succession in a low probability state but the next jackpot does not occur, the machine may be controlled to time-saving state B (also called rescue time-saving state or rescue time-saving) out of the multiple types of time-saving states. This rescue time-saving state is provided to rescue players who have not won a jackpot despite playing for a long period of time (for example, to reduce investment in games), and in this embodiment is a gaming state also called "play time."

In this embodiment, if the game is controlled to a jackpot game state of jackpot A out of multiple types of jackpots, 110 variable displays are made in time-saving state A (low probability/high base state) out of multiple types of time-saving states, leaving 790 variable displays remaining from the end of time-saving state A until the rescue time-saving state is reached. On the other hand, if the game is controlled to a jackpot game state of either jackpot B or jackpot C out of multiple types of jackpots, 110 variable displays are made in the probability variable state (high probability/high base state), leaving 900 variable displays remaining from the end of the probability variable state until the rescue time-saving state is reached. Also, in this embodiment, the number of variable displays in time-saving state B (low probability/high base state) based on the value of the rescue time-saving count counter reaching "0" is 1100.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-1, a first special symbol reserved memory display area 130SG005D is provided in the lower left of the image display device 5, which can display a reserved display corresponding to a first special symbol reserved memory that has been started but for which a variable display has not yet been executed, and a second special symbol reserved memory display area 130SG005U is provided in the lower right of the image display device 5, which can display a reserved display corresponding to a second special symbol reserved memory that has been started but for which a variable display has not yet been executed. And, an active display area 130SG005F is provided in the lower center of the image display device 5, which can display a reserved display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as an active display.

In addition, the right side of the image display device 5 can display a fourth symbol 131SG005J to notify the player that a variable display is being executed, and a small symbol 131SG005M, which is variable displayed in the same way as the variable display of the decorative symbol in the center of the image display device 5.The top right corner of the image display device 5 can display a remaining number of times to reach the rescue time reduction display 131SG005Z, which indicates the remaining number of variable displays until control is given to time reduction state B (rescue time reduction state) described below.

In addition, the left side of the image display device 5 on the gaming board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is formed as a left gaming area 2L where gaming balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the gaming board 2 is formed as a right gaming area 2R where gaming balls can flow down. Gaming balls that are weakly launched by the launching device flow down a first path as the left gaming area 2L, and gaming balls that are strongly launched by the launching device flow down a second path as the right gaming area 2R.

Furthermore, a first reserved memory display area 131SG005D is provided at the bottom left of the image display device 5, which indicates the number of reserved memories for the first special design by the number displayed on the reserved display, and a second reserved memory display area 131SG005U is provided at the bottom right of the image display device 5, which indicates the number of reserved memories for the second special design by the number displayed on the reserved display. Furthermore, an active display area 131SG005F is provided at the bottom center of the image display device 5, which displays the reserved display corresponding to the currently active variable display as the active display.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 has a first large winning opening and a second large winning opening formed in the direction in which the gaming balls flow downstream. The first large winning opening is operable by solenoid 131SG082A (see Figure 11-2) to open and close a large winning opening door (not shown), thereby changing between an open state where gaming balls can enter and a closed state where gaming balls cannot enter. The second large winning opening is operable by solenoid 131SG082B (see Figure 11-2) to open and close a large winning opening door (not shown), thereby changing between an open state where gaming balls can enter and a closed state where gaming balls cannot enter.

Furthermore, a first count switch 131SG023A capable of detecting game balls is provided in the first large prize opening, and a second count switch 131SG023B capable of detecting game balls is provided in the second large prize opening.

In other words, game balls flowing down the left game area 2L (first path) can win in the general prize opening 10 and the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A, while game balls flowing down the right game area 2R (second path) can win in the second start prize opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B, the general prize opening 10, and the first or second large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7, and can also pass through the passing gate 41.

In this embodiment, the switch circuit 110 is connected to the first count switch 131SG023A, the second count switch 131SG023B, and the jackpot start switch 131SG024 built into the jackpot start gate 131SG042.

Multiple obstacle nails are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. As a result, game balls flowing down the left game area 2L cannot win in the second start winning slot or the large winning slot, and game balls flowing down the right game area 2R cannot win in the first start winning slot.

As shown in Figure 11-2, at a predetermined position on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment (for example, the lower left position of the game area), there are a first special symbol display device 131SG004A capable of variable display of the first special symbol, a second special symbol display device 131SG004B capable of variable display of the second special symbol, a first reserve indicator 131SG025A capable of displaying the first reserved memory number, a second reserve indicator 131SG025B capable of displaying the second reserved memory number, a normal symbol display device 131SG020 capable of variable display of normal symbols, a normal symbol reserve indicator 131SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol reserve number, and a jackpot indicator. The game information display unit includes a round indicator 131SG131 that can display the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during play, a right-hit lamp 131SG132 that lights up in game states in which the game ball is shot toward the right game region 2R, such as in a jackpot game state, a high probability/high base state (probability variable state), or a low probability/high base state (time-saving state), a probability variable lamp 131SG133 that lights up when the game is in a high probability/high base state (probability variable state), and a time-saving lamp 131SG134 that lights up in the high probability/high base state (probability variable state) and the low probability/high base state (time-saving state). Note that, when the game state is normal, the right-hit lamp 131SG132 exceptionally lights up from the moment the variable display stops if the variable display results in a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 11-2, the main board 11 is equipped with an information output circuit for outputting game information (signals) to an external device, such as a management computer of the gaming facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, via a terminal board (not shown).

In this embodiment, the second large prize opening is provided with a V prize opening and a discharge outlet located downstream of the V prize opening. A variable V prize opening device (V lid) is also provided upstream of the V prize opening. The variable V prize opening device is switched between a closed and an open state by a solenoid. In other words, when the variable V prize opening device is in the open state, game balls flowing down the second large prize opening can pass through the V prize opening, but when the variable V prize opening device is in the closed state, they cannot pass through the V prize opening and instead flow down to the discharge outlet.

As shown in Figure 11-2, the main board 11 is provided with a V switch 131SG023B1 that can detect, via the switch circuit 110, that a gaming ball has passed through the V entry port located downstream of the second large entry port, and an ejection switch 131SG023B2 that can detect that a gaming ball has passed through the ejection port.

The performance control board 12 is also connected to a vibration motor 61 built into the push button 31B and a movable body motor 207 for operating the movable body 32. The lamp control board 14 is also connected to a right-hit LED 131SG031 for prompting a right-hit operation, a first special symbol LED 131SG032 that lights up during the variable display of the first special symbol, a second special symbol LED 131SG033 that lights up during the variable display of the second special symbol, a first hold LED 131SG034A that lights up when the first hold memory number is 1 to 2, and a first hold LED 131SG035A that lights up when the first hold memory number is 3 to 4. 31SG034B, a second hold LED 131SG035A that lights up when the second hold memory count is 1 to 2, a second hold LED 131SG035B that lights up when the second hold memory count is 3 to 4, a button LED 62 built into the push button 31B, a movable body LED 208 built into the movable body 32, and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are connected.

Figure 11-3(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating random number values counted on the main board 11. As shown in Figure 11-3(A), in this embodiment, the main board 11 is controlled to count numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, as well as the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern, the random number value MR5 for determining the normal symbol display result, and the random number value MR6 for determining the initial value of MR5. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random number values MR1 to MR6 may be counted by the CPU 103 using different random counters updated by software, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the gaming control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip separate from the gaming control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called gaming random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random number values MR1 to MR6 are set to the ranges shown in Figure 11-3 (A), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ranges of these random number values MR1 to MR6 may be varied depending on the settings set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of games in the pachinko game machine 1. The CPU 103 also executes a random number generation program, enabling it to generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores not only the game control program but also various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting multiple control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variable pattern judgment table that stores multiple variable patterns that determine the variable display modes of each symbol in variable displays such as special symbols and normal symbols.

Figure 11-3 (B) shows an example of the configuration of the special symbol display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common special symbol display result determination table is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special symbol display result determination tables may be used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The special symbol display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to treat the variable display result as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot game state before the determined special symbol that will be the variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, based on the random number value MR1 used to determine the special symbol display result.

In the special symbol display result determination table in this embodiment, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is normal state, time-saving state (low probability state), or probability variable state (high probability state).

In the special symbol display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is the determination data assigned to the decision result of whether to treat the special symbol display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot game state. In the special symbol display result determination table in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the "jackpot" special symbol display result than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in a probability variable state (high probability state) where probability variable control is performed in pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability of determining that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot game state is higher (approximately 1/80.02 in this embodiment) than the probability of determining that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot game state when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (approximately 1/319.68 in this embodiment). In other words, in the special chart display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the determination data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that there is a higher probability of determining that the gaming state will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state compared to when the gaming state is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

The determination tables stored in ROM 101 include the first special symbol display result determination table and the second special symbol display result determination table shown in Figure 7, as well as the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in Figure 11-3 (C1) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Figure 11-3 (C2), as well as a variation pattern type determination table, a variation pattern determination table, a normal symbol display result determination table (not shown), and a normal symbol variation pattern determination table (not shown).

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) does not change depending on the setting value, but it may also be configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on the setting value.

[Jackpot type determination table]
11-3(C1) and 11-3(C2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 11-3(C1) is a table for determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning slot (i.e., when the first special symbol is variably displayed). Also, FIG. 11-3(C1) is a table for determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning slot (i.e., when the second special symbol is variably displayed).

The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced when a decision is made to use the variable display result as a jackpot pattern, and determines the type of jackpot as either jackpot A or jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) used to determine the jackpot type.

Now, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 11-3 (D). In this embodiment, the jackpot types provided are jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, for which time-saving control is executed for a maximum of 110 variable displays after the jackpot gaming state ends. Furthermore, these jackpots A, B, and C are also jackpots for which probability variable control is executed for a maximum of 110 variable displays after the jackpot gaming state ends, when the gaming ball enters the V entry port after entering the second large entry port in the first round of the jackpot gaming state.

In this embodiment, the open state of the variable V ball entry device (V lid) includes a short open state (e.g., 0.1 seconds), in which the open state lasts for a short period of time, and a long open state (e.g., 15 seconds), in which the open state lasts for a long period of time. Jackpot A causes the variable V ball entry device to enter a short open state in the first round of the jackpot gaming state, and jackpots B and C cause the variable V ball entry device to enter a long open state in the first round of the jackpot gaming state.

The jackpot game state resulting from "Jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in rounds two through six. Furthermore, with "Jackpot A," the variable V prize entry device enters a short open state in the first round, making it extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and since the probability variation control cannot be expected to be executed, it essentially results in a normal jackpot.

The jackpot game state resulting from "Jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in rounds two through six. Furthermore, with "Jackpot B," the variable V prize entry device enters a long open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get a game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is expected that the probability variable control will be executed, resulting in a virtual probability variable jackpot.

The jackpot game state resulting from "Jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an opening state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an opening state advantageous to the player in rounds two through ten. Furthermore, with "Jackpot C," the variable V prize entry device enters a long opening state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get a game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is expected that probability variable control will be executed, resulting in a virtual probability variable jackpot.

In this embodiment, three types of jackpots, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, are provided as examples, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or fewer types of jackpots, or four or more types, may be provided.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-3 (C1), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 149 is assigned to jackpot A, and 150 to 299 is assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-3 (C2), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot B, and 100 to 299 is assigned to jackpot C.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, there is a 50% chance that the game ball will enter the V entry slot in the first round of the jackpot game state, and both probability variable control and time-saving control will be implemented after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, there is a 100% chance that the game ball will enter the V entry slot in the first round of the jackpot game state, and both probability variable control and time-saving control will be implemented after the jackpot game ends.

In this embodiment, even in the case of jackpot A, it is possible but extremely rare for a V win to occur when the V lid is in a short open state, so in the case of jackpot A, it will be explained as if no V win occurs and the special rate control is not executed. Also, even in the case of jackpot B or jackpot C, it is possible but extremely rare for a V win not to occur when the V lid is in a long open state, so in the case of jackpot B or jackpot C, it will be explained as if a V win occurs and the special rate control is executed.

In this embodiment, the type of jackpot is determined using MR2, a random number value used to determine the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot may also be determined using MR1, a random number value used to determine the special chart display result.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, the jackpot types for the second special symbol are jackpots B and C, which allow 110 rounds of probability variable control and time-saving control after the jackpot gaming state ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to provide a jackpot D, in which time-saving control is performed 1,009 times (probability variable state: 110 times + time-saving state A: 899 times) after the jackpot gaming state ends. This increases interest because it is almost certain that the next jackpot will occur. Furthermore, even if no jackpot occurs in the 110-round probability variable state after the end of jackpot D and the probability variable control ends, after no jackpot occurs in time-saving state A (low probability/high base state), 899 variable displays are performed, and then just one variable display is performed in the normal state, which further increases interest because control is entered into time-saving state B (rescue time-saving state) described below.

[Time-saving count]
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the number of time reductions for each transition trigger. As shown in FIG. 11-4, in this embodiment, if a jackpot A occurs and the game ball does not enter the probability variable area, (1) the time reduction control is performed 110 times, and (2) the low probability control is performed 110 times, and the game enters the probability variable area (in this embodiment, it is controlled to a time reduction state A (in this embodiment, it is controlled to a battle rush (Battle Rush) with 110 time reductions). Also, if either a jackpot B or a jackpot C occurs and the game ball enters the probability variable area, (1) the time reduction control is performed 110 times, and (2) the probability variable control is performed 110 times, and the game enters the probability variable area (in this embodiment, it is controlled to a super battle rush (Battle Rush) with 110 time reductions). In addition, if 900 variable displays are performed in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot, (1) time-saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) low probability control is performed 1100 times, and the game is controlled to time-saving state B (in this embodiment, a play time with 1100 time-saving times). However, even if 900 variations are performed again in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot after the end of time-saving state B, the game will not be controlled to time-saving state B again based on this.

The rescue time reduction achievement rate is the rate at which the game is controlled to the time-shortened state via rescue time reduction. The time-shortened state via rescue time reduction is controlled by performing variable display n times (900 times in this example) without being controlled to the jackpot game state, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K can be calculated as follows:

K={(1-ML)^n}×100
(K = rescue time reduction achievement rate, ML = jackpot probability, n = variable display number)

Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability ML in this embodiment is approximately 1/319, the rescue time reduction achievement rate K will be 5.9%. Furthermore, in the case of gaming machines that allow for setting values, if the rescue time reduction achievement rate is set higher the lower the jackpot probability setting, the player can be rescued even if the jackpot probability setting is low.

[Fluctuation pattern]
11-5 and 11-6 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fluctuation patterns in this embodiment. The fluctuation patterns in this embodiment are roughly divided into a loss fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is a loss and a jackpot fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 11-5, miss fluctuation patterns can be broadly divided into non-reach miss fluctuation patterns where no reach effects are executed and a miss occurs (fluctuation pattern type: non-reach), normal reach fluctuation patterns where a normal reach reach effect is executed and a miss occurs (fluctuation pattern type: normal reach), low base weak super reach fluctuation patterns where a low base weak super reach A reach effect or a low base weak super reach B reach effect is executed in a normal state (low base state) and a miss occurs (fluctuation pattern type: low base weak super reach), and normal state (low base The fluctuation pattern of low base strong super reach A (fluctuating pattern type: low base strong super reach A) in which the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is finally executed and results in a miss in the normal state (low base state), the fluctuation pattern of low base strong super reach B (fluctuating pattern type: low base strong super reach B) in which the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is finally executed and results in a miss in the normal state (low base state), the fluctuation pattern of low base strong super reach C (fluctuating pattern type: low base strong super reach C) in which the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is finally executed and results in a miss in the normal state (low base state). The fluctuation pattern of the low base strongest super reach C in which the reach effect of the low base strongest super reach is finally executed in the normal state (low base state) and results in a miss (fluctuation pattern type is the fluctuation pattern of the low base strongest super reach); the fluctuation pattern of the high base super reach A in which the reach effect of the high base super reach A is finally executed and results in a miss in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state (high base state) (fluctuation pattern type is the fluctuation pattern of the high base super reach A); the fluctuation pattern of the high base super reach B in which the reach effect of the high base super reach B is finally executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state (high base state) There are various fluctuation patterns available: a high base Super Reach B fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern type: high base Super Reach B fluctuation pattern) in which a reach effect of high base Super Reach C is ultimately executed in time-saving state A or probability variable state (high base state) and results in a miss; a high base Super Reach C fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern type: high base Super Reach C fluctuation pattern) in which a reach effect of high base Super Reach D is ultimately executed in time-saving state A or probability variable state (high base state) and results in a miss; and a high base Super Reach D fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern type: high base Super Reach D fluctuation pattern) in which a reach effect of high base Super Reach D is ultimately executed in time-saving state A or probability variable state (high base state).

Four types of non-reach fluctuation patterns are available: PA1-1, where the special chart fluctuation time is 12,000 ms and no reach effects are executed when the number of reserved memories of the variable display target special chart is two or less in normal state; PA1-2, where the special chart fluctuation time is 5,000 ms and no reach effects are executed when the number of reserved memories of the variable display target special chart is three in normal state; PA1-3, where the special chart fluctuation time is 2,000 ms and no reach effects are executed during time-saving control (time-saving state A or special probability state); and PA1-4, where the special chart fluctuation time is 500 ms and no reach effects are executed during time-saving control (time-saving state B).

For normal reach fluctuation patterns, there is one type of fluctuation pattern, PA2-1, in which the special chart fluctuation time is 20,000 ms and the normal reach reach effect is executed, resulting in a miss.

There are two types of fluctuation patterns for the low base weak super reach fluctuation pattern type: PA2-2, where the special chart fluctuation time is 43,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, resulting in a miss; and PA2-3, where the special chart fluctuation time is 53,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, resulting in a miss.

There are three types of fluctuation patterns for the fluctuation pattern type low base strong super reach A: PA2-4, where the special chart fluctuation time is 63,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach A, resulting in a miss; PA2-5, where the special chart fluctuation time is 73,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach A, resulting in a miss; and PA2-6, where the special chart fluctuation time is 40,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed and the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is executed, resulting in a miss.

There are three types of fluctuation patterns for the fluctuation pattern type low base strong super reach B: PA2-7, where the special chart fluctuation time is 78,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, resulting in a miss; PA2-8, where the special chart fluctuation time is 83,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, resulting in a miss; and PA2-9, where the special chart fluctuation time is 45,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed and the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed, resulting in a miss.

There are three types of fluctuation patterns for the fluctuation pattern type low base strong super reach C: PA2-10, where the special chart fluctuation time is 88,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, resulting in a miss; PA2-11, where the special chart fluctuation time is 93,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, resulting in a miss; and PA2-12, where the special chart fluctuation time is 50,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed and the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is executed, resulting in a miss.

There are three types of fluctuation patterns for the low base strongest super reach fluctuation pattern type: PA2-13, where the special chart fluctuation time is 98,000 ms and a reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by a reach effect of low base strongest super reach, resulting in a miss; PA2-14, where the special chart fluctuation time is 103,000 ms and a reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by a reach effect of low base strongest super reach, resulting in a miss; and PA2-15, where the special chart fluctuation time is 60,000 ms and a reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed and a reach effect of low base strongest super reach is executed, resulting in a miss.

For the high base Super Reach A variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PA2-16, where the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms and the reach effect of the high base Super Reach A is executed, resulting in a miss. For the high base Super Reach B variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PA2-17, where the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms and the reach effect of the high base Super Reach B is executed, resulting in a miss. For the high base Super Reach C variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PA2-18, where the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms and the reach effect of the high base Super Reach C is executed, resulting in a miss. For the high base Super Reach D variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PA2-19, where the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms and the reach effect of the high base Super Reach D is executed, resulting in a miss.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-6, the jackpot fluctuation patterns are similar to the miss fluctuation patterns in that they include the following fluctuation patterns: non-reach, normal reach, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, low base strongest super reach, high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, and high base super reach D.

More specifically, as shown in Figure 11-6, the non-reach variation pattern type has one variation pattern, PB1-18, in which the special chart variation time is 500 ms + 15,000 ms and no reach effects are executed during time-saving control (time-saving state B).

For normal reach fluctuation patterns, there is one type of fluctuation pattern, PB1-1, in which the special chart fluctuation time is 20,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and a normal reach reach effect is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

For the low base strong Super Reach A variation pattern type, there are three variation patterns: PB1-2, where the special chart variation time is 63,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak Super Reach A is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach A, resulting in a jackpot; PB1-3, where the special chart variation time is 73,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak Super Reach B is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach A, resulting in a jackpot; and PB-4, where the special chart variation time is 40,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak Super Reach A or low base weak Super Reach B is not executed, and the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach A is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

For the low base strong super reach B variation pattern type, there are three variation patterns: PB1-5, where the special chart variation time is 78,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, resulting in a jackpot; PB1-6, where the special chart variation time is 83,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, resulting in a jackpot; and PB1-7, where the special chart variation time is 45,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

There are three types of fluctuation patterns for the low base strong super reach C fluctuation pattern type: PB1-8, where the special chart fluctuation time is 88,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, resulting in a jackpot; PB1-9, where the special chart fluctuation time is 93,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, resulting in a jackpot; and PB1-10, where the special chart fluctuation time is 50,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

There are three types of fluctuation patterns for the low base strongest super reach fluctuation pattern type: PB1-11, where the special chart fluctuation time is 98,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strongest super reach, resulting in a jackpot; PB1-12, where the special chart fluctuation time is 103,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strongest super reach, resulting in a jackpot; and PB1-13, where the special chart fluctuation time is 60,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach effect of low base strongest super reach is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

For the high base Super Reach A variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PB1-14, in which the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the high base Super Reach A reach effect is executed, resulting in a jackpot. For the high base Super Reach B variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PB1-15, in which the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the high base Super Reach B reach effect is executed, resulting in a jackpot. For the high base Super Reach C variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PB1-16, in which the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the high base Super Reach C reach effect is executed, resulting in a jackpot. The variation pattern type for High Base Super Reach D is a special chart variation time of 30,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and one variation pattern, PB1-17, is provided, in which the High Base Super Reach D reach effect is executed and a jackpot is achieved.

[Fluctuation pattern type determination table/fluctuation pattern determination table]
The judgment table stored in ROM 101 includes a plurality of fluctuation pattern type judgment tables for determining the type of fluctuation pattern according to the game status and the variable display result, and a plurality of fluctuation pattern type judgment tables for determining the fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the fluctuation pattern type judgment table, the game status, the variable display result, and the number of reserved memories of special patterns that execute the variable display (number of reserved memories that are subject to variable display).

In the variation pattern setting process in this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table is selected according to the game status and variable display results. Next, the selected variation pattern type determination table is compared with the random number value MR3 read in step 131SGS55 of the normal special symbol processing to determine the variation pattern type.

For example, if the game status is normal and the variable display result is a miss, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 11-7 (A) is selected, and the value of the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is compared with the value of the random number value MR3 to determine the fluctuation pattern type. If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3299, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 3300 to 4053, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4054 to 4073, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base weak super reach", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4074 to 4081, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach A", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4082 to 4089, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach B", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4090 to 4094, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach C", and if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strongest super reach".

In addition, if the game state is in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state and the variable display result is a miss, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 11-7 (B) is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is compared with the value of the random number value MR3 to determine the fluctuation pattern type. If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3849, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 3850 to 4048, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4049 to 4066, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach A", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4067 to 4083, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach B", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4084 to 4094, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach C", and if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach D".

Also, if the game state is time-saving state B and the variable display result is a loss, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 11-7 (C) is selected, and the loss fluctuation pattern determination table C is compared with the value of random number value MR3 to determine the fluctuation pattern type. If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach."

Also, if the game status is normal and the variable display result is a jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 11-7 (D) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern type is determined by comparing this jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A with the value of random number value MR3. If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 1298, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 1299 to 1934, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach A." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 1935 to 2676, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach B." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 2677 to 3706, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach C." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 3707 to 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strongest super reach."

Also, if the game state is in time-saving state A or probability variable state and the variable display result is a miss, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 11-7 (E) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern type is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B with the value of random number value MR3. If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 25, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 26 to 975, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach A." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 976 to 2075, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach B." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 2076 to 3380, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach C." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 3381 to 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach D."

Also, if the game state is time-saving state B and the variable display result is a miss, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 11-7 (F) is selected, and the value of the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is compared with the value of the random number value MR3 to determine the fluctuation pattern type. If the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach."

After determining the type of variation pattern as described above, one of the variation pattern determination tables shown in Figures 11-8 to 11-10 is selected depending on the game status, the variable display result, and the number of reserved special symbols that will execute the variable display (number of reserved symbols for variable display), and the selected variation pattern determination table is compared with the random number value MR3 read in step 131SGS55 of the normal special symbol processing to determine the type of variation pattern.

For example, if the variable display result is a miss, the game status is normal, and the number of variable display target reserved memories is 0 to 2, the miss variation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 11-8 (A) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined by comparing the miss variation pattern determination table A with the value of the random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is a non-reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-1 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is a normal reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is a low base weak super reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-2 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 199, and the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-3 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 200 to 255.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-5. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-7; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-8; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-9.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-10; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-11; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-12. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strongest super reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-13; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-14; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 1743 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-15.

Also, if the variable display result is a miss, the game status is normal, and the number of variable display target reserved memories is three, the miss variation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 11-8 (B) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined by comparing the miss variation pattern determination table B with the value of random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is a non-reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-2 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is a normal reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 173 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-5. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-7; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-8; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-9.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-10; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-11; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-12. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strongest super reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-13; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-14; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-15.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is time-saving state A or a probability variable state, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 11-9 (A) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C with the value of random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is non-reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA1-3 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is normal reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-1 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach A, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-16 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach B, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-17 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach C, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-18 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach D, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-19 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is time-saving state B, the miss variation pattern determination table D shown in Figure 11-9 (B) is selected, and the value of the random number value MR4 is compared with the miss variation pattern determination table D to determine the variation pattern. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, and the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-4.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game status is normal, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 11-10 (A) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A with the value of random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is a normal reach, and the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-1.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-2; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-3; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-4. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-5; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-6; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-7.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-8; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-9; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-10. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strongest super reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-11; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-12; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-13.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is time-saving state A or a probability variable state, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 11-10 (B) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B with the value of random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is a normal reach, and the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-1.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach A, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-14 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach B, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-15 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach C, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-16 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach D, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-17 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is time-saving state B, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 11-10 (C) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C with the value of random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is non-reach, and the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-18.

[Super Reach Performance Expectations]
The expected probability of a jackpot when the variation pattern type and variation pattern are determined as described above is as shown in Figures 11-11 (A) to (C). The expected probability of a jackpot for a Super Reach effect is the percentage of a jackpot when the corresponding Super Reach effect is executed, and is a value calculated by dividing the percentage of a jackpot when the corresponding Super Reach effect is executed by the sum of the percentage of a jackpot when the corresponding Super Reach effect is executed and the percentage of a miss when the corresponding Super Reach effect is executed.

As shown in Figure 11-11 (A), of the Super Reach reach effects that are executed when the game is in the normal state, the reach effects of low base weak Super Reach A and low base weak Super Reach B do not directly lead to a jackpot, so the expected jackpot probability is 0% for each. However, the reach effects of low base weak Super Reach A and low base weak Super Reach B can develop into reach effects of other Super Reaches (low base strong Super Reach A-C, low base strongest Reach), and the expected probability of development from low base weak Super Reach A to reach effects of other Super Reaches is approximately 44%, and the expected probability of development from low base weak Super Reach B to reach effects of other Super Reaches is approximately 68%. The expected rate of development of a Super Reach effect is the rate at which the corresponding Super Reach effect will develop into another Super Reach effect when executed, and is a value calculated by dividing the rate at which the corresponding Super Reach effect will develop into another Super Reach effect by the sum of the rate at which the corresponding Super Reach effect will develop into another Super Reach effect and the rate at which the corresponding Super Reach effect will be executed and not develop into another Super Reach effect.

In addition, among the Super Reach reach effects that are executed when the game state is normal, the expected jackpot rate for the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach A is approximately 20%, the expected jackpot rate for the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach B is approximately 25%, the expected jackpot rate for the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach C is approximately 35%, and the expected jackpot rate for the reach effect of low base strongest Super Reach is approximately 55%. Furthermore, the expected jackpot probability for the reach effects of low base strong Super Reach A to C and low base strongest Super Reach differs depending on whether it develops from low base weak Super Reach A, develops from low base weak Super Reach B, or is executed directly without going through low base weak Super Reach A or B. The expected jackpot probability for the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach A developed from low base weak Super Reach A is approximately 19%, the expected jackpot probability for the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach A developed from low base weak Super Reach B is approximately 20%, the expected jackpot probability for the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach A executed directly without going through B is approximately 21%, the expected jackpot probability for the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach B developed from low base weak Super Reach A is approximately 24%, and the expected jackpot probability for the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach B developed from low base weak Super Reach B is approximately 20%. The expected jackpot rate for a reach effect is approximately 25%, the expected jackpot rate for a reach effect of low base strong Super Reach B executed directly without going through B is approximately 27%, the expected jackpot rate for a reach effect of low base strong Super Reach C developed from low base weak Super Reach A is approximately 33%, the expected jackpot rate for a reach effect of low base strong Super Reach C developed from low base weak Super Reach B is approximately 35%, the expected jackpot rate for a reach effect of low base strong Super Reach C executed directly without going through B is approximately 37%, the expected jackpot rate for a reach effect of low base strongest Super Reach developed from low base weak Super Reach A is approximately 53%, the expected jackpot rate for a reach effect of low base strongest Super Reach developed from low base weak Super Reach B is approximately 55%, and the expected jackpot rate for a reach effect of low base strongest Super Reach executed directly without going through B is approximately 57%.

As shown in Figure 11-11 (B), when the game state is time-saving state A, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach A is approximately 14%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach B is approximately 16%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach C is approximately 27%, and the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach D is approximately 70%.

As shown in Figure 11-11 (C), when the game state is in a probability variable state, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach A is approximately 40%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach B is approximately 45%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach C is approximately 60%, and the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach D is approximately 90%.

As described below, in Super Reach effects, an expectation suggestion display can be displayed that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot for the corresponding Super Reach effect using the number of stars. As shown in Figure 11-11 (A), among the Super Reach effects executed when the game state is normal, no expectation suggestion display is displayed in the reach effects of low base weak Super Reach A and B, but the expectation suggestion display in the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach A displays 3 stars, the expectation suggestion display in the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach B displays 3.5 stars, the expectation suggestion display in the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach C displays 4 stars, and the expectation suggestion display in the reach effect of low base strongest Super Reach displays 4.5 stars. As shown in Figures 11-11 (B) and (C), when the game state is in time-saving state A or probability variable state, the expectation suggestion display for the reach presentation of high base super reach A displays 3 stars, the expectation suggestion display for the reach presentation of high base super reach B displays 3.5 stars, the expectation suggestion display for the reach presentation of high base super reach C displays 4 stars, and the expectation suggestion display for the reach presentation of high base super reach D displays 4.5 stars.

In the Super Reach reach effect that is executed when the game state is normal and in the Super Reach reach effect that is executed when the game state is in a special state, the same number of stars may be displayed in the expectation indication display, but as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), even if the number of stars displayed in the expectation indication display is the same, the suggested jackpot expectation is not the same. In cases where the number of stars displayed in the expectation indication display is the same, the Super Reach reach effect that is executed when the game state is in a special state suggests a higher jackpot expectation than the Super Reach reach effect that is executed when the game state is normal.

Furthermore, whether it is a Super Reach reach effect that is executed when the game state is normal, or a Super Reach reach effect that is executed when the game state is in a special state, the suggested probability of a jackpot increases for every 0.5 increase in the number of stars displayed in the expectation suggestion display, and as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), in the expectation suggestion display of a Super Reach reach effect in either game state, the greater the increase in the suggested probability of a jackpot. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), the increase in jackpot expectation when the number of stars displayed in the expectation suggestion display increases from 3 to 3.5 is the same for both the Super Reach reach presentation executed when the game state is normal and the Super Reach reach presentation executed when the game state is in a special probability state; however, the increase in jackpot expectation when the number of stars displayed in the expectation suggestion display increases from 3.5 to 4, or from 4 to 4.5, is greater for the Super Reach reach presentation executed when the game state is in a special probability state than for the Super Reach reach presentation executed when the game state is normal.

[Performance control command]
FIG. 11-13(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1," and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0." Note that the command format shown in FIG. 11-13(A) is only an example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 11-13 (A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time) of decorative symbols and the like that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that the variation pattern specification command sets different EXT data depending on the specified variation pattern, etc.

Command 8C00H is a variable display result specification command, and is a presentation control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. For example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (B), the variable display result specification command sets different EXT data depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot," and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpot type will be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot."

For example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command in which the variable display result is "miss." Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A." Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B." Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C."

Command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that specifies the stopping (confirmation) of the variable display of decorative patterns in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5.

Command 9000H is an initialization specification (power-on specification) command for displaying the initial screen when power is turned on in the image display device 5. Command 9200H is a power outage recovery specification command for displaying a power outage recovery screen on the image display device 5 indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered from a power outage (power outage) state.

Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed (high base state, time-saving state).

Command A0XXH is a jackpot start command (also known as a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot gaming state. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a jackpot end command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot gaming state.

For the jackpot start command and jackpot end command, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. Alternatively, for the jackpot start command and jackpot end command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. For the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, different EXT data is set depending on the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state (for example, "1" to "10").

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies that the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (first start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the first start port formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (second start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first special reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special memory numbers can be identifiably displayed in the first reserved memory display area 132SG005D, etc. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second special reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special memory numbers can be identifiably displayed in the second reserved memory display area 132SG005U, etc. The first reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the first start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a second start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the second start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port. Additionally, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number decreases).

Instead of the first pending memory count notification command or the second pending memory count notification command, a total pending memory count notification command that notifies the total pending memory count may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory count.

Command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that specifies the winning result at the time of the initial winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category designation command that specifies the variable category of the winning result at the time of the initial winning.

Command D100H is a jackpot start switch passing notification command that notifies the player that the game ball has passed through the jackpot start switch 131SG024 when the variable display result is a jackpot, i.e., notifies the start of the jackpot game. Command D200H is a V win notification command that notifies the player that the game ball has passed through the V switch 131SG023B1 during the jackpot game state, i.e., notifies the player that the game state will be controlled to a special state after the jackpot game ends.

Command E1XXH is a remaining time-saving count notification command that notifies the number of remaining time-saving control attempts in the time-saving state (time-saving state A) excluding rescue time-saving. Command E2XXH is a remaining chance-change count notification command that notifies the number of remaining chance-change control attempts in the chance-change state.

Command F100H is a right-hit LED on notification command that notifies the right-hit LED 131SG031 to light up. Command F101H is a right-hit LED off notification command that notifies the right-hit LED 131SG031 to light up.

Command 91XXH is a command to specify the number of times rescue time reduction is performed upon power recovery, and is a performance control command that converts the value of the rescue time reduction counter into hexadecimal and specifies it when power is restored. For example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (C), the command to specify the number of times rescue time reduction is performed upon power recovery sets different EXT data depending on each digit (first, second, third, fourth digit) of the value (four-digit value) of the rescue time reduction counter when power is restored.

For example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (C), commands 9100H to 910FH are recovery time reduction command 1, which specify the first digit of the value of the recovery time reduction. Commands 9110H to 911FH are recovery time reduction command 2, which specify the second digit of the value of the recovery time reduction. Commands 9130H to 913FH are recovery time reduction command 3, which specify the third digit of the value of the recovery time reduction. Commands 9140H to 914FH are recovery time reduction command 4, which specify the fourth digit of the value of the recovery time reduction.

Command 94XXH is a rescue time reduction count specification command, and is a presentation control command that specifies the remaining number of variable displays (126 or fewer) until rescue time reduction occurs. For example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (D), the rescue time reduction count specification command sets different EXT data depending on the remaining number of variable displays (126 or fewer) until rescue time reduction occurs.

For example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (D), command 9400H is a rescue time reduction count A specification command that specifies that the rescue time reduction has been reached. Command 9401H is a rescue time reduction count B specification command that specifies that 1 to 125 times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached. Command 947EH is a rescue time reduction count C specification command that specifies that 126 times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached. Command 947FH is a rescue time reduction count D specification command that specifies that 127 or more times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached.

Command 96XXH is a rescue time reduction count 2 specification command, and is a presentation control command that specifies the remaining number of variable displays (in units of 100) until the rescue time reduction occurs. With the rescue time reduction count 2 specification command, for example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of variable displays (in units of 100) until the rescue time reduction occurs is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction count 2 specification command. For example, if the remaining number of variable displays until the rescue time reduction occurs is 100, command 9601H is sent as the rescue time reduction count 2 specification command, and if the remaining number of variable displays is 700, command 9607H is sent as the rescue time reduction count 1 specification command. Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration display specification command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

[Game control data storage area]
The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 11-2 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. In other words, even if power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is interrupted, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply capacitor discharges and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game status, i.e., the control status of the game control means (e.g., special game process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid balls should be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control status of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control status to its pre-power outage state based on that data when power is restored after a power outage or other event. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control status and the data indicating the number of unpaid balls are defined as data indicating the game progress status.

This RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 131SG150, as shown in FIG. 11-14, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 131SG150 shown in FIG. 11-14 includes a first special symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151A, a second special symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151B, a regular symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 131SG152, a game control timer setting unit 131SG153, a game control counter setting unit 131SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 131SG155.

The first special symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151A stores reserved data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that has not yet started, but in which a game ball has passed (entered) the first start entry port formed by the winning ball device 6A, resulting in a start entry (first start entry). As an example, the first special symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151A associates reserved numbers with the order of entry into the first start entry port (the order of detection of game balls), and stores, as reserved data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and the random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the first start condition upon the game ball's passage (entry), until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4"). The upper limit of reserved data (reserved memory) that can be stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit 131SG151B is always 4, regardless of the game status. In this way, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 131SG151A indicates that the execution of a special symbol game using the first special symbol is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special symbol display result) in this special symbol game.

The second special symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151B stores reserved data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) that has not yet started but in which a game ball has passed (entered) the second start entry port formed by the variable prize ball device 6B, resulting in a start entry (second start entry). As an example, the second special symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151B associates reserved numbers with the order of entry into the second start entry port (the order of detection of game balls), and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the second start condition upon the game ball's passage (entry), until the number of reserved data reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4"). The upper limit of reserved data (reserved memory) that can be stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit 131SG151B is always four, regardless of the game status. In this way, the reserved data stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit 131SG151B indicates that the execution of a special symbol game using the second special symbol is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special symbol display result) in this special symbol game.

In other words, in this embodiment, a maximum of four reserved memories can be stored as first special chart reserved memories (reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151A), and a maximum of four reserved memories can be stored as second special chart reserved memories (reserved memories that can be stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151B).

In addition, the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the first start entry port, and the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start entry when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the second start entry port, may be stored in a common hold memory unit in association with the hold number. In this case, start entry port data indicating whether the gaming ball passed through (enters) the first or second start entry port may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number.

When variable display is being executed, if a second special symbol reserved memory exists during normal special symbol processing (see FIG. 6), the CPU 103 first reads random number values MR1 to MR4 from the second special symbol reserved memory unit 131SG151B and then shifts the contents of the second special symbol reserved memory unit 131SG151B. In other words, if random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as reserved memory for reserve number 1 in the second special symbol reserved memory unit 131SG151B, the CPU 103 reads out the values of random number values MR1 to MR4 stored as reserved memory for reserve number 1, erases the reserved memory for reserve number 1, and re-stores the reserved memory stored as reserved memory for reserve number 2 as reserved memory for reserve number 1, the reserved memory stored as reserved memory for reserve number 3 as reserved memory for reserve number 2, and the reserved memory stored as reserved memory for reserve number 4 as reserved memory for reserve number 3.

Furthermore, if no reserved memory is stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151B, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a first special chart reserved memory exists. If a first special chart reserved memory exists, the CPU 103 reads out the random number values MR1 to MR4 from the first special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151A and then shifts the memory contents of the first special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151A. In other words, if the random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as the reserved memory for reserve number 1 in the first special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151A, the CPU 103 reads out the values of the random number values MR1 to MR4 stored as the reserved memory for reserve number 1, erases the reserved memory for reserve number 1, and re-stores the reserved memory stored as the reserved memory for reserve number 2 as the reserved memory for reserve number 1, the reserved memory stored as the reserved memory for reserve number 3 as the reserved memory for reserve number 2, and the reserved memory stored as the reserved memory for reserve number 4 as the reserved memory for reserve number 3.

The CPU 103 then determines the variable display result based on the random number value MR1 read from the first special symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151A or the second special symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151B (and also determines the type of jackpot based on the random number value MR2 if the variable display result is a jackpot), and then in the variation pattern determination process (see Figure 6), determines the variation pattern type using a variation pattern type determination table that differs depending on the game state, variable display result, and the number of reserved memories of special symbols that will execute the variable display, and then determines the variation pattern using a variation pattern determination table that differs depending on the determined variation pattern type, game state, number of reserved memories, etc.

In other words, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 is able to determine the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process based on the number of reserved memories subtracted by 1 from the number of reserved memories immediately before the variable display.

The normal symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151C stores reserve information for normal symbol games in which a gaming ball has been detected by the gate switch 21 but which have not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20. For example, the normal symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151C associates the gaming balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the gaming ball as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 131SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 131SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 131SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 131SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 131SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for calculating count values used to control the progress of play in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 may be provided with a random counter that counts some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them using software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR6, as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly in accordance with the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software that updates the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or software that updates the random count value by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

[Performance control data storage area]
The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 131SG190, for example, as shown in Fig. 11-15(A), as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 131SG190 shown in Fig. 11-15(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 131SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 131SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 131SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 131SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated in response to performance operation states, such as the display state of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 131SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 131SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 131SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 131SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 131SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 131SG194A shown in Figure 11-15 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 131SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4"). In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 131SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4"). When a start win occurs at the first start win slot or the second start win slot, a set of four commands - a start win slot designation command (first start win slot designation command or second start win slot designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory count notification command (first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command) - is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage areas corresponding to the first and second special symbol reserved memories in the start win reception command buffer 131SG194A correspond to the reserved memory counts, and storage areas (entries) are reserved for storing these start win slot designation commands, pattern designation commands, variable category designation commands, reserved memory count notification commands, and reserved display flags separately for the first and second special symbol reserved memories.

When the start conditions are met and the variable display of the top-level reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, the contents (data) of the reserved memory for which the start conditions are met are copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B in Figure 11-15 (C), and the contents of the copied reserved memory are deleted from the start winning time received command buffer 131SG194A. The contents of the storage areas lower than the deleted reserved memory are then shifted one by one to the higher storage areas.

As mentioned above, when the variable display of the reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") begins, the contents (data) of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are copied into the active display buffer 131SG194B. Therefore, as shown in Figure 11-15 (C), a storage area similar to that of the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is provided. In other words, an area for storing the start winning specification command, an area for storing the pattern specification command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the reserved memory count notification command, and an area for storing the reserved display flag is provided.

In this embodiment, if a start win occurs when variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, the start win designation command, pattern designation command, variable category command, and reserved memory count notification command based on the start win are stored in the active display buffer 131SG194B without passing through the start win reception command buffer 131SG194A. The reserved display flag is set when the performance control CPU 120 executes the advance notice setting process (S161) described below.

The contents of the active display buffer 131SG194B are cleared (deleted) during the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

The pending display flag is a flag that indicates the display mode of the pending display or the active display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed. Details will be provided later, but in this embodiment, the display mode of these pending displays and active displays (the value of the pending display flag) can indicate the probability of being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

[Starting winning determination process]
11-16 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. 6. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first starting gate switch 22A, which corresponds to the first starting gate formed by the winning ball device 6A, is on based on a detection signal from the first starting gate switch 22A (131SGS101). If the first starting gate switch 22A is on (131SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special symbol reserved memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4") (131SGS102). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved first symbol memories by, for example, reading the first reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 131SG154. When the number of reserved memories of the first special chart in 131SGS102 is not the upper limit value (131SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 is set to "1" (131SGS103).

When the first start opening switch 22A in 131SGS101 is off (131SGS101; N) or when the number of reserved first special symbols in 131SGS102 has reached the upper limit (131SGS102; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second start opening switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is on (131SGS104) based on a detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B. If the second start opening switch 22B is on (131SGS104; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., the upper limit of "4") (131SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved symbol count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved symbol count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 131SG154. When the second reserved symbol count is not the upper limit value in 131SGS105 (131SGS105; N), for example, the value stored in the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 is set to "2" (131SGS106).

After executing either process 131SGS103 or 131SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the value stored in the start port buffer, is updated by adding 1 (131SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1," the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2," the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. Furthermore, the second reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total reserved symbol count is also updated to increase by 1 (131SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 131SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the processing of 131SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, the random number value MR3 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 (131SGS109). The numerical data indicating each of the extracted random numbers and the start port buffer value are stored by being set as reserve information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol reserve memory unit (131SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or a "small hit," and further to determine the type of big hit or small hit when the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." The random number value MR3 for determining the type of variation pattern and the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 131SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display results of the special symbol or decorative symbol and the variable display mode, including the variable display time.

Following the processing of 131SGS110, a setting for sending a start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is made (131SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1," the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up to send a first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2," the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up to send a second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process has finished.

Following the processing of 131SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process (131SGS112). Then, the CPU 103 performs settings for sending a pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (131SGS113). The pending memory count notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process of S27 shown in Figure 4 after the special symbol process process has ended.

After executing the processing of 131SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (131SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (Y in 131SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (131SGS115), and then processing of 2390SGS104 proceeds. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 131SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (131SGS116), and then the start winning processing ends. This ensures that processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect valid game ball start winnings.

[Random value determination process when winning]
FIG. 11-17(A) is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed by the 131SGS112 of FIG. 11-17 as a random number value determination process at the time of winning. In this embodiment, when the variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol is initiated, the normal special symbol process (FIG. 6) determines whether or not to control the special symbol display result (the variable display result of the special symbol) as a "jackpot" and to set the game state to a jackpot. Furthermore, the variable pattern setting process (FIG. 6) determines a variable pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. Separately from these determinations, when a game ball is detected in the starting winning slot (first starting winning slot or second starting winning slot), the CPU 103 executes the random number value determination process at S112 at the time of winning to determine whether or not a jackpot symbol is to be derived and displayed as the special symbol display result. As a result, before the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns based on the detection of the game ball entering the starting winning port begins, that is, before it is determined whether or not a jackpot will be reached at the start of the variable display, it is determined that the special pattern display result will be a "jackpot," and based on this determination result, the presentation control CPU 120, etc., will execute advance warnings such as panel display presentations and hold warning presentations, as will be described later.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in Figure 11-17, the CPU 103 first identifies the game status (step 131SGS121) and selects the display result determination table shown in Figure 11-3 (B) (step 131SGS122). Then, in step 131SGS123a, the CPU 103 compares the random number value MR1 extracted in step 131SGS109 with the display result determination table, and determines whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range.

If the random number value MR1 is outside the range for determining a jackpot, i.e., if the variable display result is a miss, a symbol designation command corresponding to the miss is set to be sent (step 131SGS126a). Then, it is determined whether the game state is normal (step 131SGS126b). If the game state is normal, the miss variable pattern type determination table A shown in Figure 11-7 (A) is selected, and the process proceeds to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126c).

If the gaming state is not the normal state, it is further determined whether the gaming state is in time-saving state B (step 131SGS126d). If the gaming state is not time-saving state B, that is, if the gaming state is time-saving state A or a special state, the loss fluctuation pattern type determination table B shown in Figure 11-7 (B) is selected and the process proceeds to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126e). If the gaming state is time-saving state B, the loss fluctuation pattern type determination table C shown in Figure 11-7 (C) is selected and the process proceeds to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126f).

Also, in step 131SGS123a, if the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination value range, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to a jackpot (step 131SGS129). Then, it determines whether the game state is normal (step 131SGS130a). If the game state is normal, it selects jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table A shown in FIG. 11-7(D). If the game state is time-saving state A or high probability state, it selects jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table B shown in FIG. 11-7(E). If the game state is time-saving state B, it selects jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table C shown in FIG. 11-7(F), and proceeds to step 131SGS131 (steps 131SGS130b, 131SGS130d, and 131SGS130e).

In step 131SGS131, the CPU 103 compares the selected fluctuation pattern type determination table with the random number value MR3 extracted in step 131SGS109 and determines the fluctuation category from non-reach, super reach, or other (normal reach). For example, if the random number value MR3 is a fluctuation pattern type of non-reach, the fluctuation category is determined to be non-reach; if the random number value MR3 is a fluctuation pattern type of normal reach, the fluctuation category is determined to be other (normal reach); and if the random number value MR3 is any of low base weak super reach A/B, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, low base strongest super reach, high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, or high base super reach D, the fluctuation category is determined to be super reach. Then, the system sets up the transmission of a variable category designation command (one of those shown in Figure 11-17 (B)) according to the determination result, and ends the winning random number determination process (step 131SGS132).

The commands set for transmission are sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in Figure 5.

[Game control main processing]
11-18 is a flowchart showing the game control main process in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes of steps S1 to S7, steps S8 to S9, and steps S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, when a performance control command instructing restoration from a power outage is sent in step S7, the CPU 103 checks the value of the rescue time reduction counter, which counts the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction occurs, converts the current value of the rescue time reduction counter into a hexadecimal number, sets the value, and transmits a rescue time reduction count designation command upon restoration to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0013).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the current value of the rescue time reduction counter and controls the transmission of a rescue time reduction count designation command to the presentation control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0014). For example, if the current value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 1 and 125, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9401H as the rescue time reduction count designation command. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the RAM clear process is not performed when the gaming machine is turned on and the recovery process is executed, a rescue time reduction count designation command is transmitted, and the remaining number of variable display times until the current rescue time reduction is notified.

In this embodiment, when power is restored after a power outage, a command specifying the number of times to shorten the recovery time and a command specifying the number of times to shorten the recovery time are sent separately from the command at the time of restoration, but this is not limited to this configuration. For example, the EXT data of the command at the time of restoration (e.g., a power-on command) sent in step S7 may be configured to be set to a value corresponding to the number of times remaining until the time shortening is reached.

In addition, if a RAM clear is requested in step S3, if there is no backup data in step S4, or if an abnormality is detected in the backup RAM in step S5, the initialization process in step S8 executes a clearing process on the area including the area for the rescue time reduction counter.

Furthermore, when a presentation control command instructing initialization is sent in step S9, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time reduction counter to "900" (step 131SGS0015). Therefore, in this embodiment, if a RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900." That is, in this embodiment, if a jackpot does not occur even after 900 variable displays have been executed after the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, rescue time reduction will occur and the machine will be controlled to time reduction state B. Note that in this embodiment, since the presentation control command instructing initialization sent in step S9 corresponds to the initial value ("900") set in the rescue time reduction counter, the CPU 103 can also determine the initial value to set in the rescue time reduction counter based on the transmission of the presentation control command instructing initialization.

Next, the CPU 103 checks the value of the rescue time reduction counter (which is "900" in this embodiment), converts the current value of the rescue time reduction counter into a hexadecimal number, sets the value, and transmits a command to specify the number of rescue time reductions during recovery to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0016).

In this way, the rescue time reduction counter is set before the timer interrupt process, which is the game progress process, is executed. This means that the variable display will not start before the rescue time reduction counter is set, and the number of times until the rescue time reduction can be managed reliably.

In this embodiment, the rescue time reduction counter is initially set to "900" when the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, but this is not a limitation; the rescue time reduction counter may be configured not to be initially reset when the RAM clear process is executed. In this configuration, gameplay can be started from the value of the rescue time reduction counter from the previous day, which reduces the investment required to trigger the rescue time reduction, and the configuration can be designed to avoid any disadvantage to the player.

Furthermore, when configured as described above, the system may be configured so that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when the clear switch is detected to be on (step S3; Yes) and the RAM clear process is performed, and so that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is performed when a RAM abnormality is detected (steps S4, S5; No) and the RAM clear process is performed.

[Time-saving flag, probability flag]
In this embodiment, when any of the conditions for controlling to the time-saving state is satisfied, a time-saving flag can be set. The time-saving flag includes a time-saving flag A and a time-saving flag B. In the following description, erasing (or clearing) a flag may be referred to as resetting the flag.

Time-saving flag A is set when control is in time-saving state A via jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. This time-saving flag A is set when the jackpot game state of jackpot A ends, and is cleared when time-saving state A ends (when a jackpot occurs during time-saving state A, or when 110 times of time-saving control end and control returns to normal state).

Time-saving flag B is set when the game is in time-saving state B, which is controlled via rescue time-saving. This time-saving flag B is set when 900 variable displays that do not result in a jackpot pattern are executed after RAM is cleared, or when 900 variable displays that do not result in a jackpot pattern are executed in a low-probability state after the jackpot game state ends, and is cleared when time-saving state B ends (when a jackpot occurs during time-saving state B, when 1100 time-saving controls end and the game is controlled to the normal state, etc.).

The probability variable flag is set when the game is controlled to the probability variable state. In this embodiment, if a V win occurs in the first round of a jackpot game, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state when the jackpot game ends, and the probability variable flag is set accordingly. This probability variable flag is cleared when the probability variable state ends (when a jackpot occurs during the probability variable state, when the 110th probability variable control is executed and the game is controlled to the normal state, etc.). For example, the probability variable flag is cleared when a YES determination is made in step 131SGS69A of Figure 11-20 (described below), indicating that this is the 110th time since the variable display has been controlled to the probability variable state.

[Special pattern normal processing]
11-19 and 11-20 are flowcharts showing the normal special symbol processing (step S110) in the special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total reserved memory count (step 131SGS51). Specifically, it checks the count value of the total reserved memory count counter, which counts the total number of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count. If the total reserved memory count is not zero, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory count is zero (step 131SGS52). Specifically, it checks whether the value of the second reserved memory count counter, which counts the second reserved memory count, is zero. If the second reserved memory count is not zero, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) to data indicating "second" (step 131SGS53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (i.e., if only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special pattern pointer (step 131SGS54).

In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps SGS52 to S54 in step 131, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied with priority over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to the embodiment shown in the accompanying drawings. For example, the system may be configured to execute variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol in the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot.

Next, CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in RAM 102 corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores them in the random number buffer area of RAM 102 (step 131SGS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st," CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1, and stores them in the random number buffer area of RAM 102. Furthermore, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd," CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1, and stores them in the random number buffer area of RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 131SGS56). Specifically, if the special symbol pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Furthermore, if the special symbol pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1," the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer of RAM 102 corresponding to first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the storage area corresponding to first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2," the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer of RAM 102 corresponding to second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the storage area corresponding to second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted will always match the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total number of pending memories by 1. That is, it decrements the count value of the total number of pending memories counter by 1 (step 131SGS57). The CPU 103 also stores the value of the total number of pending memories counter before the count value was decremented by 1 in a specified area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step S131SGS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step S131SGS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination extracted in the start-up winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value with the random number for hit determination and determines that a jackpot has occurred if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes the jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variable flag indicating a probability variable state is not set (if the state is low probability), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using the low-probability jackpot determination value. Furthermore, if the probability variable flag is set (if the state is high probability), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using the high-probability jackpot determination value. If the value of the random number for determining a win matches one of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol has been selected as a jackpot.

If it is determined that a jackpot has occurred (step 131SGS63; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step 131SGS64). Then, the CPU 103 determines the type of jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the type-determining random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 131SGS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the type-determining random number extracted in the start-up winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of jackpot. Then, the process proceeds to step 131SGS70. On the other hand, if it is not determined that a jackpot has occurred (step 131SGS63; No), the process proceeds to step 131SGS66.

In this embodiment, by performing normal special symbol processing, a rescue time-saving condition (reducing the value of the rescue time-saving counter to "0") can occur to control to rescue time-saving regardless of the variable display result (jackpot, miss). In this embodiment, time-saving state A is entered based on the occurrence of jackpot A, and time-saving state B is entered based on the fact that no next jackpot occurs even after a predetermined number of variable displays (900 in this embodiment) have been completed. However, it is anticipated that the variable display result of a variable display for which the rescue time-saving condition is met will be a jackpot. Therefore, when the variable display result of a variable display for which the rescue time-saving condition is met is a jackpot, control is configured to enter time-saving state A based on the jackpot occurring.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time-saving count counter, which counts the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state, is 0 (step 131SGS66). If the value of the time-saving count counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving count counter (step 131SGS67) and checks whether the value of the time-saving count counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 131SGS68). If the value of the time-saving count counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving state will end when the variable display ends (step 131SGS69).

In this embodiment, steps 131SGS66 to 131SGSS69 are executed to decrement the time-saving count counter before counting the number of variable displays up to the rescue time-saving feature from step 131SGS71 onward, but this processing configuration is not limited to this. For example, the time-saving count counter may be decremented after counting the number of variable displays up to the rescue time-saving feature from step 131SGS71 onward. In this case, for example, in the case of a variable display that results in a rescue time-saving feature, if the time-saving count counter is set to "110" (see step 131SGS172) and then the decrement process is executed, the value of the time-saving count counter will be decremented by one. Therefore, in the case of a variable display that results in a rescue time-saving feature, the time-saving count counter may be incremented by one again after the decrement process. Alternatively, the time-saving count counter may be set to "111" in advance, which is one more than the value of the time-saving count counter.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the probability variable flag is set (step 131SGS69A). If the probability variable flag is set (i.e., if the game is in a probability variable state), the process proceeds to step 131SGS84. In this embodiment, by executing the processing of step 131SGS69A, if the game is in a probability variable state, the processing of steps 131SGS70 and subsequent steps (particularly the processing of step 131SGSS71) is not performed. Therefore, even if a variable display is executed when the game state is in a probability variable state (in this embodiment, during Extreme Battle Rush), the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not decremented. If the probability variable flag is not set (i.e., if the game is not in a probability variable state), the process proceeds to step 131SGSS70.

In this embodiment, when the probability variable flag is set, the process proceeds to step 131SGSS84 without executing the processing from step 131SGSS70 onwards. However, this is not limited to this configuration. When the probability variable flag is set, the process proceeds to step 131SGSS70 but the processing of step 131SGSS71 may not be executed. In other words, the value of the rescue time reduction counter may not be updated, but a rescue time reduction count designation command or rescue time reduction count 2 designation command corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter that has not been updated may be sent.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 131SGS70; Yes). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 131SGS70; Yes), the process proceeds to step 131SGS84. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 at this point, this means that the game has already been controlled to the time reduction state (time reduction state B) via the rescue time reduction (the game is controlled to time reduction state B, or the game is controlled to the normal state after 1,100 fluctuations in time reduction state B), and a jackpot has not yet occurred, which would have triggered the setting of the rescue time reduction counter to 900. Furthermore, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0 (step 131SGS70; No), the value of the rescue time reduction counter is decremented by 1 (step 131SGS71). Furthermore, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of step 131SGS71, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or greater (step 131SGS72). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (step 131SGS72; No), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data and performs control to send a rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS73). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1, the CPU 103 performs control to send command 9401H as the rescue time reduction number designation command. On the other hand, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 126, the CPU 103 performs control to send command 947EH as the rescue time reduction number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 131SGS74). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after the subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 131SGS84. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a rescue time reduction determination flag indicating that a rescue time reduction has occurred and that control will be made to time reduction state B at the end of the fluctuation (step 131SGS75). The CPU 103 then proceeds to step 131SGS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or greater (step 131SGS72; Yes), CPU 103 uniformly sets 7FH as the EXT data and controls the transmission of command 957FH to the performance control CPU 120 as a rescue time reduction count designation command (step 131SGS76). Next, CPU 103 checks whether the remaining variable display count until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 (in this embodiment, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800) (step 131SGS77). Whether the remaining variable display count until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the rescue time reduction counter. If the remaining variable display count until the rescue time reduction is reached is in units of 100, CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data and performs control to send a rescue time reduction count 2 designation command to performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS78). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100, CPU 103 performs control to send command 9601H as a rescue time reduction count 2 designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 800, CPU 103 performs control to send command 9608H as a rescue time reduction count 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 131SGS84.

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) counts the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction and sends a rescue time reduction number designation command or a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, but this is not limited to this configuration. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction and execute the hype effects and countdown effects described below.

Also, for example, if the rescue time reduction counter is set (to "900") at the time of rescue time reduction so that rescue time reductions can occur continuously, the rescue time reduction count designation command or rescue time reduction count 2 designation command may be sent only the first time rescue time reduction occurs, and the rescue time reduction count designation command or rescue time reduction count 2 designation command may not be sent the second or subsequent time rescue time reduction occurs.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stopping symbol of the special symbol according to the result of the determination of the jackpot type (step 131SGS84). In this case, for example, if it determines that it will be a jackpot A, it determines the stopping symbol of the special symbol to be "2." If it determines that it will be a jackpot B, it determines the stopping symbol of the special symbol to be "3." If it determines that it will be a jackpot C, it determines the stopping symbol of the special symbol to be "7." If it determines that it will be a miss, it determines the stopping symbol of the special symbol to be "-." The CPU 103 also stores the determined stopping symbol of the special symbol in a stopping symbol memory area provided in RAM 102 (step 131SGS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step S131SGS86).

[Special symbol stop processing]
11-21 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the symbol determination period timer is running (step 131SGS131). If the symbol determination period timer is not running, the CPU 103 performs a derived display of the special symbol stop symbol (step 131SGS132). Then, it determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step 131SGS133).

If the jackpot flag is set, game status flags such as the time-saving A flag, time-saving B flag, and probability variable flag are cleared (step 131SGS134), the time-saving count counter is cleared (step 131SGS135), and a jackpot start command corresponding to the jackpot type is set for transmission, proceeding to step 131SGS147 (step 131SGS136). Note that the set jackpot start command is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see Figure 5).

Furthermore, if the jackpot flag is not set in step 131SGS133, the CPU 103 determines whether the rescue time-saving determination flag is set (step 131SGS140). If the rescue time-saving determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 131SGS147. If the rescue time-saving determination flag is set, the rescue time-saving determination flag is cleared and the time-saving B flag, indicating time-saving state B, is set (steps 131SGS141 and 131SGS142). Furthermore, the time-saving count counter is set to 1100, which corresponds to time-saving state B (rescue time-saving), and a time-saving state B designation command is set for transmission (steps 131SGS143 and 131SGS144). The time-saving state B designation command that has been set for transmission is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 5).

In addition, the right-hit lamp 131SG132 starts to light up, and the transmission of the right-hit LED lighting notification command is set up (steps 131SGS145 and 131SGS146). The right-hit LED lighting notification command that has been set up for transmission is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see Figure 5).

Then, the pattern determination period timer is set to a value corresponding to the pattern determination period of 0.5 seconds, and a pattern determination command is set to be sent, and the process proceeds to step 131SGS149 (step 131SGS147, step 131SGS148). The pattern determination command set to be sent is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see Figure 5).

In step 131SGS149, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a game state designation command according to the game state, and ends the special symbol stop processing. The game state designation command that has been set for transmission is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control processing (see Figure 5).

If the symbol determination period timer is running in step 131SGS131, the CPU 103 decrements the symbol determination period timer by 1 (step 131SGS150) and determines whether the symbol determination period timer has timed out (step 131SGS151). If the symbol determination period timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 terminates the special symbol stop processing. If the symbol determination period timer has timed out, the CPU 103 determines whether the derived stopped symbol is a losing symbol (step 131SGS152). If the derived stopped symbol is a losing symbol, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing and terminates the special symbol stop processing (step 131SGS153). If the derived stopped symbol is a jackpot symbol, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-jackpot release processing and terminates the special symbol stop processing (step 131SGS154).

[state transition]
Next, the state transitions in this embodiment will be described. Figures 11-22 are state transition diagrams for explaining the state transitions in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 11-22, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), if a jackpot B occurs and the game ball passes through the high probability area (V switch 131SG023B1), the game is controlled to the high probability state, and if a jackpot A occurs, the game is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot (low probability/high base state)). Although not shown, even if a jackpot B occurs and the game ball does not pass through the high probability area (V switch 131SG023B1), the game is also controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Furthermore, even if the result is a miss, if the rescue time-saving mode is activated (if the number of variable displays reaches 900 without the next jackpot occurring after the RAM clear process or the end of the special probability mode, or if the number of variable displays reaches 790 without the next jackpot occurring after the end of 110 variable displays in time-saving mode A), the game will be controlled to time-saving mode B (a time-saving mode via rescue time-saving mode (low probability/high base mode)).

Also, as shown in Figure 11-22, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs in the probability variable state (high probability/high base state) and the gaming ball passes through the probability variable area, the game will be controlled back to the probability variable state. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the gaming ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the game will be controlled to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot).

Also, as shown in Figure 11-22, in time-saving state A (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the gaming ball passes through the probability variable area, the state will be controlled to the probability variable state. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the gaming ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the state will be controlled back to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Also, in time-saving state A, if 110 variable displays end without a jackpot occurring, the state will be controlled to the normal state.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-22, in time-saving state B (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the gaming ball passes through the probability variable area, the game will be controlled to the probability variable state. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the gaming ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the game will be controlled back to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Also, in time-saving state B, if 1,100 variable displays end without a jackpot occurring, the game will be controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, even if a miss occurs, if the rescue time-saving state is entered (if the number of variable displays reaches 900 without the next jackpot occurring after the RAM clear process or the end of the probability variable state, or if the number of variable displays reaches 790 without the next jackpot occurring after the end of 110 variable displays in time-saving state A), the game will be controlled to time-saving state B (time-saving state via rescue time-saving).

In this embodiment, if a jackpot occurs during time-saving state B and the game ball does not enter the variable probability area, the game will automatically transition to time-saving state A, but this control method is not limited to this. For example, the current remaining number of time-saving times can be compared with the number of time-saving times (110 in this embodiment) that would occur if the game ball did not enter the variable probability area (V switch 131SG023B1), and if the current remaining number of time-saving times is greater, the game will continue in time-saving state B.

In this embodiment, although it is possible to execute a variable display of the first special symbol during the time-saving state or the probability variable state, this would be a disadvantageous gameplay for the player, so the state transitions are explained without assuming that the variable display of the first special symbol will be executed during the time-saving state or the probability variable state.

[Performance control process processing/preview notice]
As shown in Figures 11-23 and 11-24, in the advance notice setting process of this embodiment, the display mode of the active display and the reserved display is determined by setting the reserved display flag to either 0 or 2 at the timing when a start winning occurs (the timing when the start winning entry designation command, pattern designation command, variable category command, and reserved memory number notification command are newly stored as reserved memory in the start winning entry reception command buffer shown in Figure 11-15 (B)), and the display mode of these active display and reserved display can suggest the rate at which the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state.

For example, as shown in Figure 11-24, if the variable display result indicated by the pattern designation command is "miss" and the variable category indicated by the variable category command is "non-reach," it is determined with a 95% probability that the pre-reading preview will not be executed (the value of the hold display flag is set to "0"), it is determined with a 5% probability that the pre-reading preview will be executed using presentation pattern α (the value of the hold display flag is set to "1"), and it is determined with a 0% probability that the pre-reading preview will be executed using presentation pattern β (the value of the hold display flag is set to "2").

Also, if the variable display result indicated by the pattern designation command is "miss" and the variable category indicated by the variable category command is "other (normal reach)", it is determined with a 90% probability that the pre-reading preview will not be executed (the value of the pending display flag is set to "0"), it is determined with a 10% probability that the pre-reading preview will be executed in presentation pattern α (the value of the pending display flag is set to "1"), and it is determined with a 0% probability that the pre-reading preview will be executed in presentation pattern β (the value of the pending display flag is set to "2").

Furthermore, if the variable display result indicated by the pattern designation command is "miss" and the variable category indicated by the variable category command is "super reach," the predictive preview will not be executed (the value of the pending display flag will be set to "0") 70% of the time, the predictive preview will be executed in presentation pattern α (the value of the pending display flag will be set to "1") 20% of the time, and the predictive preview will be executed in presentation pattern β (the value of the pending display flag will be set to "2") 10% of the time.

Furthermore, if the variable display result indicated by the symbol designation command is "jackpot," it is determined that the pre-reading preview will not be executed (the value of the pending display flag is set to "0") with a probability of 5%, that the pre-reading preview will be executed using presentation pattern α (the value of the pending display flag is set to "1") with a probability of 30%, and that the pre-reading preview will be executed using presentation pattern β (the value of the pending display flag is set to "2") with a probability of 65%.

Furthermore, after the execution of the advance notice setting process, the following processes are executed: pending display/active display update process (131SGS162), remaining number of times rescue time reduction etc. has been reached display update process (step 131SGS163), and rescue time reduction arrival notification effect execution process (step 131SGS164). The pending display/active display update process executes processes such as starting to display the pending display or active display in a display mode corresponding to the value of the pending display flag, erasing the active display from the active display area 131SG005F at the end of the variable display, and hiding or starting to display the pending display or active display depending on the progress of the effect during the variable display. The remaining number of times rescue time reduction has been reached display update process executes processes such as updating the value of the remaining number of times rescue time reduction has been reached display 131SG005Z (see Figure 11-1) displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of each variable display, and starting to hide or display the remaining number of times rescue time reduction has been reached display 131SG005Z depending on the progress of the effect during the variable display. The rescue time-saving arrival notification display execution process executes processing to execute a rescue time-saving arrival notification display that notifies players that they have been controlled to time-saving state B, starting from the timing at which the variable display ends when the number of variable displays reaches 900.

[Variable display start setting process]
FIG. 11-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11. In this process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is set (step 131SGS601). If the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the various command data stored in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A in association with buffer number "1-1" is copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B (step 131SGS602). The first special symbol reserved memory (various command data stored in association with buffer numbers "1-1" through "1-4") in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is shifted up one position at a time (step 131SGS603). At this time, the various command data stored in buffer number "1-1" is erased because there is no destination to shift it to.

Furthermore, in step 131SGS601, if the first variable display start command reception flag is not on, it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is set (step 131SGS604). If the second variable display start command reception flag is set, the various command data stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the start winning time reception command buffer 131SG194A is copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B (131SGS605). Furthermore, the second special symbol reserved memory (various command data stored in association with buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") in the start winning time reception command buffer 131SG194A is shifted up one position at a time (step 131SGS606). At this time, the various command data stored in buffer number "2-1" is erased because there is no destination to shift it to.

If the second special chart variable display start command reception flag is not on, the variable display start setting process ends.

After executing step 131SGS603 or step 131SGS6060, the performance control CPU 120 reads a variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 131SGS607). Furthermore, it determines the stopping pattern of the decorative symbols based on the read variation pattern designation command and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (step 131SGS608).

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-26, if the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable pattern is a non-reach (non-reach miss), the stopped symbols are determined to be a "non-reach" combination such as "124" or "578" (non-reach mode, non-reach miss mode) with a 100% probability. Also, if the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable pattern is a normal reach (normal reach miss), the stopped symbols are determined to be an even number "reach" combination such as "242" or "676" (even number reach mode, even number reach miss mode) with a 95% probability, and to be an odd number "reach" combination other than 7 such as "131" or "545" (odd number reach mode, odd number reach miss mode) with a 5% probability.

Also, if the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable pattern is a super reach (super reach miss), the stopping symbol is determined to be an even number "reach" combination such as "242" or "676" (even number reach mode, even number reach miss mode) with an 80% probability, an odd number other than 7 "reach" combination such as "131" or "545" (odd number reach mode, odd number reach miss mode) with a 19% probability, and a 7 symbol "reach" combination such as "767" or "787" (7 reach mode, 7 reach miss mode) with a 1% probability.

If the variable display result is a "jackpot," the stopped symbols are determined to be a "reach" combination of even numbers such as "222" or "666" (even number reach mode, even number reach jackpot mode) with a 20% probability, a "reach" combination of odd numbers other than 7 such as "111" or "555" (odd number reach mode, odd number reach jackpot mode) with a 50% probability, and a "reach" combination of the 7 symbols "777" ("7" reach mode, "7" reach jackpot mode) with a 30% probability.

In other words, the likelihood of a jackpot is highest when the decorative symbol is a "7" symbol, followed by a reach with an odd symbol other than a "7", a reach with an even symbol, and a non-reach, in that order (expected jackpot likelihood based on decorative symbol: reach with a "7" symbol > reach with an odd symbol other than a "7" > reach with an even symbol > non-reach). For this reason, in this embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the decorative symbol will be in a reach state and which symbol will be in a reach state.

In this embodiment, the expected probability of a jackpot differs depending on whether the decorative symbols are an even-numbered combination or an odd-numbered combination, but the present invention is not limited to this. The expected probability of a jackpot may be the same regardless of the decorative symbol combination that results in a jackpot, or the expected probability of a jackpot when a jackpot is reached may differ depending on the size of the numbers indicated by the decorative symbols.

Returning to Figure 11-25, after determining the decorative symbol to be stopped, the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display preview effect determination process (step 131SGS609) to determine whether or not to execute a variable display preview effect that suggests the variable display result may be a jackpot during the variable display.

Then, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table (presentation control pattern) according to the variable pattern, game status, variable display result, and the result of the variable display preview presentation determination process (step 131SGS610), and starts the process timer (step 131SGS611).

Each process table has a performance control pattern set. Specifically, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) in accordance with the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (131SGS612). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the on/off of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display so that decorative patterns are variably displayed according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one with the variation pattern specification command, but the performance control CPU 120 may also select a variation pattern to use from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern specification command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern specification command (131SGS613). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (131SGS614). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display status of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to VRAM. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (S172) (131SGS615).

In addition, during the variable display performance processing, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each set to -1. Then, control of the performance device is executed according to the value of the process timer, the variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped according to the value of the variable display time timer, and the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value according to the special pattern hit waiting processing (S173).

[About the effects during variable display]
When the CPU 120 for effect control receives a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the variable display start waiting process of step S170, it determines the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not to execute a reach effect, the form, the execution start timing, etc. based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command and the variable display results such as special patterns and decorative patterns specified by the variable display result specification command in the subsequent variable display start setting process of step S171, sets an effect control pattern that reflects the determined results, etc., and controls the variable display of the decorative pattern, reach effects, etc. based on the set effect control pattern.

[About the performance control pattern]
As shown in Figures 11-27 and 11-28, the performance control patterns are set for each of the variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, PA2-1 to PA2-19, and PB1-1 to PB1-18.

Non-reach patterns 1 to 4 are set as presentation control patterns corresponding to variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, in which the decorative symbols do not reach a reach state and result in a non-reach miss. Variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 are variation patterns designated in the normal state, PA1-3 is a variation pattern selected in time-saving state A or probability variable state, and PA1-4 is a variation pattern selected in time-saving state B. In the corresponding non-reach patterns 1 to 4, the time until the variable display of the decorative symbols ends is set to differ depending on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern.

The effect control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-1 is a pattern in which a normal reach effect ("Normal" in the diagram) is executed, in which the decorative symbol becomes a reach state, and then the reach is lost. Variation pattern PA2-1 is a variation pattern specified in the normal state, time-saving state A, and probability variable state.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-2 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance ("low base weak A" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-3 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance ("low base weak B" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a reach miss.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-4 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a low base strong reach A reach performance ("low base strong A" in the diagram), followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-5 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, followed by a low base strong reach A reach performance, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-6 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a reach miss.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-7 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a low base strong reach B reach performance ("low base strong B" in the diagram), followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-8 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, followed by a low base strong reach B reach performance, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-9 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strong reach B reach performance is executed, followed by a reach miss.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-10 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a low base strong reach C reach performance, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-11 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, followed by a low base strong reach C reach performance, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-12 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strong reach C reach performance is executed, followed by a reach miss.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-13 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a low base strongest super reach reach performance ("low base strongest" in the diagram), followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-14 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, followed by a low base strongest super reach reach performance, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-15 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strongest super reach reach performance is executed, followed by a reach miss.

Fluctuation patterns PA2-2 to PA2-15 are all fluctuation patterns specified in normal conditions.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-16 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a high base reach A reach performance ("High Base A" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-17 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a high base reach B reach performance ("High Base B" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-18 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a high base reach C reach performance ("High Base C" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-19 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a high base reach D reach performance ("High Base D" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a reach miss.

Patterns PA2-16 to PA2-19 are all selected in time-saving mode A and special mode.

The effect control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-1 is set to execute a normal reach effect followed by a jackpot.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-2 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strong reach A reach effect, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-3 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base weak super reach B reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strong reach A reach effect, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-4 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base strong reach A reach effect is executed, followed by a jackpot.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-5 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strong reach B reach effect, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-6 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base weak super reach B reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strong reach B reach effect, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-7 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base strong reach B reach effect is executed, followed by a jackpot.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-8 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strong reach C reach effect, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-9 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base weak super reach B reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strong reach C reach effect, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-10 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base strong reach C reach effect is executed, followed by a jackpot.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-11 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strongest super reach reach effect, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-12 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base weak super reach B reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strongest super reach reach effect, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-13 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base strongest super reach reach effect is executed, followed by a jackpot.

Fluctuation patterns PB1-1 to PB1-13 are all fluctuation patterns selected in normal conditions.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-14 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a high base reach A reach effect is executed, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-15 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a high base reach B reach effect is executed, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-16 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a high base reach C reach effect is executed, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-17 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a high base reach D reach effect is executed, followed by a jackpot.

Variation patterns PB1-14 to PB1-17 are all selected in time-saving mode A and special mode.

The effect control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-18 is a pattern that results in a jackpot without executing the reach effect of normal reach or super reach. Variation pattern PB1-18 is the variation pattern selected in time-saving state B.

[About the flow of the effects during variable display]
11-29 is a diagram showing the flow of the effect during variable display in the normal state. The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specifying command is PA1-1 or PA1-2, controls so that the decorative pattern does not become a reach state but becomes a non-reach miss.

The presentation control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-1 or PB1-1, executes a normal reach presentation in which the decorative symbols are in a reach state, and then controls the presentation so that the reach is missed if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-1, and so that a jackpot is reached if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-1.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-2, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach A reach effect, and then notifies the user of a miss as the result of the low base weak super reach A reach effect, causing the reach to be a miss.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-3, it executes a normal reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach B reach effect, and then notifies the user of a miss as the result of the low base weak super reach B reach effect, causing the reach to be a miss.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-4 or PB1-2, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach A reach effect, and then executes a low base strong super reach A reach effect. After that, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-4, a miss is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach A reach effect, and control is performed so that the reach is a miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-2, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach A reach effect, and control is performed so that a jackpot is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-5 or PB1-3, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach B reach effect, and then executes a low base strong super reach A reach effect. After that, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-5, a miss is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach A reach effect, and control is performed so that the reach is a miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-3, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach A reach effect, and control is performed so that a jackpot is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-6 or PB1-4, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base strong super reach A reach effect, and then controls the low base strong super reach A reach effect to result in a miss if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-6, and controls the low base strong super reach A reach effect to result in a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-4, it controls the low base strong super reach A reach effect to result in a jackpot if a jackpot is announced, and a jackpot is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-7 or PB1-5, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach A reach effect, and then executes a low base strong super reach B reach effect. After that, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-7, a miss is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach B reach effect, and control is performed so that the reach is a miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-5, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach B reach effect, and control is performed so that a jackpot is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-8 or PB1-6, it executes a normal reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach B reach effect, and then executes a low base strong super reach B reach effect. After that, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-8, a miss is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach B reach effect, and control is performed so that the reach is a miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-6, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach B reach effect, and control is performed so that a jackpot is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-9 or PB1-7, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base strong super reach B reach effect. If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-9, the low base strong super reach B reach effect is controlled to announce a miss as the effect result, resulting in a reach miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-7, the low base strong super reach B reach effect is controlled to announce a jackpot as the effect result, resulting in a jackpot.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-10 or PB1-8, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach A reach effect, and then executes a low base strong super reach C reach effect. After that, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-10, a miss is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach C reach effect, and control is performed so that the reach is a miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-8, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach C reach effect, and control is performed so that a jackpot is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-11 or PB1-9, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach B reach effect, and then executes a low base strong super reach C reach effect. After that, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-11, a miss is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach C reach effect, and control is performed so that the reach is a miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-9, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach C reach effect, and control is performed so that a jackpot is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-12 or PB1-10, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base strong super reach C reach effect. If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-12, the effect results in a miss for the low base strong super reach C reach effect, and the effect is controlled so that the reach is a miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-10, the effect results in a jackpot for the low base strong super reach C reach effect, and the effect is controlled so that a jackpot is announced.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-13 or PB1-11, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach A reach effect, and then executes a low base strongest super reach reach effect. Then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-13, a miss is announced as the result of the low base strongest super reach reach effect, and control is performed so that the reach is a miss; and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-11, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strongest super reach reach effect, and control is performed so that a jackpot is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-14 or PB1-12, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach B reach effect, and then executes a low base strongest super reach reach effect. Then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-14, a miss is announced as the result of the low base strongest super reach reach effect, and control is performed so that the reach is a miss; and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-12, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strongest super reach reach effect, and control is performed so that a jackpot occurs.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-15 or PB1-13, it executes a normal reach reach effect, and then executes a low base strongest super reach reach effect. If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-15, the effect of the low base strongest super reach reach effect is controlled so that a miss is announced and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-13, the effect of the low base strongest super reach reach effect is controlled so that a jackpot is announced and the jackpot is achieved.

In this way, under normal conditions, a jackpot is announced as the result of the reach performance of low base weak super reach A and B, and is not controlled to a jackpot. Only the reach performance of low base strong super reach A-C, which is executed via the reach performance of low base weak super reach A and B, low base strongest reach, and low base strong super reach A-C, which is executed without going through the reach performance of low base weak super reach A and B, and low base strongest super reach, will announce a jackpot as the result of the performance and be controlled to a jackpot.

Figure 11-30 shows the flow of effects during variable display in time-saving state A and probability variable state. The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in time-saving state A and probability variable state, and when the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command is PA1-3, it controls the decorative pattern so that it does not become a reach state but becomes a non-reach miss.

The presentation control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-1 or PB1-1, executes a normal reach reach presentation, and then controls the presentation so that the reach is missed if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-1, and controls the presentation so that the reach is missed if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-1.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-16 or PB1-14, it executes a normal reach reach effect, and then executes a high base super reach A reach effect. Then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-16, it controls so that a miss is announced as the result of the high base super reach A reach effect, resulting in a reach miss; and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-14, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the result of the high base super reach A reach effect, resulting in a jackpot.

The presentation control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-17 or PB1-15, it executes a normal reach reach presentation, then executes a high base super reach B reach presentation. If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-17, the high base super reach B reach presentation results in a miss, and the CPU 120 controls the high base super reach B reach presentation to result in a reach miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-15, the high base super reach B reach presentation results in a jackpot, and the CPU 120 controls the high base super reach B reach presentation to result in a jackpot.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-18 or PB1-16, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a high base super reach C reach effect, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-18, it controls so that a miss is announced as the result of the high base super reach C reach effect, resulting in a reach miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-16, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the result of the high base super reach C reach effect, resulting in a jackpot.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-19 or PB1-17, it executes a normal reach reach effect, and then executes a high base super reach D reach effect. If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-19, the high base super reach D reach effect is controlled to announce a miss and result in a reach miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-17, the high base super reach D reach effect is controlled to announce a jackpot and result in a jackpot.

In this way, in the time-saving mode A and the probability variable mode, the result of a jackpot or miss is announced in the normal presentation or in the reach presentation of high-base super reaches A to D, which are controlled after the normal presentation, and then the presentation is controlled to a jackpot or miss; no further reach presentation is executed from the high-base super reaches A to D, which are controlled after the normal presentation.

Figure 11-31 shows the flow of effects during variable display in time-saving state B. The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in time-saving state B, and when the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command is PA1-4, it controls the decorative pattern so that it does not become a reach state but becomes a non-reach miss.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in time-saving state B, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-18, it controls the decorative symbols so that they do not become ready to win and result in a jackpot.

In this way, in time-saving state B, the game is controlled so that misses and jackpots always result in a non-reach state.

[About the Super Reach Effects]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute reach effects for super reaches during variable display. The reach effects for super reaches include reach effects for low base weak super reaches A and B, low base strong super reaches A to C, and low base strongest super reaches that are executed in the normal state as described above, as well as reach effects for high base super reaches A to D that are executed in the time-saving state A and the probability variable state. In the following, the reach effects of normal reaches and super reaches may be simply referred to as normal reach effects and super reach effects, respectively; the reach effects of low base weak super reach A, low base weak super reach B, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, and low base strongest super reach may be simply referred to as low base weak reach A effects, low base weak reach B effects, low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, low base strong reach C effects, and low base strongest reach effects, respectively; and the reach effects of high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, and high base super reach D may be simply referred to as high base reach A effects, high base reach B effects, high base reach C effects, and high base reach effects, respectively.

The Super Reach effect is an effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, and also announces the final result of whether or not a jackpot will occur (for Low Base Weak Super Reach A and B, the result will be whether the jackpot will develop into Low Base Strong Super Reach A-C or Low Base Strongest Super Reach, or whether it will be a miss).

In addition, each type of Super Reach effect has a title assigned to it, and each Super Reach effect is made up of a title display part where the title of the Super Reach effect is displayed, and an introductory part that follows the title display part and ends when the result of the effect is announced.

[Variations of Low Base Weak Reach A and B Effects]
In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern for executing the low base weak reach A effect or the low base weak reach B effect does not include a fluctuation pattern in which a jackpot occurs without developing into another super reach effect after the execution of the low base weak reach A effect or the low base weak reach B effect, but it may also be a fluctuation pattern PB1-JA in which a jackpot occurs without developing into another super reach effect after the execution of the low base weak reach A effect, or a fluctuation pattern PB1-JB in which a jackpot occurs without developing into another super reach effect after the execution of the low base weak reach B effect.

In this configuration, the presentation control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-JA, it executes a normal reach presentation, then executes a low base weak reach A presentation, and controls so that a jackpot is announced as the presentation result of the low base weak reach A presentation, resulting in a jackpot; and when it receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-JB, it executes a normal reach presentation, then executes a low base weak reach B presentation, and controls so that a jackpot is announced as the presentation result of the low base weak reach B presentation, resulting in a jackpot. Therefore, in this configuration, in the introductory part of the low base weak reach A effect, it is either announced whether or not the effect will result in a jackpot, or it will develop into another super reach effect, and in the introductory part of the low base weak reach B effect, it is either announced whether or not the effect will result in a jackpot, or it will develop into another super reach effect.

Furthermore, the configuration may not include a variation pattern that develops into another super reach effect after the execution of the low base weak reach A or B effect. In such a configuration, during the introductory part of the low base weak reach A or B effect, it will be announced whether or not the effect will result in a jackpot.

Furthermore, in the following examples, a configuration may be applied that includes a variation pattern that results in a jackpot after the execution of a low base weak reach A or B effect without developing into another super reach effect.In this case, the configuration determines the probability of a jackpot for the low base strong reach A-C effects and the low base strongest reach effect, so that the jackpot expectation for the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach A effect is higher than the jackpot expectation for the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach A effect.

[About the low base weak reach A effect]
Figure 11-32 is a diagram showing the progression of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base weak reach A effect is executed, and Figure 11-33 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach A effect.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state and, when a variation pattern corresponding to a low-base weak super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, it starts varying the relatively large decorative symbols (decorative symbols (large)). As shown in FIG. 11-32 (a1), at a predetermined timing, the decorative symbols (large) of the type specified by the variable display result specification command stop in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the image display device 5, resulting in a normal reach effect. Thereafter, it executes the operation prompt effect A described below. As shown in FIG. 11-32 (a2), it executes a white flash effect in which the entire display area is displayed in white while maintaining the pending and active displays in the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F, and then starts the title display part of the low-base weak reach A effect.

As shown in Figures 11-32 (a1) to (a3), the background (daytime sky background) displayed during the changing of the decorative pattern (large) in the normal state before the white flash performance changes to the background (corridor background) of the low-base weak reach A performance after the white flash performance, and the decorative pattern (large) displayed in reach mode before the white flash performance changes to reach mode of a decorative pattern (small) that is smaller than the decorative pattern (large) after the white flash performance.

As shown in Figure 11-33, the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect includes a title start period from when part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" of the low base weak reach A effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their regular position, a title display period during which the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" are displayed in their regular position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" that were displayed in their regular position disappear and switch to the introductory part.

When the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect, it first starts displaying the title start period. During the title start period of the low base weak reach A effect, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a3) to (a4), part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" appears from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left-hand small decorative pattern of the reach mode, and then the entire title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" moves toward its fixed position and stops at that position. When the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" are stopped at their fixed position, part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" is displayed overlapping with both the left-hand small decorative patterns of the reach mode.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the illustration), but during the title start period of the low base weak reach A performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any of the numbers "1" to "9," part of the title text "Catch the Bakuchu!" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the reach mode, and when the title text "Catch the Bakuchu!" is stationary in its fixed position, part of the title text "Catch the Bakuchu!" will be displayed overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low-base weak reach A effect, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a4) to (a5), the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears behind the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" displayed in a fixed position, and a subtitle "Try and catch him if you can!", corresponding to the scene in which the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears, is displayed below the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!", and the audio of the subtitled line is output from speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, as shown in Figure 11-33, no audio is output reading the title. Also, as shown in Figure 11-33, the title display period of the low-base weak reach A effect runs for a longer period of time than the title start period of the low-base weak reach A effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the effect control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low base weak reach A effect, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a5) to (a6), the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" displayed in their fixed position are moved from their fixed position to the right of the display area until all of the title characters disappear. As shown in Figure 11-33, the title end period of the low base weak reach A effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base weak reach A effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-33, the expectation indication display, described below, is not displayed during the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect.

After the title end period ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A effect. As shown in Figures 11-32 (a6) to (a7), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A effect is the same as the background of the title display part (the background of the hallway), the animated scene that started in the title display part (the scene featuring the enemy character "Bakuchu") also continues throughout the introductory part, the line displayed in the title display part "Try and catch him if you can!" also continues to be displayed, and the audio of the line output from speakers 8L and 8R also continues to be output. Then, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a7) to (a8), when the audio output of the line displayed in the title display part "Try and catch him if you can!" ends, the scene switches to the next animated scene in the introductory part (a scene in which the ally character "Yume Yume" chases the enemy character "Bakuchu").

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern that develops from a low base weak super reach A to one of low base strong super reaches A-C or a low base strongest super reach, the effect control CPU 120 executes a drop effect in which the movable body 32 falls at the end of the introductory part, and then develops the effect into a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, a low base strong reach C effect, or a low base strongest reach effect. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern that results in a reach miss after a low base weak super reach A, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the user that the ally character "Yume Yume" is unable to capture the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part, and the low base weak reach A effect does not result in a jackpot. Then, the image display device 5 displays a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

Furthermore, in a configuration including a variation pattern in which a jackpot is reached after the execution of a low base weak reach A effect without progressing to another super reach effect, when a variation pattern in which a jackpot is reached after the execution of a low base weak reach A effect after a low base weak super reach A is specified by a variation pattern specification command, without progressing to another super reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 will notify the player that the ally character "Yume Yume" has captured the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part and that the low base weak reach A effect has resulted in a jackpot (the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state), and then cause the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command.

[About the low base weak reach B effect]
Figure 11-34 is a diagram showing the progression of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base weak reach B effect is executed, and Figure 11-35 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach B effect.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state and specifies a variable pattern corresponding to a low-base weak super reach B using the variable pattern specification command, it starts varying the decorative symbols (large) and, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (b1), executes a normal reach effect in which the decorative symbols (large) of the type specified by the variable display result specification command stop in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing, resulting in a reach state. It then executes operation prompt effect A, described below, and, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (b2), executes a white flash effect in which the entire display area is displayed in white while maintaining the pending and active displays in the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F, and then starts the title display part of the low-base weak reach B effect.

As shown in Figures 11-34 (b1) to (b3), the background (daytime sky background) displayed during the change of the decorative symbol (large) in the normal state before the white flash effect changes to the background of the low-base weak reach B effect after the white flash effect (a background in which the characters "Yume Yume" and "Boingo" face each other on either side of a hockey table), and the decorative symbol (large) displayed in reach mode before the white flash effect changes to the reach mode of a decorative symbol (small) that is smaller than the decorative symbol (large) after the white flash effect.

As shown in Figure 11-35, the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect includes a title start period from when part of the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" of the low base weak reach B effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed in its regular position, a title display period during which the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is displayed in its regular position, and a title end period from when the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" that was displayed in its regular position disappears and switches to the introductory part.

When the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect, it first starts displaying the title start period. During the title start period of the low base weak reach B effect, as shown in Figures 11-34 (b3) to (b4), part of the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" appears from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left small decorative pattern of the left and right small decorative patterns of the reach state, and then the entire title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is moved toward its home position and stopped there. When the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is stopped in its home position, part of the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is displayed overlapping with both the left and right small decorative patterns of the reach state.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the illustration), but during the title start period of the low base weak reach B performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any of the numbers "1" to "9," part of the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the reach mode, and when the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is stationary in its fixed position, part of the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" will be displayed overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low base weak reach B effect, as shown in Figures 11-34 (b4) to (b5), a subtitle "Let's have a hockey match! I won't lose!", corresponding to a scene in which the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Boingo" face off on either side, is displayed below the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown," and the audio of the subtitled line is output from speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, as shown in Figure 11-35, no audio is output reading the title. Also, as shown in Figure 11-35, the title display period of the low base weak reach B effect runs for a longer time than the title start period of the low base weak reach B effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the effect control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low base weak reach B effect, as shown in (b5) to (b6), the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown," which are displayed in their fixed position, are moved from their fixed position to the right side of the display area until all of the title characters disappear. As shown in Figure 11-35, the title end period of the low base weak reach B effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base weak reach B effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-35, the expectation indication display, described below, is not displayed during the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect.

After the title end period ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low base weak reach B performance. As shown in Figures 11-34 (b6) to (b7), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low base weak reach B performance is the same as the background of the title display part (the background showing the characters "Yume Yume" and "Boingo" facing each other on either side of a hockey table), the video scene that started in the title display part (the scene showing the friendly character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Boingo" facing each other on either side) also continues throughout the introductory part, the line that was displayed in the title display part "Let's play hockey! I won't lose!" also continues to be displayed, and the audio of the line output from speakers 8L and 8R also continues to be output. Then, as shown in Figure 11-34 (b7) to (b8), when the audio output of the line displayed in the title display part, "Let's play hockey! I won't lose!", ends, the video switches to the next scene in the introductory part (a scene in which the teammate character "Yume Yume" hits the puck back).

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern that develops from a low base weak super reach B to one of low base strong super reaches A-C or a low base strongest super reach, the effect control CPU 120 executes a drop effect in which the movable body 32 falls at the end of the introductory part, and then develops the effect into a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, a low base strong reach C effect, or a low base strongest reach effect. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern that results in a reach miss after a low base weak super reach B, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the user that the ally character "Yume Yume" is unable to win against the enemy character "Boingo" at the end of the introductory part, and the low base weak reach B effect does not result in a jackpot, and then displays on the image display device 5 a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

In a configuration including a variation pattern in which a jackpot is reached without progressing to other super reach effects after the execution of a low base weak reach B effect, when a variation pattern in which a jackpot is reached without progressing to other super reach effects is specified by a variation pattern specification command after the execution of a low base weak reach B effect, the effect control CPU 120 will notify the player that the ally character "Yume Yume" wins the game against the enemy character "Boingo" at the end of the introductory part and that a jackpot has been reached as a result of the low base weak reach B effect (the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state), and then cause the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command.

[About the low base strong reach A effect]
Figure 11-36 is a diagram showing the progression of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base strong reach A effect is executed, and Figure 11-37 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A effect.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state and a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach A is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops from a normal reach via a low base weak super reach A or a low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach specification, it executes a low base weak reach A specification or a low base weak reach B specification, and develops it into a low base strong reach A specification. Also, when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach A is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops directly from a normal reach, after executing the normal reach specification, it executes a selection specification described below, and develops it into a low base strong reach A specification.

When a low-base weak reach A effect or a low-base weak reach B effect develops, the effect control CPU 120 executes a drop effect in which the movable body 32 drops at the end of the low-base weak reach A effect or the low-base weak reach B effect, and then starts the title display part of the low-base strong reach A effect. In the drop effect, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c1), while maintaining the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach state, and the hold and active displays in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the background at the end of the low-base weak reach A effect or the low-base weak reach B effect switches to a background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center), and then drops the movable body 32, and then raises the movable body 32 to its initial position.

In addition, when a direct progression from a normal reach occurs, the effect control CPU 120 executes the selection effect described below, as shown in Figure 11-36 (c1'), and then starts the title display part of the low-base strong reach A effect. Details of the selection effect will be described later, but when the selection effect begins, the hold and active displays in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in Figure 11-37, the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect includes a prologue display period before the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu together!" of the low base strong reach A effect are displayed, a title start period from when part of the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu together!" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their regular position, a title display period during which the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu together!" are displayed in their regular position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu together!" that were displayed in their regular position disappear and switch to the introductory part.

When the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect, it first starts displaying the prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low base strong reach A effect, which transitions from the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode, and the pending and active displays in the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F are maintained, and the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the pending and active displays, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

In addition, during the prologue display period of the low base strong reach A effect transitioned from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect (here, the result image of the low base strong reach A effect) and the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode are maintained, and the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection effect, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

After the prologue display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title start period.

As shown in Figures 11-36 (c1) to (c3), during the prologue display period following the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with patterns spreading radially from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" switches to the background for the low-base strong reach A effect (a background in which the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway) after the prologue display period ends, and the pending and active displays that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends. Note that the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode remains even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, during the prologue display period following the selection effect, the selection result image displayed before the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" filled the entire display area will switch to the background of the low-base strong reach A effect (the background displaying ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" in the hallway) after the prologue display period ends. The display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach state will remain even after the prologue display period ends, and the pending and active displays that were hidden during the selection effect will remain hidden.

During the title start period of the low-base strong reach A effect, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c3) to (c4), part of the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chuu!" appears from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left-hand small decorative symbol (small) of the reach mode, and then the entire title text "Two people, catch the explosive chuu!" moves toward its fixed position and stops in that position. When the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chuu!" is stopped in its fixed position, part of the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chuu!" is displayed overlapping with both the left-hand small decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the illustration), but during the title start period of the low base strong reach A performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any of the numbers "1" to "9," part of the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chuu!" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the reach mode, and when the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chuu!" is stationary in its fixed position, part of the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chuu!" will be displayed overlapping with both of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low-base-strong reach A effect, first, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c4), the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!" are displayed in a fixed position with the expectation indicator hidden, and this state is maintained for a predetermined time. During this time, as shown in FIG. 11-37, audio reading the title is output from speakers 8L and 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c5) to (c6), an expectation indicator is displayed below the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!" in a size smaller than the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!". As shown in FIG. 11-37, the title display period of the low-base-strong reach A effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low-base-strong reach A effect (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the effect control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low base strong reach A effect, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c6) to (c7), the title text "Catch the Bakuchu Together!" displayed in its fixed position is moved from its fixed position to the right of the display area until all of the title text disappears. The expectation indication display is also moved to the right of the display area along with the title text until all of it disappears. As shown in Figure 11-37, the title end period of the low base strong reach A effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach A effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-37, during the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect, dialogue subtitles are not displayed, as in the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and no dialogue audio is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

After the title end period ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low-base-strong reach A effect. As shown in Figures 11-36 (c3) to (c8), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low-base-strong reach A effect is the same as the background after the title start period in the title display part (the background where the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway), and the video scene that started in the title display part (the scene where the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway) also continues throughout the introductory part. Also, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c8) and 11-37, after the introductory part starts, the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears, and a subtitle corresponding to the scene in which the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears, "Try and catch me if you can!", is displayed, and the audio of the subtitled line is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach A performance, during the title display part, speakers 8L and 8R output audio reading the title, but subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part is not output from speakers 8L and 8R. After the introductory part begins, subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introductory part are displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introductory part is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot after a low base strong super reach A, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" will capture the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a jackpot as the result of the low base strong reach A effect (controlling the game to a jackpot game state), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot of the type designated by the variable display result designation command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a reach miss after a low base strong super reach A, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" will not capture the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a jackpot as the result of the low base strong reach A effect, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

[About the expected probability indication for low base strong reach A effects]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chocolate!" along with an expectation suggestion display in a smaller size than the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chocolate!" As shown in Figure 11-36 (c5), the expectation suggestion display displayed in the title display part is composed of five star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, and the expectation is suggested by the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state when the low base strong reach A performance is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5. Meanwhile, the expectation level indication displayed in the title display part also indicates the expectation level using multiple objects, so if the reserve and active displays and the expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects that make up the reserve and active displays may be mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance in which the expectation level indication display is displayed, the reserve and active displays are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication display, thereby preventing the objects that make up the reserve and active displays from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

In addition, since it is rare for a game ball to enter the second start entry port under normal circumstances, when the number of reserved balls in the first special chart is at its maximum (four) and is being variable displayed, up to five objects may be displayed as reserved and active displays, which matches the number of objects indicating maximum expectation in the expectation indication display. However, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the reserved and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation indication display. Therefore, even if the low base strong reach A performance is executed in a situation where a maximum of five objects are displayed as reserved and active displays, it is possible to prevent confusion between the objects displayed as reserved and active displays and the objects in the expectation indication display, and to prevent the expectation indication display from being mistakenly interpreted as indicating maximum expectation.

In the example shown in Figure 11-36, the pending display and active display are displayed during the prologue display period before the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the title display part. However, the pending display and active display may be hidden from the start of the prologue display period. Even in this configuration, it is possible to prevent the objects that make up the pending display and active display from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level suggestion display.

Furthermore, when a low base strong reach A effect is executed, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c2) to (c3), during the prologue display period, the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a background dedicated to the falling effect (a background with a pattern spreading radially from the center) and on a layer in front of the pending display and active display, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled, and the pending display and active display that were displayed before the display area was completely filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends, so that the pending display and active display can be hidden without any sense of incongruity. In the example shown in Figure 11-36, characters are displayed on a layer in front of the pending and active displays, and are enlarged until the entire display area is filled, thereby hiding the pending and active displays that were displayed before the display area was filled. However, when a low base strong reach A effect is executed, a monochrome display effect can be executed in which the entire display area is displayed in a monochrome color such as white, except for the decorative symbols (small) of the reach pattern, thereby erasing the pending and active displays that were displayed before the monochrome display effect. Even with this configuration, the pending and active displays can be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect, as shown in FIG. 11-36(c4), the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chocolate!" is displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation indication hidden, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-36(c5) to (c6), the expectation indication is displayed below the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chocolate!". At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-36(c5), in the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation indication are displayed in black, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-36(c6), the color of three of the five star-shaped objects that correspond to the low base strong reach A effect is changed from black to gold, thereby suggesting the expectation of a jackpot in the low base strong reach A effect.

When a low base weak reach A presentation or a low base weak reach B presentation develops into a low base strong reach A presentation, as shown in Figures 11-38 (x1) to (x2), if there are any remaining reserved numbers, the reserved and active displays are displayed during the prologue display period until the entire display area is filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume." In the subsequent title display part, the expectation indication display is hidden, and the title text "Catch the Bakuchu together!" is not displayed in its fixed position. Instead, as shown in Figures 11-38 (x3) to (x4), five star-shaped objects that constitute the expectation indication display are displayed simultaneously with the title text "Catch the Bakuchu together!". If the color of the star-shaped objects is then changed from black to gold, the objects that constitute the expectation indication display will be displayed immediately after the objects that constitute the reserved and active displays are hidden, which could result in confusion between the reserved and active displays and the expectation indication display. In contrast, in the example shown in Figure 11-36, after the expectation indication display is hidden during the prologue display period, the expectation indication display is hidden during the title display period, and the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chocolate!" is displayed in a fixed position and maintained for a predetermined time, and then the expectation indication display is displayed below the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chocolate!", thereby preventing the pending display and active display from being confused with the expectation indication display.

[About the low base strong reach B effect]
Figure 11-39 is a diagram showing the progression of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base strong reach B effect is executed, and Figure 11-40 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach B effect.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state and a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach B is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops from a normal reach via a low base weak super reach A or a low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach specification, it executes a low base weak reach A specification or a low base weak reach B specification, and develops it into a low base strong reach B specification. Also, when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach B is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops directly from a normal reach, after executing the normal reach specification, it executes a selection specification described below, and develops it into a low base strong reach B specification.

When a low-base weak reach A or B effect develops, the effect control CPU 120 executes a drop effect in which the movable body 32 drops at the end of the low-base weak reach A or B effect, and then starts the title display part of the low-base strong reach B effect. In the drop effect, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d1), the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach state, and the hold and active displays in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F are maintained. Then, the background at the end of the low-base weak reach A or B effect is switched to a background specifically for the drop effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center), and the movable body 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is raised to its initial position.

In addition, when a direct progression from a normal reach occurs, the effect control CPU 120 executes the selection effect described below, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d1'), and then starts the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect. Details of the selection effect will be described later, but when the selection effect begins, the hold and active displays in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in Figure 11-40, the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect includes a prologue display period before the title characters "Shinku Robo Battle" of the low base strong reach B effect are displayed, a title start period from when part of the title characters "Shinku Robo Battle" are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their regular position, a title display period during which the title characters "Shinku Robo Battle" are displayed in their regular position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Shinku Robo Battle" that were displayed in their regular position disappear and switch to the introductory part.

When the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, it first starts displaying the prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low base strong reach B effect, which transitions from the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode, and the pending and active displays in the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F are maintained, and the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the pending and active displays, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

In addition, during the prologue display period of the low base strong reach B effect transitioned from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect (here, the result image of the low base strong reach B effect) and the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode are maintained, and the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection effect, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

After the prologue display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title start period.

As shown in Figures 11-39 (d1) to (d3), during the prologue display period following the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" switches to a background dedicated to the title display of the low-base strong reach B effect (a background with ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and enemy character "Robo" displayed on the left and right) after the prologue display period ends, and the pending and active displays that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends. Note that the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, during the prologue display period transitioning from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" switches to a background dedicated to the title display of the low base strong reach B effect (a background where ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and enemy character "Robo" are displayed on the left and right) after the prologue display period ends. Furthermore, the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode remains even after the prologue display period ends, and the pending and active displays that were hidden during the selection effect remain hidden.

During the title start period of the low base strong reach B effect, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d3) to (d4), part of the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" appear from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left-hand small decorative pattern of the reach mode, and then the entire title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" move toward their fixed position and come to a standstill in that position. When the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" are stationary in their fixed position, part of the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" are displayed overlapping with both the left-hand small decorative patterns of the reach mode.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the illustration), but during the title start period of the low base strong reach B performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any of the numbers "1" to "9," part of the title letters "Gekishin Robo Battle" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the reach mode, and when the title letters "Gekishin Robo Battle" are stationary in their fixed position, part of the title letters "Gekishin Robo Battle" will be displayed overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low base strong reach B effect, first, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d4), the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" are displayed in a fixed position with the expectation level indication hidden, and this state is maintained for a predetermined time. During this time, as shown in FIG. 11-40, audio reading the title is output from speakers 8L and 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d5) to (d6), an expectation level indication is displayed below the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" in a size smaller than the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle." As shown in FIG. 11-40, the title display period of the low base strong reach B effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base strong reach B effect (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the effect control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low base strong reach B effect, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d6) to (d7), the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle," which are displayed in their fixed position, are moved from their fixed position to the right of the display area until all of the title characters disappear. The expectation indication display is also moved to the right of the display area along with the title characters until all of the title characters disappear. As shown in Figure 11-40, the title end period of the low base strong reach B effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach B effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-40, during the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, dialogue subtitles are not displayed, as in the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and no dialogue audio is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

After the title end period ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low base strong reach B effect. As shown in Figures 11-39 (d3) to (d8), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low base strong reach B effect is different from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part (a background in which the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are displayed on the left and right). At the start of the introductory part, the background dedicated to title display in the title display part switches to the background at the start of the introductory part of the low base strong reach B effect (a background in which the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" face off in town). The introductory part of the low base strong reach B effect starts with an animated scene in which the enemy character "Robo" faces forward in a position farther back from the player, and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" face off in a position nearer to the player with their backs to each other. At this time, both the enemy character "Robo," located at the back as seen from the player, and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana," located at the front as seen from the player, are displayed in positions that overlap with the regular positions where the title text "Shocking Robo Battle" was displayed during the title display period of the title display part. Also, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d8) and 11-40, after the start of the introductory part, a subtitle for the line "I won't lose!" is displayed, corresponding to the scene in which the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" face off against the enemy character "Robo," and the audio of the line displayed in the subtitles is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach B performance, the title is read aloud from speakers 8L and 8R during the title display part, but subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not output from speakers 8L and 8R. After the introductory part begins, subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introductory part are displayed, and the lines corresponding to the scene in the introductory part are output from speakers 8L and 8R.

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot after a low base strong super reach B, the presentation control CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" win the battle against the enemy character "Robo" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a jackpot as the presentation result of the low base strong reach B presentation (the game is controlled to a jackpot game state), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot of the type designated by the variable display result designation command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a reach miss after a low base strong super reach B, the presentation control CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" lose the battle against the enemy character "Robo" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a low base strong reach B presentation result that the jackpot is not, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

[About the expected probability indication for low base strong reach B effects]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle" together with an expectation suggestion display in a smaller size than the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle." The expectation suggestion display displayed in the title display part is composed of five star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d5), and the expectation suggestion display is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state when the low base strong reach B performance is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5. If the reserved and active displays and the expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects that make up the reserved and active displays may be mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance where the expectation level indication display is displayed, the reserved and active displays are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication display, thereby preventing the objects that make up the reserved and active displays from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, the pending and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. Therefore, even when the low base strong reach B effect is executed in a situation where a maximum of five objects are displayed as pending and active displays, it is possible to prevent confusion between the objects displayed as pending and active displays and the objects in the expectation level suggestion display, and to prevent the expectation level suggestion display from being mistakenly recognized as being at its maximum.

Furthermore, in the low base strong reach B performance, the pending display and active display may be hidden from the start of the prologue display period, and even in this configuration, it is possible to prevent the objects constituting the pending display and active display from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

Furthermore, when a low-base strong reach B effect is executed, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d2) to (d3), the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with a pattern radiating from the center) and on a layer in front of the pending and active displays during the prologue display period, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled. Furthermore, the pending and active displays that were displayed before the display area was filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends, allowing the pending and active displays to be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity. Furthermore, when a low-base strong reach B effect is executed, a monochrome display effect can be executed in which the entire display area is displayed in a monochrome color such as white, except for the decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode, thereby erasing the pending and active displays that were displayed before the monochrome display effect. Even with this configuration, the pending and active displays can be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low-base-strong reach B effect, as shown in FIG. 11-39(d4), the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation indicator hidden. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-39(d5)-(d6), the expectation indicator is displayed below the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle." At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-39(d5), in the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects constituting the expectation indicator are displayed in black. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-39(d6), the color of 3.5 of the five star-shaped objects corresponding to the low-base-strong reach B effect is changed from black to gold, thereby indicating the expectation of a jackpot in the low-base-strong reach B effect. This prevents confusion between the pending and active indicators and the expectation indicator.

[About the low base strong reach C effect]
As the low base strong reach C effect has many things in common with the aforementioned low base strong reach B effect, a diagram for the low base strong reach C effect will be omitted.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state and a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach C is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops from a normal reach via a low base weak super reach A or a low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach effect, it executes a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect, and develops it into a low base strong reach C effect. Also, when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach C is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops directly from a normal reach, after executing the normal reach effect, it executes a selection effect described below, and develops it into a low base strong reach C effect.

When a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect develops, the effect control CPU 120 executes a drop effect in which the movable body 32 drops at the end of the low base weak reach A effect or the low base weak reach B effect, and then starts the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect. During the drop effect, the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach state, and the hold and active displays in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are maintained. Then, the background at the end of the low base weak reach A effect or the low base weak reach B effect is switched to a background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center), and the movable body 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is raised to its initial position.

In addition, when a direct progression from a normal reach occurs, the effect control CPU 120 executes the selection effect described below, and then starts the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect. Details of the selection effect will be described later, but when the selection effect begins, the hold and active displays in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

The title display part of the low base strong reach C effect includes a prologue display period before the title characters "Great Earthquake Robot Battle" of the low base strong reach C effect are displayed, a title start period from when part of the title characters "Great Earthquake Robot Battle" are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their regular position, a title display period during which the title characters "Great Earthquake Robot Battle" are displayed in their regular position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Great Earthquake Robot Battle" that were displayed in their regular position disappear and switch to the introductory part.

When the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, it first starts displaying the prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low base strong reach C effect, which transitions from the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode, and the pending and active displays in the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F are maintained, and the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the pending and active displays, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

In addition, during the prologue display period of the low base strong reach C effect transitioned from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect (here, the result image of the low base strong reach C effect) and the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode are maintained, and the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection effect, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

After the prologue display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title start period.

During the prologue display period following the fall effect, the background dedicated to the fall effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" switches to the background for the low-base strong reach B effect (a background with ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" and enemy character "Dai Robo" displayed on the left and right) after the prologue display period ends, and the pending and active displays that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends. Note that the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode will remain even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, during the prologue display period transitioning from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" switches to a background dedicated to the title display of the low base strong reach C effect (a background where ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" and enemy character "Dai Robo" are displayed on the left and right) after the prologue display period ends. Furthermore, the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode remains even after the prologue display period ends, and the pending display and active display that were hidden during the selection effect remain hidden.

During the title start period of the low base strong reach C performance, part of the title text "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" appears from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left-hand decorative pattern (small) of the left and right decorative patterns in the reach mode, and then the entire title text "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" moves toward its fixed position and stops in that position. When the title text "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" is stopped in its fixed position, part of the title text "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any number between "1" and "9" ("2" in the illustration), but during the title start period, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any number between "1" and "9," part of the title text "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the reach mode, and when the title text "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" is stationary in its fixed position, part of the title text "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" will be displayed overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Dai Geki Shock Robot Battle" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low base strong reach C effect, first, the title characters "Dai Geki Shock Robot Battle" are displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation level indication display hidden, and during this time, audio reading the title is output from speakers 8L and 8R. Next, an expectation level indication display is displayed below the title characters "Dai Geki Shock Robot Battle" in a size smaller than the title characters "Dai Geki Shock Robot Battle." The title display period of the low base strong reach C effect is executed for a longer period of time than the title start period of the low base strong reach C effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the effect control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low base strong reach C effect, the title characters "Great Shock Robot Battle", which are displayed in their fixed position, are moved from their fixed position to the right of the display area until all of the title characters disappear. In addition, the expectation level indication display is also moved to the right of the display area along with the title characters until all of it disappears. The title end period of the low base strong reach C effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach C effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Furthermore, during the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, dialogue subtitles are not displayed, as in the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and dialogue audio is not output from speakers 8L and 8R.

After the title end period ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low base strong reach C effect. The background at the start of the introductory part of the low base strong reach C effect is different from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part (a background where the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Dai Robo" are displayed on the left and right), and at the start of the introductory part, it switches from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part to the background at the start of the introductory part of the low base strong reach C effect (a background where the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Dai Robo" face off in town). The introductory part of the low base strong reach C effect starts with an animated scene in which the enemy character "Dai Robo" is facing forward on the far side from the player's perspective, and the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" are facing each other on the near side from the player's perspective. At this time, both the enemy character "Big Robo", located at the back as seen from the player, and the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana", located at the front as seen from the player, are displayed in positions that overlap with the regular positions where the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle" was displayed during the title display period of the title display part. Also, after the introductory part begins, a subtitle for the line "I'll never lose!" is displayed in accordance with the scene in which the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" face off against the enemy character "Big Robo", and the audio of the line displayed in subtitles is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach C performance, the title is read aloud from speakers 8L and 8R during the title display part, but subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the title display part is not output from speakers 8L and 8R. After the introductory part begins, subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the introductory part are displayed, and the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the introductory part is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot after a low base strong super reach C, the presentation control CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" win the battle against the enemy character "Dai Robo" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a jackpot as the presentation result of the low base strong reach C presentation (the game is controlled to a jackpot game state), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot of the type designated by the variable display result designation command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a reach miss after a low base strong super reach C, the presentation control CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" lose the battle against the enemy character "Dai Robo" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a reach miss as the presentation result of the low base strong reach C presentation, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

[About the expected probability indication for low base strong reach C effects]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, an expectation suggestion display is displayed on the image display device 5 in a smaller size than the title characters "Great Shock Robot Battle" along with the title characters "Great Shock Robot Battle." The expectation suggestion display displayed in the title display part is made up of five star-shaped objects and the characters "Expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, and the expectation is suggested by the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state when the low base strong reach C effect is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5. If the reserved and active displays and the expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects that make up the reserved and active displays may be mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect where the expectation level indication display is displayed, the reserved and active displays are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication display, thereby preventing the objects that make up the reserved and active displays from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, the pending and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation suggestion display. Therefore, even when the low base strong reach C effect is executed in a situation where a maximum of five objects are displayed as pending and active displays, it is possible to prevent confusion between the objects displayed as pending and active displays and the objects in the expectation suggestion display, and to prevent the expectation suggestion display from being mistakenly perceived as having the highest expectation.

Furthermore, in the low base strong reach C performance, the pending display and active display may be hidden from the start of the prologue display period, and even in this configuration, it is possible to prevent the objects constituting the pending display and active display from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

In addition, when a low-base strong reach B effect is executed, the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with a pattern radiating from the center) and on a layer in front of the pending and active displays during the prologue display period, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled. The pending and active displays that were displayed before the display area was filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends, allowing the pending and active displays to be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity. Furthermore, when a low-base strong reach C effect is executed, a monochrome display effect can be executed in which the entire display area is displayed in a monochrome color such as white, except for the decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode, thereby erasing the pending and active displays that were displayed before the monochrome display effect. Even with this configuration, the pending and active displays can be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle" is displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation indication hidden, and then the expectation indication is displayed below the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle." At this time, in the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation indication are displayed in black, and then the color of four of the five star-shaped objects that correspond to the low base strong reach C effect is changed from black to gold, suggesting the expectation of a jackpot in the low base strong reach C effect. This prevents the pending and active displays from being confused with the expectation indication.

[About the Low-Base Strongest Reach Performance]
FIG. 11-41 is a diagram showing the transition of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low-base strongest reach effect is executed, and FIG. 11-42 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low-base strongest reach effect.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state and a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strongest super reach is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern develops from a normal reach via a low base weak super reach A or a low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach effect, it executes a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect, developing it into a low base strongest reach effect. Also, when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strongest super reach is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern develops directly from a normal reach, after executing the normal reach effect, it executes a selection effect described below, developing it into a low base strongest reach effect.

When a low-base weak reach A effect or a low-base weak reach B effect develops, the effect control CPU 120 executes a drop effect in which the movable body 32 drops at the end of the low-base weak reach A effect or the low-base weak reach B effect, and then starts the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect. In the drop effect, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e1), while maintaining the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach state, and the hold and active displays in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the background at the end of the low-base weak reach A effect or the low-base weak reach B effect switches to a background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center), and then drops the movable body 32, and then raises the movable body 32 to its initial position.

In addition, when a direct progression from a normal reach occurs, the effect control CPU 120 executes the selection effect described below, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e1'), and then starts the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect. Details of the selection effect will be described later, but when the selection effect begins, the hold and active displays in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in Figure 11-42, the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect includes a title start period from when part of the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" of the low-base strongest reach effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed in its regular position, a title display period during which the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" is displayed in its regular position, and a title end period from when the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" that was displayed in its regular position disappears and switches to the introductory part.

When the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect, it first starts displaying the title start period.

During the title start period of the low-base strongest reach effect, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e3), the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" are displayed at an enlarged size so that only a portion of the characters is visible in the display area, while the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are maintained. At this time, the display area is completely filled with a portion of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!". In addition, the portion of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" that is displayed in the display area appears overlapping both of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode. Then, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e4), the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" are gradually reduced in size, and the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" are stopped in their fixed position, with the reduced size so that all of the characters are visible in the display area. When the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" is reduced in size and stationary in its fixed position, part of the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" for the low-base strongest reach effect is displayed overlapping with both of the small decorative patterns on the left and right of the reach effect.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the illustration), but during the title start period of the low-base strongest reach performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any of the numbers "1" to "9," the enlarged title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" will appear overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode, and the reduced title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" that is stationary in its fixed position will be displayed with a portion overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

As shown in Figures 11-41 (e1) to (e4), during the title start period transitioning from the falling effect, the background dedicated to the falling effect (a background with a pattern spreading radially from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with part of the enlarged title text "Six people, catch the Bakuchu!" is switched to a background dedicated to displaying the title of the low-base strongest reach effect (a background in which six ally characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right), while the entire display area is filled with part of the enlarged title text "Six people, catch the Bakuchu!", and when the title text "Six people, catch the Bakuchu!" is stationary in a reduced size in its fixed position, the background dedicated to displaying the title of the low-base strongest reach effect is displayed as its background. Additionally, during the title start period that transitions from the drop effect, the pending and active displays that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with part of the enlarged title text "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" are hidden while the entire display area is filled with part of the enlarged title text "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!". Note that the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach mode will remain even after the title start period ends.

Furthermore, during the title start period following the selection effect, the selection result image (here, the title image of the low-base strongest reach effect) of the selection effect that was displayed before the display area was completely filled with part of the enlarged title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" is switched to a background dedicated to displaying the title of the low-base strongest reach effect (a background in which six friendly characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right), while the display area is completely filled with part of the enlarged title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!", and when the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" is stationary in its fixed position at a reduced size, the background dedicated to displaying the title of the low-base strongest reach effect is displayed as its background. Note that the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode is maintained even after the end of the title start period, and the pending and active displays that were hidden during the selection effect remain hidden.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" in a reduced size in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to the display of the title display period. During the title display period of the low-base strongest reach effect, first, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e4), the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" are displayed in a fixed position with the expectation indication display hidden for a predetermined time, and during this time, as shown in FIG. 11-42, audio reading the title is output from speakers 8L and 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e5) to (e6), an expectation indication display is displayed below the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" in a smaller size than the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!". As shown in FIG. 11-42, the title display period of the low-base strongest reach effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low-base strongest reach effect (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the effect control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low-base strongest reach effect, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e6) to (e7), the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!", which are displayed in a reduced size and at a fixed position, are enlarged until the entire display area is filled with part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!". In this case, the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" are not enlarged in the opposite manner to when they are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, but are enlarged in a manner different from the reverse manner to when they are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, until the entire display area is filled with part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!". In other words, the trajectory of each part of the title characters as the title characters "Catch the Explosive Chew with Six People!" shrink during the title start period is different from the trajectory of each part of the title characters as the title characters "Catch the Explosive Chew with Six People!" expand during the title end period. Therefore, the display area is completely filled with parts of the title characters "Catch the Explosive Chew with Six People!" in a manner that differs from the manner in which the display area is completely filled at the start of the title start period. As shown in Figure 11-42, the title end period of the low-base strongest reach effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low-base strongest reach effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-42, during the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect, dialogue subtitles are not displayed, as in the low-base weak reach A effect and the low-base weak reach B effect, and dialogue audio is not output from speakers 8L and 8R.

After the title end period ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low-base strongest reach effect. As shown in Figures 11-41 (e4) to (e8), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low-base strongest reach effect (a background in which six ally characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu" in the city) is different from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part (a background in which six ally characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right). After the title end period ends and the background dedicated to title display is completely filled with part of the title text "Catch Bakuchu with six people!" during the title end period, it switches to the background at the start of the introductory part of the low-base strongest reach effect. The introductory part of the low-base strongest reach effect starts with a video scene in which six ally characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu." Furthermore, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e8) and 11-42, after the introductory part begins, a subtitle is displayed in response to the scene in which six friendly characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu", saying "Try and catch him if you can!", and the audio of the subtitled line is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low-base strongest reach performance, during the title display part, speakers 8L and 8R output audio reading the title, but subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and speakers 8L and 8R do not output audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part. After the introductory part begins, subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introductory part are displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introductory part is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot after a low-base strongest super reach, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the player that the six ally characters will capture the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a jackpot as the result of the low-base strongest reach effect (controlling the game to a jackpot game state), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot of the type designated by the variable display result designation command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern resulting in a reach miss after a low-base strongest super reach, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the player that the six ally characters will not capture the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a low-base strongest reach effect not resulting in a jackpot, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

[About the low-base strongest reach effect expectation indication]
In the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Catch the explosive chuu with six people!" along with an expectation suggestion display in a smaller size than the title text "Catch the explosive chuu with six people!" As shown in Figure 11-41 (e6), the expectation suggestion display displayed in the title display part is composed of five star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, and the expectation is suggested by the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state when the low-base strongest reach effect is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5. If the reserved and active displays and the expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects that make up the reserved and active displays may be mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect where the expectation level indication display is displayed, the reserved and active displays are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication display, thereby preventing the objects that make up the reserved and active displays from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

In addition, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect, the pending and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation suggestion display. Therefore, even when the low-base strongest reach effect is executed in a situation where a maximum of five objects are displayed as pending and active displays, it is possible to prevent confusion between the objects displayed as pending and active displays and the objects in the expectation suggestion display, and to prevent the expectation suggestion display from being mistakenly perceived as having the highest expectation.

Furthermore, when a low-base strongest reach effect is executed, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e2) to (e4), the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" is displayed in an enlarged size during the title start period, so that only a portion of the text is visible in the display area. It is then reduced to a size where all of the text is visible in the display area. When the background dedicated to the title display of the low-base strongest reach effect is displayed, the pending and active displays that were displayed before the title start period are hidden, so that the pending and active displays can be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity. Furthermore, when a low-base strongest reach effect is executed, a monochrome display effect can be executed in which the entire display area is displayed in a monochrome color such as white, except for the decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode, thereby erasing the pending and active displays that were displayed before the monochrome display effect. Even with this configuration, the pending and active displays can be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e4), the title text "Catch the Explosive Chew with Six Players!" is displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation indication hidden. Then, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e5) to (e6), the expectation indication is displayed below the title text "Catch the Explosive Chew with Six Players!". In this case, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e5), in the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects constituting the expectation indication are displayed in black. Then, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e6), the color of 4.5 of the five star-shaped objects corresponding to the low-base strongest reach effect is changed from black to gold, thereby indicating the expectation of a jackpot in the low-base strongest reach effect. This prevents confusion between the pending and active displays and the expectation indication.

[Modifications of the title display part]
Figure 11-43 shows the image transition in modified title display parts of low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, low base strong reach C effect, and low base strongest reach effect.

When the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the corresponding Super Reach effect, it first executes a blackout effect, displaying the entire display area in black, except for the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the Reach state, as shown in Figure 11-43 (f1). If the pending and active displays were displayed before the blackout effect was executed, the pending and active displays will be hidden when the blackout effect begins.

After the blackout effect continues for a predetermined period of time, the effect control CPU 120 displays an expectation indication display (in FIG. 11-43 (f2), an expectation indication display for the low-base strongest reach effect) while maintaining the background of the entire display area in black, as shown in FIG. 11-43 (f2).

The effect control CPU 120 then displays the expectation indication display with the background of the entire display area displayed in black for a predetermined period of time, and displays the title character of the corresponding super reach effect (the title character of the low-base strongest reach effect in Figures 11-43 (f3) (f5)) in a fixed position at a size larger than the expectation indication display, as shown in Figures 11-43 (f3) (f5).

When the title letters of the corresponding Super Reach effect are displayed in their regular positions, portions of the title letters are displayed overlapping both of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the Reach state. The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the Reach state will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the illustration), but whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the Reach state are any of the numbers "1" to "9," when the title letters of the corresponding Super Reach effect are displayed in their regular positions, portions of the title letters are displayed overlapping both of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the Reach state.

In addition, the title characters are displayed in either a white mode (Figure 11-43 (f3)) or a red mode (Figure 11-43 (f5)). Whether the title characters are displayed in a white mode or a red mode is determined in the variable display preview effect determination process of step 131SGS609 described above. In the variable display preview effect determination process, when a variable pattern including the execution of a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, a low base strong reach C effect, or a low base strongest reach effect is identified, it is determined whether the title characters are displayed in a white mode or a red mode with a probability corresponding to whether a jackpot has occurred, and it is also determined whether the title characters are displayed in a white mode or a red mode with a probability such that the rate of a jackpot when the title characters are displayed in a red mode is higher than the rate of a jackpot when the title characters are displayed in a white mode. Therefore, when the title text is displayed in red during the title display part of the corresponding Super Reach effect, the likelihood of a jackpot is higher than when the title text is displayed in white.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the expectation indication display and the title text of the corresponding Super Reach effect, and then, as shown in Figures 11-43 (f4) and (f6), while maintaining the expectation indication display and the title text of the corresponding Super Reach effect, displays a background corresponding to the title display part of the corresponding Super Reach effect and outputs audio reading the title from speakers 8L and 8R. Meanwhile, in the title display part, dialogue subtitles are not displayed, as in the low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, and dialogue audio is not output from speakers 8L and 8R. Furthermore, in the title display part, the title text is displayed for a longer period of time after the start of the blackout effect than the time until the title text is displayed (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title end period. Note that the control of the title end period is the same as for each of the super reach effects described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In this modified version of the title display part, the title text of the corresponding Super Reach effect is larger than the expectation level indication display, and the expectation level is indicated by whether it is white or red, which attracts the player's attention. However, by displaying the expectation level indication display before the title text, the player's attention can be drawn to the expectation level indication first.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-43 (f2), whether the title characters are displayed in white or red, if the type of super reach effect is the same, the expectation level indication is displayed in the same manner. This allows the player to pay attention to whether the title characters are displayed in white or red after the expectation level indication is displayed.

[About high base reach A to D effects]
Figure 11-44 is a diagram showing the transition of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the high base reach A to D effects are being executed, and Figure 11-44 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the high base reach A to D effects. Note that the high base reach A to D effects are all the same except for the type of enemy character that appears, the title name, and the expectation level suggested by the expectation level suggestion display. Therefore, the high base reach A effect will be explained here, and an explanation of the high base reach B to D effects will be omitted.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and when a variation pattern corresponding to a high-base super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, it starts varying the decorative pattern (large), and as shown in Figure 11-44 (g2), executes a normal reach effect in which the decorative pattern (large) of the type specified by the variable display result specification command stops at the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R on the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing, resulting in a reach mode. Then, the title display part of the high-base reach A effect begins.

As shown in Figure 11-45, the title display part of the high base reach A effect includes a title start period from when part of the title characters "Battle Reach A" of the high base reach A effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their regular position, a title display period during which the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in their regular position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Battle Reach A" that were displayed in their regular position disappear and switch to the introductory part.

When the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the high base reach A effect, it first starts displaying the title start period.

During the title start period of the high-base reach A effect, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g2), the display of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state is maintained, and the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed at an enlarged size so that only a portion of the characters is visible in the display area. At this time, the display area is displayed so that part of the title characters "Battle Reach A" fills the entire display area. In addition, the portion of the title characters "Battle Reach A" that is displayed in the display area appears to overlap both of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state. Then, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are gradually reduced in size, and the reduced size title characters "Battle Reach A" are stopped in their fixed position so that all of the characters are visible in the display area. When the title text "Battle Reach A" is displayed in a reduced size and stationary in a fixed position, part of the title text "Battle Reach A" is displayed overlapping both of the small decorative patterns on the left and right of the reach state.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the illustration), but during the title start period of the high base reach A performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any of the numbers "1" to "9," the enlarged title letters "Battle Reach A" will appear overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode, and the reduced title letters "Battle Reach A" that are stationary in their fixed position will appear overlapping with parts of both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

As shown in Figures 11-44 (g1) to (g3), the background (night sky background) displayed during the fluctuation of the decorative pattern (large) in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state before the display area is completely filled with a portion of the enlarged title characters "Battle Reach A" switches to a background dedicated to the title display of the high base reach A effect (a background in which the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Masked Man" are displayed on the left and right) while the display area is completely filled with a portion of the enlarged title characters "Battle Reach A," and when the title characters "Battle Reach A" are stationary in a reduced size and in their fixed positions, a background dedicated to the title display of the high base reach A effect is displayed as its background. Furthermore, the pending display and active display that were displayed before the display area is completely filled with a portion of the enlarged title characters "Battle Reach A" are hidden while the display area is completely filled with a portion of the enlarged title characters "Battle Reach A." Furthermore, the display of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will remain even after the title start period ends.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a reduced size at the fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to the title display period. During the title display period of the high base reach A effect, first, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in the fixed position with the expectation indication display hidden for a predetermined time, and during this time, as shown in Figure 11-45, audio reading the title is output from speakers 8L and 8R. Next, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g4) to (g5), an expectation indication display is displayed below the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a smaller size than the title characters "Battle Reach A." As shown in Figure 11-45, the title display period of the high base reach A effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the high base reach A effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the display of the title end period. During the title end period of the high base reach A effect, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g5) to (g6), the title characters "Battle Reach A," which are displayed in a reduced size and at a fixed position, are enlarged until the entire display area is filled with parts of the title characters "Battle Reach A." In this case, the title characters "Battle Reach A" are not enlarged in the opposite manner to when the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, but are enlarged in a manner different from the opposite manner to when the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, until the entire display area is filled with parts of the title characters "Battle Reach A." In other words, the trajectory taken by each part of the title characters as they shrink during the title start period is different from the trajectory taken by each part of the title characters as they expand during the title end period. Therefore, unlike the state in which the display area is completely filled at the start of the title start period, the display area is completely filled with part of the title characters "Battle Reach A." As shown in Figure 11-45, the title end period of the high bass reach A effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the high bass reach A effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-45, in the title display part of the high bass reach A effect, dialogue subtitles are not displayed, as in the low bass weak reach A effect and the low bass weak reach B effect, and dialogue audio is not output from speakers 8L and 8R.

The performance control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the high bass reach A performance after the end of the title end period. As shown in Figures 11-44 (g3) to (g7), the background at the start of the introductory part of the high bass reach A performance (the background showing the ally character "Yume Yume" fighting the enemy character "Masked Man") is different from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part (the background showing the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Masked Man" on the left and right). After the title end period ends and the background dedicated to title display is completely filled with part of the title characters "Battle Reach A" during the title end period, it switches to the background at the start of the introductory part of the high bass reach A performance. The introductory part of the high bass reach A performance starts with a video scene showing the ally character "Yume Yume" fighting the enemy character "Masked Man." Also, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g7) and 11-45, after the introductory part begins, a subtitle for the line "Fight!" is displayed in response to a scene in which the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Masked Man" are fighting, and the audio of the line displayed in the subtitles is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the high bass reach A performance, during the title display part, audio is output from speakers 8L and 8R reading the title, but subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and audio of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the title display part is not output from speakers 8L and 8R. After the introductory part begins, subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the introductory part are displayed, and audio of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the introductory part is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot after a high base super reach A, the presentation control CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally character "Yume Yume" wins the fight against the enemy character "Masked Man" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a jackpot as the presentation result of the high base reach A presentation (the game is controlled to a jackpot game state), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot of the type designated by the variable display result designation command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a reach miss after a high base super reach A, the presentation control CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally character "Yume Yume" is defeated by the enemy character "Masked Man" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a jackpot as the presentation result of the high base reach A presentation, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

[About the expected probability indication for high base reach A to D effects]
The expectation suggestion displays for the high base reach A to D effects are all the same except for the differences in the expectation suggested by the expectation suggestion displays. Therefore, here we will explain the expectation suggestion displays for the high base reach A effect and omit explanations of the expectation suggestion displays for the high base reach B to D effects.

In the title display part of the high base reach A performance, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Battle Reach A" along with an expectation level indication in a smaller size than the title text "Battle Reach A." The expectation level indication displayed in the title display part, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g5), consists of five star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation Level" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation level, and the expectation level is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects that have changed color from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

When in time-saving state A or probability variable state in which the high base reach A effect is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5. If the reserved and active displays and the expectation indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects that make up the reserved and active displays may be mistaken for objects in the expectation indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the high base reach A effect in which the expectation indication display is displayed, the reserved and active displays are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation indication display, thereby preventing the objects that make up the reserved and active displays from being mistaken for objects in the expectation indication display.

Furthermore, since it is almost impossible for a game ball to enter the first start entry slot in the time-saving mode A or the probability variable mode, when the number of reserved balls in the second special chart is at its maximum (four) and is being displayed in a variable manner, up to five objects may be displayed as reserved and active displays, which matches the number of objects indicating the highest expectation in the expectation indication display. However, in the title display part of the high base reach A effect, the reserved and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation indication display. Therefore, even if the high base reach A effect is executed in a situation where up to five objects are displayed as reserved and active displays, it is possible to prevent confusion between the objects displayed as reserved and active displays and the objects in the expectation indication display, and to prevent the expectation indication display from being mistakenly interpreted as the highest expectation.

Furthermore, when a high base reach A effect is executed, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g1) to (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in an enlarged size during the title start period, so that only a portion of the characters are visible in the display area. They are then reduced in size so that all characters are visible in the display area. When the background dedicated to the title display of the high base reach A effect is displayed, the hold and active displays that were displayed before the title start period are hidden, so that the hold and active displays can be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity. Furthermore, when a high base reach A effect is executed, a monochrome display effect can be executed in which the entire display area is displayed in a monochrome color such as white, except for the decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode, thereby erasing the hold and active displays that were displayed before the monochrome display effect. Even with this configuration, the hold and active displays can be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the high base reach A effect, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g3), the title letters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation indication display hidden, and then, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g4) to (g5), the expectation indication display is displayed below the title letters "Battle Reach A." At this time, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g4), in the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects constituting the expectation indication display are displayed in black, and then, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g5), the color of three of the five star-shaped objects corresponding to the high base reach A effect (3.5 for the high base reach B effect, 4 for the high base reach C effect, and 4.5 for the high base reach D effect) is changed from black to gold, thereby indicating the expectation of a jackpot in the high base reach A effect. This prevents confusion between the pending and active displays and the expectation indication display.

[Title text display position]
FIG. 11-46 is a diagram showing the position where the title characters are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. In FIG.

As shown in Figures 11-46 (A) and (B), the image display device 5 has a rectangular display area 5L. However, since the game board 2 is placed in front of it, the visible area of the display area 5L of the image display device 5 is the area that is visible through the opening 24 formed in the game board 2, i.e., the area that is not covered by the components that make up the game board 2.

As mentioned above, the effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" in a fixed position during the title display period of the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect. In this case, the fixed position where the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" are displayed is the position where the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" overlap with the intersection of the diagonal lines of the display area 5L of the image display device 5, as shown in Figure 11-46(A), and the position where the title characters overlap with the intersection of the diagonal lines of the visible square area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area within the visible area of the image display device 5 that is not obstructed by components of the game board 2, as shown in Figure 11-46(B).

Similarly, the title text for the low base weak reach B effect is "Bilibili Hockey Showdown", the title text for the low base strong reach A effect is "Two people catch the explosive chocolate!", the title text for the low base strong reach B effect is "Shocking Robot Battle", the title text for the low base strong reach C effect is "Super Shocking Robot Battle", the title text for the low base strongest reach effect is "Six people catch the explosive chocolate!", the title text for the high base reach A effect is "Battle Reach A", the title text for the high base reach B effect is "Battle Reach B", and the title text for the high base reach C effect is " For both the title characters "Battle Reach C" and the title characters "Battle Reach D" for the high base reach D effect, the fixed position at which the title characters are displayed during the title display period is where the title characters overlap with the intersection of the diagonal lines of the display area 5L of the image display device 5, as shown in Figure 11-46 (A), and where the title characters overlap with the intersection of the diagonal lines of the visible square area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area within the visible area of the image display device 5 that is not obstructed by components of the game board 2, as shown in Figure 11-46 (B).

Gaming machines are often subject to design changes during the development stage, and changes to the design of the gaming board 2 can change the area of the display area 5L of the image display device 5 that is covered by the components that make up the gaming board 2, thereby changing the visible area of the display area 5L. Gaming machines installed in gaming parlors are sometimes taken back, refurbished, and resold, and in such cases, changes to the design of the gaming board 2 can change the area of the display area 5L of the image display device 5 that is covered by the components that make up the gaming board 2, thereby changing the visible area of the display area 5L. In such cases, if the placement of the title characters in the super reach effect is determined based on the display area 5L of the image display device 5, there is a risk that the display position of the title characters will be significantly off from the center of the visible area.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, in the title display part of any Super Reach performance, the fixed position at which the title characters are displayed during the title display period is a position where the title characters overlap with the intersection of the diagonal lines of the display area 5L of the image display device 5, and also overlap with the intersection of the diagonal lines of the visible square area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area within the visible area of the image display device 5 that is not obstructed by components of the game board 2.As a result, the title characters displayed at the fixed position during the title display period are displayed at a position where they overlap with both the intersection of the diagonal lines of the display area 5L and the intersection of the diagonal lines of the visible square area 5S.This prevents the display position of the title characters from deviating significantly from the center of the visible area even if the design of the game board 2 is changed due to design changes or when the game machine is reused.

[Super Reach performance duration]
Figure 11-47 is a diagram showing the presentation time of each super reach presentation, and Figure 11-48 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the presentation times of each super reach presentation.

As shown in Figure 11-47, the overall presentation time of the low base weak reach A presentation (the time from the start of the title display part to the end of the introductory part) is T1-1, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt1, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt1a, the presentation time of the title display period is Tt1b, and the presentation time of the title end period is Tt1c.

The overall presentation time for the low base weak reach B presentation is T1-2, the presentation time for the title display part is Tt1, of which the presentation time for the title start period is Tt1a, the presentation time for the title display period is Tt1b, and the presentation time for the title end period is Tt1c.

Note that while the overall presentation times for the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect are different, the presentation time for the title display part, as well as the presentation time for the title start period, title display period, and title end period, are all the same.

As shown in Figure 11-47, the overall presentation time of the low base strong reach A presentation is T2-1, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt2, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt2a, the presentation time of the title display period is Tt2b, and the presentation time of the title end period is Tt2c.

The overall presentation time for the low base strong reach B presentation is T2-2, the presentation time for the title display part is Tt2, of which the presentation time for the title start period is Tt2a, the presentation time for the title display period is Tt2b, and the presentation time for the title end period is Tt2c.

The overall duration of the low base strong reach C effect is T2-3, the duration of the title display part is Tt2, of which the duration of the title start period is Tt2a, the duration of the title display period is Tt2b, and the duration of the title end period is Tt2c.

Note that while the overall presentation times for the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect are different, the presentation time for the title display part, and the presentation time for the title start period, title display period, and title end period are all the same.

The overall presentation time for the low base strongest reach presentation is T3, the presentation time for the title display part is Tt3, of which the presentation time for the title start period is Tt3a, the presentation time for the title display period is Tt3b, and the presentation time for the title end period is Tt3c.

The overall presentation time for high base reach presentations A to D is T4, and the presentation time for the title display part is Tt4, of which the presentation time for the title start period is Tt4a, the presentation time for the title display period is Tt4b, and the presentation time for the title end period is Tt4c.

Comparing the overall presentation time of super reach effects during a low base (normal state) in this configuration, as shown in Figure 11-48 (A), the overall presentation time (T2-1, T2-2, T2-3) of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect, which have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, is longer than the overall presentation time (T1-1, T1-2) of the low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, and the overall presentation time (T3) of the low base strongest reach effect, which has higher jackpot expectations than the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base weak reach C effect, is set longer than the overall presentation time (T2-1, T2-2, T2-3) of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect.

In addition, of the low base weak reach A and low base weak reach B effects, the low base weak reach B effect, which has a higher expectation of developing into another super reach effect than the low base weak reach A effect, has an overall presentation time (T1-2) that is set longer than the overall presentation time (T1-1) of the low base weak reach A effect. Furthermore, the overall presentation time (T2-3) of the low base strong reach C effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A effect and the low base strong reach B effect, out of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect, is longer than the overall presentation time (T2-1, T2-2) of the low base strong reach A effect and the low base strong reach B effect, and the overall presentation time (T2-2) of the low base strong reach B effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A effect, out of the low base strong reach A effect and the low base strong reach B effect, is set longer than the overall presentation time (T2-1) of the low base strong reach A effect.

When comparing the presentation times for the title start period, title display period, and title end period in the title display part in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-48 (B), for all super reach presentations (low base weak reach A, B presentations, low base strong reach A-C presentations, low base strongest reach presentations, and high base reach A-D presentations), the presentation time for the title display period (Tt1b/Tt2b/Tt3b/Tt4b) is longer than the presentation time for the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a/Tt4a) and the presentation time for the title end period (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c/Tt4c), and the presentation time for the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a/Tt4a) is set longer than the presentation time for the title end period (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c/Tt4c).

When comparing the presentation time of the title display part in the super reach effect in this form, as shown in Figure 11-48 (C), the presentation time (Tt2) of the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, is longer than the presentation time (Tt1) of the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, and the presentation time (Tt3) of the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base weak reach C effect, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2) of the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect. Additionally, the presentation time (Tt4) of the title display part of the high base reach A-D effects is set shorter than the presentation time (Tt1, Tt2, Tt3) of the title display part of the low base weak reach A-B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, and low base strongest reach effects.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation times of the title start period and title display period in the low base strongest reach presentation and the high base reach A to D presentation, as shown in Figure 11-48 (D), the presentation time (Tt3a) of the title start period in the low base strongest reach presentation is set longer than the presentation time (Tt4a) of the title start period in the high base reach A to D presentation, and as shown in Figure 11-48 (E), the presentation time (Tt3b) of the title display period in the low base strongest reach presentation is set longer than the presentation time (Tt4b) of the title display period in the high base reach A to D presentation.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation times of the title start periods of super reach presentations (low base weak reach A, B presentations, low base strong reach A-C presentations, low base strongest reach presentation) during a low base (normal state), as shown in Figure 11-48 (F), the presentation time (Tt2a) of the title start periods of the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach B presentation, and low base strong reach C presentations, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A presentation and low base weak reach B presentation, is longer than the presentation time (Tt1a) of the title start periods of the low base weak reach A presentation and low base weak reach B presentation, and the presentation time (Tt3a) of the title start period of the low base strongest reach presentation, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach presentation B, and low base weak reach C presentation, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2a) of the title start periods of the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach B presentation, and low base strong reach C presentation.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation times of the title display periods in the super reach presentations (low base weak reach A, B presentations, low base strong reach A-C presentations, low base strongest reach presentation) during a low base (normal state), as shown in Figure 11-48 (G), the presentation time (Tt2b) of the title display period of the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach B presentation, and low base strong reach C presentation, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A presentation and low base weak reach B presentation, is longer than the presentation time (Tt1b) of the title display period of the low base weak reach A presentation and low base weak reach B presentation, and the presentation time (Tt3b) of the title display period of the low base strongest reach presentation, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach presentation B, and low base weak reach C presentation, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2b) of the title display period of the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach B presentation, and low base strong reach C presentation.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation times of the title end periods of super reach presentations (low base weak reach A, B presentations, low base strong reach A-C presentations, low base strongest reach presentation) during a low base (normal state), as shown in Figure 11-48 (H), the presentation time (Tt2c) of the title end period of the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach B presentation, and low base strong reach C presentation, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A presentation and low base weak reach B presentation, is longer than the presentation time (Tt1c) of the title end period of the low base weak reach A presentation and low base weak reach B presentation, and the presentation time (Tt3c) of the title end period of the low base strongest reach presentation, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach presentation B, and low base weak reach C presentation, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2c) of the title end period of the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach B presentation, and low base strong reach C presentation.

In this mode, when comparing the presentation time of the text display period of the title display part (the period in the title display part that does not include the prologue period described below, and is the combined period of the title start period, title display period, and title end period) in the super reach presentations (low base weak reach A, B presentations, low base strong reach A-C presentations, low base strongest reach presentations) during a low base (normal state), as shown in Figure 11-48 (I), the low base strong reach A presentation has a higher chance of winning than the low base weak reach A presentation and the low base weak reach B presentation. The presentation time (Tt2d) for the character display period of the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect is longer than the presentation time (Tt1d) for the character display period of the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and the presentation time (Tt3d) for the character display period of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect and the low base weak reach C effect, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2d) for the character display period of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation times of the title start period and title display period in super reach effects (low base weak reach A, B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, low base strongest reach effects) during a low base (normal state), as shown in Figure 11-48 (J) (K), in all super reach effects (low base weak reach A, B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, low base strongest reach effects) during a low base (normal state), the presentation time of the title display period (Tt1b/Tt2b/Tt3b) is longer than the presentation time of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a), and the presentation time of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a) is set longer than the presentation time of the title end period (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c).

In this mode, when comparing the overall presentation time of the super reach effects (low base weak reach A, B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, low base strongest reach effects) during a low base (normal state) with the super reach effects (high base reach A-D effects) during a high base (time-saving state A and special state), as shown in Figure 11-48 (L), the overall presentation time (T4) of the super reach effects (high base reach A-D effects) during a high base (time-saving state A and special state) is set shorter than the overall presentation time (T1-1, T1-2, T2-1, T2-3, T3) of the super reach effects (low base weak reach A, B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, low base strongest reach effects) during a low base (normal state).

[About the title text of the Super Reach performance]
Figure 11-49 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the title characters and decorative patterns in the title display part in the super reach performance.

As shown in Figure 11-49 (A), the title text for the low-base weak reach A effect is "Catch the Bakuchu!", the title has 10 characters, the font size of the title characters (standard size per character) is FJ, and the display area size in which the title characters are displayed (the size of the area containing all title characters) is EJA.

The title text for the low base weak reach B effect is "Bilibili Hockey Showdown," the title has 10 characters, the font size of the title text is FJ, and the display area size in which the title text is displayed is EJB.

The title text for the low base strong reach A effect is "Catch the Bakuchu together!", the title has 13 characters, the font size of the title text is FK, and the display area size in which the title text is displayed is EKA.

The title of the low base strong reach B effect is "Shocking Robot Battle," the title has seven characters, the font size of the title is FK, and the display area size in which the title is displayed is EKB.

The title of the low base strong reach C effect is "Great Shock Robot Battle," the title has eight characters, the font size of the title is FK, and the display area size in which the title is displayed is EKC.

The title of the Low Base Strongest Reach performance is "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!", the title has 13 characters, the font size of the title is FSK, and the display area size in which the title is displayed is ESK.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-49 (A), the font size of the decorative pattern (large) before the Super Reach performance develops is KD, and the font size of the decorative pattern (small) after the Super Reach performance develops is KS.

Comparing the font sizes of the title characters in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-49 (B), the font size FK of the title characters in the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base strong reach C effects, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects, is larger than the font size FJ of the title characters in the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters in the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base strong reach C effects is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters in the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects.

In addition, the font size FSK of the title characters of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher chance of winning than the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base weak reach C effect, is larger than the font size FK of the title characters of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the low base strongest reach effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-49 (B), the font size FJ of the title characters in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, the font size FK of the title characters in the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance and the low base strong reach C performance, and the font size FSK of the title characters in the low base strongest reach performance are all smaller than the font size KD of the decorative pattern (large) before the performance develops into a super reach performance, and larger than the font size KS of the decorative pattern (small) after the performance develops into a super reach performance. Furthermore, the size of the largest character making up the title characters in the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, the size of the largest character making up the title characters in the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect, and the size of the largest character making up the title characters in the low base strongest reach effect are all smaller than the size of the smallest character that can be made up of the decorative pattern (large) before the effect develops into a super reach effect, and the size of the smallest character making up the title characters in the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, the size of the smallest character that can be made up of the title characters in the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect, and the size of the smallest character that can be made up of the title characters in the low base strongest reach effect are all larger than the size of the largest character that can be made up of the decorative pattern (small) after the effect develops into a super reach effect.

Comparing the display area sizes of the title characters in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-49 (C), the display area sizes EKA, EKB, and EKC of the title characters for the low base strong reach A, low base strong reach B, and low base strong reach C effects, which have a higher chance of winning than the low base weak reach A and low base weak reach B effects, are larger than the display area sizes EJA, EJB of the title characters for the low base weak reach A and low base weak reach B effects, and the display area size ESK of the title characters for the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher chance of winning than the low base strong reach A, low base strong reach B, and low base weak reach C effects, is larger than the display area sizes EKA, EKB, and EKC of the title characters for the low base strong reach A, low base strong reach B, and low base strong reach C effects.

[About the expected level indication]
Figure 11-50 is a diagram showing the execution status of the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the super reach effect.

As shown in Figure 11-50 (A), the expectation indication displayed in the title display section consists of five star-shaped objects and the word "expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation level. The expectation level is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold among the five.

When displaying the expectation level indication, the performance control CPU 120 first displays five star-shaped objects in black, as shown in Figure 11-50 (A), and displays the word "expectation level" to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation level. Then, the performance control CPU 120 gradually changes the color of the multiple star-shaped objects that are to change from black to gold, starting from the left. Furthermore, when changing a star-shaped object from black to gold, the performance control CPU 120 highlights the corresponding star-shaped object and then changes it back to its normal gold color.

At this time, as shown in Figure 11-50 (B), the performance control CPU 120 enlarges the star-shaped object that is changing color, changes its color to white so that it shines from the center to the periphery, and then changes the entire enlarged object to white until the outline disappears, and then displays the star-shaped object with all or half of it changed to gold. In particular, for the second and third star-shaped objects, the CPU 120 enlarges the enlarged star-shaped object to a size where part of it overlaps with part of the word "Expectation Level," which indicates that the star-shaped object indicates the expectation level. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 highlights the object in a common manner whether changing the entire star-shaped object from a black to gold or changing half of the star-shaped object to gold.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-50 (A), when changing multiple star-shaped objects to gold, the performance control CPU 120 starts highlighting the star-shaped object one block away at the timing (t1) before the highlighting of the star-shaped object that started highlighting first ends and returns to normal display. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 does not start highlighting the star-shaped object two blocks away until the highlighting of the star-shaped object that started highlighting first ends at the timing (t2), and starts highlighting the star-shaped object two blocks away at the timing (t2) when the highlighting of the star-shaped object that started highlighting first ends. In other words, the highlighting of two adjacent star-shaped objects overlaps, but three star-shaped objects are not highlighted simultaneously and overlap each other.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-50 (A), the performance control CPU 120 outputs an expectation level indication sound from speakers 8L and 8R at the timing when the highlighting of a star-shaped object begins, and when multiple star-shaped objects are changed to gold, it ends the output of the expectation level indication sound associated with the highlighting of the star-shaped object that began highlighting earlier before the highlighting of the next star-shaped object begins, so that the sound is not output overlapping with the expectation level indication sound associated with the highlighting of the next star-shaped object.

[About selection effects]
11-51 is a diagram showing the execution status of the selection effect. The selection effect is an effect that specifies which type of super reach effect will be executed when a low base strong reach A to C effect or a low base strongest reach effect is executed directly from a normal reach effect without going through a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect.

When a selection effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes a normal reach effect as shown in FIG. 11-51 (h1), and then displays a window in the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-51 (h2), displaying the title of the selection effect in that window. The title of the selection effect displays the message "Upgrade your reach!", suggesting that a selection effect will be executed.

Next, as shown in Figures 11-51 (h2) to (h8), the effect control CPU 120 displays in the window a title image of the super reach effect and an operation prompt image consisting of a button image imitating the push button 31B and the operation prompt text "Press repeatedly!" to encourage continuous operation of the push button 31B. The title image of the super reach effect is an image with the same content as the display content during the title display period in the title display part of each super reach effect, and the title images of the low base strong reach effects A to C and the low base strongest reach effect also display an indication of the expected level.

The effect control CPU 120 first displays the title image of the Super Reach effect in the window as the title image of the Super Reach effect, which has a jackpot expectation of 0 and the lowest expectation of development to other Super Reach effects. Each time an operation of the number of times push button 31B corresponding to the title image of the displayed Super Reach effect is detected, the CPU 120 switches to the title image of the next Super Reach effect until it shows the title image of the Super Reach effect corresponding to the type of variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command.

As shown in Figures 11-51 (h2) to (h8), the title images of the Super Reach effects displayed in the window switch in the following order: the title image of the low base weak reach A effect, which has the lowest expectation of development into other Super Reach effects, followed by the title image of the low base weak reach B effect, which has a higher expectation of development into other Super Reach effects than the low base weak reach A effect, the title image of the low base strong reach A effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title image of the low base strong reach B effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A effect, the title image of the low base strong reach C effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach B effect, and the title image of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach C effect.

Then, when the title image of the super reach effect corresponding to the type of variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command appears, the effect control CPU 120 detects operation of the number of times push button 31B corresponding to the displayed title image of the super reach effect, and displays a confirmation image in which the operation prompt image disappears and only the title image of the super reach effect is displayed in the window, as shown in Figure 11-51 (h9), notifying the player that the super reach effect of the displayed title image will be executed, and then transitions to the title display part of that super reach effect.

As shown in Figure 11-52, push button 3B was operated three times to switch from the title image of the low base weak reach A effect to the title image of the low base weak reach B effect, push button 31B was operated four times to switch from the title image of the low base weak reach B effect to the title image of the low base strong reach A effect, push button 31B was operated eight times to switch from the title image of the low base strong reach A effect to the title image of the low base strong reach B effect, and push button 31B was operated eight times to switch from the title image of the low base strong reach B effect to the title image of the low base strong reach B effect. The number of times push button 31B is operated to switch to the title image of the Reach C effect is 10, and the number of times push button 31B is operated to switch from the title image of the low base strong Reach C effect to the title image of the low base strongest Reach effect is 15; the higher the developmental attitude of the Super Reach effect of the title image being switched to other Super Reach effects or the higher the expected jackpot, the more times push button 31B must be operated to switch to the next title image, and the more times push button 31B must be operated.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-52, when a selection effect is executed, the low base weak reach A and B effects will never be executed, and a super reach effect with a jackpot expectation level equal to or higher than the low base strong reach A effect will always be executed. The probability that the low base strong reach A effect will be executed is approximately 32.18%, the probability that the low base strong reach B effect will be executed is approximately 30.16%, the probability that the low base strong reach C effect will be executed is approximately 30.30%, and the probability that the low base strongest reach effect will be executed is approximately 7.36%.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 will also display an expectation suggestion display in the title images of the low base strong reach A-C effects and the low base strongest reach effect in the selection effect, just like the title display part. However, the expectation suggestion display in the title display part displays five star-shaped objects in black, and multiple star-shaped objects that change from black to gold gradually change from black to gold in order from the left, whereas the expectation suggestion display displayed in the selection effect displays the number of star-shaped objects out of the five that indicates the expectation of the corresponding super reach effect in gold from the start.

The minimum time required for the title image of the Super Reach effect displayed during the selection effect to switch to the title image of the next Super Reach effect is the number of times corresponding to the title image of the Super Reach effect multiplied by the time required for one operation of push button 31B. The time required for one operation of push button 31B is approximately 80 ms, and to switch from the title image of the Low Base Weak Reach A effect to the title image of the Low Base Weak Reach B effect, push button 31B must be operated three times, and the minimum time required for this is approximately 240 ms.

On the other hand, the time it takes for the star-shaped object in the expectation suggestion display in the title display part to change from black to highlighted and then to gold, i.e., the time it takes for the suggested expectation level to change by one level, is approximately 300 ms, which is set longer than the minimum time required to switch from the title image of the low base weak reach A effect to the title image of the low base weak reach B effect. Therefore, in the selection effect, the effect control CPU 120 can switch the title image of the low base weak reach A effect to the title image of the low base weak reach B effect in a time shorter than the time it takes for the expected level suggested in the expectation suggestion display in the title display part to change by one level.

[About effects that can be performed during variable display]
11-53 is a diagram showing effects that can be executed during variable display. As shown in FIG. 11-53, effects that can be executed during variable display include explanatory text display effects, title color change effects, and operation prompt effects A to D.

The explanatory text display effect can be executed during the prologue display period in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, and displays explanatory text suggesting a high chance of a jackpot.

The title color change effect is an effect that can be performed during the title display period in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, and is an effect that changes the color of the title text from the initial white to red or gold.

Operation prompt effect A is an effect that can be executed in a normal reach effect, and displays an operation prompt image that prompts the operation of push button 31B, and notifies the player whether or not the effect will progress to a low-base weak reach effect A or B depending on the operation of push button 31B. Note that operation prompt effect A may also be configured to progress not only to a low-base weak reach effect A or B, but also to a low-base strong reach effect A-C or a low-base strongest reach effect depending on the operation of push button 31B.

Operation prompt effect B is an effect that can be executed at the end of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, and displays an operation prompt image (small) or operation prompt image (large) that prompts the operation of push button 31B, and notifies the player whether or not the effect will develop into one of the low base strong reach A to C effects depending on the operation of push button 31B. Furthermore, in a configuration in which the low base weak reach A and B effects are notified of a jackpot as a result of the effect, operation prompt effect B may be configured to notify the player of whether or not a jackpot has occurred depending on the operation of push button 31B.

Operation prompt effect C is an effect that can be executed in the middle of the introductory part of the low-base strong reach effects A to C and the strongest reach effect. It displays an operation prompt image that prompts you to operate the push button 31B, and displays one of several types of cut-in images depending on the operation of the push button 31B.

Operation prompt effect D is an effect that can be executed at the end of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, and displays an operation prompt image (small) or operation prompt image (large) that prompts the user to operate push button 31B, and notifies the user of the result of the effect, whether or not a jackpot has been achieved, depending on the operation of push button 31B.

The effect control CPU 120 determines during the preview effect determination process of the variable display start setting process whether to execute an explanatory text display effect during variable display, whether to execute a title color change effect and which color to change to, whether to execute operation prompt effect A, whether to display either an operation prompt image (small) or an operation prompt image (large) in operation prompt effect B, whether to execute operation prompt effect C and whether to display either a cut-in image (A) or a cut-in image (B), and whether to display either a operation prompt image (small) or an operation prompt image (large) in operation prompt effect D.

As shown in Figure 11-54 (A), in the preview effect determination process, if a variation pattern in which the low base strong reach A to C effects are executed is identified, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute the explanatory text display effect. In this case, if a variation pattern in which the effect results in a miss is identified, there is an 80% chance that it will not be executed, and a 20% chance that it will be executed. Furthermore, if a variation pattern in which the effect results in a jackpot is identified, there is a 20% chance that it will not be executed, and an 80% chance that it will be executed. In this way, if a variation pattern in which the effect results in a jackpot is identified, there is a higher chance that the explanatory text display effect will be executed than if a variation pattern in which a miss is identified. Therefore, the execution of the explanatory text display effect during the prologue display period in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects suggests a high possibility of a jackpot.

In this embodiment, the explanatory text display effect is executed during the prologue display period in the title display part, and the execution time of the low base strong reach A-C effect and the execution time of the title display part remain unchanged regardless of whether the explanatory text display effect is executed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A-C effect. However, the variation patterns in which the low base strong reach A-C effects are executed may include a first variation pattern and a second variation pattern with a longer variation time than the first variation pattern, and if the first variation pattern is specified, the explanatory text display effect is not executed, and if the second variation pattern is specified, the explanatory text display effect is executed using a variation time longer than the first variation pattern. In such a configuration, whether or not to execute the explanatory text display effect is not determined in the preview effect determination process, but rather whether or not to execute the explanatory text display effect is determined depending on whether the first variation pattern or the second variation pattern is specified. In this case, by determining the first and second variation patterns so that the likelihood of a jackpot is higher when the explanatory text display effect is executed than when the explanatory text display effect is not executed, the execution of the explanatory text display effect in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects suggests that there is a high possibility of a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 11-54 (B), in the preview effect determination process, when a variation pattern in which a low-base weak reach A or B effect is executed is identified, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a title color change effect, and if so, what color to change to. In this case, when a variation pattern in which the effect result is a miss is identified, non-execution (white) is determined 80% of the time, execution (red) is determined 20% of the time, and execution (gold) is not determined. Furthermore, when a variation pattern in which the effect develops into a low-base strong reach A-C effect or a low-base strongest reach effect is identified, non-execution (white) is determined 20% of the time, execution (red) is determined 75% of the time, and execution (gold) is determined 5% of the time. In this way, when a variation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect is identified, the execution of the title color change effect is decided at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified, so the change in color of the title letters in the title display part of the low base strong reach A and B effects suggests that there is a high possibility of development into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect. Furthermore, since execution (gold) is decided only when a variation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect is identified, the change in color of the title letters to gold in the title display part of the low base strong reach A and B effects confirms development into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect.

Furthermore, in a configuration that includes a variation pattern that results in a jackpot without developing into another super reach effect after the execution of a low base weak reach A or B effect, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, the execution of a title color change effect may be decided at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified, and the color of the title letters in the title display part of the low base strong reach A or B effect may change to indicate the high possibility of a jackpot. Also, in such a configuration, execution (gold) may be decided only when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, and a jackpot may be confirmed when the color of the title letters in the title display part of the low base strong reach A or B effect changes to gold.

As shown in Figure 11-54 (C), in the preview effect determination process, if a variation pattern that results in a miss from a normal reach effect or a variation pattern that develops from a normal reach effect to a low-base weak reach A or B effect is identified, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute operation prompt effect A. In this case, if a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified, there is a 50% chance that it will not be executed, and a 50% chance that it will be executed. Furthermore, if a variation pattern that develops into a low-base weak reach A or B effect is identified, there is a 100% chance that it will be executed. In this way, execution is always decided when a variation pattern that develops into a low-base weak reach A or B effect is identified, and execution may also be decided when a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified. Therefore, executing operation prompt effect A in a normal reach effect suggests the possibility of it developing into a low-base weak reach A or B effect.

As shown in Figure 11-54 (D), in the preview effect determination process, if a variation pattern is identified in which the result of the low base weak reach A or B effect is a miss, or a variation pattern in which the low base weak reach A or B effect develops into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect, it is determined whether to display a small operation prompt image or a large operation prompt image. In this case, if a variation pattern in which the result is a miss is identified, a small operation prompt image is determined 90% of the time, and a large operation prompt image is determined 10% of the time. Furthermore, if a variation pattern in which the result develops into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect is identified, a small operation prompt image is determined 10% of the time, and a large operation prompt image is determined 90% of the time. In this way, when a fluctuation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect is identified, the large operation prompt image is determined at a higher rate than when a fluctuation pattern that results in a miss is identified. Therefore, when a large operation prompt image is displayed in operation prompt effect B at the end of the introductory part of a low base weak reach A or B effect, it is suggested that there is a higher possibility of the effect developing into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect than when a small operation prompt image is displayed.

As shown in Figure 11-54 (E), in the preview effect determination process, when a variation pattern in which a low-base strong reach A-C effect or a low-base strongest reach effect is executed is identified, a determination is made as to whether to execute operation prompt effect C, and whether to display cut-in image (A) or cut-in image (B) if operation prompt effect C is executed. In this case, when a variation pattern in which the effect result is a miss is identified, non-execution is determined 50% of the time, execution (cut-in image (A)) is determined 30% of the time, and execution (cut-in image (B)) is determined 20% of the time. Furthermore, when a variation pattern in which the effect result is a jackpot is identified, non-execution is determined 5% of the time, execution (cut-in image (A)) is determined 30% of the time, and execution (cut-in image (B)) is determined 65% of the time. In this way, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, the execution of operation prompt effect C is determined at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified, and therefore, the execution of operation prompt effect C at the end of the introductory part of the low base strong reach A-C effects suggests that there is a high possibility of a jackpot. Furthermore, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, the cut-in image (B) out of cut-in image (A) and cut-in image (B) is displayed at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified, and therefore, the operation prompt effect C is executed at the end of the introductory part of the low base strong reach A-C effects, and it suggests that there is a higher possibility of a jackpot when cut-in image (B) is displayed than when cut-in image (A) is displayed.

As shown in Figure 11-54 (F), in the preview effect determination process, when a variation pattern in which a low-base strong reach A-C effect or a low-base strongest reach effect is executed is identified, it is determined whether to display a small operation prompt image or a large operation prompt image. In this case, when a variation pattern in which the effect result is a miss is identified, a small operation prompt image is determined 90% of the time, and a large operation prompt image is determined 10% of the time. Furthermore, when a variation pattern in which the effect result is a jackpot is identified, a small operation prompt image is determined 10% of the time, and a large operation prompt image is determined 90% of the time. In this way, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, the large operation prompt image is determined at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified. Therefore, when a large operation prompt image is displayed in operation prompt image D at the end of the introductory part of the low base strong reach A-C effects and the low base strongest reach effect, it is suggested that there is a higher chance of a jackpot than when a small operation prompt image is displayed.

[About the explanatory text display]
FIG. 11-55 is a diagram showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display performance, and FIG. 11-56 is a timing chart showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display performance.

During the prologue display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects, the effect control CPU 120 displays the ally character "Yume Yume" as shown in Figures 11-55 (A) to (I), and then enlarges and displays the ally character "Yume Yume" until the entire display area is filled.When an explanatory text display effect is performed during the prologue display period, the explanatory characters that make up the explanatory text, "Surprise!", "Peach tree", and "Great luck!", are displayed in order on a layer in front of the background that the ally character "Yume Yume" enlarges and displays. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 first displays the explanatory text "Surprise!", moving it quickly from the right side of the display area toward the center and to the left (Fig. 11-56(t1)), as shown in Fig. 11-55(A), then, when it reaches the center, moves it slowly to the left (Fig. 11-56(t2)), as shown in Fig. 11-55(B), and then, as shown in Fig. 11-55(C), moves it quickly again to the left until it disappears from the display area (Fig. 11-56(t3)).

Next, as shown in Figure 11-55(D), the performance control CPU 120 displays the explanatory text "Peach Tree" while moving it quickly to the left from the right side of the display area toward the center (Figure 11-56(t4)), and when it reaches the center, as shown in Figure 11-55(E), it displays it while moving it slowly to the left (Figure 11-56(t5)), and then, as shown in Figure 11-55(F), it displays it while moving it quickly to the left again until it disappears from the display area (Figure 11-56(t6)).

Next, as shown in Figure 11-55(G), the performance control CPU 120 displays the explanatory text "Lucky!" while moving it quickly to the left from the right side of the display area toward the center (Figure 11-56(t7)), and when it reaches the center, as shown in Figure 11-55(H), it displays it while moving it slowly to the left (Figure 11-56(t8)), and then, as shown in Figure 11-55(I), it displays it while moving it quickly to the left again until it disappears from the display area (Figure 11-56(t9)).

[About the title color change effect]
FIG. 11-57 is a diagram showing the execution status of the title color change effect, and FIG. 11-58 is a diagram showing the timing at which the color of the title characters changes in the title color change effect.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a title color change effect in which the white title text changes to red or gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects.

During the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the effect control CPU 120 causes some of the white title characters to appear from the left side of the display area during the title start period, move toward a fixed position, and stop them in that position. Then, during the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 displays the white title characters stationary in their fixed positions, as shown in Figure 11-57(A). Then, if the execution of a title color change effect has not been determined, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound from speakers 8L and 8R after time t1 has elapsed since the start of the title display period, and maintains the white title characters stationary in their fixed positions, as shown in Figures 11-57(B) and (C). Then, during the title end period, the white title characters displayed in their fixed positions move from their fixed positions to the right side of the display area until all of the title characters disappear.

On the other hand, if the execution of a title color change effect has been determined, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound from speakers 8L and 8R after time t1 has elapsed since the start of the title display period, and changes the title characters displayed in their fixed positions to appear to glow, as shown in Figure 11-57(D). After time t2 has elapsed, if a change to red has been determined, the title characters change to red, as shown in Figure 11-57(E). If a change to gold has been determined, the title characters change to gold, as shown in Figure 11-57(F). Thereafter, during the title end period, the title characters are moved from their fixed positions to the right side of the display area, maintaining the changed color displayed in their fixed positions, until all of the title characters have disappeared. If the title characters change from appearing to glow to red or gold, the title characters change to red or gold when the light on the title characters clears.

As shown in Figures 11-58 (A) and (B), the presentation time T1 of the title start period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B presentations is set to 500 ms, the presentation time T2 of the title display period is set to 2200 ms, and the presentation time T3 of the title end period is set to 300 ms. During the title display period, the time t1 from the start of the title display period to the title characters changing to a state where they appear to glow is set to 800 ms, the time t2 from the title characters changing to a state where they appear to glow to the title characters changing to red or gold is set to 200 ms, and the time t3 from the title characters changing to red or gold to the end of the title display period is set to 1200 ms.

For this reason, as shown in Figure 11-58 (C), when the color of the title characters changes from white to red or gold, the time (t3) during which the title characters are displayed in their changed red or gold form during the title display period is longer than the time (t1) during which the title characters are displayed in their white form during the title display period, and the time (t3 + T3) during which the title characters are displayed in their changed red or gold form during the title display part is longer than the time (T1 + t1) during which the title characters are displayed in their white form during the title display part.

[About Operation Promotion A]
Figure 11-59 shows the execution status of operation promotion presentation A.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute operation prompt effect A, which prompts the player to operate the push button 31B, during normal reach effects.

When it has been decided to execute operation prompt effect A, as shown in Figures 11-59 (A) and (B), during the execution of a normal reach effect in which the decorative pattern (large) is in a reach state, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompt image (small) consisting of a button image (small) that resembles the push button 31B and operation prompt text (small) "Press!" that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B.

The button image (small) has a remaining time meter that indicates the remaining time of the valid period during which operation of the push button 31B is valid. If operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches 0, or if the remaining time meter reaches 0, the effect control CPU 120 executes a whiteout effect in which the entire display area is displayed in white, as shown in Figure 11-59 (C), and then executes a low base weak reach A or B effect, as shown in Figure 11-59 (D).

On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern that results in a loss, the performance control CPU 120 erases the operation prompt image (small) and stops the decorative pattern (large) in a loss state, as shown in Figure 11-59 (E).

[About Operation Promotion Presentation B]
Figure 11-60 shows the execution status of operation promotion presentation B.

In low-base weak reach A and B effects, the effect control CPU 120 can execute operation prompt effect B, which prompts the player to operate the push button 31B, at the end of the introductory part.

When the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute operation prompt performance B and to display a small operation prompt image, it displays a small operation prompt image consisting of a small button image resembling push button 31B and small operation prompt text "Press!" encouraging the player to operate push button 31B at the end of the introductory part, as shown in Figure 11-60 (A).

Furthermore, when the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute operation prompt performance B and to display an operation prompt image (large), it displays an operation prompt image (large) at the end of the introductory part, as shown in Figures 11-60(B) and (C), which is an image resembling push button 31B and is larger than the small button image, and which consists of operation prompt text (large) "PRESS!" encouraging the player to operate push button 31B. In this case, unlike when displaying an operation prompt image (small), the performance control CPU 120 displays multiple button images (large) with a transparent background and combines these multiple button images (large) into a single large button image, and then displays an operation prompt image (large) consisting of a button image (large) and operation prompt text (large) "PRESS!" encouraging the player to operate push button 31B.

Both the small button image and the large button image have a remaining time meter formed on them, and if the operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches 0, or if the remaining time meter reaches 0, and the fluctuation pattern develops into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 erases the small operation prompt image or large operation prompt image as shown in Figure 11-60 (D) and executes a drop effect in which the movable body 32 falls, and then executes a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect as shown in Figure 11-60 (E).

On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern that results in a loss, the performance control CPU 120 erases the small operation prompt image or large operation prompt image, as shown in Figure 11-60 (F), and executes a blackout performance in which the entire display area goes dark, and then notifies the player of a loss as the performance result, as shown in Figure 11-60 (G).

[About operation promotion effect C]
Figure 11-61 is a diagram showing the execution status of operation prompting effect C.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute operation prompt effect C, which prompts the player to operate the push button 31B, in the middle of the introductory part of the low-base strong reach A-C effects and the low-base strongest reach effect.

When it has been decided to execute operation prompting effect C, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting image (small) consisting of a button image (small) resembling the push button 31B and operation prompting text (small) "Press!" encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B in the middle of the introductory part, as shown in Figures 11-61 (A) and (B).

The performance control CPU 120 has determined that a cut-in image (A) will be displayed. If operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches zero, the operation prompt image (small) is erased as shown in Figure 11-61(C), and a cut-in image (A) showing the ally character "Nana" is displayed, and then the introductory part continues as shown in Figure 11-61(F).

The performance control CPU 120 also determines that a cut-in image (B) will be displayed. If operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches zero, the operation prompt image (small) is erased as shown in Figure 11-61 (D), and a cut-in image (B) showing the ally character "Jam" is displayed, and then the introductory part continues as shown in Figure 11-61 (F).

In addition, whether it has been determined that cut-in image (A) or cut-in image (B) should be displayed, if operation of push button 31B is not detected before the remaining time meter reaches zero, the performance control CPU 120 will erase the operation prompt image (small) while continuing the performance of the middle part of the introductory part, as shown in Figure 11-61 (E), and will continue the introductory part as shown in Figure 11-61 (F).

[Regarding Operation Promotion Effects D]
Figure 11-62 is a diagram showing the execution status of operation prompting effect D.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute operation prompt effect D, which prompts the player to operate the push button 31B, at the end of the introductory part of the low-base strong reach A-C effects and the low-base strongest reach effect.

When it has been determined that a small operation prompt image should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays a small operation prompt image consisting of a small button image resembling the push button 31B and small operation prompt text "Press!" encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B at the end of the introductory part, as shown in Figures 11-62 (A) and (B).

Furthermore, when it has been determined that a large operation prompt image will be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays a large operation prompt image at the end of the introductory part, as shown in Figures 11-62(A)(G), which is an image resembling push button 31B and is larger than the small button image, and which consists of large operation prompt text "Press!" encouraging the player to operate push button 31B. Unlike when a small operation prompt image is displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays multiple large button images with a transparent background and performs a promotional introduction performance (see Figure 11-60(B)) in which these multiple large button images are combined into a single large button image, and then displays a large operation prompt image consisting of a large button image and large operation prompt text "Press!" encouraging the player to operate push button 31B.

If the operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches 0, or if the variation pattern indicates a jackpot when the remaining time meter reaches 0, the effect control CPU 120 executes a rainbow effect in which a rainbow pattern swirls across the entire display area while the operation prompt image (small) or operation prompt image (large) gradually disappears, as shown in Figure 11-62 (C) (H), and then announces a jackpot as the effect result, as shown in Figure 11-62 (D) (I).

On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern that results in a loss, the performance control CPU 120 erases the small operation prompt image or the large operation prompt image, as shown in Figure 11-62 (E) (J), and executes a blackout performance in which the entire display area goes dark, and then notifies the player of a loss as the performance result, as shown in Figure 11-62 (F) (K).

[About the operation promotion image]
11-63 is a diagram showing the display mode of the operation prompt image. The performance control CPU 120 displays the button images that make up the operation prompt image (small) and the operation prompt image (large) while continuously moving alternately left and right as shown in FIG. 11-63(A), and while continuously changing between a state in which the button is not pressed and a state in which the button is pressed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-63(B), the interval at which the button image moves left and right is different from the interval at which the button changes from a state in which the button is not pressed to a state in which the button is pressed. Therefore, the movement of the button image moving left and right and the movement at which the button changes from a state in which the button is not pressed to a state in which the button is pressed are not synchronized, resulting in a complex movement.

[About the jackpot start effect]
Figure 11-64 shows the execution status of the jackpot start effect.

As shown in Figure 11-64 (A), after the decorative symbol (large) stops in a jackpot state, the effect control CPU 120 executes the jackpot start effect when it receives a jackpot start command that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of the jackpot game state.

As shown in Figures 11-64(B) to (G), the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image of flickering flames as the background during the jackpot start presentation, and as shown in Figure 11-64(B), first displays the first half of the jackpot title "BIG BONUS (REG BONUS)" - "BIG (REG)" - in an enlarged size, and then, as shown in Figure 11-64(C), gradually reduces the first half of the title "BIG (REG)" until it is reduced in size so that the entire title is visible in the display area, and displays it in a fixed position near the top center of the display area.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-64(D), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the latter half of the title letters "BONUS" in the title letters "BIG BONUS (REG BONUS)" in an enlarged size, and then, as shown in Figure 11-64(E), gradually reduces the size of the latter half of the title letters "BONUS" until it is reduced so that the entire latter half is visible in the display area, and displays it in its usual position below the center of the display area (below the first half of the title letters "BIG").

In this embodiment, if the jackpot type is a 6-round jackpot game state, the title text will be "REG BONUS," and if the jackpot type is a 10-round jackpot game state, the title text will be "BIG BONUS."

Next, as shown in Figures 11-64(E) to (G), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the entire title text "BIG BONUS" in a fixed position, then gradually enlarges the title text "BIG BONUS", and then, as shown in Figure 11-64(H), starts the jackpot presentation and switches the display on the image display device 5 to the background of the jackpot game state.

When the performance control CPU 120 starts the jackpot performance, it first displays a right-hit promotion image (large) and a right-hit promotion image (small) to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, as shown in Figure 11-64 (H).

The right-hit promotion image (small) consists of the message "Right Hit" (small) that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and an arrow image (small) indicating the right direction. As shown in Figures 11-64 (H) (I), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the right-hit promotion image (small) in a position toward the top right of the display area from the start of the jackpot presentation until the end of the jackpot game state.

The right-hit promotion image (large) is a message encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R. It is composed of the message "Right Hit" (large), which is larger in size than the right-hit promotion image (small), and an arrow image (large), which is an arrow pointing to the right and is larger in size than the arrow image (small). As shown in Figures 11-64 (H) (I), the presentation control CPU 120 repeatedly displays the right-hit promotion image (large) in a manner that moves from the left side of the display area to the right side only for the first certain amount of time during the period from the start of the jackpot presentation until the end of the jackpot game state.

In addition, when the jackpot game state is entered, after the title text is displayed in the jackpot start effect, the effect switches to the jackpot mid-game, and a right-hit prompt image (small) and a right-hit prompt image (large) are displayed, suggesting the operation method for the jackpot game state (an operation method for shooting the game ball toward the right game area 2R). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 switches to the jackpot mid-game and displays the right-hit prompt image (small) and the right-hit prompt image (large) a predetermined time before the timing at which control is exercised on the main board 11 that gives an advantage by operating the game ball toward the right game area 2R. Therefore, a predetermined period of time after the right-hit prompt image (small) and the right-hit prompt image (large) are displayed, control is exercised that gives an advantage by operating the game ball toward the right game area 2R.

In addition, after the title characters are displayed during the jackpot start effect, when the jackpot start effect ends, the title characters are erased, and a switch is made to the next effect, the effect control CPU 120 erases the title characters of the jackpot start effect and switches to the next effect in a shorter time than when the title characters are erased during the title end period in the title display part of the super reach effect.

In particular, after the presentation control CPU 120 displays the title text in the jackpot start presentation, it switches to the jackpot mid-presentation in one frame (the smallest unit of image update) and displays a right-hit prompt image (small) and a right-hit prompt image (large). The title display portion of the super reach presentation is configured to erase the title text over a certain period of time, rather than one frame, by providing a title end period. However, if the title text is similarly erased over a certain period of time when the presentation switches to the jackpot mid-presentation and displays a right-hit prompt image (small) and a right-hit prompt image (large) after the title text is displayed in the jackpot start presentation, there is a risk that a player may attempt to launch the game ball toward the right play area 2R during the period in which the title text is being erased. However, if the game ball is launched toward the right play area 2R at this timing, the game ball will be wasted because the control that would be advantageous for launching the game ball toward the right play area 2R has not yet begun. In response to this, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the title text during the jackpot start presentation, and then switches to the jackpot mid-presentation in one frame (the smallest unit of image update) and displays the right hit prompt image (small) and right hit prompt image (large), thereby reducing the generation of wasted game balls.

[Display of remaining spins until Yu-time]
When the game control microcomputer 100 performs 900 variable displays without being controlled to a jackpot in a low probability state, it controls to a time-shortened state B (in this embodiment, a play time with 1100 time-shortened times) in which (1) time-shortened control is performed 1100 times and (2) low probability control is performed 1100 times.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can display on the image display device 5 the remaining number of times to reach rescue time reduction (hereinafter referred to as the remaining number of times until Yu-time) 131SG005Z (see Figure 11-1), which is the remaining variable display number of times until control is switched to time reduction state B (Yu-time).

As shown in Figure 11-65(A), in normal conditions when a normal reach effect, low base weak reach A or B effect, low base strong reach A-C effect, or low base strongest reach effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of times remaining until Yu-Time in the upper left corner of the display area. The number of times remaining until Yu-Time 131SG005Z is displayed as "XXX times remaining" (XXX is a number between 0 and 900 depending on the number of times remaining). In this case, whether the number of times remaining until Yu-Time is between 0 and 900, the number of times remaining until Yu-Time 131SG005Z is displayed in characters of the same font size.

As shown in Figure 11-65 (B), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to display the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time 131SG005Z even during the normal reach presentation in which the decorative symbol (large) is in a reach state.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-65(C), when a normal reach effect develops into a low base weak reach A or B effect, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until Yu-Time even while the low base weak reach A or B effect is being executed. In this case, as shown in Figures 11-65(D)(E), if a miss is announced as the result of the low base weak reach A or B effect, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until Yu-Time even after the low base weak reach A or B effect has ended.

In addition, the system is configured so that a jackpot can be announced as a result of the low base weak reach A and B effects, and when a jackpot is announced as a result of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the remaining number of times until Yu-time 131SG005Z continues to be displayed until the low base weak reach A and B effects end, and the remaining number of times until Yu-time 131SG005Z is erased at the end of the low base weak reach A and B effects. Furthermore, the remaining number of times until Yu-time 131SG005Z may be erased at the point when the content indicating that a jackpot has been confirmed as a result of the low base weak reach A and B effects is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-65(F), when a normal reach effect or a low base weak reach A or B effect develops into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z upon the start of the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect. In this case, if the effect develops from a normal reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z at the start of the selection effect. When developing from a low base weak reach A or B effect, if the effect is a low base strong reach A-C effect, the effect control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z along with the pending and active displays during the prologue display period of the title display part. In the case of a low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z at the start of the title display part.

Furthermore, when progressing from a low base weak reach A or B effect, the hold display and active display, as well as the remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z, can be erased at the timing when the drop effect begins as a result of the execution of operation prompt effect B (the timing shown in Figure 11-60 (D)). This allows the timing for erasing the hold display, active display, and remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z to be consistent regardless of whether the effect progresses to a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect.

Then, if a miss is announced as the result of the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 will display the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until Yu-Time again after the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect has ended, as shown in Figures 11-65(G)(H). On the other hand, if a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 will leave the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until Yu-Time is cleared until the next time the normal state is reached, as shown in Figures 11-65(I)(J).

Furthermore, if operation prompt effect A is configured to develop into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect in response to operation of push button 31B, remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z will continue to be displayed while operation prompt effect A is being executed, and remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z will be erased upon the start of the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect. With this configuration, remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z will be displayed in operation prompt effect A, but remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z will not be displayed in operation prompt effects C and D in the subsequent low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect.

[About the Yu-time start effect]
When the game control microcomputer 100 performs 900 variable display cycles without being controlled by a jackpot in a low probability state, it controls to time-shortened state B (Yu-time). At this time, the game control microcomputer 100 turns on the right-hit lamp 131SG132 and sends a right-hit LED lighting notification command, as shown in Figure 11-66 (C). After that, the performance control CPU 120 stops the variable display when the number of remaining cycles until Yu-time is 0, as shown in Figures 11-66 (A) and (B). Upon receiving the right-hit LED lighting notification command, it displays a right-hit promotion image (small) that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, as shown in Figure 11-66 (C). The timing for lighting the right hit lamp 131SG132 and the timing for displaying the right hit promotion image (small) are almost simultaneous, but the game control microcomputer 100 lights up the right hit lamp 131SG132 and then sends a right hit LED lighting notification command, and in response, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the right hit promotion image (small), so the right hit lamp 131SG132 lights up before the right hit promotion image (small) is displayed.

When time-saving state B (Yu-time) begins, the game control microcomputer 100 keeps the right-hit lamp 131SG132 lit until time-saving state B (Yu-time) ends. The right-hit promotion image (small) is composed of the message "Right Hit" (small) encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and an arrow image (small) indicating the right direction. As shown in Figures 11-66 (C) to (H), when time-saving state B (Yu-time) begins, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the right-hit promotion image (small) in a position toward the top right of the display area until time-saving state B (Yu-time) ends.

When the variable display stops and the number of remaining plays until Yu-Time is 0, and a game state designation command specifying time-saving state B (Yu-Time) is received, the effect control CPU 120 executes the Yu-Time start effect as shown in Figures 11-66 (D) to (G).

The Yu-Time start effect includes a title start period from when part of the Yu-Time title text "Yu-Time Entering" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed in its regular position, a title display period during which the title text "Yu-Time Entering" is displayed in its regular position, and a title end period from when the title text "Yu-Time Entering" that was displayed in its regular position disappears and switches to the Yu-Time effect.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title text "Entering Yu-Time" in the same manner as when it displays the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" during the title start period, title display period, and title end period of the Yu-Time start effect in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect.

Specifically, during the title start period, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Yu-time Enter" at an enlarged size so that only a portion of the characters is visible in the display area, as shown in Figure 11-66 (D). At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Yu-time Enter" so that the entire display area is filled with a portion of the title characters. Thereafter, the presentation control CPU 120 gradually reduces the title characters "Yu-time Enter" as shown in Figures 11-66 (D) (E), and freezes the title characters "Yu-time Enter" in a fixed position at a reduced size so that all of the characters are visible in the display area.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title text "Yu-time Enters" in a reduced size at a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to the title display period. During the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 displays the title text "Yu-time Enters" in a fixed position and stops it there, as shown in Figures 11-66 (E) and (F).

After the title display period ends, the presentation control CPU 120 transitions to the display of the title end period. During the title end period, as shown in Figures 11-66 (F) (G), the presentation control CPU 120 enlarges the title characters "Yu-Time Entering", which are displayed in a reduced size and at a fixed position, until the entire display area is filled with parts of the title characters "Yu-Time Entering". In this case, the title characters "Yu-Time Entering" are not enlarged in the opposite manner to when the title characters "Yu-Time Entering" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, but are enlarged in a manner different from the reverse manner to when the title characters "Yu-Time Entering" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, until the entire display area is filled with parts of the title characters "Yu-Time Entering". In other words, the trajectory taken by each part of the title characters as they shrink during the title start period is different from the trajectory taken by each part of the title characters as they expand during the title end period. Therefore, the display area is completely filled with part of the title text "Entering Yu-Time," which is different from the way the display area is completely filled at the start of the title start period. After that, as shown in Figure 11-66 (H), the background changes to the Yu-Time effect, and the Yu-Time effect begins.

During the Yu-Time start effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays a right-hit promotion image (large) that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, in addition to the right-hit promotion image (small), and also displays an addiction warning image (message "Be careful not to get addicted!") below the display area.

The right-hit promotion image (large) is a message encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R. It is composed of the message "Right Hit" (large), which is larger in size than the right-hit promotion image (small), and an arrow image (large), which is an arrow pointing to the right and is larger in size than the arrow image (small). The effect control CPU 120 repeatedly displays the right-hit promotion image (large) in a manner that moves from the left side to the right side of the display area throughout the period during which the Yu-time start effect is being executed, as shown in Figures 11-66 (D) to (G).

In addition, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to time-saving state B, and if the variable display result is a miss, it selects variable pattern PA1-4 with a special chart variable time of 500 ms to perform variable display, and is controlled to time-saving state B, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, it selects variable pattern PB1-18 with a special chart variable time of 500 ms + 15,000 ms to perform variable display, and the presentation control CPU 120 is configured to execute the Yu-time start presentation during the period when variable display according to these variable patterns is being performed when control of time-saving state B begins, but the game control microcomputer The microcomputer 100 may be configured to select a time-saving B start variable pattern having a variable time longer than that of variable pattern PA1-4 and corresponding to the Yu-Time start effect when the first variable display controlled to time-saving state B, i.e., when the first variable display based on the first game ball entering the first or second start winning slot after control is set to time-saving state B, results in a miss, and the effect control CPU 120 executes the Yu-Time start effect during the period when the variable display based on the time-saving B start variable pattern is being displayed in the first variable display controlled to time-saving state B. In this configuration, if the first variable display controlled to time-saving state B results in a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable display using variable pattern PB1-18, which has a special symbol variable time of 500 ms + 15,000 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the Yu-Time start effect and stops the decorative symbol (large) in a jackpot mode.

[Title characters, etc. 1]
Figure 11-67 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the title characters of the title display part in the super reach effect, the explanatory characters of the explanatory text display effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompting characters (small) in the operation prompting effect (small), and the operation prompting characters (large) in the operation prompting effect (large).

As shown in Figure 11-67 (A), the title characters of the Super Reach effect are displayed in a stationary state during the title display period, with the background image being either a still image (low base strong reach B and C effects, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A-D effects) or a moving image (low base weak reach A and B effects, low base strong reach A effect). Furthermore, the number of characters in the title characters of the Super Reach effect is 7 to 13, the display time of the title characters of the Super Reach effect (the time from when all the characters making up the title characters are displayed until at least a portion of the characters are no longer displayed) is LR, the font size of the title characters of the Super Reach effect is FR, and the display area size in which the title characters of the Super Reach effect are displayed is ER.

As shown in Figure 11-67(A), the explanatory text is displayed in an active state, with the background image being an active image. The number of explanatory text characters is 3 to 6, the display time (the time from when all characters constituting the explanatory text are displayed until at least a portion of the character string is no longer displayed) of the explanatory text (one of the three explanatory text characters) is LS, the font size of the explanatory text is FS, and the display area size in which the explanatory text (one of the three explanatory text characters) is displayed is ES.

As shown in Figure 11-67 (A), the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed in an animated state, and the background image at that time is an animated image. The title characters of the jackpot start effect have eight characters, the display time of the title characters of the jackpot start effect (the time from when all the characters making up the title characters are displayed until at least a portion of the characters are no longer displayed) is LB, the font size of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is FB, and the size of the display area in which the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed is EB.

As shown in Figure 11-67 (A), the operation prompt text (small) is displayed in an operating state, and the background image at that time is an operation image. The operation prompt text (small) contains three characters, the display time of the operation prompt text (small) (the valid operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompt text (small) is displayed without the push button 31B being operated) is L1P, the font size of the operation prompt text (small) is F1P, and the display area size in which the operation prompt text (small) is displayed is E1P.

As shown in Figure 11-67 (A), the operation prompt text (large) is displayed in an operating state, and the background image at that time is the operation image. The operation prompt text (large) contains three characters, the display time of the operation prompt text (large) (the valid operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompt text (large) is displayed without the push button 31B being operated) is L2P, the font size of the operation prompt text (large) is F2P, and the display area size in which the operation prompt text (large) is displayed is E2P.

In this embodiment, when comparing the display times of the title character, explanatory character, title character, operation prompt character (small), and operation prompt character (large) of the super reach effect, as shown in Figure 11-67 (B), the display time LB of the title character of the jackpot start effect is longer than the display times LR, LS, L1P, and L2P of the title character, explanatory character, operation prompt character (small), and operation prompt character (large) of the super reach effect, the display time LR of the title character of the super reach effect is longer than the display times LS, L1P, and L2P of the explanatory character, operation prompt character (small), and operation prompt character (large), and the display times LS and L1P of the operation prompt character (small) and operation prompt character (large) are set longer than the display time LS of the explanatory character. Additionally, the display times LR, LB, L1P, and L2P for the title characters of the super reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt characters (small), and the operation prompt characters (large) are all set longer than the display time required for all three explanatory characters that make up the explanatory text display effect to be displayed. Furthermore, the relationship between these display times holds regardless of the type of super reach effect.

In this embodiment, when comparing the font sizes of the title characters, explanatory characters, title characters of the jackpot start effect, operation prompt characters (small), and operation prompt characters (large) of the super reach effect, as shown in Figure 11-67 (C), the font size F2P of the operation prompt characters (large) is larger than the font sizes FR, FS, FB, and F1P of the title characters, explanatory characters, title characters of the jackpot start effect, and operation prompt characters (small) of the super reach effect. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (large) is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters, explanatory characters, title characters of the super reach effect, title characters, operation prompt characters (small), and operation prompt characters (large).

Furthermore, the font size FB of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the font sizes FR and F1P of the title characters, explanatory characters, and small operation prompt characters of the Super Reach effect. Furthermore, the title characters "BIG BONUS" of the jackpot start effect are first displayed with the first half "BIG" at the top of the fixed position, followed by the second half "BONUS" at the bottom of the fixed position, and then the title characters "BIG BONUS" are gradually enlarged. When the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the fixed position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, the size of the characters comprising the title characters "BIG BONUS" is at its smallest. In this configuration, when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the fixed position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, the size of the title characters of the jackpot start effect when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the fixed position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position is larger than the size of the title characters, explanatory characters, and small operation prompt characters of the Super Reach effect. Furthermore, when the first half of "BIG" is displayed above the fixed position and the second half of "BONUS" is displayed below the fixed position, the size of the smallest character that makes up the title of the jackpot start effect is larger than the size of the largest character that makes up the title, explanation character, operation prompt character (small), and operation prompt character (large) of the super reach effect.

In addition, the font size FR of the title characters of the Super Reach effect is larger than the font sizes FS and F1P of the explanatory characters and operation prompt characters (small). Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Super Reach effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the explanatory characters and operation prompt characters (small).

Furthermore, the font size FS of the explanatory characters is larger than the font size F1P of the operation prompt characters (small). Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the explanatory characters is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small).

Furthermore, these font size and character size relationships apply regardless of the type of Super Reach performance.

In this embodiment, when comparing the display area sizes of the title characters, explanatory characters, title characters, operation prompt characters (small), and operation prompt characters (large) of the super reach effect, as shown in Figure 11-67 (D), the display area size E2P of the operation prompt characters (large) is larger than the display area sizes ER, ES, EB, and E1P of the title characters, explanatory characters, title characters, and operation prompt characters (small) of the super reach effect. Furthermore, the display area size EB of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the display area sizes ER, ES, and E1P of the title characters, explanatory characters, and operation prompt characters (small) of the super reach effect. Furthermore, the display area size ES of the explanatory characters is larger than the display area size E1P of the operation prompt characters (small). Furthermore, these display area size relationships hold regardless of the type of super reach effect.

[Title characters, etc. 2]
Figure 11-68 is a diagram showing one aspect of the relationship between the title characters of the title display part in the super reach performance, the title characters of the jackpot start performance, the operation prompt characters (small) in the operation prompt performance (small), the operation prompt characters (large) in the operation prompt performance (large), the title characters of the Yu-time start performance, and the remaining number characters that make up the number of times remaining until Yu-time.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the title characters in the Super Reach effect (the time from when all the characters making up the title characters are displayed until at least part of the characters are no longer displayed) is LR, the font size of the title characters in the Super Reach effect is FR, and the size of the display area in which the title characters in the Super Reach effect are displayed is ER.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the title characters of the jackpot start effect (the time from when all the characters making up the title characters are displayed until at least part of the characters are no longer displayed) is LB, the font size of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is FB, and the size of the display area in which the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed is EB.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the operation prompt character (small) (the valid operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompt character (small) is displayed even if the push button 31B is not operated) is L1P, the font size of the operation prompt character (small) is F1P, and the display area size in which the operation prompt character (small) is displayed is E1P.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the operation prompt character (large) (the valid operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompt character (large) is displayed even if the push button 31B is not operated) is L2P, the font size of the operation prompt character (large) is F2P, and the display area size in which the operation prompt character (large) is displayed is E2P.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect (the time from when all the characters making up the title characters are displayed until at least a part of the characters are no longer displayed) is LY, the font size of the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect is FY, and the size of the display area in which the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect are displayed is EY.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the font size of the remaining number of plays until Yu-time is FZ, and the size of the display area in which the remaining number of plays until Yu-time is displayed is EZ.

In this embodiment, when comparing the font sizes of the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt character (small), the operation prompt character (large), the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect, and the characters for the number of times remaining until Yu-Time, as shown in Figure 11-68 (B), the font size F2P of the operation prompt character (large) is larger than the font sizes FR, FB, F1P, FY, and FZ of the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt character (small), the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect, and the characters for the number of times remaining until Yu-Time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters composing the operation prompt character (large) is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters composing the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt character (small), the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect, and the characters for the number of times remaining until Yu-Time (XXX times remaining (X is a number between 0 and 900)). Additionally, the size of the smallest character that makes up the operation prompt character (large) is larger than the size of the largest character that makes up the remaining number of times until Yu-time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until Yu-time is between 0 and 900.

Furthermore, the font size FB of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the font sizes FR, F1P, FY, and FZ of the title characters of the super reach effect, the operation prompt characters (small), the title characters of the Yu-time start effect, and the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters composing the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters composing the title characters of the super reach effect, the operation prompt characters (small), the title characters of the Yu-time start effect, and the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters composing the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters composing the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until Yu-time is between 0 and 900.

Furthermore, the font size FY of the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect is larger than the font sizes FR, F1P, and FZ of the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the operation prompt characters (small), and the remaining number of times until Yu-Time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the operation prompt characters (small), and the remaining number of times until Yu-Time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the remaining number of times until Yu-Time, regardless of whether the remaining number of times until Yu-Time is 0 to 900.

Furthermore, the font size FR of the title characters of the Super Reach effect is larger than the font sizes F1P and FZ of the operation prompt characters (small) and the remaining number of times until Yu-Time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Super Reach effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small) and the remaining number of times until Yu-Time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Super Reach effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the remaining number of times until Yu-Time, regardless of whether the remaining number of times until Yu-Time is 0 to 900.

Furthermore, the font size F1P of the operation prompt characters (small) is larger than the font size FZ of the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small) is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small) is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until Yu-time is 0 to 900.

Furthermore, these font size and character size relationships apply regardless of the type of Super Reach performance.

In this embodiment, when comparing the display area sizes of the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt character (small), the operation prompt character (large), the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect, and the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-Time, as shown in Figure 11-68 (C), the display area size E2P of the operation prompt character (large) is larger than the display area sizes ER, EB, E1P, EY, and EZ of the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt character (small), the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect, and the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-Time. Furthermore, the display area size EB of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the display area sizes ER, E1P, EY, and EZ of the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the operation prompt character (small), the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect, and the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-Time. Furthermore, the display area size EY of the title character of the Yu-Time start effect is larger than the display area sizes ER, E1P, and EZ of the title character, operation prompt character (small), and remaining number of times until Yu-Time of the Super Reach effect. Furthermore, the display area size ER of the title character of the Super Reach effect is larger than the display area sizes E1P and EZ of the operation prompt character (small) and remaining number of times until Yu-Time. Furthermore, the display area size E1P of the operation prompt character (small) is larger than the display area size EZ of the remaining number of times until Yu-Time. Furthermore, these display area size relationships hold regardless of the type of Super Reach effect.

In this version, when comparing the display time of the title characters for the Super Reach effect and the Yu-Time start effect, as shown in Figure 11-68 (D), the display time LY of the title characters for the Yu-Time start effect is set longer than the display time LR of the title characters for the Super Reach effect. Furthermore, this relationship between these display times holds regardless of the type of Super Reach effect.

Comparing the display modes of the title characters in the Super Reach effect and the Yu-Time start effect in this form, as shown in Figure 11-68 (E), in the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A-C effects, the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side of the display area to the center during the title start period, and are erased while moving from the center to the right side of the display area during the title end period. On the other hand, in the low base strongest reach effect and the Yu-Time start effect, the title characters are displayed while shrinking during the title start period, and are erased while expanding during the title end period.

[LED placement]
The game effect lamps 9 in this embodiment include frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4.

As shown in Figure 11-69, LED frames LWL1-LWL12 are arranged above the image display device 5 of the gaming machine frame 3 and surround the left side of the gaming area, while LED frames LWR2-LWR12 are arranged to surround the right side of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. Furthermore, LED logos LL1-LL4 are positioned corresponding to the "POWERFUL II" logo formed on the front of the movable body 32. Furthermore, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 are arranged in positions corresponding to the decorative parts formed on the gaming area 2L. Furthermore, attacca lamps LA1-LA4 are arranged in positions near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

The frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 are full-color LEDs made up of RGB (red, green, blue) light-emitting elements. The logo LEDs LL1-LL4 are red LEDs that can emit a single red light, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 are white LEDs that can emit a single white light.

[Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)]
Figure 11-70 is a diagram illustrating the mechanism for outputting data to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 outputs brightness data to the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver) for turning on, blinking, or extinguishing one or more of the LEDs included in the game effect lamp 9. Hereinafter, the control of turning on, blinking, or extinguishing lamps such as LEDs by the effect control CPU 120 is also referred to as lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the effect control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 that is the target of lamp control to turn on, blink, or extinguish the lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on, blink, or extinguish based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

More specifically, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 stores a brightness data table containing brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9. The brightness data table includes an error brightness data table used when an error occurs, an SP reach brightness data table used during a super reach, and a background brightness data table.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in the low-probability, low-base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in the fanfare state in which a fanfare effect is executed, a jackpot background brightness data table used during a round in the jackpot gaming state, an ending background brightness data table used in the ending state in which an ending effect is executed to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a time-saving background brightness data table used in the low-probability, high-base state (time-saving state).

The above-mentioned background brightness data tables are used without overlapping, and one of the background brightness data tables is used depending on which of the multiple game states, such as normal state, fanfare state, jackpot game state, ending state, and time-saving state, is controlled. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background brightness data tables for each game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data based on that background brightness data table to the LED driver. This allows each game effect lamp 9 to be controlled depending on the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, a priority is set for each of the error brightness data table, SP reach brightness data table, and background brightness data table. Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-70, the error brightness data table, SP reach brightness data table, and background brightness data table have the highest priority when used.

For example, if the Super Reach effect develops while outputting brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table in the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 uses the SP Reach brightness data table corresponding to the Super Reach effect in preference to the normal background brightness data table, and outputs brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, if the Super Reach effect develops while the game effect lamps 9 are being lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background brightness data table, the game effect lamps 9 are lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the Super Reach effect based on the SP Reach brightness data table. Note that while brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is being output to the LED driver, brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. However, when the Super Reach effect ends and the state returns to normal, brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is output to the LED driver. If a jackpot is hit and the fanfare state is entered, brightness data based on the fanfare background brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the presentation control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the game state being controlled, while outputting brightness data to the LED driver using the background brightness data table corresponding to that game state being controlled. However, if the effect progresses to a Super Reach effect, the SP Reach brightness data table corresponding to that Super Reach effect is used preferentially over the background brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the lamp control time using the background brightness data table. In other words, even while the presentation control CPU 120 is controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP Reach brightness data table, it continues to update the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table. However, because the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the SP Reach brightness data table, the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. Then, after the Super Reach effect ends, the effect control CPU 120 begins outputting the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table to the LED driver again, starting from the continuation of the brightness data that was being updated.

Furthermore, for example, if an error occurs while outputting brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table during a Super Reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 uses the error brightness data table corresponding to the error in preference to the SP Reach brightness data table, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver based on the error brightness data table. As a result, if an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is being lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the Super Reach effect based on the SP Reach brightness data table, the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error brightness data table. Note that while brightness data based on the error brightness data table is being output to the LED driver, brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but when the error is cleared and the game returns to a gaming state during a Super Reach effect, brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the currently controlled Super Reach effect, while outputting brightness data to the LED driver using the SP Reach brightness data table corresponding to that Super Reach effect. However, if an error occurs, the error brightness data table corresponding to that error is used in preference to the SP Reach brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the lamp control time using the SP Reach brightness data table. In other words, even while the effect control CPU 120 is controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error brightness data table, it continues to update the brightness data contained in the SP Reach brightness data table. However, because the brightness data contained in the SP Reach brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the error brightness data table, the brightness data contained in the SP Reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. After the error is resolved, the performance control CPU 120 resumes outputting the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table to the LED driver, starting from the continuation of the brightness data that it had been updating.

[Lighting mode of game effect lamp]
In this embodiment, the lamps of each game effect lamp 9 are controlled by the output of brightness data to the LED driver by the performance control CPU 120 as described above. In this embodiment, terms such as "off,""almostoff,""on," and "flashing" are used to describe the lighting of each game effect lamp 9. As described above, the "on" and "flashing" modes of each game effect lamp 9 are also referred to as "lighting modes."

The term "off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and its brightness is 0. The term "almost off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" as described below).

For example, if the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as brightness data is "000," the corresponding LED will be "off." Also, if the brightness data (RGB data) is "111," the corresponding LED will be lit in white at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of an LED when its RGB data is "111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

When the R (Red) data defined as the brightness data for logo LEDs LL1-LL4 is "0," logo LEDs LL1-LL4 are "off." Furthermore, when the brightness data (R data) for logo LEDs LL1-LL4 is "1," logo LEDs LL1-LL4 are lit at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of logo LEDs LL1-LL4 when their R data is "1" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

When the W (White) data, which is defined as the brightness data for decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, is "0," decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 are "off." Furthermore, when the brightness data (W data) for decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 is "1," decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 are lit at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of logo LEDs LL1-LL4 when their W data is "1" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

The term "lit" includes constant lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is always lit, wave lighting, in which the multiple lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in sequence, and hazy lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing brightness. Specifically, "lit" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any of "2" to "F." Note that brightness data is hexadecimal data that can be specified from "0" to "F," with "0" being no brightness, "1" being the lowest brightness, and "F" being the highest brightness.

The term "flashing" refers to a state of the game effect lamp 9 other than the above-mentioned "off" and "on" states, including states in which the brightness of each lamp alternates between a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. For example, "flashing" includes repeatedly turning on and off or nearly off, and specifically, "flashing" includes alternating over time between brightness data of "2" to "F" and brightness data of "0" or "1." As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the lamp lighting state includes hazy lighting. However, while hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing brightness, flashing differs from hazy lighting in that all of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 alternate between turning on and off or nearly off.

[Explanation about the game effect lamp]
Next, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to Figures 11-71 to 12-36.

[Regarding lamp control of game effect lamps using brightness data tables]
The CPU 120 for controlling the presentation uses a brightness data table stored in the ROM 121 to control the lamps to turn on/blink/turn off one or more of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 123 sets the sub-variation time in accordance with the variation pattern command sent from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by 1 every frame (33 ms) of the displayed image. When the sub-variation time reaches the timing to start displaying corresponding to each part (for example, various displays in each part of the super reach effect), the display control unit 123 controls the display of the image display device 5 based on the image data (video data, animation data) stored in ROM 121. The display control unit 123 sets an extension command (for example, extension command BXXX (where "X" is any alphanumeric character)) corresponding to the effect display (effect scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the display control it is performing, and sends the extension command to the effect control CPU 120. Based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the effect display (effect scene) for which display control is performed by the display control unit 123.

Figure 11-71 is a diagram illustrating an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in Figure 11-71, for example, when the display control unit 123 performs display control on the title display part of a low-base weak reach A effect, it sends an extension command (B421) to the effect control CPU 120 to specify the title display part of the low-base weak reach A effect. Based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table (weak reach common title (parent)) corresponding to the title display part of the low-base weak reach A effect.

The parent table stores information specifying which lamps (illuminated locations) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are subject to lamp control, information specifying the child table to be referenced during lamp control for the lamps subject to lamp control, and information specifying the maximum time for which lamp control is performed. Note that the parent table only stores information about lamps subject to lamp control; it does not store information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control.

For example, in the parent table shown in Figure 11-74, frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 (XD_A_LWU_1_B421), logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD_A_LLOGO_B421), decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD_A_LSLMP_B421), and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_A_LATAK_B421) are specified as targets for lamp control. Furthermore, a child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and 600,000 ms (600,000/10) is specified as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed by this child table. A child table: XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and 600,000 ms (600,000/10) is specified as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed by this child table. ) is specified, and child table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, with 600,000 ms (600,000/10) specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table, and child table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to attaka lamps LA1 to LA4, with 600,000 ms (600,000/10) specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table.

As shown in Figure 11-71, when the performance control CPU 120 controls a lamp specified in a parent table using a specified child table, for example, if 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time, it subtracts 1 from the counter every 10 ms to time this 600,000 ms (10 minutes). In other words, the performance control CPU 120 performs the counter subtraction process 60,000 times to time 600,000 ms (10 minutes). The performance control CPU 120 controls the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) has been timed. Furthermore, if the performance control CPU 120 receives a new extended command after receiving an extended command but before a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) has elapsed, it will stop the lamp control in progress and perform lamp control of the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table specified in the newly received extended command. Note that while it is not anticipated that a performance display (performance scene) will take 600,000 ms, the maximum time for lamp control using the child table is set to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for a performance display (performance scene). This means that even if the performance control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, it can continue the lamp control in progress for a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes).

The child table stores, for each lamp (illuminated location) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 that is the target of lamp control, information specifying the grandchild table to be referenced during lamp control and information specifying the execution time for lamp control, in the order in which each lamp control is performed.

For example, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and the execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and the grandchild table: The execution time for lamp control by the table is 500 ms, the execution time for lamp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table is 230 ms, and the execution time for lamp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table is 600,000 ms, which are specified as the order in which lamp control by these grandchild tables is executed.

In addition, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the following execution times are specified in the order in which lamp control by these grandchild tables will be performed: grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and lamp control by this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and lamp control by this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and lamp control by this grandchild table: 230 ms, and grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and lamp control by this grandchild table: 600,000 ms.

In addition, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the following execution time is specified for lamp control by grandchild table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table: 230 ms, and grandchild table: X_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table: 600,000 ms, in the order in which lamp control by these grandchild tables is executed:

In addition, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to the Attacka lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the following execution time is specified for grandchild table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and lamp control by this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and lamp control by this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and lamp control by this grandchild table: 230 ms, and grandchild table: X_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and lamp control by this grandchild table: 600,000 ms, in the order in which lamp control by these grandchild tables is executed.

As shown in Figure 11-71, when the performance control CPU 120 controls a target lamp using a grandchild table specified by a child table, it performs lamp control of the target lamp using the grandchild table specified first, measures the execution time corresponding to this grandchild table, and then performs lamp control of the target lamp using the grandchild table specified next, and repeats this process for all specified grandchild tables in the specified order. For example, in the case of the child table shown in Figure 11-75, for frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 until 500 ms is first measured, then lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until 500 ms is measured, then lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 until 230 ms is measured, and then lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until 600,000 ms is measured. It is not anticipated that a performance display (performance scene) will take 600,000 ms, but by setting the maximum lamp control time using the last specified grandchild table to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the performance display (performance scene), it is possible to continue the ongoing lamp control for up to 600,000 ms (10 minutes) even if the performance control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason.

In addition, in the child table, when frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are the targets of lamp control, one grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 may be specified as the grandchild table corresponding to frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, as shown in Figure 11-75, or two grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1 and XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1 may be specified as shown in Figure 11-75. When one grandchild table is designated as the grandchild table corresponding to the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the performance control CPU 120 uses this one grandchild table to perform the same lamp control for both the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12. On the other hand, when two grandchild tables are designated as the grandchild tables corresponding to the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the two grandchild tables to perform lamp control for the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, and uses the other grandchild table to perform lamp control for the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12. Therefore, when one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to frame LEDLWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2-LWR12, common lamp control is performed for frame LEDLWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2-LWR12, whereas when two grandchild tables are specified, individual lamp control is performed for frame LEDLWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2-LWR12.

The grandchild table stores, for each lamp (illuminated location) that is the subject of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, brightness data that is referenced during lamp control and information specifying the execution time for lamp control, in the order in which each lamp control is performed.

For example, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, corresponding to frame LED LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LED LWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1), the following is the data: brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 100 ms, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, The order in which lamp control using this brightness data is specified is: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms.

In addition, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the following are specified for logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1): brightness data: 0x0000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 100 ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms, in the order in which lamp control using this brightness data will be performed.

In addition, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the following values are specified for decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD___LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1): Brightness data: 0x00000, Execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 100 ms, Brightness data: 0x00000, Execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, Brightness data: 0x66666, Execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, Brightness data: 0x66666, Execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, Brightness data: 0x66666, Execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms, in the order in which lamp control using this brightness data will be performed.

In addition, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the following are specified for Attacka lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD___LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1): brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 100 ms, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms.

In the brightness data for the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1) in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL1, the values in the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL2 and LWR2, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL3 and LWR3, and the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL4 and LWR4. The values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL4 and LWR4, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL5 and LWR5, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL6 and LWR6, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL7 and LWR7, and the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL8 and LWR8.

Also, as in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-81, when different grandchild tables are specified for frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 (XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1) and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), in the brightness data for frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 (XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 represent the RGB values of frame LEDLWL1. the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL2, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL3, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL4, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL5, and the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL6, The values of the fourth to sixth lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL7, the values of the first to third lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL8, and in the brightness data of frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), the values of the first to third lowest digits of the data corresponding to number 2 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR2, and the values of the fourth to sixth lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR3. The values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR4, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR5, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR6, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR7, and the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR8.

Furthermore, in the brightness data for logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the value in the fourth lowest digit indicates the R (Red) value of logo LED LL1, the value in the third lowest digit indicates the R value of logo LED LL2, the value in the second lowest digit indicates the R value of logo LED LL3, and the value in the fourth lowest digit indicates the R value of logo LED LL4.

Furthermore, in the brightness data for decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the value in the fourth lowest digit indicates the W (White) value of decorative LED LS1, the value in the third lowest digit indicates the W value of decorative LED LS2, the value in the second lowest digit indicates the W value of decorative LED LS3, and the value in the fourth lowest digit indicates the W value of decorative LED LS4.

In the brightness data for Attacka Lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of Attacka Lamp LA1, the values in the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of Attacka Lamp LA2, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of Attacka Lamp LA3, and the values in the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of Attacka Lamp LA4.

The brightness data value corresponds to the current value output to the lamp being controlled. The frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 are composed of LEDs consisting of three elements: "R," "G," and "B." The brightness data for each element corresponds to the current value output to that element. Specifically, the brightness data has 16 current values ranging from 0 to F. When brightness data is 0, the current value is the minimum (e.g., 0), and when brightness data is F, the current value is the maximum. For example, when brightness data "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the "A" brightness data flows through the "R" element. When brightness data "1" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the "1" brightness data flows through the "G" element. When brightness data "F" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the "F" brightness data flows through the "G" element.

The frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 can emit light in various colors by passing current corresponding to brightness data through each RGB element. Furthermore, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 can light up in colors corresponding to each performance or character by emitting light based on brightness data. For example, when brightness data "F00" is output from an LED lamp to an LED, a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up red. Furthermore, when brightness data "F0F" is output from an LED lamp to an LED, a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up magenta. Furthermore, when brightness data "FF0" is output from an LED lamp to an LED, a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up yellow.

In addition, logo LEDs LL1-LL4 can emit red light at a brightness corresponding to the brightness data by passing a current corresponding to the brightness data through the R (Red) element, and decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 can emit white light at a brightness corresponding to the brightness data by passing a current corresponding to the brightness data equally through the three "R," "G," and "B" elements.

As shown in Figure 11-71, when the performance control CPU 120 controls the target lamp by referring to the brightness data in the grandchild table, it first outputs the specified brightness data to the LED driver, measures the execution time corresponding to this brightness data, and then outputs the next specified brightness data to the LED driver, and this process is carried out in the specified order for all specified brightness data. For example, in the child table shown in FIG. 11-75, for frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the following brightness data is output to the LED driver until 100 ms is first counted: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000. Then, until 120 ms is counted, the following brightness data is output to the LED driver: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000. Then, until 120 ms is counted, the following brightness data is output to the LED driver: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000. The CPU 120 outputs 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 to the LED driver, then outputs the following brightness data to the LED driver until 120 ms is reached: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, and then outputs 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA to the LED driver until 40 ms is reached. The LED driver then passes a current corresponding to the received brightness data through the specified LED. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 has timers corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and controls the lamps based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table by decrementing the timers at regular intervals (e.g., every 10 ms).

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table, and when it has completed outputting brightness data up to the last specified location in that grandchild table, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table still remains, it starts outputting brightness data again from the first specified location in that grandchild table. On the other hand, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table becomes 0 while the performance control CPU 120 is outputting brightness data based on a grandchild table, it sets a timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying that child table, and starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table specified by that child table. This switches the grandchild table, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table after the switch.

The timer management of child tables by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to the figure. Figure 11-72 is a diagram to explain an example of lamp control using a grandchild table with timer management of a child table. As shown in Figure 11-72, in child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, 500 ms is specified as the time when lamp control is first performed for frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 is specified, 500 ms is specified as the time when lamp control is second performed and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 is specified, 230 ms is specified as the time when lamp control is third performed and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 is specified, and 600,000 ms is specified as the time when lamp control is fourth performed and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 is specified. In the second and fourth grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, the brightness data (RGB data) for frame LED LWL1 to LWL12 is "0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499", "0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388", "0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499", "0x499388, 0x4995AA, It is specified to be executed at 100 ms intervals in the order "0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA." For ease of explanation, the luminance data for the first 100 ms will be referred to as data 1, the luminance data for the second 100 ms as data 2, the luminance data for the third 100 ms as data 3, and the luminance data for the fourth 100 ms as data 4.

When the performance control CPU 120 controls lamps for the second specified grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 of the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, it times the specified 500 ms by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms, and outputs the brightness data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until the time reaches 500 ms.However, if the time has not yet reached 500 ms after outputting data 1 to data 4, it again outputs the brightness data to the LED driver in order, starting with the first data 1. When the timer reaches 500 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, and begins outputting brightness data based on the next grandchild table specified by the child table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for the fourth specified grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 of the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, it times the specified 600,000 ms by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms, and outputs the brightness data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until the time reaches 600,000 ms.However, if the time has not yet reached 600,000 ms after outputting data 1 to data 4, it again outputs the brightness data to the LED driver in order, starting with the first data 1. When the time reaches 600,000 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2. At this time, because no next grandchild table is specified in the child table, it will begin outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1, which was specified first in the child table. However, unless some abnormality occurs, the time will not reach 600,000 ms, and if the next extension command is received from the display control unit 123 before the time reaches 600,000 ms, it will begin outputting brightness data based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table specified in the newly received extension command.

As shown in the parent table in Figure 11-74, the maximum lamp control time by a child table is specified as 600,000 ms (10 minutes), and this 10-minute data in the parent table serves as a malfunction countermeasure. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 switches parent tables to control lamps based on performance control commands from the main board 11, but even if a malfunction occurs while lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table and the performance control CPU 120 does not receive a performance control command from the main board 11, lamp control will be performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, preventing different lamps from being controlled one after another from the point where the malfunction occurred.

Furthermore, as shown in the child table in Figure 11-75, the execution time for lamp control by the last-specified grandchild table is specified as 600,000 ms (10 minutes).The 10-minute data in such a child table serves to prevent lamp control from being performed again by the first-specified grandchild table of the child table when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table reaches 0, due to the parent table's timer still remaining.

Furthermore, in the grandchild table, 600,000 ms (10 minutes) may be specified as the execution time for lamp control that references the last specified brightness data. This configuration prevents the 10-minute data in the brightness data from causing lamp control to be performed again using the brightness data specified first in the grandchild table when the timer corresponding to the grandchild table reaches 0, due to the child table's timer still remaining. By specifying 10-minute brightness data at the end of the grandchild table in this way, the lamp is maintained at a fixed light emission, preventing problems with continuous changes in lamp illumination. Furthermore, specifying brightness data spanning 600,000 ms (10 minutes) at the end of the grandchild table specified last in the child table can more effectively prevent problems with continuous changes in lamp illumination.

[Brightness data table used for Super Reach effects 1]
Figure 11-73 is a diagram showing a brightness data table used in the super reach effect.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and as shown in Figure 11-73, whether the effect control CPU 120 is executing a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect, in the title display part it controls the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 using a common weak reach common title that defines the lighting mode of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects as a brightness data table.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the low base weak reach A or B effect, it executes a title color change effect in the title display part, and when changing the title characters to red, it controls the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 using the common title common chance up red, which defines the light emission mode when changing the title characters to red in the title color change effect, as a brightness data table, whether in the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect or the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect. In addition, when the title color change effect is executed in the title display part and changing the title characters to gold, it controls the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 using the common title common chance up gold, which defines the light emission mode when changing the title characters to gold in the title color change effect, as a brightness data table, whether in the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect or the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect.

The execution time of the introduction part differs between the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect. As shown in Figure 11-73, when a low base weak reach A effect is executed, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a weak reach system weak reach A introduction, which defines the lighting pattern specific to the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect as a brightness data table. When a low base weak reach B effect is executed, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a weak reach system weak reach B introduction, which defines the lighting pattern specific to the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect as a brightness data table.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base strong reach C effect. As shown in Figure 11-73, whether the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, or the low base strong reach C effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part using a common strong reach common title that defines the lighting mode of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects as a brightness data table.

The execution times for the introduction parts of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect differ, and as shown in Figure 11-73, when a low base strong reach A effect is executed, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a strong reach system strong reach A introduction, which defines the lighting pattern unique to the introduction part of the low base strong reach A effect as a brightness data table; when a low base strong reach B effect is executed, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a strong reach system strong reach B introduction, which defines the lighting pattern unique to the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect as a brightness data table; and in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a strong reach system strong reach C introduction, which defines the lighting pattern unique to the introduction part of the low base strong reach C effect as a brightness data table.

As shown in Figure 11-73, when executing a low-base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part and introduction part using a brightness data table for the strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction, which defines a series of lighting patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach effect.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the high base reach A, high base reach B, high base reach C, and high base reach D effects, and as shown in Figure 11-73, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part using a common high base reach common title that defines the lighting mode of the title display part of the high base reach A to D effects as a brightness data table, regardless of whether the high base reach A, B, C, or D effect is being executed.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C performance, and high base reach D performance, but as shown in Figure 11-73, when a high base reach A performance is executed, in the introductory part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach reach A introduction, which defines the lighting pattern specific to the introductory part of the high base reach A performance as a brightness data table, and when a high base reach B performance is executed, in the introductory part, the lighting pattern specific to the introductory part of the high base reach B performance as a brightness data table. When a high base reach C performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach system reach C introduction in which the light emission mode specific to the introduction part of the high base reach C performance is defined as a brightness data table, and when a high base reach D performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach system reach D introduction in which the light emission mode specific to the introduction part of the high base reach D performance is defined as a brightness data table.

In this way, whether a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect is executed, the title display part uses a common weak reach-type common title as the brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9, thereby saving storage capacity for the brightness data table. Meanwhile, in the introduction part, whether a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using separate weak reach-type weak reach A introduction and weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, respectively. This makes it possible to set the game effect lamp 9 to emit different light depending on the content of each effect in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the introduction part before the effect result is introduced in the super reach effect.

In this embodiment, whether a low base weak reach A effect is executed or a low base weak reach B effect is executed, the title display part uses a common weak reach common title as a brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. However, the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects is provided with a weak reach title start which defines a unique lighting pattern for the title start period from when part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in their fixed position, and a weak reach title display which defines a unique lighting pattern after the title display period in which the title characters are displayed in their fixed position. When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, By sending an extended command specifying the start of a reach-type title, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: weak reach-type title start, and when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display period of the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, by sending an extended command specifying the weak reach-type title display, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: weak reach-type title display. Also, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low-base weak reach A performance or a low-base weak reach B performance, a common brightness data table may be used for either the brightness data table: weak reach-type title start or the weak reach-type title display, and a separate brightness data table with individual contents set for the other may be used.

In addition, when executing the low base weak reach A or B effect, if a title color change effect is executed in the title display part, whether it is a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the common title common chance up red (title common chance up gold) brightness data table, thereby saving storage capacity for the brightness data table.

In addition, whether a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, or a low base strong reach C effect is executed, the title display part uses a common strong reach common title as the brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9, thereby saving storage capacity for the brightness data table. Meanwhile, in the introduction part, when a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, or a low base strong reach C effect is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a separate strong reach A introduction, strong reach B introduction, or strong reach C introduction, respectively. This makes it possible to set the game effect lamp 9 to emit different light depending on the content of each effect in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, or low base strong reach C effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the introduction part before the effect result is introduced in a super reach effect.

In this embodiment, whether a low base strong reach A effect is executed, a low base strong reach B effect is executed, or a low base strong reach C effect is executed, the title display part is configured to use a common strong reach common title as a brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. However, the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects is provided with a strong reach title start which defines a unique lighting pattern for the prologue display period and the title start period from when part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in the fixed position, and a strong reach title display which defines a unique lighting pattern after the title display period in which the title characters are displayed in the fixed position, and the display control unit 123 controls the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects. When display control of the title is started, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 by sending an extended command specifying the start of a strong reach title, using the brightness data table: strong reach title start, and when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display period of the title display part of the strong base weak reach A to C performance, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 by sending an extended command specifying the strong reach title display, using the brightness data table: strong reach title display. Furthermore, in such a configuration, depending on whether the effect is a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, or a low base strong reach C effect, a common brightness data table can be used for either the start of a strong reach title or the display of a strong reach title, and a separate brightness data table with individual content set for the other can be used.

In addition, the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects includes a strong reach prologue that defines a unique lighting pattern for the prologue display period, a strong reach title start that defines a unique lighting pattern for the title start period from when part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in their fixed position, and a strong reach title display that defines a unique lighting pattern for the title display period after the title characters are displayed in their fixed position.When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, it sends an extended command that specifies the strong reach prologue, and the effect control CPU 120 controls the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: strong reach prologue, and the display control unit 123 However, by sending an extended command specifying the strong reach title start when starting display control for the title start period of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performance, the performance control CPU 120 can use the brightness data table: strong reach title start to control the lamps of frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4, and by sending an extended command specifying the strong reach title display when the display control unit 123 starts display control for the title display period of the title display part of the strong base weak reach A to C performance, the performance control CPU 120 can use the brightness data table: strong reach title display to control the lamps of frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4. Furthermore, in such a configuration, depending on whether the effect is a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, or a low base strong reach C effect, at least one of the brightness data tables: strong reach prologue, strong reach title start, or strong reach title display may be a common brightness data table, and the remaining tables may be separate brightness data tables with individual content set for each.

In addition, the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects includes a strong reach prologue that defines a unique lighting pattern for the prologue display period, and a strong reach title display that defines a unique lighting pattern for the title start period from when part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in their fixed position.When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, it sends an extension command that specifies the strong reach prologue, and the effect control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: strong reach prologue. The display control unit 123 controls the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4, and when it starts display control of the title start period of the title display part of the low base strong reach A-C effects, it sends an extended command specifying the strong reach title display, so that the effect control CPU 120 controls the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 using the brightness data table: strong reach title display. Also, in this configuration, depending on whether it is a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, or a low base strong reach C effect, a common brightness data table may be used for one of the brightness data tables: strong reach prologue or strong reach title display, and a separate brightness data table with individual contents set for the other may be used.

In addition, whether a high base reach A performance, a high base reach B performance, a high base reach C performance, or a high base reach D performance is performed, the title display part uses a common high base reach common title as the brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9, thereby saving storage capacity for the brightness data table. On the other hand, in the introduction part, when a high base reach A performance, a high base reach B performance, a high base reach C performance, or a high base reach D performance is performed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a separate high base reach reach A introduction, high base reach B introduction, high base reach C introduction, or high base reach D introduction, respectively. This makes it possible to set the game effect lamp 9 to emit different light depending on the content of each performance in the introduction part of the high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C, or high base reach D performance, thereby enhancing the performance effect in the introduction part before the performance result is introduced in the super reach performance.

In this embodiment, whether a high base reach A performance is executed, a high base reach B performance is executed, a high base reach C performance is executed, or a high base reach D performance is executed, the title display part is configured to use a common high base reach series common title as a brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. However, the title display part of the high base reach A to D performances is provided with a high base reach series title start which defines a unique lighting pattern for the title start period from when part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in the fixed position, and a high base reach series title display which defines a unique lighting pattern after the title display period when the title characters are displayed in the fixed position, and the display control unit 123 controls the title display part of the high base reach A to D performances. When starting display control of the title, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance may use the brightness data table: high base reach title start to send an extended command specifying the start of a high base reach title, and may use the brightness data table: high base reach title start to control the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4, and when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display period of the title display part of the high base reach A to D performance, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance may use the brightness data table: high base reach title display to control the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4. Furthermore, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a high bass reach A performance, a high bass reach B performance, a high bass reach C performance, or a high bass reach D performance, the brightness data table may be a common brightness data table for either the high bass reach title start or the high bass reach title display, and a separate brightness data table with individual content set for the other.

In addition, when a low-base strongest reach effect is executed, the execution time of which is not shared with other super reach effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction, which defines the series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach effect as a brightness data table, in the title display part and introduction part, thereby reducing the number of brightness data tables.

In this embodiment, whether a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect is executed, the title display part uses a common weak reach-type common title as the brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. However, when a low base weak reach A effect is executed, the title display part uses a weak reach-type weak reach A title that defines the lighting pattern specific to the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect as the brightness data table for the title display part to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. When a low base weak reach B effect is executed, the title display part uses a weak reach-type weak reach B title that defines the lighting pattern specific to the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect as the brightness data table for the title display part to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. This makes it possible to set the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 to different lighting patterns depending on the content of each effect in the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the title display part in the super reach effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, whether a low base strong reach A performance is executed, a low base strong reach B performance is executed, or a low base strong reach C performance is executed, the title display part uses a common strong reach common title as the brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. However, when a low base strong reach A performance is executed, the title display part uses a strong reach A title that defines the lighting pattern specific to the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance as the brightness data table for the title display part to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. When a low base strong reach B performance is executed, the title display part uses a strong reach A title that defines the lighting pattern specific to the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance as the brightness data table for the title display part. When controlling the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 using a strong reach series strong reach B title that defines a lighting pattern specific to the display part and executing a low base strong reach C effect, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 can be controlled using a strong reach series strong reach C title that defines a lighting pattern specific to the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect as the brightness data table for the title display part. This makes it possible to set the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 to different lighting patterns depending on the content of each effect in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the title display part in the super reach effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, whether a high base reach A performance is executed, a high base reach B performance is executed, a high base reach C performance is executed, or a high base reach D performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common high base reach series common title as the brightness data table in the title display part.When a high base reach A performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach series reach A title that defines the lighting mode specific to the title display part of the high base reach A performance as the brightness data table in the title display part, and when a high base reach B performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach series reach B title that defines the lighting mode specific to the title display part of the high base reach B performance as the brightness data table in the title display part. When a high base reach C effect is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a high base reach-type reach C title, which defines the lighting pattern specific to the title display part of the high base reach C effect as the brightness data table for the title display part, and when a high base reach D effect is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a high base reach-type reach D title, which defines the lighting pattern specific to the title display part of the high base reach D effect as the brightness data table for the title display part.This makes it possible to set the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 to different lighting patterns depending on the content of each effect in the title display parts of the high base reach A effect, high base reach B effect, high base reach C effect, and high base reach D effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the title display part in the super reach effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a low-base strongest reach effect is executed, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction in the title display part and introduction part, which defines a series of lighting patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach effect as a brightness data table. However, when a low-base strongest reach effect is executed, the game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a strongest reach system strongest reach title in the title display part brightness data table, which defines a lighting pattern unique to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect, and the game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a strongest reach system strongest reach introduction in the introduction part brightness data table, which defines a lighting pattern unique to the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when low base weak reach A and B effects are executed, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a common weak reach-system common title as the brightness data table for the title display part, and the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using weak reach-system weak reach A introduction and weak reach-system weak reach B introduction as the brightness data tables for the introduction part. However, when a low base weak reach A effect is executed, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a weak reach-system weak reach A title introduction, which defines the series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base weak reach A, as the brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part, and when a low base weak reach B effect is executed, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a weak reach-system weak reach B title introduction, which defines the series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part, as the brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part. By doing this, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when low base strong reach A to C effects are executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common strong reach common title as the brightness data table for the title display part, and the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using strong reach A introduction, strong reach B introduction, and strong reach C introduction as brightness data tables for the introduction part. When a low base strong reach A effect is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a strong reach A title introduction, which defines a series of lighting patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach A effect, as the brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part. When a low base strong reach B effect is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a strong reach B title introduction, which defines a series of lighting patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect, as the brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 can be controlled using a strong reach-type strong reach B title introduction that defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part, and when a low base strong reach C performance is executed, the game effect lamp 9 can be controlled using a strong reach-type strong reach C title introduction that defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach C performance as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part, and when a low base strong reach D performance is executed, the game effect lamp 9 can be controlled using a strong reach-type strong reach D title introduction that defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach D performance as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part, and by doing so, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when high base reach A to D effects are executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common high base reach common title as the brightness data table for the title display part, and the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using high base reach reach A introduction, high base reach reach B introduction, high base reach reach C introduction, and high base reach reach D introduction as the brightness data table for the introduction part.When a high base reach A effect is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a high base reach reach A title introduction, which defines a series of lighting patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the high base reach A effect, as the brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part.When a high base reach B effect is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a high base reach reach B title introduction, which defines a series of lighting patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the high base reach A effect, as the brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part. The lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high bass reach-type reach B title introduction, which defines a series of lighting modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the bass reach B effect; when a high bass reach C effect is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high bass reach-type reach C title introduction, which defines a series of lighting modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the high bass reach C effect as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part; and when a high bass reach D effect is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high bass reach-type reach D title introduction, which defines a series of lighting modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the high bass reach D effect as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part; by doing this, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

[Brightness data table used for Super Reach effects 2]
The following explains the settings of the brightness data table used for the super reach effect. As mentioned above, the brightness data table is made up of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table, but in the brightness data table explained below, only some of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table are shown, and the other tables may be omitted.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of low-base weak reach A and B effects]
Figure 11-74 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: weak reach common title used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B421 sent when performing display control of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, Figure 11-75 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: weak reach common title, and Figures 11-76 to 11-78 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: weak reach common title.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives extension command B421, it specifies the parent table for weak reach common titles based on extension command B421. As shown in Figure 11-74, the parent table for weak reach common titles is set to perform lamp control for frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 by referencing child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE for a maximum of 600,000 ms. When the performance control CPU 120 receives extension command B421, it performs lamp control for frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 by referencing child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE specified by the parent table for weak reach common titles.

Child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE contains the grandchild tables and execution times for frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 in the order of reference, as shown in Figure 11-75.

The performance control CPU 120 first controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 (Figure 11-76), which is the first table set in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 are turned off for 340 ms, and then the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 are lit in blue for 160 ms.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 500 ms, which is the execution time of grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1, and performs lamp control by referencing grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 (Figure 11-77), which is the second grandchild table set in child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. As a result, frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 light up in a blue-based color, and the brightness changes every 100 ms.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 500 ms, which is the execution time of grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, and performs lamp control by referencing grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 (Figure 11-78), which is the third grandchild table in child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. As a result, some of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 are turned off, while the rest are lit blue, with the off and lit areas changing every 30 ms or 20 ms.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 230 ms, which is the execution time of grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3, and performs lamp control by referencing grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 (Figure 11-77), which is the fourth grandchild table in child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. As a result, frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 light up in a blue-based color, and the brightness changes every 100 ms.

Then, when the display control unit 123 receives an extension command (B400 or B40F) sent when controlling the display of the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the effect control CPU 120 switches to lamp control using a brightness data table based on the newly received extension command. As a result, frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 will continue to light up in a blue-based color and change brightness every 100 ms until a new extension command is received, and when a new extension command is received, they will switch to the lighting mode based on the received extension command.

As shown in Figure 11-74, the parent table for weak reach common titles has child tables set up that also reference logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4. These child tables also have grandchild tables, etc., that they reference set up in order of execution. These grandchild tables also have brightness data, etc., that they reference set up in order of execution. The performance control CPU 120 references the child table specified in the parent table, the grandchild table specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table, and controls the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 using the same procedure as above.

As a result, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4 will change from off to red until 500 ms have elapsed, then remain lit in red until 500 ms have elapsed, with the brightness changing every 100 ms, then change from red to almost off until 230 ms have elapsed, then remain lit in red again, and continue to change brightness every 100 ms until a new extended command is received.

In addition, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change from an off state to white until 500 ms has elapsed, then remain lit in white until 500 ms has elapsed, with the brightness changing every 100 ms, then change from white to nearly off until 230 ms has elapsed, then remain lit in white again, with the brightness changing every 100 ms, until a new extended command is received.

In addition, the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 will change from off to blue until 500 ms have passed, then stay lit in a blue-based light until 500 ms have passed, with the brightness changing every 100 ms, then go from blue to almost off until 230 ms have passed, then stay lit in a blue-based light again, and continue to change brightness every 100 ms until a new extended command is received.

As shown in Figure 11-152 (A), the title display part in the low-base weak reach A and B effects has a title start period of 500 ms from the start, followed by a title display period of 2,200 ms, followed by a title end period of 300 ms. Therefore, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: weak reach common title. During the title start period (the period from the start of the title display part to 500 ms elapsed) when the title characters move from the left side of the display area toward their fixed position, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 change from an off state to blue, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4 change from an off state to red, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 change from an off state to white (lamp control based on the grandchild table (1) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). In addition, during the title display period when the title characters remain stationary in their fixed positions and the title end period (the period from the start of the title display period until the end of the title display part) when the title characters move from their fixed positions to the right, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 light up in blue until 500 ms have elapsed, and the brightness changes every 100 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then by 230 ms have elapsed, they go from blue to almost off, and then light up in blue again (lamp control by grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then they light up in blue again, and the brightness continues to change every 100 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 remain lit in red until 500 ms have elapsed, and the brightness changes every 100 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then, within 230 ms, they change from red to almost off and then turn red again (lamp control by grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then they remain lit in red again, and the brightness continues to change every 100 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). In addition, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 will light up in white until 500 ms has elapsed, with the brightness changing every 100 ms (lamp control according to grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), then change from white to almost off and back to white within 230 ms (lamp control according to grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), after which they will again light up in white and continue to change brightness every 100 ms (lamp control according to grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75).

In addition, after 3000 ms has elapsed since the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) sent in conjunction with starting display control of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, which ends lamp control based on the brightness data table: weak reach common title, and switches to lamp control based on the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In this way, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command B421, it controls the lamps based on the brightness data table: weak reach common title, in accordance with the extended command B421. As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 change color and pattern according to the title start period, in which the title characters move from the left side of the display area toward their fixed position, and the title end period, in which the title characters move from their fixed position toward the right side.

[Brightness data table used in title color change effect (red)]
Figure 11-79 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: title common chance up red used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B511 sent when performing display control of the title color change effect that changes the title text from white to red, Figure 11-80 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: title common chance up red, and Figures 11-81 to 11-83 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: title common chance up red.

When controlling the display of a title color change effect that changes the title characters from white to red in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the display control unit 123 sends an extension command 511 at the timing when the title characters change (1,300 ms after the start of the title display part).

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command B511, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-79) for the title common chance up red based on the extended command 511, and controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Figure 11-80) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figures 11-81 to 83) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

As a result, frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 will flash white at 40 ms intervals until 200 ms has elapsed, then they will light up in red until 1200 ms has elapsed, and their brightness will change at 20 ms intervals. After that, they will gradually turn off from red at 280 ms and remain off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, logo LEDs LL1-LL4 will remain off until 200 ms have elapsed, then remain lit in red until 1200 ms have elapsed, with the brightness changing at 20 ms intervals. After that, they will gradually turn off from red at 280 ms and remain off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will flash white at 40 ms intervals until 200 ms has elapsed, then remain lit in white until 1200 ms has elapsed, with their brightness changing at 20 ms intervals, then gradually turn off from white at 280 ms, and remain off until a new extended command is received.

As shown in Figure 11-152 (B), the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects consists of a title start period of 500 ms from the start, followed by a title display period of 2200 ms, followed by a title end period of 300 ms. Furthermore, when a title color change effect that changes from white to red is executed, the title characters are displayed in a manner that makes them appear to glow for 200 ms after 800 ms have elapsed since the start of the title display period, after which the title characters change to red, and then the transition to the title end period takes place after a further 1200 ms.

Therefore, after the start of the title display period, extended command B511 is received at the timing when the title color change effect is executed, and lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: Title Common Chance Up Red, so that during the period in which the title characters are displayed in a manner that appears to glow (the period up to 200 ms after extended command B511 is received), frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 flash white, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are turned off, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 flash white (lamp control by grandchild table (5) specified by the child table in Figure 11-80). Furthermore, until the title characters change to red and the title end period begins (the period from 200 ms after receiving extension command B511 until another 1200 ms has passed), the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 light up in red and change brightness at 20 ms intervals, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 light up in red and change brightness at 20 ms intervals, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 light up in white and change brightness at 20 ms intervals (lamp control by grandchild table (6) specified by the child table in Figure 11-80). Additionally, during the title end period (the period 1,400 ms after receiving extension command B511) when the title characters move to the right from their original position and disappear, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12 and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 gradually turn off from red, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4 gradually turn off from red, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 gradually turn off from white (lamp control is performed by the grandchild table (7) specified by the child table in Figure 11-80).

In addition, after 3000 ms has elapsed since the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) sent in conjunction with starting display control of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, which ends lamp control based on the brightness data table: title common chance up red, and switches to lamp control based on the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances.

[Brightness data table used in title color change effect (gold)]
Figure 11-84 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of the brightness data table: title common chance up gold used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B512 sent when performing display control of the title color change effect that changes the title text from white to gold, Figure 11-85 is a diagram showing the settings of the child table of the brightness data table: title common chance up gold, and Figures 11-86 to 11-88 are diagrams showing the settings of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: title common chance up gold.

When controlling the display of a title color change effect that changes the title text from white to gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the display control unit 123 sends an extension command 512 at the timing when the title text changes (1,300 ms after the start of the title display part).

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B512, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-84) for the title common chance up gold based on the extension command 512, and controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-85) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-86 to 88) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

As a result, frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 will flash white at 40 ms intervals until 200 ms has elapsed, then they will light up in yellow until 1200 ms has elapsed, and their brightness will change at 20 ms intervals. After that, they will gradually turn off from yellow at 280 ms, and will remain off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, logo LEDs LL1-LL4 will remain off until 200 ms have elapsed, then remain lit in red until 1200 ms have elapsed, with the brightness changing at 20 ms intervals. After that, they will gradually turn off from red at 280 ms and remain off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will flash white at 40 ms intervals until 200 ms has elapsed, then remain lit in white until 1200 ms has elapsed, with their brightness changing at 20 ms intervals, then gradually turn off from white at 280 ms, and remain off until a new extended command is received.

As shown in Figure 11-152 (B), the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects consists of a title start period of 500 ms from the start, followed by a title display period of 2200 ms, followed by a title end period of 300 ms. Furthermore, when a title color change effect is executed in which the title changes from white to gold, the title characters are displayed in a manner that makes them appear to glow for 200 ms after 800 ms have elapsed since the start of the title display period, after which the title characters change to gold, and after a further 1200 ms the transition to the title end period begins.

Therefore, after the start of the title display period, extended command B512 is received at the timing when the title color change effect is executed, and lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: Title Common Chance Up Gold, so that during the period in which the title characters are displayed in a manner that appears to glow (the period up to 200 ms after extended command B512 is received), frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 flash white, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are turned off, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 flash white (lamp control by grandchild table (8) specified by the child table in Figure 11-85). Furthermore, until the title characters change to gold and the title end period begins (the period from 200 ms after receiving extension command B512 until another 1200 ms has passed), the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 light up in yellow and change brightness at 20 ms intervals, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 light up in red and change brightness at 20 ms intervals, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 light up in white and change brightness at 20 ms intervals (lamp control by grandchild table (9) specified by the child table in Figure 11-85). Additionally, during the title end period (the period 1,400 ms after receiving extension command B512) when the title characters move from their fixed position to the right and disappear, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12 and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 gradually turn off from yellow, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4 gradually turn off from red, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 gradually turn off from white (lamp control is performed by the grandchild table (10) specified by the child table in Figure 11-85).

In addition, after 3000 ms has elapsed since the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) sent in conjunction with starting display control of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, which ends lamp control based on the brightness data table: title common chance up gold, and switches to lamp control based on the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances.

[Modification of the brightness data table used in title color change effects]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for effect control uses the brightness data table: weak reach system common title to control the lamps of the frame LED LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamp LA1 to LA4 in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, regardless of whether or not a title change effect is performed, and when a title change effect is not performed, the CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach system common title to control the lamps of the frame LED LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamp LA1 to LA4. When lamp control is performed and a title change effect is performed, an extended command specifying title common chance up red or title common chance up gold, which is sent from the display control unit 123 at the timing of performing display control to change the color of the title characters, is received, and from the time the color of the title characters changes, lamp control of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 is performed using the brightness data table: title common chance up red or title common chance up gold.

In contrast to this, this modified example is provided with a brightness data table: weak reach common title (white) in which brightness data is set when no title change effect is performed in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B effects, a brightness data table: weak reach common title (red) in which brightness data is set when a title change effect is performed in which the title characters change to red in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B effects, and a brightness data table: weak reach common title (gold) in which brightness data is set when a title change effect is performed in which the title characters change to gold.When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of low base weak reach A and B effects, if no title change effect is performed, it sends an extended command specifying the weak reach common title (white), and the effect control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach common title (white) to display the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attack run When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, in the case of performing a title change performance in which the title characters are changed to red, by transmitting an extension command specifying the weak reach common title (red), the performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach common title (red) to control the lamps of the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attack lamps LA1 to LA4. When lamp control is performed and the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, if a title change effect is performed in which the title text changes to gold, by sending an extension command specifying the weak reach common title (gold), the effect control CPU 120 will use the brightness data table: weak reach common title (gold) to control the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

This allows the effect control CPU 120 to control the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 in lighting modes appropriate to the respective situations: when no title change effect is performed in the title display part of the base weak reach A and B effects, when a title change effect that changes the title characters to red is performed, or when a title change effect that changes the title characters to gold is performed.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of the low base weak reach A effect]
Fig. 11-89 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach A introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B400 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A performance, Fig. 11-90 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach A introduction, and Figs. 11-91 to 11-95 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach A introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table have been omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B400, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-89) for the introduction of the weak reach system weak reach A based on the extension command B400, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-90) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-91 to 95) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-90 contains a grandchild table with an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene changes in the introductory part of the low base weak reach A effect, as well as an illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the effect scene.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-91 to 11-95 contain brightness data that indicates the illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters, etc., that appear in the effect scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, Logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and Decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the Low Base Weak Reach A performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect]
Fig. 11-96 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach B introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B40F sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the low base weak reach B performance, Fig. 11-97 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach B introduction, and Figs. 11-99 to 11-103 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach B introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table have been omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B40F, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-96) for the introduction of the weak reach system weak reach B based on the extension command B40F, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-97) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-98 to 103) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-97 contains a grandchild table with an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene changes in the introductory part of the low base weak reach B effect, as well as an illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the scene of the effect.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-98 to 103 contain brightness data that indicates the illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters, etc. that appear in the scene of the effect.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, Logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and Decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the Low Base Weak Reach B performance.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of low base strong reach A to C effects]
Figure 11-104 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: strong reach common title used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B517 sent when performing display control of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, Figure 11-105 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strong reach common title, and Figures 11-106 to 11-109 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: strong reach common title.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the expansion command B517, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-105) of the strong reach common title based on the expansion command B517, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-106) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-107-109) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-106 contains grandchild tables that set the execution time corresponding to the time when the scenes of the presentation change, such as the prologue display period, title start period, title display period, and title end period that make up the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C presentation, as well as the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the presentation scene.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-107 to 109 contain brightness data that sets the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the characters that appear in the presentation scene.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attack Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scenes and characters appearing in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A-C effects.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of the low base strong reach A effect]
Fig. 11-110 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach A introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B500 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the low base strong reach A performance, Fig. 11-111 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach A introduction, and Figs. 11-112 to 11-117 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach A introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table have been omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command B500, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-110) for the strong reach system Strong Reach A introduction based on the extended command B500, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-111) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-112 to 117) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-111 contains a grandchild table with an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene changes in the introductory part of the low base strong reach A effect, as well as an illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the effect scene.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-112 to 117 contain brightness data that indicates the illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters, etc. that appear in the effect scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, Logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and Decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the Low Base Strong Reach A performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of low base strong reach B effect]
Fig. 11-118 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach B introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B504 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the low base strong reach B performance, Fig. 11-119 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach B introduction, and Figs. 11-120 to 11-124 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach B introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table have been omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the expansion command B504, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-118) for the strong reach system strong reach B introduction based on the expansion command B504, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-119) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-120 to 124) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-119 contains a grandchild table with an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene changes in the introductory part of the low base strong reach B effect, as well as an illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the scene of the effect.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-120 to 124 contain brightness data that indicates the illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters, etc., that appear in the scene of the effect.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the low base strong reach B effect.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of low base strong reach C effect]
When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extension command B505 transmitted when the display control unit 123 controls the display of the introductory part in the low base strong reach C performance, it specifies the parent table (not shown) of the strong reach system strong reach C introduction based on the extension command B505, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 by referring to the child table (not shown) specified by the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

In particular, the child table for the introduction of a strong reach C in a strong reach system has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene changes in the introductory part of the low base strong reach C effect, as well as an illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the scene of the effect, and further, the grandchild table for the introduction of a strong reach C in a strong reach system has brightness data set with an illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters that appear in the scene of the effect in the introductory part of the low base strong reach C effect.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the low base strong reach C effect.

[Brightness data table used in low-base strongest reach effects]
Fig. 11-125 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B600 sent when performing display control of the low-base strongest reach presentation, Fig. 11-126 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction, and Fig. 11-127 to Fig. 11-135 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the expansion command B600, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-126) for the strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction based on the expansion command B600, and controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-127) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-128 to 135) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-126 contains a grandchild table with the execution time corresponding to the time it takes for the scene of the low-base strongest reach effect to change from the title display part to the end of the introductory part, as well as the light color and light pattern corresponding to the effect scene.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-127 to 135 contain brightness data that determines the light color and light pattern corresponding to the characters, etc. that appear in the effect scene.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the low-base strongest reach performance.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of high base reach A to D effects]
Figure 11-136 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: high bass reach common title used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B605 sent when performing display control of the title display part in the high bass reach A to D performances, Figure 11-137 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: high bass reach common title, and Figures 11-138 to 11-140 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: high bass reach common title.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the expansion command B605, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-136) of the high-base reach common title based on the expansion command B605, and controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-137) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-138-140) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-137 contains grandchild tables that set the execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scenes change, such as the title start period, title display period, and title end period that make up the title display part in the high base reach A to D performances, as well as the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the performance scene.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-138 to 140 contain brightness data that sets the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the characters that appear in the performance scenes.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scenes and characters appearing in the title display parts of the high base reach A-D effects.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high-base reach A performance]
Fig. 11-141 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: high base reach type reach A introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B606 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the high base reach A performance, Fig. 11-142 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: high base reach type reach A introduction, and Figs. 11-143 to 11-145 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: high base reach type reach A introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table have been omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the expansion command B606, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-141) for the introduction of high-base reach type reach A based on the expansion command B606, and controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-142) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-143 to 145) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-142 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the high base reach A performance, an illumination color corresponding to the performance scene, and an illumination mode.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-143 to 145 have brightness data set with an illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters, etc., appearing in the performance scene.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the high base reach A performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high-base reach B performance]
Fig. 11-146 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: parent table of high bass reach type reach B introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B607 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the high bass reach B performance, and Fig. 11-147 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: child table of high bass reach type reach B introduction. Note that the child table has been omitted except for some setting contents, and all grandchild tables have been omitted.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the expansion command B607, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-146) for the introduction of high-base reach-type reach B based on the expansion command B607, and controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Figure 11-147) specified by the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-147 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the high base reach B performance, an illumination color corresponding to the performance scene, and illumination mode.Furthermore, the grandchild table for the high base reach reach B introduction has brightness data that determines the illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters that appear in the performance scene in the introductory part of the high base reach B performance.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the high base reach B performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high-base reach C performance]
Fig. 11-148 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: parent table of high bass reach type reach C introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B608 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the high bass reach C performance, and Fig. 11-149 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: child table of high bass reach type reach C introduction. Note that the child table has been omitted except for some setting contents, and all grandchild tables have been omitted.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the expansion command B608, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-148) for the introduction of high-base reach-type reach C based on the expansion command B608, and controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Figure 11-149) specified by the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-148 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the high base reach C performance, an illumination color corresponding to the performance scene, and illumination mode.Furthermore, the grandchild table for the high base reach reach C introduction has brightness data that determines the illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters that appear in the performance scene in the introductory part of the high base reach C performance.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the high base reach C performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high-base reach D performance]
Fig. 11-150 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: parent table of high bass reach type reach D introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B609 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the high bass reach D performance, and Fig. 11-151 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: child table of high bass reach type reach D introduction. Note that the child table has been omitted except for some setting contents, and all grandchild tables have been omitted.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the expansion command B609, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-150) for the introduction of the high base reach type reach D based on the expansion command B609, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-151) specified by the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-150 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the high base reach D performance, an illumination color corresponding to the performance scene, and illumination mode.Furthermore, the grandchild table for the high base reach reach D introduction has brightness data that determines the illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters that appear in the performance scene in the introductory part of the high base reach D performance.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the high base reach D performance.

[Effect 1]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super reach effect after the decorative symbol displayed on the image display device 5 reaches a reach state. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Then, before the title display part in the super reach effect, the decorative symbol is displayed in a reach state, and in the title display part, the title character corresponding to the super reach effect is displayed using the display position of the decorative symbol that has reached a reach state. In this way, when the decorative symbol reaches a reach state, the player will focus on which decorative symbol has reached a reach state. However, by displaying the title character corresponding to the super reach effect using the display position of the decorative symbol that has reached a reach state in the title display part of the super reach effect, attention can be naturally drawn to the title character, resulting in an optimal title display.

In addition, since the likelihood of a jackpot differs depending on whether the decorative symbol that has reached the reach state is an odd numbered symbol or an even numbered symbol, when a decorative symbol reaches the reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative symbol has reached the reach state, which will also draw more attention to the title text.

In addition, before the title display part of the Super Reach effect, a decorative symbol (large) is displayed in reach mode, and then the decorative symbol (large) displayed in reach mode is reduced in size to a smaller decorative symbol (small), and the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach effect are displayed in the display position of the reduced decorative symbol (small). In this way, the reduced display of the decorative symbol (large) attracts the player's attention, and by displaying the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach effect in the display position of the reduced decorative symbol (small), it is easier to draw attention to the title characters.

In addition, during the title display part of the Super Reach performance, when the decorative pattern that has reached the Reach state is displayed, the title text corresponding to the Super Reach performance is displayed so that it overlaps with the decorative pattern that has reached the Reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title text.

In addition, the super reach effects include low base weak reach A and B effects, and low base strong reach A-C effects, which have a higher chance of winning than low base weak reach A and B effects.The title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects and the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A-C effects appear overlapping with one of the decorative patterns (the decorative pattern on the left) of the decorative patterns that have reached the reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title display.

In addition, the Super Reach effect includes a Low Base Strongest Reach effect, which has a higher chance of winning than the Low Base Strong Reach A to C effects. The title characters corresponding to the Low Base Strongest Reach effect appear overlapping with both decorative patterns (decorative patterns on both sides) that have reached the reach state, allowing the title characters corresponding to the Low Base Strongest Reach effect to be displayed in a more impactful manner.

In addition, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A-C effects, and the title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach effect appear overlapping with one of the decorative patterns that have reached the reach state (the decorative pattern on the left) or both decorative patterns (the decorative patterns on both sides) and are then displayed in their fixed positions, and even while they are displayed in their fixed positions, they are displayed overlapping with part of the decorative patterns on both sides that have reached the reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title characters even after they have been displayed in their fixed positions.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 2]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 has reached a reach state. The low base weak reach A and B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. When an odd-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B performance, title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative pattern that has become reach mode; when an even-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B performance, title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the even-numbered decorative pattern that has become reach mode; when an odd-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, title letters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative pattern that has become reach mode; and when an even-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, title letters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the even-numbered decorative pattern that has become reach mode. By doing this, when a decorative pattern reaches a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern has reached the reach state, but by using the display position of the decorative pattern that has reached the reach state in the title display part of the low base weak reach A, B performance and the low base strong reach A to C performance to display the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performance and the low base strong reach A to C performance, the player can naturally pay attention to the title letters as well, and as a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

In addition, since the likelihood of a jackpot differs depending on whether the decorative symbol that has reached the reach state is an odd numbered symbol or an even numbered symbol, when a decorative symbol reaches the reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative symbol has reached the reach state, which will also draw more attention to the title text.

[Effect 3]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B effects, low base strong reach A to C effects, and low base strongest reach effects after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 reaches a reach state. The low base weak reach A and B effects, low base strong reach A to C effects, and low base strongest reach effects are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. When an odd-numbered decorative symbol is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative symbol that has become a reach state, when an even-numbered decorative symbol is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the even-numbered decorative symbol that has become a reach state, when an odd-numbered decorative symbol is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C effects are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative symbol that has become a reach state When an even numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performances are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the even numbered decorative pattern that has become a reach state, when an odd numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance, title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the odd numbered decorative pattern that has become a reach state, and when an even numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance, title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the even numbered decorative pattern that has become a reach state. By doing this, when a decorative pattern reaches a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern has reached the reach state, but by using the display position of the decorative pattern that has reached the reach state in the title display part of the low base weak reach A, B effect, low base strong reach A to C effect, and low base strongest reach effect to display the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B effect, low base strong reach A to C effect, and low base strongest reach effect, the player can naturally pay attention to the title characters as well, and as a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

In addition, since the likelihood of a jackpot differs depending on whether the decorative symbol that has reached the reach state is an odd numbered symbol or an even numbered symbol, when a decorative symbol reaches the reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative symbol has reached the reach state, which will also draw more attention to the title text.

[Effect 4]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super reach effect after the decorative symbol displayed on the image display device 5 reaches a reach state. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Then, before the title display part in the super reach effect, the decorative symbol is displayed in a reach state, and in the title display part, the title character corresponding to the super reach effect is displayed using the display position of the decorative symbol that has reached a reach state. In this way, when the decorative symbol reaches a reach state, the player will focus on which decorative symbol has reached a reach state. However, by displaying the title character corresponding to the super reach effect using the display position of the decorative symbol that has reached a reach state in the title display part of the super reach effect, attention can be naturally drawn to the title character, resulting in an optimal title display.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 5]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a low base weak reach B effect, which has a higher probability of winning than the low base weak reach B effect and the low base weak reach B effect. The low base weak reach B effect and the low base strong reach B effect are composed of both a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, in the low base weak reach B effect, the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Boingo" are used, and the ally character "Yume Yume" announces that a jackpot will be reached, and in the low base strong reach B effect, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are used, and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" announce that a jackpot will be reached. In the introductory part of the low base strong reach B performance, the display starts with the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" positioned in the foreground and the enemy character "Robo" positioned in the background, and in the introductory part of the low base weak reach B performance, the display starts with the ally character "Yume Yume" positioned in the foreground and the enemy character "Boingo" positioned in the background (the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Boingo" facing each other on the left and right). In this way, for the low base weak reach B performance, which has a relatively high probability of winning, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana," who are notified of a jackpot, are positioned in the foreground and the enemy character "Robo" positioned in the background, allowing the player to empathize and making it easier for the player to intuitively recognize that the probability of winning is high, resulting in a more suitable title display.

Also, ally characters are characters who receive benefits if they win a battle, while enemy characters are characters who do not receive benefits if they win a battle. At the start of the introductory part of the low base strong reach B performance, ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" are displayed in a position in the foreground with their backs to you, and enemy character "Robo" is displayed in a position in the background facing you, with ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" facing off against enemy character "Robo." For the low base strong reach B performance, which has a relatively high expectation, the player and ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" are facing in the same direction, making it easier for the player to empathize and recognize that there is a high chance of winning.

In addition, during the introductory part of the low-base strong reach B performance, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are displayed in a position that includes the display area where the title characters were displayed during the title display part, so when the title characters disappear, players who were focusing on the title characters will naturally turn their attention to the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo".

[Effect 6]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A, B effects, and low base weak reach A, B effects, and low base strong reach A to C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A, B effects and a longer effect time than the low base weak reach A, B effects. The low base weak reach A, B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, the low base weak reach A, B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects all use dialogue subtitles. In the low base weak reach A, B effects, the title characters and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part, and the dialogue subtitles that were displayed in the title display part continue to be displayed in the introduction part, while in the low base strong reach A to C effects, the dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the title display part, and the title characters are displayed. By doing this, the low base strong reach A to C effects, which have a relatively high probability of winning and a long execution time, are displayed so that the title characters and dialogue subtitles do not overlap as much as possible, while in the low base weak reach A and B effects, which have a relatively low probability of winning and a short execution time, even if the dialogue subtitles and title characters overlap, the display of the title characters is finished first so that the player can also pay attention to the dialogue subtitles, making it possible to provide the title characters and dialogue subtitles to the player in an appropriate manner, and as a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

In addition, when the title text and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the scene does not change in the subsequent introductory part until the dialogue subtitles that were displayed simultaneously with the title text have finished displaying, so the viewer can focus on the title text and then the dialogue subtitles.

In addition, when title text and dialogue subtitles are displayed during the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output, while the audio corresponding to the title text is not, making it easier to hear the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles.

[Effect 7]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base strongest reach effect and the high base reach A to D effects. The low base strongest reach effect and the high base reach A to D effects are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the title display of the low base strongest reach effect and the high base reach A to D effects is made up of multiple characters ("Catch the explosive chuu with six people!", "Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B to D)"). Then, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect and the high base reach A to D effects, the title characters start out being displayed at an enlarged size where only a portion of the multiple characters are visible, and the display size gradually decreases from the enlarged size, and the title characters are displayed at a reduced size where all of the multiple characters are visible. In this way, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect and the high base reach A to D effects, the multiple characters are displayed at an enlarged size where only a portion of the multiple characters are visible, and then the size gradually decreases until they are displayed at a reduced size where all of the characters are visible, which draws the player's attention to the title characters.

In addition, before the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect begins, the movable body 32 is moved so that it overlaps the front side of the image display device 5, and a background dedicated to the falling effect is displayed during the period in which the falling effect is executed from the time the movable body 32 moves until the movable body 32 returns to its initial position. When the movable body 32 returns to its initial position, the title characters are displayed at an enlarged size so that not all of the characters making up the title characters are visible and the display area is filled so that the background is no longer visible, and then the reduced-size title characters and a background dedicated to the title display are displayed. This makes an impact with the way the title characters are displayed, while at the same time allowing the background to be switched seamlessly, allowing the title characters to be viewed in an appropriate manner by the player.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the high base reach A to D presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (common title for high base reach series), and in the introduction part of the high base reach A to D presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of high base reach series reach A, introduction of high base reach series reach B, introduction of high base reach series reach C, introduction of high base reach series reach D). By doing this, in the title display part of the high base reach A to D effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

In addition, in the low-base strongest reach presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part and introduction part using a single brightness data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and introduction part. However, it is also possible to control the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation using a brightness data table for title display (a brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach type strongest reach title)), and control the game effect lamp 9 in the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach presentation using a brightness data table for the introduction part (a brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach type strongest reach introduction)). With this configuration, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode corresponding to the title display, resulting in appropriate title display.

[Effect 8]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low-base strongest reach effects and high-base reach A-D effects. The low-base strongest reach effects and high-base reach A-D effects are comprised of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. The title display for the low-base strongest reach effects and high-base reach A-D effects is comprised of multiple characters ("Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!", "Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B-D)"). In the title display part for the low-base strongest reach effects and high-base reach A-D effects, the multiple characters are enlarged and displayed, ending the title display part, and the background at the start of the introductory part is displayed. This allows the player to focus on the title characters during the title display part, and the title characters can be used to seamlessly transition to the background corresponding to the next introductory part.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the high base reach A to D presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (common title for high base reach series), and in the introduction part of the high base reach A to D presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of high base reach series reach A, introduction of high base reach series reach B, introduction of high base reach series reach C, introduction of high base reach series reach D). By doing this, in the title display part of the high base reach A to D effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

In addition, in the low-base strongest reach presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part and introduction part using a single brightness data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and introduction part. However, it is also possible to control the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation using a brightness data table for title display (a brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach type strongest reach title)), and control the game effect lamp 9 in the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach presentation using a brightness data table for the introduction part (a brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach type strongest reach introduction)). With this configuration, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode corresponding to the title display, resulting in appropriate title display.

[Effect 9]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low-base weak reach A and B effects and low-base strong reach A to C effects. The low-base weak reach A and B effects and low-base strong reach A to C effects each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, unlike the execution time (T1-1 to 2) of the title display part in the low-base weak reach A and B effects and the execution time (T2-1 to 3) of the title display part in the low-base strong reach A to C effects, each title display part is composed of a title start period from when the title characters start to be displayed in their designated position until they are displayed in their designated position, a title display period that is displayed in their designated position, and a title end period from when the title characters are displayed in their designated position until they end. Furthermore, in the title display part in the low-base weak reach A and B effects and in the title display part in the low-base strong reach A to C effects, the title characters are displayed so that the title display period is longer than the title start period and title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. By doing this, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A, B effects and the low base strong reach A-C effects, it is possible to draw attention to the type of title characters by making the title display period displayed in the fixed position the longest. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A, B effects and the low base strong reach A-C effects, it is possible to motivate which title characters will be displayed by making the title start period until the title is displayed in the fixed position longer than the title end period from the display in the fixed position to the end of the display. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A, B effects and the low base strong reach A-C effects, it is possible to make the title display part easier to understand by making the execution time relationship between the title start period, title display period, and title end period the same.

[Effect 10]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super reach effect both in the normal state and in a probability variable state, which is more advantageous than the normal state. The super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state are both composed of a title display part in which the corresponding title characters are displayed and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, the execution time (T1-1 to T2-2, T2-1 to T2-3, T3) of the title display part in the super reach effect in the normal state differs from the execution time (T4) of the title display part in the super reach effect in the probability variable state. In both cases, the title display part is composed of a title start period from when the title characters start to be displayed in their designated position until they are displayed in their designated position, a title display period in which the title characters are displayed in their designated position, and a title end period from when they are displayed in their designated position until they end. Furthermore, in the title display part in the super reach effect in the normal state and in the title display part in the super reach effect in the probability variable state, the title characters are displayed so that the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. By doing this, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state, the title display period displayed in the fixed position is made the longest, thereby drawing attention to the type of title character. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state, by making the title start period until it is displayed in the fixed position longer than the title end period from the display in the fixed position until the display ends, it is possible to motivate which title character will be displayed. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state, by making the execution time relationship between the title start period, title display period, and title end period the same, the title display part can be made easier to understand.

In addition, the execution time (T4) of the title display part of the Super Reach effect in the probability variable state is shorter than the execution time (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) of the title display part of the Super Reach effect in the normal state. Because the execution time of the title display part in the Super Reach effect executed in the probability variable state is relatively short, gameplay in the probability variable state can proceed at a good tempo, while the execution time of the title display part in the Super Reach effect executed in the normal state is relatively long, so it can be well-excited.

Furthermore, regardless of the type, the Super Reach effects executed in the probability variable state have a higher chance of winning than the low-base weak Reach A and B effects, which have a lower chance of winning among the Super Reach effects executed in the normal state. Even if the execution time of the title display part of the Super Reach effect executed in the probability variable state is relatively short, the execution of the Super Reach effect alone can give players hope of winning a jackpot.

In addition, the execution time of the Super Reach effect and the execution time of the title display part are the same regardless of the type of Super Reach effect executed in the probability variable state, but the Super Reach effect has a higher chance of winning than the low base weak Reach A and B effects, which have a lower chance of winning among the Super Reach effects executed in the normal state. Therefore, even if the execution time of the Super Reach effect and the execution time of the title display part are the same regardless of the type of Super Reach effect executed in the probability variable state, just the execution of the Super Reach effect can give the player hope of winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, among the super reach effects executed in normal mode, the execution time of the title display part in low base strong reach A-C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than low base weak reach A and B effects, is set to be longer than the execution time of the title display part in low base weak reach AB effects, and the execution time of the title display part in low base strongest reach effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than low base strong reach A-C effects, is set to be longer than the execution time of the title display part in low base strong reach A-C effects. By doing this, in normal mode, the execution time of the title display part of super reach effects with a higher jackpot expectation is longer, which can effectively excite the player.

Furthermore, among the super reach effects executed in normal mode, the execution time of the title display period in which the title letters are displayed in a fixed position in the low base strong reach A-C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B effects, is set to be longer than the execution time of the title display period in the low base weak reach AB effect, and the execution time of the title display period in the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A-C effects, is set to be longer than the execution time of the title display period in the low base strong reach A-C effects. By doing this, in normal mode, the super reach effects with a higher jackpot expectation have a longer execution time of the title display period in which the title letters are displayed in a fixed position, which can effectively excite the player.

[Effect 11]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect includes both a title display part in which the corresponding title characters are displayed and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. The title display part includes a title start period from when the title characters start to be displayed in their designated positions until they are displayed in their designated positions, a title display period displayed in their designated positions, and a title end period from when the title characters are displayed in their designated positions until they end. In the title display part, the title characters are displayed so that the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. By doing this, the title display period displayed in its designated position is made the longest, thereby drawing attention to the type of title characters. Furthermore, by making the title start period until the title characters are displayed in their designated positions longer than the title end period from when the title characters are displayed in their designated positions until they end, it is possible to tease the player about which title characters will be displayed. Even if the execution times of the title display parts differ between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state, the title display part can be made easier to understand by making the execution time relationships between the title start period, title display period, and title end period the same.

[Effect 12]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low-base-strength reach A-C effects and low-base-strength reach effects. The low-base-strength reach A-C effects and low-base-strength reach effects each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. As shown in FIG. 11-43, in the title display part of the low-base-strength reach effect and the low-base-strength reach A-C effects, the title character can be displayed in white or in red, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the white color. In the title display part of the low-base-strength reach effect and the low-base-strength reach A-C effects, the corresponding expectation indication is displayed, and then the title character is displayed in a larger size than the expectation indication. In this case, whether the title character is displayed in white or red, the expectation indication is displayed in the same manner. By doing this, the title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach effects and low base strong reach A to C effects are larger in size than the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation is suggested by its appearance, so they attract the player's attention, but by displaying the expectation suggestion display before the title characters, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the expectation suggestion first. Also, whether the title characters are displayed in white or red, the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the same manner, so the player can be drawn to the appearance of the title characters that follow.

[Effect 13]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a low base strong reach B effect and a low base strong reach C effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach B effect. The low base strong reach B and C effects are composed of both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, an expectation suggestion display is displayed in a first manner (3.5 stars), and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, an expectation suggestion display is displayed in a second manner (4 stars). In this case, the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect and the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect are both highlighted in a common manner. By doing this, development costs can be reduced by making the highlighting a common mode whether the expectation level indication display is displayed in the first mode in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, or whether the expectation level indication display is displayed in the second mode in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance.

The expectation indication display is also made up of multiple star-shaped objects, and in the low-base strong reach B performance, the expectation is indicated by N (N is an integer) + 0.5 (3.5) objects, and in the low-base strong reach C performance, the expectation is indicated by N + 1 (4) objects, with each star-shaped object being highlighted, and the highlighting is done in a common manner whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted. In this way, the highlighting is done in a common manner whether one star-shaped object is highlighted or 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted, thereby reducing development costs.

In addition, in the expectation suggestion display, the time for which one star-shaped object is highlighted and the time for which 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted are the same. By doing this, development costs can be reduced by making the time for which one star-shaped object is highlighted and the time for which 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted the same.

In addition, when displaying the expected level, a common expected level indication sound is output whether a single star-shaped object is highlighted or 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted. By doing this, a common expected level indication sound is output whether a single star-shaped object is highlighted or 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted, thereby reducing development costs.

The effect control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. It also controls the game effect lamps 9 in the title display part of the low-base strong reach B and C effects using a brightness data table for title display (strong base common title), and in the introductory part of the low-base strong reach B and C effects using the brightness data table for the respective introductory part (strong reach strong reach B introduction, strong reach strong reach C introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low-base strong reach B and C effects, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, allowing the game effect lamps 9 to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

In addition, in the low base strong reach B and C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common brightness data table (strong base common title) in the title display part, but in the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display in the low base strong reach B effect (brightness data table (strong reach strong reach B title) composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect), and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, the brightness data table for title display in the low base strong reach C effect is controlled using the brightness data table for title display in the low base strong reach C effect. The game effect lamp 9 may also be controlled using a brightness data table (a brightness data table (strong reach series strong reach C title) composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect). With this configuration, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using different title display brightness data tables for the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect and the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, so the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display, resulting in appropriate title display.

[Effect 14]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low-base strong reach A-C effects, low-base strongest reach effects, and high-base reach A-D effects. The low-base strong reach A-C effects, low-base strongest reach effects, and high-base reach A-D effects are each composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, the title display part of the low-base strong reach A-C effects, low-base strongest reach effects, and high-base reach A-D effects can display an expectation suggestion display composed of multiple star-shaped objects. In the expectation suggestion display, the first star-shaped object is highlighted, then, while continuing to highlight the first star-shaped object, the second star-shaped object is highlighted, and then the highlighting of the first star-shaped object is ended and the third star-shaped object is highlighted. By doing this, in the expectation indication display, highlighting of the second star-shaped object begins before highlighting of the first star-shaped object ends, but highlighting of the third star-shaped object does not begin until highlighting of the first star-shaped object ends, making it easier to recognize the number of objects suggesting the expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, when displaying the degree of expectation, an expectation suggestion sound is output each time a star-shaped object is highlighted, and after the output of the expectation suggestion sound for highlighting one star-shaped object has finished, an expectation suggestion sound for highlighting the next object is output. By doing this, the emphasis sound for highlighting one object and the emphasis sound for highlighting the next object do not overlap, making it easier to recognize the number of objects suggesting the degree of expectation.

The expectation suggestion display is made up of multiple star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation" indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, and the star-shaped objects are highlighted in a size that overlaps with the text "Expectation." By highlighting the star-shaped objects in this way, attention can be drawn to both the multiple star-shaped objects that make up the expectation suggestion display and the text indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation.

In this embodiment, when some of the multiple star-shaped objects are highlighted, the highlighting of the star-shaped objects is superimposed on text indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the degree of expectation. However, it is also possible to configure the highlighting of all star-shaped objects to be superimposed on text indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the degree of expectation.

[Effect 15]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, and high base reach A to D effects. The low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, and high base reach A to D effects are each composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, it is possible to display multiple hold displays corresponding to variable displays that have not yet started, and it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display composed of multiple star-shaped objects in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, and high base reach A to D effects. Furthermore, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, and high base reach A to D effects, the hold display is not displayed simultaneously with the expectation suggestion display. By doing this, an expectation suggestion display made up of a plurality of objects is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, the low base strongest reach performances, and the high base reach A to D performances, but the hold display is not displayed simultaneously with the expectation suggestion display, so that it is possible to prevent the hold display from being mistakenly recognized as the expectation suggestion display.

In particular, the maximum number of pending displays and active displays corresponding to the variable displays that have been started will match the maximum number of star-shaped objects that make up the expectation suggestion display. Even if a low-base strong reach A-C effect, a low-base strongest reach effect, or a high-base reach A-D effect is executed when the maximum number of pending displays and active displays are displayed, it is possible to prevent the pending displays and active displays from being mistakenly recognized as the maximum number of star-shaped objects that make up the expectation suggestion display.

In addition, by erasing the hold display when a monochrome display effect is executed in which the display area is displayed in a monochrome color before the title display part begins, the hold display can be ended without any sense of incongruity.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects and high base reach A to D effects, it also uses a brightness data table for title display (strong base common title, high base The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A-C effects and high base reach A-D effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

In addition, in the low-base strongest reach presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part and introduction part using a single brightness data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and introduction part. However, it is also possible to control the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation using a brightness data table for title display (a brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach type strongest reach title)), and control the game effect lamp 9 in the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach presentation using a brightness data table for the introduction part (a brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach type strongest reach introduction)). With this configuration, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode corresponding to the title display, resulting in appropriate title display.

[Effect 16]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base strong reach A-C effects and high base reach A-C effects. The low base strong reach A-C effects and high base reach A-C effects are each configured to include a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect/high base reach A effect, an expectation suggestion display made up of a first number (3) of star-shaped objects can be displayed, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect, an expectation suggestion display made up of a second number (3.5) of star-shaped objects that is greater than the first number can be displayed, and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect, an expectation suggestion display made up of a third number (4) of star-shaped objects that is greater than the second number can be displayed. The difference between the first number (3) and the second number (3.5) is the same (0.5) as the difference between the second number (3.5) and the third number (4), and the difference between the expected jackpot when a low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed and the expected jackpot when a low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed is greater than the difference between the expected jackpot when a low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed and the expected jackpot when a low base strong reach A effect/high base reach A effect corresponding to the first number (3). By doing this, when the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an expectation indication display in the title display part increases from the first number (3) to the second number (3.5), the increase in the number of star-shaped objects is the same as when it increases from the second number (3.5) to the third number (4), but the increase in the expectation of a jackpot is greater when it increases from the second number (3.5) to the third number (4) than when it increases from the first number (3) to the second number (3.5).Therefore, as the number of star-shaped objects increases, the player can expect to hit a jackpot greater than the number of increased star-shaped objects, while not being overly hopeful of a jackpot when the number of star-shaped objects is small.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a low-base strongest reach effect/high-base reach D effect, and is capable of displaying an expectation indication display consisting of a star-shaped object of the fourth number (4.5), which is greater than the third number (4), in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect/high-base reach D effect, and the difference (0.5) between the third number (4) and the fourth number (4.5) is smaller than the difference (1) between the first number (3) and the third number (4), and the low-base strongest reach effect corresponding to the fourth number (4.5) The difference between the probability of a jackpot when the lowest base strongest reach effect/high base reach D effect is executed and the probability of a jackpot when the low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed is greater than the difference between the probability of a jackpot when the low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed and the probability of a jackpot when the low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect corresponding to the first number (3) is executed. By doing this, the increase in the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an expectation indication display in the title display part is smaller when the number of star-shaped objects increases from the third number (4) to the fourth number (4.5) than when it increases from the first number (3) to the third number (4), but the increase in the expectation of a jackpot is greater when it increases from the third number (4) to the fourth number (4.5) than when it increases from the first number (3) to the third number (4). Therefore, the more star-shaped objects there are, the more likely a jackpot will occur even if the number of added star-shaped objects is small.

Furthermore, the difference between the third number (4) and the fourth number (4.5) is 0.5, and the difference between the first number (3) and the third number (4) is 1, so it can be expected that there will be a greater chance of a jackpot if the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an expectation suggestion display in the title display part increases by 0.5 from the third number (4) to the fourth number (4.5) than if the number increases by 1 from the first number (3) to the third number (4).

Furthermore, in a probability variable state that is more favorable than the normal state, the difference in the likelihood of a jackpot when a high base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed and when a high base reach B effect corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed is greater than the difference in the likelihood of a jackpot when a low base strong reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed in the normal state and when a low base strong reach B effect corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed. In this way, in a probability variable state that is more favorable than the normal state, it can be expected that a jackpot will occur when the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an expectation indication in the title display part increases.

[Effect 17]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach A to C effects that have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base weak reach A and B effects under normal conditions. The low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects are each composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. The title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects has a longer execution time than the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, and an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects, while an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects. By doing this, the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, which have a relatively high expectation, is longer than the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, which have a relatively low expectation, and while an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, so it can be intuitively recognized that the low base strong reach A to C performances have a higher expectation than the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In addition, the title display part in the low base strong reach A-C effects consists of a prologue display period and a title character display period in which the title characters are displayed (title start period, title display period, title end period), while the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects does not have a prologue display period and is composed only of the title character display period, and the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A-C effects is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects. By doing this, the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A-C effects is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, allowing the player to intuitively recognize that the low base strong reach A-C effects have a higher level of expectation than the low base weak reach A and B effects.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach effects A-C under normal conditions. The title display part in the low base strong reach effects A-C consists of a prologue display period and a title character display period in which the title characters are displayed (title start period, title display period, title end period). The title display part in the low base strongest reach effect does not have a prologue display period and is composed only of the title character display period. The title character display period in the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect is longer than the title character display period in the title display part in the low base strong reach effects A-C. By doing this, the title character display period in the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect is longer than the title character display period in the title display part in the low base strong reach effects A-C, allowing the player to intuitively recognize that the low base strongest reach effect has a higher expectation than the low base strong reach effects A-C.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B presentations and the low base strong reach A to C presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for the respective title displays (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title), and in the introduction parts of the low base weak reach A and B presentations and the low base strong reach A to C presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for the respective introduction parts (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

[Effect 18]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A, B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than low base weak reach A, B effects under normal conditions. The low base weak reach A, B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in the low base weak reach A and B effects, there are cases where the effect result is an announcement of a jackpot, and cases where the effect results in an announcement of a miss, or cases where the effect develops into another super reach effect. In the low base strong reach A to C effects, there are cases where the effect result is an announcement of a jackpot, or cases where the effect results in an announcement of a miss. Furthermore, while an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects, an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects. By doing this, an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances in which a jackpot will be directly announced, while an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances in which a jackpot will not be directly announced, so that excessive expectations can be prevented from being created by the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to display the title text in a golden form, which confirms that the effect will develop into another super reach effect, so it is possible to draw the player's attention even in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, where no expectation indication is displayed.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B presentations and the low base strong reach A to C presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for the respective title displays (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title), and in the introduction parts of the low base weak reach A and B presentations and the low base strong reach A to C presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for the respective introduction parts (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

[Effect 19]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low-base strong reach A-C effects and low-base strongest reach. The low-base strong reach A-C effects and low-base strongest reach are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, the low-base strong reach A-C effects and low-base strongest reach may be executed via a selection effect using title characters corresponding to multiple super reach effects, and it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display together with the title characters in the title display part and selection effect of the low-base strong reach A-C effects and low-base strongest reach. Furthermore, when displaying the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A-C effects and low-base strongest reach, an expectation suggestion display composed of multiple star-shaped objects is displayed in stages, and when displaying the expectation suggestion display in the selection effect, the expectation suggestion display composed of multiple star-shaped objects is not displayed in stages. By doing this, when the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performances and the low base strongest reach, the expectation suggestion display made up of a plurality of star-shaped objects is displayed in stages, whereas when the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the selection performance, the expectation suggestion display made up of a plurality of star-shaped objects is not displayed in stages, so that the annoyance caused by the expectation suggestion display being displayed in stages not only in the title display part but also in the selection performance that precedes it can be eliminated.

In addition, the selection effect changes gradually from a Super Reach effect with a low probability of winning to a Super Reach effect with a high probability of winning by operating push button 31B. The time required for one change in the selection effect, i.e., the minimum time required to switch to the title image of the next Super Reach effect, may be shorter than the time required for one level of indication of the probability of winning in the title display part of the Low Base Strong Reach A-C effects and the Low Base Strongest Reach, i.e., the time it takes for the star-shaped object to change from black to highlighted and then to gold, giving a sense of speed to the gradual change in the selection effect.

Furthermore, the selection effect changes step by step from the current Super Reach effect to a Super Reach effect with one step higher chance of a jackpot, and the number of push button 31B operations required to change to the next step increases with each step. In this way, the higher the chance of a jackpot in the Super Reach effect, the more impatient the player becomes.

In addition, if a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach is selected through the selection effect, the title display part of that super reach effect will begin. By doing this, even if a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach is executed via the selection effect, the title display part will begin, making it easier for the player to determine which super reach effect was ultimately executed.

[Effect 20]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, after the super reach effect announces that a jackpot has been reached, the title character corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be displayed in the jackpot start effect. The title character of the jackpot start effect is displayed in a manner that moves more dramatically than the title character of the super reach effect. In this way, the situation in which the title character is displayed in the super reach effect is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will be reached, whereas the situation in which the title character of the jackpot start effect is displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will be reached. Therefore, the title character of the jackpot start effect moves more dramatically, allowing the player to celebrate the fact that the jackpot gaming state has been reached.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a static state in the title display part of the Super Reach effect, but the title characters may also be displayed in a moving manner in the title display part of the Super Reach effect. Even in this configuration, the title characters of the jackpot start effect can be displayed in a more dynamic manner than the title characters of the Super Reach effect, allowing you to celebrate the game being controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, in the title display part of the Super Reach effect, when the title characters are displayed, a background dedicated to the title display is displayed (Low Base Strong Reach B and C effects, Low Base Strongest Reach effect, High Base Reach A-D), and the background of the title characters in the jackpot start effect is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the background dedicated to the title display in the Super Reach effect. By doing this, the background of the title characters in the jackpot start effect also moves more greatly, allowing you to celebrate the fact that you have been controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

In this embodiment, the background dedicated to displaying the title in the Super Reach effect is a still image, but the background dedicated to displaying the title in the Super Reach effect may also be a moving image. Even in this configuration, the background of the title characters in the jackpot start effect is displayed in a manner with more movement than the background dedicated to displaying the title in the Super Reach effect, allowing you to celebrate being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 21]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in the operation prompting effects B and D in the introductory part of the super reach effect, small operation prompting characters that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B can be displayed. In this case, the small operation prompting characters are displayed in a manner that moves more than the title character corresponding to the super reach effect. In this way, the small operation prompting characters displayed in the introductory part prompt the player to take an action (operation), and by moving them more than the title character displayed in the title display part, the player can be intuitively prompted to take an action (operation).

Furthermore, in operation prompting effects B and D in the introductory part of the Super Reach effect, the player is prompted to operate push button 31B, and it is possible to display operation prompting characters (large) that suggest a more advantageous situation than operation prompting characters (small), and both operation prompting characters (small) and operation prompting characters (large) are displayed in a manner that causes greater movement than the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach effect. In this way, whether it is operation prompting characters (small) or operation prompting characters (large), by moving them more than the title characters displayed in the title display part, it is possible to intuitively encourage the player to take action (operate).

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a stationary state in the title display part of the Super Reach effect, but the title characters may also be displayed in a moving manner in the title display part of the Super Reach effect. Even in this configuration, by displaying the operation prompt characters (small) in a manner that moves more than the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the player can be intuitively encouraged to take action (operate). Also, even in this configuration, by displaying both the operation prompt characters (small) and the operation prompt characters (large) in a manner that moves more than the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach effect, whether the operation prompt characters (small) or the operation prompt characters (large) move more than the title characters displayed in the title display part, the player can be intuitively encouraged to take action (operate).

In addition, the number of characters (3) in the small operation prompt text is less than the number of characters (7-13) in the title text of the Super Reach effect, so the content of the text can be recognized even if the small operation prompt text is moved widely.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 22]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect is composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in the title display part of the super reach effect, explanatory characters that explain the content of the super reach effect can be displayed. In this case, the explanatory characters are displayed in a manner that moves more than the title characters that correspond to the super reach effect. In this way, by displaying the additionally displayed explanatory characters in a manner that moves more than the title characters, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that explanatory characters have been added in addition to the title characters.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a static state in the title display part of the super reach effect, but the title characters may also be displayed in a moving manner in the title display part of the super reach effect. Even in such a configuration, by displaying the explanatory characters in a manner that moves more than the title characters in the super reach effect, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that explanatory characters have been added in addition to the title characters.

In addition, the explanatory text suggests that the Super Reach effect is advantageous, so the presence of the explanatory text can draw even more attention.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 23]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base strong reach A-C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A-B effects and the low base weak reach A-B effects. The low base weak reach A-B effects and the low base strong reach A-C effects each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. The title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A-C effects are displayed in larger character size than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A-B effects. By doing this, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A-C effects, which have a relatively high expectation, are displayed in larger character size than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A-B effects, which have a relatively low expectation, so that the title characters alone can be used to intuitively recognize that the low base strong reach A-C effects have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A-B effects.

Furthermore, the number of characters (10) making up the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects is greater than the number of characters (7, 8) making up the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach B and C effects, but the display area size of the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach B and C effects is larger than the display area size of the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects. By doing this, the display area size occupied by one character is larger for the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach B and C effects, allowing the player to intuitively recognize that the low base strong reach B and C effects have a higher chance of winning than the low base weak reach A and B effects.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B presentations and the low base strong reach A to C presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for the respective title displays (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title), and in the introduction parts of the low base weak reach A and B presentations and the low base strong reach A to C presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for the respective introduction parts (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

[Effect 24]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super reach effect after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 reaches a reach state. The super reach effect is composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, before the title display part in the super reach effect, a decorative pattern (large) is displayed in a reach state, and then the decorative pattern (large) displayed in the reach state is reduced to a smaller decorative pattern (small). At this time, at least one character of the title character corresponding to the super reach effect is displayed in a size larger than the decorative pattern (small). By doing this, at least one character of the title character corresponding to the super reach effect is displayed in a size larger than the reduced decorative pattern (small), so that the title character can be focused on in the title display part.

In addition, all characters of the title letters corresponding to the Super Reach effect are displayed smaller than the decorative pattern (large) and larger than the decorative pattern (small). This ensures that the decorative pattern (large) can be recognized when the Reach state is reached, and then the decorative pattern (large) is reduced to a decorative pattern (small), and each character that makes up the title letters is displayed larger than the decorative pattern (small), so that attention can be drawn to the title letters in the title display part.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 25]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in operation prompting effects B and D in the introductory part of the super reach effect, small operation prompting characters can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Furthermore, after a jackpot is announced by the super reach effect, title characters corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be displayed in the jackpot start effect. The title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the small operation prompting characters. In this way, the situation in which small operation prompting characters are displayed in the super reach effect indicates a situation in which it is not yet clear whether a jackpot has occurred, whereas the situation in which the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed indicates a situation in which a jackpot has already been announced. Displaying the title characters of the jackpot start effect larger than the small operation prompting characters allows the player to celebrate the jackpot gaming state.

The title characters for the jackpot start effect are composed of "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS." After "BIG" or "REGULAR" is displayed at the top of the fixed position, "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position. After "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, "BIG" or "REGULAR" displayed at the top of the fixed position and "BONUS" displayed at the bottom of the fixed position are gradually enlarged. Furthermore, "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS" are displayed at their smallest size when displayed at the top and bottom of the fixed position, and the size of the characters when "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS" are displayed at the top and bottom of the fixed position is larger than the size of the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small). By doing this, the characters that make up the title characters for the jackpot start effect are always displayed larger than the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small), making it even more congratulatory to be controlled into the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the smallest character in the string of characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the largest character in the string of characters that make up the small operation prompt characters. By doing this, no matter which character you focus on, the title characters of the jackpot start effect will be displayed larger than the small operation prompt characters, making it even more congratulatory to be controlled into the jackpot game state.

It is also possible to display special prompt characters (large) that suggest a more advantageous situation than the small prompt characters. The large prompt characters are displayed larger than the title characters of the jackpot start effect, allowing the player to sense the advantageous situation.

In addition, the smallest character in the string of characters that make up the large operation prompt characters is displayed larger than the largest character in the string of characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect. This means that no matter which character the player focuses on, the large operation prompt characters will be displayed larger than the title characters of the jackpot start effect, making the player aware of the advantageous situation.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 26]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, after the super reach effect announces that a jackpot has been reached, the title characters corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be displayed in the jackpot start effect. The title characters for the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect. By doing so, the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the super reach effect is one in which it is not yet clear whether a jackpot will be reached, whereas the situation in which the title characters for the jackpot start effect are displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will be reached. By displaying the title characters for the jackpot start effect larger than the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the game has been controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the Super Reach effect includes multiple types of Super Reach effects with different title characters, and the title character of the jackpot start effect is displayed larger than the title character corresponding to any of the types of Super Reach effects, allowing you to celebrate the jackpot game state being controlled.

In addition, the smallest character in the string of characters that make up the title characters for the jackpot start effect is displayed larger than the largest character in the string of characters that make up the title characters corresponding to any type of super reach effect, so no matter which character you focus on, the title character for the jackpot start effect will be displayed larger than the title character that corresponds to the super reach effect, making it even more congratulatory that you have been controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 27]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in the operation prompting effect A that is executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to display operation prompting characters (small) that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Then, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed larger than the operation prompting characters (small). By doing this, the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title characters that are displayed thereafter are displayed larger than the operation prompting characters (small), thereby drawing attention to the title characters.

Furthermore, after the operation prompt text (small) is displayed, the low base weak reach A and B effects develop, and the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects begins. By doing this, the operation prompt text (small) is displayed before the title display part in the series of events, and the title text that is displayed afterwards is displayed larger than the operation prompt text (small), thereby drawing attention to the title text.

In addition, the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B effects is displayed larger than the largest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small), so no matter which character you focus on, you can draw attention to the title characters.

The effect control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. It also controls the game effect lamps 9 in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach-type common title), and in the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using the brightness data table for the respective introductory part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, allowing the game effect lamps 9 to emit light in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

[Effect 28]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, in the operation prompting effect A that is executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to display operation prompting characters (small) that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. In addition, after the low base weak reach A and B effects announce that a jackpot will occur, it is possible to display the title characters of the jackpot start effect corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, and the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed larger than the operation prompting characters (small). By doing this, the situation in which the title letters are displayed in the low base weak reach A and B effects is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will occur, whereas the situation in which the title letters of the jackpot start effect are displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will occur, and by displaying the title letters of the jackpot start effect larger than the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. Also, by displaying operation prompt letters (small) before the title display part and displaying the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects that are displayed afterwards larger than the operation prompt letters (small), it is possible to draw attention to the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects.

Furthermore, after the operation prompt character (small) is displayed, the low base weak reach A and B effects develop, the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects begins, and after the low base weak reach A and B effects announce that a jackpot has been reached, the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed. In this way, the operation prompt character (small) is displayed before the title display part in the series of events, and the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects that are displayed afterwards are displayed larger than the operation prompt character (small), thereby drawing attention to the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, and after the low base weak reach A and B effects announce that a jackpot has been reached, the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, allowing the player to celebrate being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

The effect control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. It also controls the game effect lamps 9 in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach-type common title), and in the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using the brightness data table for the respective introductory part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, allowing the game effect lamps 9 to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

[Effect 29]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, after the super reach effect announces that a jackpot has been reached, the title character corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be displayed in the jackpot start effect. The title character of the jackpot start effect is displayed for a longer period of time than the title character corresponding to the super reach effect. In this way, the situation in which the title character is displayed in the super reach effect is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will be reached, whereas the situation in which the title character of the jackpot start effect is displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will be reached. By displaying the title character of the jackpot start effect for a longer period of time than the title character corresponding to the super reach effect, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the jackpot gaming state has been reached.

In addition, the time from when all of the characters making up the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed until at least a portion of those characters disappear is longer than the time from when part of the characters making up the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect are displayed until all of those characters disappear. By doing this, the time during which the title characters of the jackpot start effect, which has a celebratory meaning, are clearly visible is made longer than the time during which the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect, which are intended to increase the possibility of a jackpot, are displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, after the title letters of the jackpot start effect are displayed, the title letters of the jackpot start effect are switched to a right-hit promotion image (small) and a right-hit promotion image (large) which suggest the operation method during the jackpot game state, and after a predetermined period of time has passed since the switch to the right-hit promotion image (small) and right-hit promotion image (large), advantageous control is exercised by operating using the operation method suggested by the right-hit promotion image (small) and right-hit promotion image (large) (an operation method to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R), and the time it takes to switch from the title letters of the jackpot start effect to the right-hit promotion image (small) and right-hit promotion image (large) is shorter than the time it takes to end the title letters corresponding to the super reach effect. By doing this, the title text of the jackpot start effect switches to the right hit prompt image (small) and right hit prompt image (large) in a short time, and then after a predetermined period of time has passed, control is exercised that gives an advantage by operating using the operation method suggested by the right hit prompt image (small) and right hit prompt image (large), preventing the player from being disadvantaged by changing the operation method during the period when the title text of the jackpot start effect ends.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 30]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in operation prompting effects B and D in the introductory part of the super reach effect, small operation prompting characters can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Furthermore, after a jackpot is announced by the super reach effect, title characters corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be displayed in the jackpot start effect. The title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed for a longer period of time than the small operation prompting characters. In this way, the situation in which the small operation prompting characters are displayed in the super reach effect is one in which it is not yet clear whether a jackpot has occurred, whereas the situation in which the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot has occurred. By displaying the title characters of the jackpot start effect for a longer period of time than the small operation prompting characters, the player can celebrate being controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

The small operation prompt text is displayed until the prompted operation is performed or the time for which the prompted operation is valid has elapsed, and the time for which the title text for the jackpot start effect is displayed is longer than the time from when the small operation prompt text is displayed until the time for which the prompted operation is valid has elapsed without the prompted operation being performed. By doing this, the title text for the jackpot start effect is displayed for a longer time than the time it is displayed without the prompted operation being performed after the small operation prompt text is displayed, allowing you to celebrate the game being controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, the time from when all of the characters making up the title character of the jackpot start effect are displayed until at least part of the character string disappears is longer than the time the small operation prompt characters are displayed. By doing this, the time the congratulatory title character of the jackpot start effect is clearly visible is longer than the time the small operation prompt characters, which are intended to encourage the player to operate the machine, are displayed, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

It is also possible to display large operation prompt characters that suggest a more advantageous situation than small operation prompt characters. Small operation prompt characters are displayed without any prompt introduction effects, while large operation prompt characters are displayed after the prompt introduction effects have been executed. The time that the title characters for the jackpot start effect are displayed is longer than the time that large operation prompt characters are displayed. In this way, the time that the congratulatory advantageous state name display is displayed is longer than the time that large operation prompt characters accompanied by a prompt introduction display are displayed, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 31]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in the operation prompting effect A that is executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to display operation prompting characters (small) that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Then, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed for a longer period of time than the operation prompting characters (small). By doing this, the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title characters that are displayed thereafter are displayed for a longer period of time than the operation prompting characters (small), thereby drawing attention to the title characters.

In addition, the time from when all the characters making up the title are displayed until at least part of the characters disappears is longer than the time the action prompt characters (small) are displayed. By doing this, the time the title display is clearly visible is longer than the time the prompt characters, which are intended to encourage the player to take action, are displayed, drawing attention to the title characters.

It is also possible to display large operation prompt characters that suggest a more advantageous situation than small operation prompt characters. Small operation prompt characters are displayed without any prompt introduction, while large operation prompt characters are displayed after the prompt introduction has been executed. The title characters are displayed for a longer period than the large operation prompt characters. This allows the title display to be displayed for a longer period than the large operation prompt characters that accompany the prompt introduction, drawing attention to the title characters.

The effect control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. It also controls the game effect lamps 9 in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach-type common title), and in the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using the brightness data table for the respective introductory part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, allowing the game effect lamps 9 to emit light in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

[Effect 32]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in the operation prompting effect A, which is executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to display small operation prompting characters that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Furthermore, after the low base weak reach A and B effects announce that a jackpot will occur, it is possible to display the title characters of the jackpot start effect corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state. The title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed for a longer period of time than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, and the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed for a longer period of time than the small operation prompting characters. By doing this, the situation in which the title letters are displayed in the low base weak reach A and B effects is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will occur, whereas the situation in which the title letters of the jackpot start effect are displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will occur, and by displaying the title letters of the jackpot start effect for a longer period of time than the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the game has been controlled to a jackpot. Also, by displaying operation prompt letters (small) before the title display part and then displaying the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects for a longer period of time than the operation prompt letters (small), it is possible to draw attention to the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects.

The effect control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. It also controls the game effect lamps 9 in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach-type common title), and in the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using the brightness data table for the respective introductory part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, allowing the game effect lamps 9 to emit light in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

[Effect 33]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects in the normal state, and can execute high base reach A to D effects in a probability variable state that is more advantageous than the normal state. The low base weak reach A and B effects, low base strong reach A to C effects, and high base reach A to D effects in the probability variable state are all composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the low base strong reach A to C effects have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B effects, the high base reach B to D effects have a higher jackpot expectation than the high base reach A effect, and the high base reach A effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B effects. Then, an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C effects, the high base reach A effect, and the high base reach B to D effects, but an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects. By doing this, the low base weak reach A and B effects in the normal state have a lower jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A to C effects in the normal state, so by displaying an expectation suggestion display in the low base strong reach A to C effects but not displaying an expectation suggestion display in the low base weak reach A and B effects, excessive expectations of a jackpot due to the low base weak reach A and B effects are not created. On the other hand, although the high base reach A effect in a probability variable state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the high base reach B to D effect in the probability variable state, it has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A and B effect in the normal state, so by displaying an expectation indication display in both the high base reach A effect and the high base reach B to D effect, it is possible to expect a jackpot in both the high base reach A effect and the high base reach B to D effect.

[Effect 34]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super reach effect both in the normal state and in a probability variable state that is more advantageous than the normal state. The super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state are both composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. The title display part of the super reach effect in the probability variable state is shorter than the title display part of the super reach effect in the normal state. By doing so, the title display part of the super reach effect in the probability variable state is shorter than the title display part of the super reach effect in the normal state, allowing for a fast-paced gameplay in the probability variable state.

In addition, even if the frequency with which Super Reach effects are executed in the probability variable state is higher than the frequency with which Super Reach effects are executed in the normal state, the title display portion of the Super Reach effects in the probability variable state is shorter than the title display portion of the Super Reach effects in the normal state, allowing play in the probability variable state to proceed at a good tempo.

The effect control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and also controls the brightness data tables for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title, The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction) for the introduction part of the super reach effect. In this way, during the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 35]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach effect, which has a higher probability of winning than the low base strong reach effects A to C and the low base strong reach effects A to C. The low base strong reach effects A to C and the low base strong reach effects include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs 900 variable displays in the normal state without being controlled to a jackpot, it controls to the time-saving state B (Yu-time), which is more advantageous than the normal state. In the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects, the title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side of the display area to the center, and in the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect, the title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are displayed reduced from an enlarged display, and when controlled to time-shortened state B (Yu-time), in the Yu-time start effect, the title characters of the Yu-time start effect are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are displayed reduced from an enlarged display, similar to the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect. By doing this, when controlled to time-shortened state B (Yu-time), in the Yu-time start effect, the title characters of the Yu-time start effect are displayed in the same display mode as the title characters of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a relatively high expectation of a jackpot, so that it can be recognized that time-shortened state B (Yu-time) is highly advantageous.

In addition, when the title characters are erased in the Yu-Time start effect, they are erased in a display format in which they expand while being erased, similar to when the title characters are erased in the title display part of the Low Base Strongest Reach effect. By doing this, even when the title characters are erased in the Yu-Time start effect, they are erased in the same display format as when the title characters are erased in the Low Base Strongest Reach effect, which has a relatively high expectation of a jackpot, allowing the player to recognize that time-saving state B (Yu-Time) is highly advantageous.

[Effect 36]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a Super Reach effect. The Super Reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, if the game control microcomputer 100 performs 900 variable displays in the normal state without being controlled to a jackpot, it controls the game to a time-saving state B (Yu-time), which is more advantageous than the normal state. When controlled to time-saving state B (Yu-time), the title character of the Yu-time start effect is displayed in the Yu-time start effect, and the size of the characters constituting the title character of the Yu-time start effect is larger than the size of the characters constituting the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect. In this way, while the title character is displayed in the Super Reach effect when it is not yet clear whether a jackpot will occur, the title character of the Yu-time start effect is controlled to time-saving state B (Yu-time), and the characters constituting the title character of the Yu-time start effect are displayed larger than the characters constituting the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect, allowing the player to celebrate being controlled to time-saving state B (Yu-time).

In addition, the Super Reach effect includes multiple types of Super Reach effects with different title characters, and the characters that make up the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect are larger than the characters that make up the title characters corresponding to any type of Super Reach effect. By doing this, the characters that make up the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect are displayed larger than the characters that make up the title characters corresponding to any type of Super Reach effect, so you can celebrate being controlled to time-saving state B (Yu-Time).

In addition, the smallest character among the characters making up the title character of the Yu-Time start effect is larger than the largest character among the characters making up the title character corresponding to any type of Super Reach effect. By doing this, no matter which character you focus on, the title character of the Yu-Time start effect will be displayed larger than the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect, making it even more congratulatory that you have been controlled to time-saving state B (Yu-Time).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 37]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a Super Reach effect. The Super Reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, when 900 variable displays are performed in the normal state without being controlled to a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game to a time-saving state B (Yu-time), which is more advantageous than the normal state. When controlled to time-saving state B (Yu-time), the title character of the Yu-time start effect is displayed in the Yu-time start effect, and the display time of the title character of the Yu-time start effect is longer than the display time of the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect. In this way, while the title character is displayed in the Super Reach effect when it is not yet clear whether a jackpot will occur, the title character of the Yu-time start effect is controlled to time-saving state B (Yu-time), and the title character of the Yu-time start effect is displayed longer than the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect, allowing the player to celebrate the control to time-saving state B (Yu-time).

In addition, the time from when all of the characters making up the title character of the Yu-Time start effect are displayed until at least a portion of that character is no longer displayed is longer than the time from when part of the characters making up the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect is displayed until all of that character is no longer displayed. By doing this, the time during which the title character of the Yu-Time start effect, which has a celebratory meaning, is clearly visible is longer than the time during which the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect, which is intended to increase the possibility of a jackpot, is displayed, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 38]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a Super Reach effect. The Super Reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, when 900 variable displays are performed in the normal state without being controlled by a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game to a time-saving state B (Yu-time), which is more advantageous than the normal state. Furthermore, in the normal state, it is possible to display characters indicating the number of times remaining until the game is controlled to the time-saving state B (Yu-time). Furthermore, the size of the characters constituting the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect is larger than the size of the characters constituting the characters constituting the characters constituting the number of times remaining until the game is controlled to the time-saving state B (Yu-time). In this way, the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect is displayed larger than the characters constituting the characters constituting the characters constituting the number of times remaining until the game is controlled to the time-saving state B (Yu-time), thereby drawing attention to the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect.

In addition, the Super Reach effect includes low base weak reach A and B effects, and low base strong reach A-C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than low base weak reach A and B effects. The remaining number of plays until Yu-Time is displayed during low base weak reach A and B effects, but not during low base strong reach A-C effects. By doing this, the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time is displayed during low base weak reach A and B effects, which have a low jackpot expectation, making the player aware of the number of plays until time-saving state B (Yu-Time). Meanwhile, in low base strong reach A-C effects, which have a high jackpot expectation, the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time is not displayed, drawing attention to the content of the effect. Furthermore, since time-saving state B (Yu-Time) is more likely to result in a jackpot than normal state, this can alleviate the player's disappointment when there are few plays remaining until time-saving state B (Yu-Time).

In addition, if the selection effect progresses to a low base strong reach A-C effect without going through the low base weak reach A or B effect, the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time is not displayed even during the selection effect. This prevents the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time from interfering with the selection effect that confirms a super reach effect of low base strong reach A-C or higher, and also reduces the player's disappointment when there are only a few plays remaining until time-saving state B (Yu-Time).

In addition, when a jackpot is announced in the low base strong reach A-C effects, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state without displaying the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time again, and when a miss is announced in the low base strong reach A-C effects, the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time is displayed again after the low base strong reach A-C effects end. By doing this, when a jackpot is announced in the low base strong reach A-C effects, the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time is not displayed again, thereby mitigating the player's disappointment when there are few plays left until time-saving state B (Yu-Time). In addition, when a miss is announced in the low base strong reach A-C effects, the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time is displayed again after the low base strong reach A-C effects end, allowing the player to feel relieved quickly when there are few plays left until time-saving state B (Yu-Time).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 39]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a Super Reach effect. The Super Reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, when 900 variable displays are performed in the normal state without being controlled by a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game to a time-saving state B (Yu-time), which is more advantageous than the normal state. Furthermore, in operation prompting effects A to D executed at timings related to the Super Reach effect, small operation prompting characters can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Furthermore, in the normal state, characters indicating the number of times remaining until the game is controlled to the time-saving state B (Yu-time) can be displayed. Furthermore, the size of the characters constituting the small operation prompting characters is larger than the size of the characters constituting the number of times remaining until the game is controlled to the Yu-time. By doing so, the small operation prompting characters are displayed larger than the characters constituting the number of times remaining until the game is controlled to the Yu-time, thereby drawing attention to the small operation prompting characters and effectively encouraging the player to take action (operate).

Furthermore, when executing the low base strong reach A-C effects among the super reach effects, if the operation prompt character (small) is displayed in operation prompt effect A, which is executed before the title display part, the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-Time is displayed at the same time, whereas if the operation prompt character (small) is displayed in operation prompt effect D, which is executed at the end of the introductory part, the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-Time is not displayed. By doing this, before the development into the low base strong reach A-C effects, the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-Time is displayed at the same time as the prompt character display operation prompt character (small), making the player aware of the number of times remaining until time-saving state B (Yu-Time), and by not displaying the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-Time in the operation prompt character (small) in the introductory part, the player can focus on whether or not a jackpot will be announced.

Furthermore, when the low base strong reach A-C effects are executed, operation prompt A, which is executed before the title display part, displays only the small operation prompt characters out of the small operation prompt characters and the large operation prompt characters, which suggest a more favorable situation than the small operation prompt characters. Meanwhile, operation prompt D, which is executed at the end of the introductory part, can display both the small operation prompt characters and the large operation prompt characters. When the large operation prompt characters are displayed in the low base strong reach A-C effects, the characters showing the number of times remaining until Yu-time are not displayed at the same time. By doing this, in addition to being notified of whether a jackpot will occur, the large operation prompt characters are displayed, drawing attention to the fact that a more favorable situation is suggested.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach presentation, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title), and in the introduction part of the super reach presentation, it controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, during the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

[Effect 40]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, when 900 variable displays are performed in the normal state without being controlled to a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game to a time-saving state B (Yu-time), which is more advantageous than the normal state. Furthermore, after a jackpot is announced by the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state can be displayed. Furthermore, in the normal state, the remaining number of times until Yu-time can be displayed, indicating the number of times remaining until the game is controlled to the time-saving state B (Yu-time). Furthermore, before displaying the title character of the jackpot start effect, the remaining number of times until Yu-time is erased, and the size of the characters constituting the title character of the jackpot start effect is larger than the size of the characters constituting the remaining number of times until Yu-time. By doing this, the situation in which the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will occur, and the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time are unnecessary, so the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time are erased before the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed, and the characters constituting the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the characters constituting the number of times remaining until Yu-time, so that it is possible to celebrate being controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, regardless of the number of times remaining until time-saving state B (Yu-time), the size of the characters that make up the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time is the same, and the size of the characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the size of the characters that make up the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time. By doing this, regardless of the number of times remaining until time-saving state B (Yu-time), the characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the characters that make up the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time, so you can celebrate being controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs a variable display in response to the first entry of a game ball into the first start winning slot or the second start winning slot in time-shortened state B (Yu-time), it uses a time-shortened state B start variable display pattern with a longer variable period than the variable pattern normally used in time-shortened state B (Yu-time). By doing this, the Yu-time start effect can be executed during the variable period corresponding to the time-shortened state B start variable display pattern during the first variable period in time-shortened state B (Yu-time).

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach presentation, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title), and in the introduction part of the super reach presentation, it controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, during the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

[Effect 41]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low-base weak reach A and B effects. The low-base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. It is also possible to change the title characters corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B effects from a white state to a red or gold state. When the title characters are changed from a white state to a red or gold state in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters are displayed so that the time during which they are displayed in the red or gold state is longer than the time during which they are displayed in the white state. In this way, when the title characters are changed from a white state to a red or gold state in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters in the red or gold state, i.e., the state after the change, are displayed longer than the title characters in the white state, i.e., the state before the change, so that the change from white to red or gold can be reliably recognized.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters may change from a white state to a red or gold state, or may remain in a white state. If the title characters are changed from a white state to a red or gold state, a specific sound is output as the white state changes to a red or gold state when time t1 has elapsed since the start of the title display period. If the title characters remain in a white state, the white state remains unchanged when time t1 has elapsed since the start of the title display period, and a specific sound is output. In this way, a specific sound is output when the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects change from a white state to a red or gold state at a specific timing, and a specific sound is also output when the title characters remain in a white state at the specific timing. This creates the expectation that the title characters will change to a red or gold state when the specific sound is output.

In addition, when the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects change from a white state to another state, a specific sound is output whether they change to a red state or a gold state, so the output of the specific sound draws attention to the type of state they will change to.

The effect control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. It also controls the game effect lamps 9 in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach-type common title), and in the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using the brightness data table for the respective introductory part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, allowing the game effect lamps 9 to emit light in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

[Effect 42]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, it is possible to change the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects from a white state to a red state, or to a gold state that suggests a higher likelihood of a jackpot than the red state. In either case where the title characters are changed from a white state to a red state or a gold state in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the characters are displayed by changing from the white state to a common display state and then changing to the red state or the gold state. By doing this, whether the title characters are changed from a white form to a red form or from a white form to a gold form in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, they are changed to a common display form and then changed to a red form or a gold form, so that by changing from the white form to the common display form, until the change from the common display form to the red form or the gold form, players can expect until the end that they will change to the gold form which has a higher probability of winning than the red form.

Furthermore, a common display mode is one in which the characters that make up the title text glow, and when the light clears, they change to a red or gold color. By doing this, it is possible to encourage the characters that make up the title text to glow and change to a red or gold color.

[Effect 43]
In this embodiment, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B presentations. The low base weak reach A and B presentations are comprised of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introductory part until the presentation result is announced. The presentation control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table comprised of brightness data. The effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 using a common brightness data table for the title display part (weak reach-type common title) in both the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect and the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect, controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for the low base weak reach A effect (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction) in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect, and controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for the low base weak reach B effect (weak reach-type weak reach B introduction) in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect. In this way, by using a common brightness data table corresponding to the title display part for the two different super reach effects, an increase in cost and capacity is prevented, and by using a corresponding brightness data table for each of the introduction parts, the period until an announcement of whether or not a jackpot has been achieved can be suitably aroused, resulting in suitable title display.

[Effect 44]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A, B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, which have a higher probability of winning than the low base weak reach A, B effects. The low base weak reach A, B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. The presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the common title display part (weak reach common title) in the title display part of the low base weak reach A presentation and in the title display part of the low base weak reach B presentation, and controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the common title display part (strong reach common title) in the title display part of the low base strong reach A presentation, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B presentation and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C presentation, and controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the low base weak reach A presentation (weak reach weak reach A introduction) in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A presentation. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the low base weak reach B presentation (introduction of weak reach B in a weak reach system) in the introductory part of the low base strong reach A presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the low base strong reach A presentation (introduction of strong reach A in a strong reach system) in the introductory part of the low base strong reach B presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the low base strong reach B presentation (introduction of strong reach B in a strong reach system), and in the introductory part of the low base strong reach C presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the low base strong reach C presentation (introduction of strong reach C in a strong reach system). In this way, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is common for two types of super reach effects with high expectations and two types of super reach effects with low expectations, thereby preventing an increase in cost and capacity, and by using the brightness data table corresponding to each of the introductory parts, it is possible to suitably stimulate the period until it is announced whether or not a jackpot has been achieved, and as a result, it is possible to perform a suitable title display.

[Effect 45]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A and B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects that have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B effects, and low base strongest reach effects that have an even higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A-C effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, and low base strongest reach effects each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. The presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for a common title display part (weak reach type common title) in the title display part of the low base weak reach A presentation and in the title display part of the low base weak reach B presentation, controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for a common title display part (strong reach type common title) in the title display part of the low base strong reach A presentation, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B presentation and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C presentation, controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for title display for the low base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach type strongest reach title) in the title display part of the low base strongest reach presentation, and controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for title display for the low base weak reach A presentation (weak reach type weak reach title) in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A presentation. In the introduction part of the low base strong reach A presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base weak reach B presentation (weak reach system weak reach B introduction), in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach A presentation (strong reach system strong reach A introduction), in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach B presentation (strong reach system strong reach B introduction), in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach C presentation (strong reach system strong reach C introduction), and in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction). In this way, for the two types of super reach effects with high expectations and the two types of super reach effects with low expectations, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is common, thereby preventing an increase in cost and capacity, and by using the brightness data table corresponding to each of the introductory parts, it is possible to suitably stimulate the period until it is announced whether or not a jackpot will be won, resulting in a suitable title display. Furthermore, the low-base strongest reach effect with the highest expectation is heightened by having dedicated brightness data tables for the title display part and the introductory part, resulting in a suitable title display.

[Effect 46]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are comprised of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, it is possible to change the display of the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects from a white state to a red state, or to a gold state that suggests a higher likelihood of a jackpot than the red state. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. When the color of the title letters is not changed in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table: weak reach common title (white) in which brightness data is set for when a title change effect is not performed; when the color of the title letters is changed to red or gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table: weak reach common title (red) or weak reach common title (gold) in which brightness data is set for when a title change effect is performed; and regardless of whether the color of the title letters is changed in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the common introduction part (weak reach weak reach A introduction, weak reach weak reach B introduction). By doing this, whether the title characters are not changed to red or gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances or are changed to the second form, the brightness data table corresponding to each introductory part is made common, thereby preventing an increase in cost and capacity, and by using the brightness data table corresponding to each title display part, it is possible to perform the performance appropriately in either the case where the color of the title characters is not changed or where they are changed to red or gold, and as a result, an appropriate title display can be performed.

[Effect 47]
In this embodiment, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B presentations. The low base weak reach A and B presentations are comprised of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introductory part until the presentation result is announced. The presentation control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table comprised of brightness data. Furthermore, the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects includes a title start period from when the title characters start to be displayed in their designated positions until they are displayed in their designated positions, and a title display period and a title end period after the title characters are displayed in their designated positions. The effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 during the title start period of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects using a brightness data table (weak reach title start) that defines a light-emitting pattern specific to the title start period, and controls the game effect lamps 9 during the title display period and title end period using a brightness data table (weak reach title display) that defines a light-emitting pattern specific to the period after the title display period. In this way, by using the brightness data table corresponding to the title start period from when the title characters start to be displayed in their designated positions until they are displayed in their designated positions in the low base weak reach A and B effects, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display period and title end period after the title characters are displayed in their designated positions, and the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part, the period during which the title characters are displayed and the period until the notification of whether or not a favorable state will be achieved can be favorably stimulated, resulting in favorable title display.

In addition, depending on whether it is a low base weak reach A presentation or a low base weak reach B presentation, a common brightness data table can be used for either the brightness data table corresponding to the title start period or the brightness data table corresponding to the title display period and title end period, and a separate brightness data table with individual contents set for the other period.By using a common brightness data table for either the title start period or the brightness data table corresponding to the title display period and title end period, increases in cost and capacity can be prevented, and by using the corresponding brightness data table for the other period, it is possible to appropriately present either a low base weak reach A presentation or a low base weak reach B presentation, resulting in an appropriate title display.

Although embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention are also included in the present invention.

The following further describes the implementation of the gaming machine according to the present invention.

[Form 1] (No. 1)
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The size of the reduced identification information is smaller than that of the decorative identification information, and it is possible to variably display reduced identification information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of decorative identification information (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variably display of small patterns corresponding to decorative patterns),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 32 ) that moves the ornament identification information,
The variable display of the reduced identification information is a switching display (e.g., switching display; see FIG. 33(E) ) in which the reduced identification information is switched to another reduced identification information without moving the reduced identification information,
In the variable display of the reduced identification information, one piece of decorative identification information is displayed in the variable display of the decorative identification information, and the reduced identification information can be switched multiple times during the period until the display of the one piece of decorative identification information is completed (for example, during the period Ta2 from when one decorative pattern is displayed until the display of the decorative pattern is completed, the small patterns are switched five times to small patterns of losing combinations, and are displayed for the period Ta1 each (period Ta1<period Ta2). See FIG. 33(E)).
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is configured by a combination of the decorative identification information (for example, a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326");
The display result of the variable display of the reduced symbol information is configured by a combination of the reduced symbol information (for example, a combination of small symbols such as "111" and "326");
When a non-specific combination, which is a combination of the decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, the reduced identification information is switched so that the combination of the reduced identification information corresponding to the non-specific combination does not become the combination of the reduced identification information corresponding to the non-specific combination before the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is derived (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 decides to statically display a confirmed decorative pattern of a losing combination (e.g., "326"), this part switches the display so that the small symbols of the losing combination, which are the same as the decorative pattern "326", are not displayed after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern and before statically displaying the confirmed decorative pattern of the losing combination (e.g., "326"); see FIG. 33(E)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information, the reduced identification information is switched before the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information is derived so that the combination of reduced identification information in the variable display of reduced identification information does not correspond to the non-specific combination.Therefore, it is not known in advance that a non-specific combination will be derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information from the combination of reduced identification information in the variable display of reduced identification information, and a decrease in interest can be prevented.

[Form 2] (No. 2)
The gaming machine of form 2 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Light-emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is constituted by a combination of the decorative identification information that has stopped in the valid display area among the plurality of decorative identification information displayed in the display area (for example, a portion that results in a jackpot or a loss depending on a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326" that have stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R),
When a non-specific combination, which is a combination of the decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, the decorative identification information can be displayed in a manner in which it is enlarged from a normal size and then returned to the normal size (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a variable stop action when it temporarily stops and displays a decorative pattern in a variable display based on a miss variable pattern. See Figures 47 to 49, 53, and 54).
When the decoration identification information to be stopped in the effective display area is enlarged and displayed, the decoration identification information that is not located in the effective display area is not enlarged and displayed (see Modification 3 of FIG. 68 ).
During the execution of the variable display of the decorative identification information, predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for a predetermined light emission period, and the predetermined light emission control is also continuously performed when the decorative identification information to be stopped in the effective display area is enlarged and displayed (for example, even when the performance control CPU 120 is executing a variable stop action when temporarily stopping a decorative pattern, loop light emission control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d is performed. See Figures 53 and 54).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination of decoration identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of decoration identification information, the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area is temporarily enlarged to draw the player's attention to the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area, and even when a non-specific combination that is meaningless to the player is derived, the player's gaze can be kept on the area where the decoration identification information is displayed. Furthermore, when the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area is enlarged, decoration identification information that is not located in the valid display area is not enlarged, so the player's gaze can be focused on the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area and the load on display control can be reduced. Furthermore, since the predetermined light-emission control continues even when the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area is enlarged, the control of the light-emitting means can be simplified.

[Form 3-1] (No. 4-1)
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a front-moving display (e.g., a scrolling display) in which the ornament identification information is moved from the back side to the front side while increasing transparency, and then disappeared (see FIGS. 39 to 41 ).
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display unit 002SG052) and a number image (e.g., a number display unit 002SG051),
During the forward movement display of the decoration identification information, other decoration identification information located on the back side of one decoration identification information becomes visible through the one decoration identification information, and the character images of the other decoration identification information are displayed while the number images are not displayed. After the one decoration identification information is erased, the number images of the other decoration identification information are displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 41(A) and (B), between being displayed in a frame-in state in the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and being displayed out of the frame, (For example, a decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "3") located at the back so as to overlap partially with the decorative pattern "2") may become visible through the decorative pattern "2". In this case, the character in the character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed, while the number ("3") in the number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), and as shown in Figure 41 (C), the decorative pattern "2" is erased, and then the number ("3") in the number display portion 002SG051 of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a front-moving display is performed in which decorative identification information is moved from the back side toward the front side while increasing its transparency and then erased, other decorative identification information located behind one decorative identification information can be seen through the first decorative identification information, but in this case, the character image of the other decorative identification information located behind is displayed while the number image is not displayed, and the first decorative identification information is erased before the number image of the other decorative identification information is displayed, so the number image of one decorative identification information and the number image of the other decorative identification information are not displayed overlapping each other, preventing the number image of the first decorative identification information located in the front side from becoming difficult to see.

[Form 3-2] (No. 4-2)
The gaming machine of form 3-2 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a front-moving display (e.g., a scrolling display) in which the ornament identification information is moved from the front side to the back side while increasing in transparency, and then disappeared (see FIGS. 42 and 43 ).
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display unit 002SG052) and a number image (e.g., a number display unit 002SG051),
During the forward movement display of the decoration identification information, other decoration identification information located behind one decoration identification information becomes visible through the one decoration identification information, and the character image of the one decoration identification information is displayed while the number image is not displayed. After the other decoration identification information is erased, the number image of the one decoration identification information is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figures 42(G) and (H), in the scroll display, the decorative patterns move in a curved manner from the front side to the back side. Therefore, between the time when the other decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "2") is displayed in the frame-in display in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the time when the other decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") is displayed out of the frame, the other decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "2") located behind the one decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") so as to partially overlap the one decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") may become visible through the decorative pattern "3". At this time, the character in character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "2" is displayed, while the number ("2") in number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed). Variation 1)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a front-moving display is performed in which decorative identification information is moved from the front side toward the back side while increasing its transparency and then erased, other decorative identification information located behind one decorative identification information can be seen through the one decorative identification information, but in this case, the one decorative identification information located in the front side has its character image displayed while its number image is not displayed, and the other decorative identification information is erased before the number image of the one decorative identification information is displayed, so the number image of the other decorative identification information and the number image of the one decorative identification information do not overlap and this prevents the number image of the other decorative identification information located behind from becoming difficult to see.

[Form 4] (No. 5)
The gaming machine of form 5 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Light-emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a rotation display in which the ornament identification information is rotated to alternately display the front and back sides of the ornament identification information (see FIGS. 44 and 45 ).
During the rotation display, the decoration identification information is semi-transparent, and when the rotation display stops, the decoration identification information is non-transparent (see FIGS. 44 and 45).
The decoration identification information includes a number image (e.g., number display unit 002SG051),
During the rotation display, the number image on the front side of the decorative identification information, which is in a semi-transparent state, is displayed, while the number image on the back side is not displayed (see FIG. 45 ).
During the execution of the variable display of the decorative identification information, a predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for a predetermined light emission period, and the predetermined light emission control is continuously performed even during the rotation display (for example, even when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed in a high base state, a light emission pattern of white, blue, and yellow may be repeatedly executed in this order based on a loop light emission control (see FIG. 35(B)) corresponding to the background pattern. Modified example. See FIG. 55).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the decorative identification information is rotated to repeatedly display the front and back sides of the decorative identification information, the decorative identification information becomes semi-transparent, so that not only the front side but also the back side of the decorative identification information can be seen through the display. In this case, the number images on the front side of the decorative identification information are displayed, but the number images on the back side are not displayed, so the number images on the front side and the number images on the back side of the decorative identification information do not overlap, preventing the number images on the front side from becoming difficult to see. In addition, since the predetermined light emission control is continued even during the rotation display, the control of the light emitting means can be simplified.

[Form 5] (No. 6)
The gaming machine of form 5 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area in which the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
When the specific display result is derived, after a ready-to-win state is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type as the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-win state is stopped in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion effect can be executed in which a reach line suggestion image (e.g., reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and then erased (e.g., a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion effect),
After the reach state is reached, the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area is made to be transparent at a first transparency (e.g., first transparency F1) until the reach line suggestion performance is executed, and after the reach line suggestion performance is executed, the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area is made to be transparent at a second transparency (e.g., second transparency F2) that is lower than the first transparency (see FIG. 63 ).
After the reach line suggestion performance is executed, the timing at which the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area is set to the second transparency is the timing at which the reach line suggestion image is erased from the third area (for example, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed, the timing at which the transmittance (transparency) of the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is set to the second transmittance F2 which is lower than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed is the timing after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. See FIGS. 61 to 63).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first area and the second area and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and at the timing when the reach line suggestion image is erased from the third area, the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area becomes a second transparency lower than the first transparency, so that the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area does not interfere with the reach line suggestion image.

[Form 6] (No. 7)
The gaming machine of form 6 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a light emitting means,
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area in which the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
When the specific display result is derived, after a ready-to-win state is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type as the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-win state is stopped in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion effect can be executed in which a reach line suggestion image (e.g., reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and then erased (e.g., a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion effect),
When the reach line suggestion performance is executed, an enlarged display for enlarging the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, and a separated display for separating the decorative identification information after the enlarged display are executed can be executed (see FIGS. 61 to 63 ).
The second period from the start to the end of the distant display is longer than the first period from the start to the end of the enlarged display (for example, the second period te1 from the start to the end of the distant display is longer than the first period td1 from the start to the end of the enlarged display (td1<te1; see FIG. 63 ).
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (e.g., a movable lamp 9d) disposed around the display means,
It is possible to execute a light-off control for turning off the specific light-emitting means while the reach line suggestion performance is being executed (for example, a part for turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A, 32B arranged on the periphery (nearby) of the display screen of the image display device 5 when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is being changed. See Figures 61 (F) to (H)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second regions and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third region, and the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second regions is enlarged and displayed for a first period and then spaced apart for a second period longer than the first period, thereby allowing the player to recognize the decorative identification information that forms the reach state. Also, by turning off the specific light-emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggestion image can be made to stand out more.

[Form 7] (No. 8)
The gaming machine of form 7 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a light emitting means,
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area in which the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
When the specific display result is derived, after a ready-to-win state is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type as the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-win state is stopped in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion effect can be executed in which a reach line suggestion image (e.g., reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and then erased (e.g., a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion effect),
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (e.g., a movable lamp 9d) disposed around the display means,
It is possible to execute a light-off control for turning off the specific light-emitting means while the reach line suggestion performance is being executed (for example, a part for turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A, 32B arranged on the periphery (nearby) of the display screen of the image display device 5 when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is being changed. See Figures 61 (F) to (H)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second areas and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and by turning off specific light-emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggestion image can be made to stand out more.

[Form 8] (No. 9)
The gaming machine of form 8 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Light-emitting means (e.g., main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, a predetermined operation display control is repeatedly performed to operate the decorative identification information in a predetermined operation mode over a first period (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative symbols at the stop positions of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the low base state, the loop action of the decorative symbols is repeatedly performed until the variable display of the special symbols is completed. See Figures 34(C), 53, and 54).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode over a second period (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative patterns at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the low base state, the loop light emission control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d is repeatedly performed. See Figures 35(B), 53, and 54).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is stopped in the special state, the predetermined operation display control is not performed (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative symbols at the stop positions of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the high base state, the loop action of the decorative symbols is not executed. See FIG. 55).
The second period is longer than the first period (for example, loop action period Tb3<loop light emission period Tb4. See FIG. 35A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, the predetermined action display control is repeatedly performed to prompt the player to change the display of the decorative identification information, while in the special state in which the variable display is likely to be performed, the variable display is not excessively prompted and the player feels annoyed. Furthermore, since the predetermined action display control is repeatedly performed at a shorter cycle than the predetermined light emission control, the decorative identification information can be suitably highlighted.

[Form 9] (No. 10)
The gaming machine of form 9 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
Information relating to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started can be stored as reserved memory information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 stores reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updates the number of reserved memories in the start winning determination process of step S101).
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is constituted by a combination of the decorative identification information stopped in the valid display area (for example, a portion that results in a jackpot or a loss depending on a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326" stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R),
In the normal state, when a non-specific combination, which is a combination of the decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, the decorative identification information can be enlarged from the normal size and then returned to the normal size according to the number of reserved memories stored as the reserved memory information (for example, a part where a variable stop action can be executed when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays a decorative pattern. See Figures 47 to 50).
In the special state, when the non-specific combination is derived as a result of the display of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, the decorative identification information is maintained at a normal size regardless of the number of reserved memories stored as the reserved memory information (for example, in a high base state in which the average variable display period is short and the decorative pattern is difficult to see, if a variable display based on a shortened variable pattern is executed regardless of the number of reserved memories, a variable stop action is not executed and the size is maintained and the decorative identification information is displayed as a temporary stop. See Figures 50 and 55).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, interest is enhanced by providing variations in the movement of the decorative identification information when it stops according to the number of reserved memories, while in the special state in which the average variable display period is short and the decorative identification information is difficult to see, the size is maintained while the decorative identification information is stopped so that its visibility is not impaired.

[Form 10] (No. 11)
The gaming machine of form 10 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 51(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 51(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then the image is erased, and a background fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized; see FIG. 51 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, an identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, an identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, when the timing for stopping the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the reduction in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The period during which the background fade-out display is performed is longer than the period during which the identification information fade-out display is performed (for example, the fade-out display period A1 during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out is longer than the fade-out display period A21 from when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start to be scrolled until they are displayed at high speed (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A21). See FIGS. 53 and 54).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the shorter the fade-out display is performed, the more suddenly the impression is given that the display has disappeared. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the variable display of decorative identification information and the background change are performed at the same time, the fade-out display of identification information is performed in a shorter period of time than the fade-out display of the background, thereby drawing attention to the start of the variable display of decorative identification information.

[Form 11] (No. 12)
The gaming machine of form 11 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 51(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 51(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then the image is erased, and a background fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized; see FIG. 51 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, an identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, an identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, when the timing for stopping the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the reduction in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The execution period of the identification information fade-out display and the execution period of the background fade-out display are different (for example, a portion where the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed at the same time. See FIGS. 53 and 54).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by synchronizing the fade-out display of the identification information and the fade-out display of the background, it is possible to prevent the start of variable display of the decoration identification information from becoming difficult to notice.

[Form 12] (No. 13)
A gaming machine of form 12 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 51(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 51(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then the image is erased, and a background fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized; see FIG. 51 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, an identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, an identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, when the timing for stopping the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the reduction in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The execution period of the background fade-in display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-in display (for example, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is longer than the fade-in display period B21 from when the display speed of the scrolling display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R starts to slow down until the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are temporarily stopped (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B21). See FIGS. 53 and 54).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fade-in display basically gives the impression of appearing suddenly the shorter the period in which it is performed, so if there is a possibility that the variable display of decorative identification information and the background change are performed at the same time, the fade-in display of identification information is performed in a shorter period of time than the fade-in display of the background, thereby drawing attention to the end of the variable display of decorative identification information.

[Form 13] (No. 14)
The gaming machine of form 13 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 51(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 51(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then the image is erased, and a background fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized; see FIG. 51 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, an identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, an identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, when the timing for stopping the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the reduction in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The execution period of the identification information fade-in display and the execution period of the background fade-in display are different (for example, a portion where the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed at the same time. See FIGS. 53 and 54).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by synchronizing the fade-in display of the identification information and the fade-in display of the background, it is possible to prevent the user from being confused about the end of the variable display of the decoration identification information.

[Form 14] (No. 15)
A gaming machine of form 14 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
A specific effect can be executed in which the variable display is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information until the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variable display is resumed (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "pseudo consecutive announcement" that determines whether or not the variable display will be resumed after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the display result is derived and displayed, in other words, whether or not one variable display will be made to look like multiple variable displays in a pseudo manner).
The decorative identification information has decorative identification information of multiple colors (e.g., blue, red) including a number image,
When the variable display is resumed in the specific performance, a number image (e.g., pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212) that can identify the number of times the variable display has resumed can be displayed in multiple colors (e.g., blue, red) (see FIGS. 59 and 60).
In the specific performance, there are cases where the number image of the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number display of the number image when the variable display is resumed are the same type, resulting in a first combination where the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number image are different in color, and there are cases where the number image of the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number image are different in color, resulting in a second combination where the number image of the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number display of the number image when the variable display is resumed, and both the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number image are the same type,
In the specific presentation, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the variable display is resumed in the second combination than when the variable display is resumed in the first combination (for example, in the pseudo consecutive prediction, there is a case where the display colors of the decorative symbols temporarily displayed and the pseudo consecutive number of times are not the same, and a case where the display colors of the decorative symbols temporarily displayed and the pseudo consecutive number of times are the same, and there is a case where the display colors of the decorative symbols temporarily displayed and the pseudo consecutive number of times are the same, and there is a higher probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state when the variable display is resumed in the second combination than when the variable display is resumed in the first combination in the pseudo consecutive prediction).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest in the game is increased because it is possible to draw attention not only to whether or not a specific effect is executed, but also to the combination of the number image of the decorative identification information temporarily displayed and the number and color of the count image if the specific effect is executed.

[Form 15] (No. 16)
A gaming machine of form 15 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The size of the reduced identification information is smaller than that of the decorative identification information, and it is possible to variably display reduced identification information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of decorative identification information (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variably display of small patterns corresponding to decorative patterns),
When the variable display is not being executed, a waiting effect that displays a predetermined image can be executed (for example, a portion that can execute a "waiting-for-customer demo effect" when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed since the effect control CPU 120 received a customer waiting demo designation command output from the main board 11 without receiving a control command such as a variable display start designation command. See FIG. 57 ).
When the standby effect is being executed, the decorative identification information is not displayed, while the reduced identification information continues to be displayed (see FIG. 57 ).
If the start condition for the variable display is met while the waiting effect is being executed, the variable display of the reduced identification information is started before the predetermined image is hidden, and then, after the predetermined image is hidden, the decorative identification information is displayed and the variable display is started (for example, if a start winning occurs while the customer waiting demo effect is being executed, the variable display of the small symbols is started before the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is hidden, then the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is hidden and switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode at that time (here, the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the first effect mode), and then the decorative symbols are displayed and the scrolling display is started. See FIG. 58).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display of the decorative identification information begins after the specified image is hidden, allowing the player to recognize that the variable display has begun when the conditions for starting the variable display are met, but since the variable display of the reduced identification information begins before the specified image is hidden, it is possible to ensure a display that corresponds to the variable display of the specific identification information.

[Form 16] (No. 17)
A gaming machine of form 16 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 18) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (e.g., a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs processing to display the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update processing of step S161).
When the variable display of the specific identification information starts, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 36).
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 32) that moves the decorative identification information, and a pre-action display (e.g., a change start action, see FIG. 34(A)) that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display,
In the normal state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and displayed as the active display 002SG103, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern does not start until the reserved shift display period ends, the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern starts after the reserved shift display period ends. See Figures 37 (C) to (F)).
The variable display of the decorative identification information is executed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of the decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 36).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information begins, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and while the switching display is being performed, a pre-operation display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display, thereby making effective use of the time required for the switching display. Furthermore, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is being performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, and the normal state tends to be monotonous, making it more interesting when the variable display of the decorative identification information begins. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 17] (No. 18)
The gaming machine of form 17 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 18) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (e.g., a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs processing to display the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update processing of step S161).
When the variable display of the specific identification information starts, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 36).
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 32) that moves the decorative identification information, and a pre-action display (e.g., a change start action, see FIG. 34(A)) that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display,
In the normal state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed, and the scrolling display is not started until the switching display is completed (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and is switched to and displayed as the active display 002SG103. The scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is not started until the reserved shift display period is completed, the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started after the reserved shift display period is completed. See Figures 37(C) to (F)).
The variable display of the decorative identification information is executed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of the decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 36).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, upon the start of variable display of specific identification information, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display. Furthermore, during the switching display, a pre-operation display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display of the decorative identification information. This allows for effective use of the time required for the switching display. Furthermore, since the moving display of the decorative identification information does not start until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the sense of incongruity caused by the moving display of the decorative identification information starting before the corresponding display is displayed can be eliminated. Furthermore, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, which can easily become monotonous, and the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information can be more interesting. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 18] (No. 19)
The gaming machine of form 18 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 18) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (e.g., a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs processing to display the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update processing of step S161).
When the variable display of the specific identification information starts, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 36).
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 32) that moves the decorative identification information, and a pre-action display (e.g., a change start action, see FIG. 34(A)) that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display,
In the special state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and displayed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern does not start until the reserved shift display period until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 ends, the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern starts after the reserved shift display period ends. Variant example).
The display of the decorative identification information is performed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).

It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 36).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and while the switching display is being performed, a pre-action display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display, thereby making effective use of the time required to perform the switching display. Furthermore, since the pre-action display is performed when the switching display is being performed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state, the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information in the special state can be made more exciting. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 19] (No. 20)
The gaming machine of form 19 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 18) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (e.g., a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs processing to display the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update processing of step S161).
When the variable display of the specific identification information starts, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 36).
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 32) that moves the decorative identification information, and a pre-action display (e.g., a change start action, see FIG. 34(A)) that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display,
In the special state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed, and the moving display is not started until the switching display is completed (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is not started until the reserved shift display period until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 is completed, and the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started after the reserved shift display period has completed. Variant example).
The display of the decorative identification information is performed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).

It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 36).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display of a specific identification information begins, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to a corresponding display. Furthermore, during the switching display, a pre-action display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display of the decorative identification information. This allows the time required for the switching display to be effectively utilized. Furthermore, since the moving display of the decorative identification information does not begin until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the sense of incongruity caused by the moving display of the decorative identification information beginning before the corresponding display is displayed can be eliminated. Furthermore, since the pre-action display is performed when the switching display is performed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state, the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information in the special state can be made more exciting. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 20] (No. 21)
The gaming machine of form 20 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to control to one of a plurality of presentation modes (for example, the first presentation mode to the fourth presentation mode) including the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode,
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, a fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a portion in which the decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the decorative pattern is faded out).
In the first presentation mode, a moving display of the decoration identification information is executed as a variable display of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 31(A1) and (A2)).
In the second presentation mode, a special variable display different from the moving display is executed as the variable display of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 31(B1) and (B2)).
The execution period of the fade-out display when the special variable display is executed in the second presentation mode is longer than the execution period of the fade-out display when the moving display is executed in the first presentation mode (for example, the fade-out display period A22 when the scrolling display is executed in the second presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scrolling display is executed in the first presentation mode (fade-out display period A21<fade-out display period A22. See Figures 56(A) and 56(B))).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second presentation mode, not only is the manner of variable display of the decorative identification information different from that in the first presentation mode, but the fade-out display period from the start of variable display to the erasure of the decorative identification information is longer, so that the decorative identification information can be focused on for a longer period of time.

[Form 21] (No. 22)
The gaming machine of form 21 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to control to one of a plurality of presentation modes (for example, the first presentation mode to the fourth presentation mode) including the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode,
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, a fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a portion in which the decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the decorative pattern is faded out).
The variable display pattern of the decoration identification information can be determined to be any one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns,
The execution period of the fade-out display differs between a case where a predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the first presentation mode and a case where the predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the second presentation mode (for example, the fade-out display periods A21, A22 differ between a case where a non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is determined in the first presentation mode and a case where a non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is determined in the second presentation mode. See FIGS. 56(A) and 56(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a predetermined variable display pattern is determined, the fade-out execution period differs between when the display is controlled in the first presentation mode and when the display is controlled in the second presentation mode, making it difficult for the player to predict that the predetermined variable display pattern is determined, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 22] (No. 23)
The gaming machine of form 22 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (e.g., an information display section 002SG053) that is information related to the character of the character image,
The variable display period includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display start condition is met until the decorative identification information starts to be variable displayed, and a post-variable display period after the decorative identification information starts to be variable displayed (for example, the variable display period of a special pattern includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display of the special pattern and small pattern starts until the scrolling display of the decorative pattern starts, and a post-variable display period after the scrolling display of the decorative pattern starts).
the character image is displayed in the pre-variable display period and the post-variable display period,
The related information image is erased after being displayed in the pre-variable display period and before the post-variable display period begins (for example, the name of the character (character related information) displayed in the information display unit 002SG053 is erased after being displayed in the pre-variable display period, i.e., when the variable start action is being executed, and before the post-variable display period begins, i.e., before the scrolling display of the decorative pattern begins. See FIGS. 34(A) and 37).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by drawing attention to the related information image before the variable display of the decorative identification information starts, i.e., while it is statically displayed, the player can deepen his/her understanding of the character. Also, by erasing the related information image before the variable display starts, the player can focus attention on the variable display, preview effects, etc. rather than the related information image.

[Form 23] (No. 24)
The gaming machine of form 23 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In the normal state, it is possible to control to one of a plurality of presentation modes including a first presentation mode (e.g., first presentation mode) and a second presentation mode (e.g., second presentation mode) (e.g., first presentation mode to fourth presentation mode. See FIG. 31 );
In the special state, it is possible to control to a presentation mode including a third presentation mode (for example, a third presentation mode or a fourth presentation mode),
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (e.g., an information display section 002SG053) that is information related to the character of the character image,
In the first presentation mode, the decoration identification information is displayed in a manner including the character image and the related information image (see FIG. 37 );
In the second and third presentation modes, the decoration identification information is displayed without including the related information image (see FIGS. 39, 40, and 44).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the first presentation mode, the related information image is displayed to draw the player's attention to the related information image, thereby allowing the player to deepen their understanding of the character, while in the second and third presentation modes, the related information image is erased, allowing the player to focus more on the variable display and preview presentation rather than the related information image.

[Form 24] (No. 25)
The gaming machine of form 24 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The decoration identification information includes a number image (e.g., number display unit 002SG061),
When the normal background image is displayed, it is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state will be achieved (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute an SP reach effect that notifies whether or not a jackpot will be achieved),
In the notification performance, a specific background image (for example, a fifth background image 002SG085) different from the normal background image is displayed,
When the notification effect is executed in a variable display in which the specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display, a combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed when the specific background image is displayed in the notification effect (for example, in an SP reach effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, a combination of symbols that determine a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 64(F)),
As the notification effect ends, the specific background image is erased and the normal background image is displayed, and while the normal background image is displayed, a combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 64(G), as the SP reach effect ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, a combination of symbols that determine a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed).
a specific image (e.g., specific image 002SG075) is displayed in an operational state adjacent to the number image of the combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result displayed when the normal background image is displayed;
In the special state, the specific image is not displayed (for example, in the low base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is displayed in the number display section 002SG051 of the combination of jackpot confirmation decorative symbols displayed after the end of the SP reach effect (see Figures 64(H) and (I)), while in the high base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is not displayed in the number display section 002SG051 of the combination of jackpot confirmation decorative symbols displayed after the end of the SP reach effect (see Figures 65(P) and (S))).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, the effect of the presentation is enhanced and made more exciting by displaying a specific image in motion relative to the number image of the decorative identification information displayed after the end of the notification presentation, but in the special state in which the average variable display period is short, the specific image is not displayed in motion relative to the number image of the decorative identification information displayed after the end of the notification presentation, thereby giving a sense of speed to the variable display.

[Form 25] (No. 18-2)
A gaming machine of aspect 25 is the gaming machine according to aspect 17 or aspect 18,
The performance control means
When the corresponding display (e.g., active display 002SG103) corresponding to the variable display displayed in the corresponding display area (e.g., active display area 5F) is erased based on the completion of the variable display of the specific identification information, an erasure effect display (e.g., erasure effect 002SG110) can be displayed to emphasize that the corresponding display has been erased,
If the hold display is displayed when the erase effect display is displayed, the erase effect display continues to be displayed until the variable display corresponding to the hold display starts (for example, the erase effect 002SG110 continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 is erased, and is erased after the next variable display corresponding to the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, as shown below. See FIG. 36 (B3)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not creating a blank period in the presentation between the end of a variable display and the start of the next variable display, it is possible to prevent the interest in the presentation from declining. Also, the erasure effect display allows the player to recognize that the corresponding display corresponding to the ended variable display has been erased, and the display of a new corresponding display allows the player to recognize that a new variable display has started.

[Form 26] (No. 18-3)
A gaming machine of aspect 26 is the gaming machine according to aspect 17 or aspect 18,
The area in which the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
In the normal state, the decoration identification information is displayed in a smaller size in the third area than in the first area and the second area (see, for example, FIG. 30 );
In the special state, the decorative identification information in the first area, the second area, and the third area is displayed in the same size (see, for example, FIG. 30 );
The third area in the special state is disposed closer to the center of the display area of the display means than the third area in the normal state (see, for example, FIG. 30).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, the decorative identification information in the first and second areas is made to look larger, and the decorative identification information in the third area is shifted to create a sense of depth and enhance interest, while in the special state in which the average variable display period is short, the decorative identification information is positioned near the center of the display area, thereby increasing the degree of recognition of the decorative identification information.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

Next, an embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following, the near side of Figure 12 will be referred to as the front (front face) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the far side will be referred to as the rear (rear face) side, and the description will be based on the up, down, left, and right directions when viewing the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side. Note that the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is the surface facing the player playing on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, in describing each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "002SGS1," and "Normal Reach" may be abbreviated as "N Reach" and "Super Reach" as "SP Reach."

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
12 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that forms the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls, which serve as gaming media, are shot into this gaming area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. When special symbols or the normal symbols described below vary, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. When decorative symbols described below vary, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variation also includes the display of a certain symbol flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that variable display is sometimes referred to as variable display or variation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special symbol," and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special symbol." A special symbol game using the first special symbol is also referred to as the "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbol is also referred to as the "second special symbol game." There may be only one type of special symbol display device that variably displays special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a variable display of multiple types of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

In addition, a display area 5S is provided in the upper left corner of the display screen of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and small symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols, and the small symbols are displayed variably in response to the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, reserved display, small symbols, error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, right-hit notification image 002SG201 (see Figure 31) that prompts the player to perform a right-hit operation, and remaining time-saving display 002SG202 (see Figure 31) that indicates the number of remaining time-saving plays may be displayed in front of (higher layer than) the effect images such as characters, thereby preventing overlapping of the effect images and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, small symbols, and error display, while decorative symbols may be displayed behind (lower layer than) the effect images to prevent overlapping of the decorative symbols and reducing the visibility of the effect images.

The small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is being variably displayed, and is variably displayed by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5. The variably displayed fourth symbol makes it possible to determine whether or not a variably displayed symbol is currently being displayed, even if the decorative symbol is difficult to recognize, such as when the effect content, including the variably displayed decorative symbol, momentarily disappears from the screen, or when movable bodies 32A and 32B obscure all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Based on receiving the first variable display start command, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to variably display the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Based on receiving the second variable display start command, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to variably display the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

In addition, the pattern displayed on a fourth pattern display device provided in a location other than the image display device 5 (such as the special variable winning ball device 7, which is a predetermined location on the game board 2), such as the first special symbol LED or second special symbol LED, is also referred to as the fourth symbol.

Display areas (special symbol pending memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) are provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying pending displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are currently being executed. The pending displays and active displays are collectively referred to as variable display-compatible displays corresponding to variable displays. Note that in this embodiment, a special symbol pending memory display area 5U is provided that is common to the first and second special symbols; however, a first special symbol pending memory display area that displays a first pending display representing a variable display whose execution of the first special symbol is pending, and a second special symbol pending memory display area that displays a second pending display representing a variable display whose execution of the second special symbol is pending may also be provided separately.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each consisting of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first hold memories by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second hold memories by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable prize ball device 6B (a standard electric device) forms a second start prize opening that changes between a closed and an open state due to the solenoid 81 (see Figure 13). The variable prize ball device 6B, for example, comprises an electric device with a movable piece that can be opened and closed. When the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in an upright position, thereby creating a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable prize ball device 6B is in a tilted position, thereby creating an open state in which game balls can enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start prize opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three) are paid out and the second special game can be initiated. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above, as long as it can change between a closed state and an open state.

General winning openings 10 are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 12, three locations at the bottom left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), and are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 with a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 13), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door (for the special electric device) is in the off state, the large prize door closes the large prize door, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the large prize door. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door is in the on state, the large prize door opens the large prize door, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize door.

When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 14) are paid out as prize balls. When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a gaming ball enters, for example, the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10.

When a game ball enters any of the prize slots, including the general prize slot 10, it is also referred to as a "win." In particular, a win at a start slot (first start slot, second start slot) is also referred to as a start slot.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 12, at the bottom left of the gaming area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and displays a variety of normal symbols as normal identification information that differs from special symbols. Normal symbols are represented by numbers ranging from "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". Normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This type of variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

To the right of the image display device 5, there is a passing gate 41 through which the game ball can pass. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending indicator 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls as they flow down, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3 for playing and outputting sound effects, etc. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

Moveable bodies 32A and 32B that operate in response to the effects are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (above and below the image display device 5 in Figure 12). Furthermore, movable body lamps 9d are provided on movable bodies 32A and 32B. These movable body lamps 9d, together with the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c, are sometimes collectively referred to as the game effect lamps 9. Furthermore, these main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are constructed to include LEDs.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. The ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is operated by the player or the like to launch gaming balls toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. Operation of the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 13).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, which the player can press to issue a specific command. Operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see Figure 13).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 while the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on that passage cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on that passage is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed, the normal symbol display result will be "normal winning." On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the normal symbol display result will be "normal losing." When a "normal winning" occurs, opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when a special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the execution of the special game based on that entry will be suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In special game games, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol will vary depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot," and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "miss."

Once the display result in the special game shows "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls entering the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9), whichever comes first. This predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can win prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is advantageous to the player. The more rounds played in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot slot (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, probability variable state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set accordingly. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may enter a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning slot by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state and by increasing the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in a regular symbol game compared to the normal state. The time-saving state is advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols (especially the second special symbol).

In the probability variable state (probability variable state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is implemented, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for players, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuations, but also makes it easier to win a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability variation state will continue until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined number of special games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. A state in which the condition for the special game to end is played a predetermined number of times is also called a count-cut state (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability variation state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a gaming state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot gaming state that are advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability variable state. It is a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability that the displayed result in a normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the displayed result in a special game will be a "jackpot," is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified recovery process is not executed after power is turned on).

A state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and a state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may also change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within the jackpot opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special state after the jackpot game state.

(Progression of the production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (such as notifying the player of the game progress or enhancing the excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed by audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable bodies 32A, 32B, or by using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 begin to display variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) in the first or second special symbol game is statically displayed, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is also statically displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins to when it ends, the variable display of the decorative symbols may assume a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, as described below.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach mode is reached during the variable display of decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. Pachinko gaming machine 1 executes multiple types of reach effects, with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the effect mode. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot," a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is displayed stopped and aligned on a predetermined effective line in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" where the game state is controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line-up, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (regular jackpot)" where the game state is not controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line-up. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (regular symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot."

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. Other effects, such as preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Preview effects include preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the currently executing variable display, and pre-read preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is reserved). Pre-read preview effects may be executed that change the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode that is different from normal.

In addition, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative symbols while they are being displayed in a variable manner, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo-consecutive effect that makes a single variable display appear as multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot effect is executed to notify the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot effect may include an effect to notify the number of rounds or an upgrade effect to indicate that the value of the jackpot gaming state is increasing.

Also, for example, when a special game or the like is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 13. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a firing control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source, such as an external power source like a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 executes the program stored in ROM 101 to control the progress of the game (processing that realizes the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in ROM 101 (such as data on variation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) is used, and RAM 102 is used as the main memory. RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM, where the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if part or all of the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in ROM 101 may be deployed to RAM 102 and executed on RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specified computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals that control (drive) the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first hold display device 25A, second hold display device 25B, normal symbol hold display device 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), and count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal that stops control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and turns on when the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value for a period of time that exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 or solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of its control of the game's progress, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the game's progress, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. These presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various decisions made by the main board 11 (e.g., the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable patterns used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (e.g., the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot slot, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable bodies 32A and 32B, error notifications, and notifications of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes programs stored in ROM 121, and performs processing to execute performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). During this processing, various data (such as data from various tables) stored in ROM 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute an effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes presentations based on instructions to execute presentations from the presentation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display device 5 by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data from the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and drawing area switch for each V blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area assigned as the drawing area in one V blank, and then switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output, while drawing continues in the other area during that time.

In addition, since the display control unit 123 generates images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) multiple layers, the VRAM area is provided with a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. In addition, each layer is classified into upper, middle, and lower levels, with images in higher layers being set with a higher display priority on the image display device 5, and images in lower layers being set with a lower display priority on the image display device 5.

The VRAM area contains a Layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging Layer 1 images, a Layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging Layer 2 images, and a Layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging Layer 3 images. The VRAM area also contains a displacement image creation area for creating displacement images, and a display image creation area.

The displacement image creation area is an area where an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (combined) to create a displacement target image, and where a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area is an area where an image is created as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5, which is an image obtained by superimposing (combining) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area, or an image obtained by superimposing (combining) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area with a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area.

The image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is set as the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) on the image display device 5, the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is set as the image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area on the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area is set as the image with the lowest display priority (display priority: low) on the image display device 5. In other words, layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is a middle layer with a lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority.

The layer 1 image drawing area is a drawing area in which these images are drawn to display a first interface image at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, which includes a special pattern reserved memory display area 5U that identifiably displays the first and second special pattern reserved memory counts, and a second interface image at the top left of the display area of the image display device 5, which includes a small pattern with a smaller display area than the decorative pattern and a reserved memory count display.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 where the left, center, and right decorative patterns are drawn to perform variable display of the decorative patterns.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which the background image is drawn to display the background image across the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, an image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area (layer 3 image). In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image and second interface image) are set to have the highest display priority and are therefore displayed as the top-level images on the image display device 5; the images drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area (decorative design) are set to have a lower display priority than the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and are therefore displayed as the middle-level images on the image display device 5; and the images drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area (background image) are set to have the lowest display priority and are therefore displayed as the bottom-level images on the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the upper image makes the overlapping area of the lower image invisible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set higher than 0%, and images may be displayed transparently in the display area of the image display device 5 or temporarily hidden.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal that designates the lamp on/off state) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies signals that operate the movable bodies 32A, 32B to the movable bodies 32A, 32B or to the drive circuits that drive the movable bodies 32A, 32B.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off of the lamp.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to perform control of audio output, lamp on/off (such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals), and control of movable bodies 32A and 32B (such as supplying signals to operate movable bodies 32A and 32B).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (performance random numbers) used to execute various performances. The performance random numbers may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, sound control board 13, and lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 14(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this embodiment. A performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 14(A) is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 14 (A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that the variation pattern specification command sets different EXT data depending on the specified variation pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, and is a presentation control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. With the variable display result specification command, as shown in Figure 14 (B), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (pre-determined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot," and the determination result of which of several types of jackpot type will be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

For example, as shown in FIG. 14(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result will be a "miss." Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "variable jackpot A." Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "variable jackpot B." Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "variable jackpot C." Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot."

Command 8F00H is a symbol determination command that specifies the stopping (determination) of the decorative symbol variation in each of the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low-probability, low-base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low-probability, high-base state, time-saving state). Furthermore, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which both time-saving control and probability variable control are performed (high-probability, high-base state, time-saving, probability variable state). Furthermore, the time-saving probability variable state may be simply referred to as the "probability variable state."

Command A0XXH is a start-of-jackpot command (also known as a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-opening notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end-of-jackpot command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example by setting the same EXT data as in the variable display result designation command. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set depending on the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state (e.g., "0" to "10"), as described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies that the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (first start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the first start port formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (second start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first special symbol reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special symbols can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second special symbol reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special symbols can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the first start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a second start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the second start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port. Additionally, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first or second start condition is met (when the pending memory number decreases).

Instead of the first pending memory count notification command or the second pending memory count notification command, a total pending memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of pending memories. In other words, the total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 14 (A) are just examples, and some of these commands may not be included, different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added. For example, it may be possible to provide a prize ball number notification command that enables the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each winning slot, a gate passage notification command that notifies the game ball that it has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command that notifies the remaining number of variable display times at which the probability change control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 15 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 15, on the main board 11 side, numerical data indicating each of the following is controlled so as to be countable: random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result. Note that random number values other than these may also be used to enhance the gaming effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be configured to count numerical data representing some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may also count numerical data representing some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data using software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to treat the variable display result of a special symbol or other game in a special symbol game as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot gaming state, and takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type when the variable display result is a "jackpot" as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special and decorative patterns, and is one of several pre-prepared types. For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "997".

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss," and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13," for example.

Figure 16 shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to treat the variable display result as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot game state before the determined special pattern that will be the variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using the second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on the random number value MR1 used to determine the special pattern display result.

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 used to determine the special symbol display result is assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is normal state, time-saving state (low probability state), or special symbol state (high probability state).

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to treat the special symbol display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state. In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the "jackpot" special symbol display result than when the gaming state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in a probability variable state (high probability state) where probability variable control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability of determining that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state is higher (approximately 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability of determining that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state when the gaming state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). In other words, in the display result determination table, determination data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 17 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced to determine one of multiple jackpot types based on the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and that the jackpot game state should be controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, the number (determination value) compared with the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 is assigned to multiple jackpot types, such as "non-variable jackpot," "variable jackpot A," "variable jackpot B," and "variable jackpot C," depending on whether the special symbol variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game using the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game using the second special symbol display device 4B).

Here, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 17 (B). In this embodiment, the jackpot types are "Probable jackpot A," "Probable jackpot B," and "Probable jackpot C," in which probability variable control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a transition to a high-probability, high-base state, and "Non-probable jackpot," in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a transition to a low-probability, high-base state.

The jackpot gaming state resulting from a "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed ten times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the jackpot gaming state resulting from a "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot gaming state resulting from a "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed two times (so-called 2 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the jackpot gaming state resulting from a "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, "Probable jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) probable jackpot, "Probable jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probable jackpot, and "Probable jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) probable jackpot.

The probability variable control and time-saving control that begin after the jackpot gaming state of probability variable jackpot A through probability variable jackpot C ends are terminated on the condition that control is entered into the jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, the time-saving control that begins after the jackpot gaming state of a non-probability variable jackpot ends is terminated on the condition that 100 variable displays are completed or that control is entered into the jackpot gaming state before the 100 variable displays are completed. Therefore, if a recurring jackpot is one of probability variable jackpot A through probability variable jackpot C, probability variable control and time-saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state, in which the jackpot gaming state occurs continuously without an intermediate normal state. In other words, the probability variable state in this embodiment is a gaming state that continues until the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time-saving state in this embodiment is a gaming state that is controlled to the normal state by executing 100 variable displays if the variable display result is not a jackpot. For this reason, the time-saving state is also the game state that is controlled when a winning streak may end.

In the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 17 (A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot A," "Probable jackpot B," "Probable jackpot C," and "Non-probable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In other words, when the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C," which have fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special symbol is the second special symbol, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C." This setting allows for different rates of determining the jackpot type as a "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C," which have fewer rounds, depending on whether the jackpot type is determined based on the first start condition being met to start a special game using the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second start condition being met to start a special game using the second special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. In particular, in special games using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is never determined to be a "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C," which results in fewer rounds. Therefore, for example, in game states where game balls are likely to enter the second start entry slot formed by the variable prize ball device 6B due to high-opening control associated with time-saving control, frequent jackpot states with fewer prize balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In addition, in the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 17 (A), the allocation of determination values for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As mentioned above, just as the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the first special chart or the second special chart, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether the game is the first special chart or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A," which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, even in the case of a special game with a second special symbol, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of a special game with a first special symbol may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C." For example, in the case of a special game with a second special symbol, fewer judgment values may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C" compared to a special game with a first special symbol. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special game with a first special symbol or a second special symbol, the jackpot type may be determined by referencing common table data.

Figure 18 shows the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, multiple variation patterns are prepared in advance to correspond to the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach," respectively, and to correspond to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot." Note that the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss." The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called a jackpot variation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Note that in this embodiment, one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in this embodiment, three types of super reach fluctuation patterns are provided: super reach (no pseudo-consecutive hits), super reach (one pseudo-consecutive hit), and super reach (two pseudo-consecutive hits), but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types or two or less types of super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach variation patterns include a variation pattern (PB1-2) in which the variable display result is a jackpot as a super reach (no pseudo-consecutive hit) and a variation pattern (PA2-2) in which the variable display result is a miss; a variation pattern (PB1-3) in which the variable display result is a jackpot as a super reach (one pseudo-consecutive hit) and a variation pattern (PA2-3) in which the variable display result is a miss; and a variation pattern (PB1-4) in which the variable display result is a jackpot as a super reach (two pseudo-consecutive hits) and a variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the variable display result is a miss.

As shown in Figure 18, the special chart fluctuation time for the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed in this embodiment is set shorter than that for the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In this embodiment, the variable display result is set to have a higher chance of becoming a "jackpot" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, so in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the chance of a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern type may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to that determined type may be determined.

Figure 19 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display being executed, the number of reserved memories, the game status, etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, if the variable display result is a non-probable jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and using that jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined 5% of the time, PB1-2 is determined 20% of the time, PB1-3 is determined 35% of the time, and PB1-4 is determined 40% of the time.

Also, if the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot A to C, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and using that jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 is determined 10% of the time, PB1-3 is determined 20% of the time, and PB1-4 is determined 70% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories for the special variable chart is one or less, the miss variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this miss variation pattern determination table A from PA1-1 (non-reach miss variation pattern without shortening), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined 50% of the time, PA2-1 is determined 40% of the time, PA2-2 is determined 5% of the time, PA2-3 is determined 3% of the time, and PA2-4 is determined 2% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories for the special variable chart is two, the miss variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this miss variation pattern determination table B from PA1-2 (shortened non-reach miss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined 60% of the time, PA2-1 is determined 30% of the time, PA2-2 is determined 5% of the time, PA2-3 is determined 3% of the time, and PA2-4 is determined 2% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories for the special variable chart is three, the miss variation pattern determination table C is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this miss variation pattern determination table C from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined 70% of the time, PA2-1 is determined 20% of the time, PA2-2 is determined 5% of the time, PA2-3 is determined 3% of the time, and PA2-4 is determined 2% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a high base state (time-saving state or probability variable state), miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and using this miss fluctuation pattern determination table D, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) miss fluctuation pattern). More specifically, miss fluctuation pattern determination table C determines PA1-3 80% of the time, PA2-1 10% of the time, PA2-2 5% of the time, PA2-3 3% of the time, and PA2-4 2% of the time.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined according to the type of jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The selection rate of one of the multiple jackpot variation patterns (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied, for example, according to the game status, regardless of the jackpot type. In this way, the variable display is performed with a variation pattern appropriate for the game status, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 13 may be a backup RAM, partly or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will be preserved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game status, i.e., the control status of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid balls should be stored in the backup RAM. Data corresponding to the control status of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control status to its state before the power outage, etc., based on that data, when power is restored after a power outage, etc. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control status and the data indicating the number of unpaid balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

This RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 002SG150, as shown in FIG. 20, which serves as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 002SG150 shown in FIG. 20 includes a first special symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151A, a second special symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151B, a regular symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 002SG152, a game control timer setting unit 002SG153, a game control counter setting unit 002SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 002SG155.

The first special symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151A stores reserved data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in order of winning, in which a game ball has passed (entered) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A, resulting in a start winning (first start winning), but which have not yet started.

The second special symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151B stores reserved data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) that have not yet started but in which a game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred, in order of winning.

As an example, the first special chart reserve memory unit 002SG151A associates the reserve number with the order of entry into the first start entry port (the order in which the game balls are detected), and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), as reserve data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special chart reserve memory unit 002SG151B associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game balls) at the second start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In this way, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 002SG151A and the second special symbol reserved memory unit 002SG151B indicates that the execution of a special symbol game using the first special symbol or a special symbol game using the second special symbol is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the variable display results (special symbol display results) in these special symbol games.

In this embodiment, when hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the first start entry port, and hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start entry when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the second start entry port are stored in separate hold memory units in association with hold numbers, the variable display based on the second hold memory information is executed in priority over the variable display based on the first hold information.

The normal symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151C stores reserve information for normal symbol games in which a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21 but which have not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20. For example, the normal symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151C associates game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game ball, as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 002SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 002SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 002SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 002SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 002SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for calculating count values used to control the progress of play in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 may be provided with a random counter that counts some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them using software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly in accordance with the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software that updates the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or software that updates the random count value by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 13 stores not only performance control programs but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared so that the performance control CPU 120 can make various judgments, decisions, and settings, as well as pattern data constituting various performance control patterns.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that contains multiple presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, decorative LEDs, presentation models, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content of those operations. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, presentation control patterns for when special charts are variable displayed, preview presentation control patterns, and various other presentation control patterns.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 13 has an area for storing various data used to control performance operations, such as a performance control data storage area 002SG190 as shown in Figure 21(A). The performance control data storage area 002SG190 shown in Figure 21(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 002SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 002SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 002SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 002SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated in response to performance operation states, such as the display state of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 002SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 002SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 002SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 002SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 002SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning time reception command buffer 002SG194A shown in FIG. 21(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194. The start winning time reception command buffer 002SG194A has a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4"), and a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed. The start winning time reception command buffer 002SG194A also has a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4"), and a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being variably displayed. When a start win occurs at the first start win slot or the second start win slot, a set of two commands, a start win slot designation command (first start win slot designation command or second start win slot designation command) and a reserved memory count notification command (first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command), is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage areas corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 002SG194A have storage areas (entries) reserved for associating these start win slot designation commands and reserved memory count notification commands and storing them separately as the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory.

When the start conditions are met and the variable display of the top-level reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, the contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one by one, as described below. Furthermore, the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0," which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start conditions are met, are cleared during the special drawing hit waiting process, which is executed when the variable display ends.

When a start win occurs in the first start win slot, the performance control CPU 120 stores the command starting from the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 002SG194A. When a start win occurs in the second start win slot, the CPU 120 stores the command starting from the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 002SG194A. When a start win occurs, commands from the start win slot designation command to the reserved memory number notification command are sent sequentially. Therefore, when commands are received, the start win slot designation command and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the last digits "0" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first or second special symbol reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of decorative symbols begins, the commands stored in the start winning time receive command buffer 002SG194A shown in Figure 21(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents of the entries corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to begin (the entry with buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents of the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that just began are shifted. For example, when the variable display of decorative symbols in the first special symbol reserved memory ends in the storage state shown in Figure 21(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "0" are shifted to buffer number "0," the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0," and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3." Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is currently being variably displayed.

(operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main board 11)
First, we will explain the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up and game control main processing is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 22 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in Figure 22, the CPU 103 first disables interrupts (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and making the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is available, and the backup RAM is normal. When power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example, is pressed, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be able to be saved in RAM 102, which serves as backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery conditions can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (Step S3; Yes), recovery processing (Step S4) is executed, followed by random number circuit setting processing (Step S8). The recovery processing of Step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored; for example, if a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the special symbol change can be resumed from the state before the power supply was stopped.

Also, if the recovery condition is not met (Step S3: No), an initialization process (Step S6) is performed, followed by a random number circuit setting process (Step S8). The initialization process of Step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and initial values are set in the working area by executing the clearing process.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time interval (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and enables the interrupt (step S10). Then, a loop process is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), allowing the CPU 103 to periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

After executing this game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 23. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23 begins, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main error processing to diagnose abnormalities in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and, if necessary, issue a warning based on the diagnosis results (step S22). After this, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output processing to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start wins), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the game has entered a probability variable state) to be supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 is able to manage the execution and reservation of special symbol games, control the jackpot gaming state, control the gaming state, and so on.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, it is possible to execute the normal symbol game and manage reserves based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), as well as control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reserve display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a presentation control command to be sent during each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the set presentation control command is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the presentation control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 23. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

The start winning determination process detects the occurrence of a start winning, stores pending information in a specified area of RAM 102, and updates the number of pending memories. When a start winning occurs, a random number value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and variation pattern, and this is stored as pending information. A process may also be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. After the pending information and number of pending memories are stored, transmission settings are made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the determination results, such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of pending memories, and the predictive determination. The performance control command for the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 23.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag stored in RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S117), transmission settings are made to transmit the effect control commands corresponding to each step to the effect control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). This normal special symbol processing determines whether to start the first or second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines (predetermines) whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and, if so, the type of jackpot before the display result is derived and displayed, based on a random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines a fixed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be displayed in the special symbol game in accordance with the determined display result. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "1," and the normal special symbol processing ends. In this embodiment, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also known as special symbol 2 priority consumption). Additionally, the order in which game balls enter the first and second starting winning slots may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision value compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern to determine one of several types of fluctuation pattern, based on the results of a pre-determined decision on whether or not the display result will be a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes processes for making settings to change the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change reaches the special symbol change time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3." This special symbol stop process includes a setting process to stop the variation of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and to stop displaying (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will result in the display of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4." If the display result is a "miss," the game state is also updated if the game is in a time-saving state or a special probability state and the end of the number-cutting period is confirmed. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-jackpot opening process in step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "4." This pre-jackpot opening process includes processing to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and set the large prize opening to an open state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot." When the large prize opening is set to an open state, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door. At this time, the maximum open period for the large prize opening to be set and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set, depending on, for example, the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5," and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "5." This jackpot opening process includes processes such as measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the large prize opening is to be returned to a closed state, processes such as stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door are executed, and then the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "6," and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6." This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the large prize opening has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. If the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5." However, if the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7." Once the value of the special symbol process flag has been updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7." This jackpot end process includes processes such as waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation, which serves as a presentation operation to notify players of the end of the jackpot game state, has elapsed, and making various settings to initiate variable rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0," and the jackpot end process ends.

(Starting winning judgment process)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first starting gate switch 22A, which corresponds to the first starting gate formed by the winning ball device 6A, is on based on a detection signal from the first starting gate switch 22A (002SGS101). If the first starting gate switch 22A is on (002SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special symbol reserved memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4") (002SGS102). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved first symbol memories by, for example, reading the first reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154. When the number of reserved memories for the first special chart in 002SGS102 is not the upper limit value (002SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is set to "0" (002SGS103).

When the first start opening switch 22A in 002SGS101 is off (002SGS101; N), or when the number of reserved first special symbols in 002SGS102 has reached the upper limit (002SGS102; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second start opening switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is on (002SGS104) based on a detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B. If the second start opening switch 22B is on (002SGS104; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., the upper limit of "4") (002SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved symbol count value, which is the value stored in the second reserved symbol count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154. When the second reserved symbol count in 002SGS105 is not the upper limit (002SGS105; N), for example, the value stored in the start buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is set to "2" (002SGS106).

After executing either of the processes 002SGS103 or 002SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the value stored in the start port buffer, is updated by adding 1 (002SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0," the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2," the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. Furthermore, the second reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total reserved symbol count is also updated to increase by 1 (002SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the processing of 002SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 (002SGS109). The numerical data indicating each extracted random number value and the start port buffer value are stored by being set as reserve information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol reserve memory unit (002SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot," and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot." The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 002SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode, including the variable display result and variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 002SGS110, a setting for sending a start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is made (002SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0," the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up to send a first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2," the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up to send a second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 23.

Following the processing of 002SGS111, the CPU 103 performs settings for sending the pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (002SGS113). The pending memory count notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in Figure 23 after the special symbol process processing has ended.

After executing the processing of 002SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "0" (002SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "0" (Y in 002SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS115), and then processing of 2390SGS104 proceeds. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 002SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS116), and then the start winning processing ends. This ensures that processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect valid game ball start winnings.

(Normal processing of special patterns)
26 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of FIG. 24 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in FIG. 26, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" (step 002SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 002SGS141, the second reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit may be read, and it may be determined whether the read value is "0".

When the number of second special symbol reserved memories is other than "0" in step 002SGS141 (step 002SGS141; N), the following reserved data stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit corresponding to reserved number "0" are read out (step 002SGS142): random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 002SGS142, the second special symbol reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special symbol reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the second special symbol reserved memory unit is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the second special symbol reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") is shifted up by one entry (step 002SGS143).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 002SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 002SGS149.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols is "0" in step 002SGS141 (step 002SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved first special symbols is "0" (step 002SGS145). The number of reserved first special symbols is the number of reserved special symbol games using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the processing of step 002SGS145, the game control counter setting unit reads the first reserved symbol count value stored in the first reserved symbol count counter and determines whether the read value is "0." In this way, the processing of step 002SGS145 is executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is determined to be "0" in step 002SGS141, and determines whether the number of reserved first special symbols is "0." As a result, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is started before the special symbol game using the first special symbol.

Note that the special symbol game using the second special symbol is not limited to being executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol; for example, the special symbol game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first or second start winning port and a start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winnings occurred, and it may be possible to determine from the stored data whether to start the special symbol game using the first or second special symbol.

When the number of reserved first special symbols stored in step 002SGS145 is other than "0" (step 002SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserve memory unit corresponding to reserve number "0" is read out as numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 002SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 002SGS146, the first special symbol reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special symbol reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the first special symbol reserved memory unit is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the first special symbol reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted up by one entry (step 002SGS147).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "0" (step 002SGS148), and the process proceeds to step 002SGS149.

In step 002SGS149, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 16 is selected and set as the table to be used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "jackpot" or a "miss." Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the determination value assigned to each special symbol display result of "jackpot" or "miss," to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 002SGS150). Furthermore, in this step 002SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, a "jackpot" is determined if the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result falls within the range of 10,000 to 12,180, which corresponds to the high probability state (high probability state), and a "miss" is determined if it does not fall within that range. Additionally, if the probability flag is off and the game is in a low probability state (low probability, low base state in this feature), if the random number value MR1 used to determine the special chart display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is determined to be a "miss."

In this way, in the display result determination table selected in step 002SGS149, different determination values are assigned to a "jackpot" depending on the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. Therefore, in the processing of step 002SGS150, whether or not the special chart display result is a "jackpot" is determined using different determination data (determination values) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of a special chart game or the like is started is a high probability state. When the game state is a high probability state, a "jackpot" is determined (determined) with a higher probability than when the game state is a low probability state.

If step 002SGS150 determines that a jackpot has occurred (step 002SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON (step 002SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 17(A) is selected and set as the table to be used to determine one of several jackpot types (step 002SGS153). By referencing the jackpot type determination table thus set, the jackpot type is determined to be one of several types depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches one of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table: "non-variable jackpot," "variable jackpot A," "variable jackpot B," or "variable jackpot C" (step 002SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in step 002SGS154, the game state to be controlled after the jackpot game state ends—either a time-saving state (low probability, high base state) or a probability variable state (high probability, high base state), which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state—is determined before the fixed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. Corresponding to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by, for example, setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of a jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 002SGS155). For example, if the jackpot type is a "non-probability variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0," if it is a "probability variable A" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot A, "0" if it is a "probability variable B" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot B, "2," and if it is a "probability variable C" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot C, "3." After processing step 002SGS155, proceed to step 002SGS156.

Also, if step 002SGS150 determines that the result is a "miss" (step 002SGS150; N), step 002SGS156 is executed without executing steps 002SGS152 to 002SGS155.

In step 002SGS156, the CPU 103 sets a fixed special symbol in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on), and the determined result of the jackpot type when the jackpot gaming state is set. As an example, in accordance with the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss," a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 002SGS150a, and the jackpot type in step 002SGS154 is "Probable Jackpot A," a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "Probable Jackpot B," a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. Additionally, if the jackpot type is a "non-variable jackpot," the special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Additionally, if the jackpot type is a "variable jackpot C," the special symbol showing the number "0" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are only examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 002SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 002SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 002SGS145 (step 002SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 002SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. If the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

(Major operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, we will explain the main operations of the performance control board 12. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 27. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 27 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting registers for the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example, based on the register settings of the CTC. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns on. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 automatically disables the interrupt. However, if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable command (DI command). In response to the interrupt due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a specified command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, the performance control command is captured from a specified input port included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The captured performance control command is stored in a performance control command reception buffer, for example, provided in RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then enables interrupts and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 may be turned on, so that the effect control process process can confirm which effect control command was received and the content specified by the effect control command. Furthermore, if the effect control command specifies the game status, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game status.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). The performance control process controls the operation of various performance devices, such as the display of performance images in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving of the movable bodies 32A and 32B. Furthermore, the control content of performance operations using the various performance devices is judged, determined, and set in accordance with the performance control commands sent from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. Furthermore, after the effect random number value update process (step S77), a demo effect control process (step S78) is executed to execute a demo effect on the pachinko gaming machine 1, a background display update process (step S79) is executed to update the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to another background image, and a menu display process (step S80) is executed to display a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state. Then, processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

In the background display update process of this embodiment, one of the following is selected and displayed: a first background image corresponding to the first presentation mode, a second background image corresponding to the second presentation mode, a third background image corresponding to the third presentation mode, and a fourth background image corresponding to the fourth presentation mode. The first and second background images can be displayed when the game state is normal, the third background image can be displayed when the game state is in a low-probability, high-base state, and the fourth background image can be displayed when the game state is in a high-probability, high-base state. Furthermore, the first and second background images are switched when a switching display condition is met, such as when a variable display of SP Reach Hare is executed or when one background image is displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time.

The menu display process not only displays a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, but also includes adjusting the volume output from the speakers 8L, 8R and adjusting the light intensity (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9 in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer, such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer, until the customer waiting demo performance starts based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command, and start the customer waiting demo performance when the timer times out without the variable display starting. If the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process)
28 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 27 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 28, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a hold display update process (step S161) to update the hold memory display (first hold display 002SG101 or second hold display 002SG102) in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U of the image display device 5 to a display corresponding to the contents stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 002SG194A, such as a shift display (described later). After the hold display update process is executed, one of the following steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag stored in RAM 122.

In addition, in step S161, a pre-reading preview setting process may be executed together with the above-mentioned hold display update process, in which judgments, decisions, and settings are made to execute a pre-reading preview performance (such as a performance that changes the display color of the hold display) based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various effects such as reach effects and various preview effects will be executed, their mode, and the start timing of execution are determined based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) that reflects the determined results is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing of step S172 is executed when the effect process flag value is "2." During this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable bodies 32A and 32B, output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs in response to a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 displays the fixed decorative pattern, which is the result of the display of the decorative pattern, in a static state, for example, in response to reading an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the effect control pattern or receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the static display of the fixed decorative pattern. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" and the variable display effect processing ends.

The special symbol win wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special symbol win wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. When a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Furthermore, if a command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving said command has elapsed, the display result in the special symbol game is determined to be a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to its initial value of "0". Once the value of the presentation process flag has been updated, the special symbol win wait process ends.

The jackpot presentation processing of step S174 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "4." In this jackpot presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. Furthermore, in the jackpot presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the jackpot gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5," which corresponds to the ending presentation processing, and the jackpot presentation processing ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5." In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0," and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, the operation of the performance control CPU 120 will be described. Figure 29 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 28. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS271; Y), for example, the various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special symbol reserve memory in the start winning reception command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number at a time (step 002SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so they are erased.

Furthermore, if the first variable display start command reception flag is OFF in step 002SGS271 (step 002SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 002SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is OFF (step 002SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated. If the second variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 002SGS273; Y), for example, the various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special symbol reserve memory in the start winning time reception command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number (step 002SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

After executing step 002SGS272 or step 002SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 002SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined based on the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (i.e., the received display result specification command) and the variation pattern (step 002SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this embodiment, if the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to a probability variable jackpot A, the presentation control CPU 120 determines, for example, a decorative pattern combination (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols form a "7" as the stopping symbol. Also, if the received variable display result designation command is one of the third to fourth variable display result designation commands corresponding to probability variable jackpot B to probability variable jackpot C, the stopping symbol is determined from multiple combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, decorative pattern combinations such as "111," "333," "555," and "999"). Also, if the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 determines, for example, a decorative pattern combination in which three symbols form an even number as the stopping symbol.

Furthermore, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command, which corresponds to a non-variable jackpot, the stopping symbol may be determined from multiple combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (e.g., combinations of decorative symbols such as "111," "333," "555," and "999"), just as when the received variable display result designation command is one of the third to fourth variable display result designation commands, which correspond to variable jackpots B to C. In this case, by further sharing the effects during jackpot play and variable display in the variable jackpot state, the player can be drawn to whether the game state is in the variable jackpot state or the time-saving state until the variable display is executed 100 times, and further, whether the time-saving state will end after 100 variable displays or continue until 10,000 variable displays, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, a decorative pattern combination in which three patterns are not aligned (a miss pattern) is determined as the stopping pattern.Furthermore, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a reach variation pattern, a reach-miss combination in which the left and right patterns are the same but the center pattern is different (a miss pattern) is determined as the stopping pattern.

To determine these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number to determine the stopping symbols, and determine the stopping symbols of the decorative symbols using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols are associated with numerical values. In other words, the stopping symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the fluctuation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is a fluctuation pattern designation command for a super reach with pseudo-consecutive wins (fluctuation patterns PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) (step 002SGS277). If the fluctuation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is not a fluctuation pattern designation command for a super reach, that is, if it is a fluctuation pattern designation command for a normal reach (step 002SGS278; N), proceed to step 002SGS383.

If the variation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is a variation pattern designation command for a super reach, the display colors of the stopped patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and right decorative pattern display area 5C that form the reach state are identified from the data indicating the stopped decorative patterns determined in step 002SGS276 and stored in the decorative pattern display result storage area. Then, using the pseudo consecutive number of times display determination table shown in Figure 60 (C), the display color of the pseudo consecutive number of times display to be displayed when the first re-variable display begins, that is, the pseudo consecutive number of times display (e.g., "x2") indicating that two variable displays, including the first variable display, will begin in the variable display, is determined and stored (step 002SGS278).

Next, it is determined whether the variation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is a super reach variation pattern with two pseudo consecutive wins (step 002SGS279). If it is determined that it is a super reach variation pattern with two pseudo consecutive wins (step 002SGS279; Y), the pseudo consecutive win count display determination table shown in Figure 60 (C) is used to determine and store the display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display to be displayed when the second re-variable display begins, that is, the pseudo consecutive win count display (e.g., "x3") indicating that three re-variable displays, including the first re-variable display, will begin in that re-variable display (step 002SGS280).

If step 002SGS279 determines that the variation pattern is not two pseudo consecutive wins, or if step 002SGS280 is executed, a start wait timer is set to start displaying the number of pseudo consecutive wins (step 002SGS281), and the process proceeds to step 002SGS282.

Next, in step 002SGS282, a process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is selected (step 002SGS282), and the process timer is started (step 002SGS283).

In addition, the process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, all of which are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) in accordance with the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 002SGS284). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the on/off of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 002SGS285). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 002SGS286). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display status of the left, center, and right decorative and small symbols to VRAM. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display (variation) of the decorative and small symbols. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display performance processing (step S172) (step 002SGS287), and the variable display start setting processing ends.

(Decorative designs and small designs)
Next, the decorative symbols and small symbols will be explained based on Figures 30 to 33. Figure 30 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbols and small symbols. Figure 31 shows (A1) and (A2) the first presentation mode, (B1) and (B2) the second presentation mode, (C1) and (C2) the third presentation mode, and (D1) and (D2) the fourth presentation mode. Figure 32 shows the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative symbols in (A1) and (A2) the first presentation mode, and (B1) and (B2) the second presentation mode. Figure 33 shows the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative symbols in (C1) and (C2) the third presentation mode, and (D1) and (D2) the fourth presentation mode, and (E) is a diagram for explaining the variable display of the decorative symbols and small symbols.

In Figure 30, the sizes of the decorative symbols (for low base state), decorative symbols (for high base state), and small symbols are displayed at the ratio when displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and display area 5S.

As shown in FIG. 30, the decorative symbols (for low base state) displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R when the game state is in the low base state are composed of a number display unit 002SG051 consisting of a circular number base portion when viewed from the front and the numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number base portion; a character display unit 002SG052 displaying 10 types of characters (not all characters are shown) corresponding to the numbers "0" to "9" in the number display unit 002SG051; an information display unit 002SG053 consisting of a rectangular information base portion when viewed from the front and information about the character (for example, in this embodiment, the character's name) displayed on the front of the information base portion; and a roughly rectangular base display unit 002SG054 displayed surrounding the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, and information display unit 002SG053.

In this embodiment, the information display unit 002SG053 displays the name of the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052, but the present invention is not limited to this. Various information other than the name (for example, the character's nickname, personality, battle level, items owned by the character, etc.) may be displayed as long as it is information about the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052.

In addition, the decorative symbols (for high base state) displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R when the game state is in the high base state are composed of a number display section 002SG061 consisting of the numbers "0" to "9" and a roughly rectangular base display section 002SG064 that is displayed surrounding the number display section 002SG061. The decorative symbols for the high base state do not have character display sections or information display sections like the decorative symbols for the low base state.

In addition, the display area 5S located in the upper left of the image display device 5 displays the first and second reserved memory counts and the small symbol (fourth symbol) corresponding to the decorative symbol. The small symbol consists of the numbers "0" to "9" displayed in each of the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and each number corresponds to a decorative symbol. Note that in this embodiment, the numbers on the decorative symbol and the numbers on the small symbol correspond, but not all of the numbers on both symbols necessarily correspond. For example, the numbers on the small symbol may be numbers "1" to "5," which are fewer than the numbers "0" to "9" on the decorative symbol, or they may be symbols or figures that are different from the numbers on the decorative symbol.

Next, we will explain the decorative patterns (for low base state), decorative patterns (for high base state), and small patterns.

<Display time of each symbol> The decorative symbols (for low base state) and decorative symbols (for high base state) are almost always displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R while the image display device 5 is powered on, but they may be erased (not displayed), for example, when an SP reach effect (super reach effect) is executed during variable display, or when a customer waiting demo effect is executed. On the other hand, the small symbols are always displayed in front of the decorative symbols (higher layer) while the image display device 5 is powered on, and continue to be displayed even when the decorative symbols are erased as described above. However, they may be erased when information with a higher display priority than the small symbols (for example, an error message) is displayed.

<Variable display mode of each symbol> In the first presentation mode described below, decorative symbols (for low base state) are variably displayed by a scrolling display that moves linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the second presentation mode, decorative symbols are variably displayed by a scrolling display that moves curvedly from the back to the front across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the third presentation mode described below, decorative symbols (for the high base state) are displayed variably in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by rotating around an axis of rotation facing up and down, and in the fourth presentation mode, decorative symbols are displayed variably by scrolling in a linear fashion from top to bottom in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Regardless of the game state or presentation mode, the small symbols are displayed variably in each small symbol display area 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, switching between symbols "0" to "9" (updating symbols).

In a broad sense, the above-mentioned "scrolling display" and "switching display" are both included in "switching display," in which images are switched between displays. However, as described below, a "scrolling display" may refer to an image that is framed in or faded in to the display area, and then framed out or faded out from the display area, thereby updating and displaying multiple images. A distinction may also be made between a "switching display" and an image that is updated and displayed by repeatedly displaying and hiding (erasing), or by rotating, at a predetermined position in the display area, without moving, fading in, or fading out.

<Numeric display section> The decorative design (for low base state) and decorative design (for high base state) have not only numeric display sections 002SG051 and 002SG061, but also character display section 002SG052, information display section 002SG053, and base display section 002SG054, whereas the small design is composed only of a numeric display section.

In addition, the decorative patterns (for low base state) are displayed in the same size in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and in the center decorative pattern display area 5C they are displayed in a size slightly smaller than the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, creating a sense of depth. On the other hand, the decorative patterns (for high base state) are displayed in the same size in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and are arranged in a straight line in the left-right direction. The small patterns are displayed in the same size in each small pattern display area 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR.

In addition, in the low base state, the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are arranged approximately horizontally in the approximate vertical center of the image display device 5, but the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is arranged slightly higher than the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and is therefore arranged slightly higher than the approximate vertical center of the image display device 5. On the other hand, in the high base state, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged approximately horizontally in the approximate vertical center of the image display device 5. Therefore, the decorative pattern displayed and stopped at the stop position of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C in the high base state is arranged closer to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 than the decorative pattern displayed and stopped at the stop position of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C in the low base state (see Figure 31).

Furthermore, when the size of the number display section 002SG051 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is used as the standard, the size of the number display section 002SG061 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is large, and the size of the number display section of the small pattern is small. In other words, the size of the number display section increases in the order of decorative pattern (for high base state), decorative pattern (for low base state), and small pattern (size of number display section: decorative pattern (for high base state) > decorative pattern (for low base state) > small pattern). Furthermore, the overall size of each pattern is also in the same relationship as the number display section.

In this way, in the low base state, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are made to appear larger, and the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is shifted to create a sense of depth and increase interest, while in the high base state, where the average variable display period is short, the decorative patterns are positioned closer to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, thereby increasing the degree to which the decorative patterns can be recognized (see Figure 31).

The decorative pattern (for low base state), decorative pattern (for high base state), and numerical display portion of the small pattern are each formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). A stereoscopic image is, for example, an image created using 3DCG (a virtual solid is constructed (modeled) using points placed on a three-dimensional coordinate system as vertices, information reproducing the material, etc. is assigned to each surface, and the object is reproduced by illuminating it from an arbitrary light intensity, light source position, etc.). However, it may also be an image that can be viewed in three dimensions when displayed on a three-dimensional display device (for example, an image liquid crystal panel capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of an image for the right eye (R image) and an image for the left eye (L image), a backlight that irradiates planar light from behind the image liquid crystal panel toward the front, and a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel located in front of the image liquid crystal panel at a predetermined distance from the image liquid crystal panel).

Furthermore, among the decorative symbols from "0" to "9," the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, and 9" are probability symbols corresponding to a "probability variable jackpot" that is controlled to a high probability, high base state after the jackpot ends, while the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, and 8" are normal symbols (non-probability variable symbols) corresponding to a "non-probability variable jackpot" that is controlled to a low probability, high base state after the jackpot ends. Note that even in the case of a probability variable jackpot, the normal symbols may result in a predetermined jackpot combination.

<Character Display> The character display section 002SG052 of the decorative symbol (for low base state) is formed as a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). Note that the character display section 002SG052 may also be formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Furthermore, the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 performs a predetermined action (movement) when the variable display starts or stops, as described below. On the other hand, the decorative symbol (for high base state) and the small symbol do not have a character display section.

<Information Display Unit> The information display unit 002SG053 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is formed as a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). Note that the information display unit 002SG053 may also be formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). The information display unit 002SG053 also displays the "name," which is information about the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052, and as described below, the "name" is erased when the variable display begins. On the other hand, the decorative pattern (for high base state) and the small pattern do not have an information display unit.

<Base display section> The base display section 002SG054 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) has a decorative section that decorates the character displayed on the front, and is formed as a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). Furthermore, the base display section 002SG064 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Note that both the base display section 002SG054 and the base display section 002SG064 may be formed as stereoscopic images (3D image, three-dimensional image). Furthermore, when the size of the base display section 002SG054 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is used as a standard, the size of the base display section 002SG064 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is larger. On the other hand, no base display section is provided for the small pattern.

<Main Color> The color of the numbers displayed on the number display units 002SG051 and 002SG061 of the decorative symbols (for low base state) and decorative symbols (for high base state) is "blue" for regular symbols consisting of even numbers, and "red" for special symbols consisting of odd numbers. Furthermore, the number base units other than numbers, and base display units 002SG054 and 002SG064, etc., may be the same color as the numbers, or may be displayed in a different color than the numbers.

The characters displayed in the character display section 002SG052 may be configured with their own original colors without being influenced by the main color. Furthermore, the character corresponding to the probability variation pattern is preferably an ally character, for example, when there are separate ally and enemy characters. Alternatively, it is preferable that the ally character be a central character in the story, such as the protagonist of the story or someone closely related to the protagonist.

As mentioned above, when the narrative concept of allies and enemies is applied, preview effects and SP reach effects are generally presented from the perspective of the allies, and if the SP reach effect is structured around allies fighting each other, the player will be notified that a favorable outcome for the allies (such as a jackpot) will occur if the outcome is favorable for the allies, such as the allies defeating the enemies.

Also, the main color with the highest occupancy rate across the entire area of each decorative symbol (for low base state) and decorative symbol (for high base state) may be the same color as the number. Also, while the color used for normal symbols consisting of even numbers is "blue" and the color used for special symbols consisting of odd numbers is "red," they may be different colors.

In addition, in high base states, as described below, the scrolling display is performed at high speed, so the decorative symbols (for low base states) need to be more visible and appealing than the decorative symbols (for low base states). Stop symbol announcements and announcements of when the variation will begin are often performed by incorporating effect displays into the decorative symbols. As a result, decorative symbols (for high base states) are primarily composed of the number display section 002SG061, and are characterized by a larger size ratio than decorative symbols (for low base states) which are composed of a character display section and a number display section.

Although not shown in the present embodiment, the numbers in the decorative design (for the high base state) may be made more flashy in appearance, such as by having more complex movements or a more sophisticated design, than the numbers in the decorative design (for the low base state), in order to enhance the high base state.

On the other hand, the color of the numbers in the small symbols is "yellow" for regular symbols consisting of even numbers and "yellow-green" for special symbols consisting of odd numbers. In this embodiment, the colors are "yellow" for regular symbols consisting of even numbers and "yellow-green" for special symbols consisting of odd numbers, but they may be other colors. Also, numbers that are the same as decorative symbols may be the same color as the decorative symbols.

The design of the small symbols may be a reduced version of the material of the numbers in the decorative symbols in the low base state and high base state, but rather than enhancing the presentation effect through design, it is preferable that the design be simpler than the numbers in the decorative symbols (for example, flat rather than three-dimensional, and with a simple color that is not glossy, etc.) in order to improve visibility for players.

As shown in FIG. 31, the presentation control CPU 120 is capable of executing one of the following presentation modes: the first presentation mode (see FIG. 31 (A1) (A2)), the second presentation mode (see FIG. 31 (B1) (B2)), the third presentation mode (see FIG. 31 (C1) (C2)), and the fourth presentation mode (see FIG. 31 (D1) (D2)). The first and second presentation modes are presentation modes that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low-probability, low-base state. The third presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low-probability, high-base state, and the fourth presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a high-probability, high-base state.

As shown in Figure 31 (A1), in the first presentation mode, decorative symbols for a low base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a first background image 002SG081 depicting a daytime cityscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 31 (A2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is implemented using a scrolling display (first scrolling display) that moves linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

More specifically, as shown in Figures 32 (A1) and (A2), each decorative symbol is displayed frame-in downward from the top edge of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, then moves downward in a straight line, and is displayed frame-out downward from the bottom edge of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. Furthermore, when the preceding decorative symbol displayed frame-in (e.g., decorative symbol "3") passes the decorative symbol stopping position set in the vertical center of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, the succeeding decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "4") is displayed frame-in and moves downward. That is, as shown in FIG. 32 (A2), while the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "2" decorative symbol and the trailing "4" decorative symbol are not visible, but after the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "3" decorative symbol and the trailing "4" decorative symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative symbols increase in number in the order of "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., returning to "0" after "9," and repeatedly updating the display from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative symbols are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby scrolling the display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the display area 5S located in the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first pending memory count, second pending memory count, and small symbols, while the special symbol pending memory display area 5U and active display area 5F located in the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 display the first pending display 002SG101 and second pending display 002SG102 corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending, and the active display 002SG103 corresponding to variable displays that are currently being executed. Note that the first pending memory count, second pending memory count, small symbols, special symbol pending memory display area 5U, and active display area 5F are displayed in common in all presentation modes, and therefore will not be described below.

As shown in Figure 31 (B1), in the second presentation mode, decorative symbols for a low base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a second background image 002SG082 depicting a daytime wilderness landscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 31 (B2), the decorative symbols are displayed in a scrolling display (second scrolling display) that moves in a curved pattern from the back to the front of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In more detail, as shown in Figures 32 (B1) and (B2), the left and right decorative patterns are displayed frame-in from the upper left side of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the upper right side of the right decorative pattern display area 5R, moving toward the center of the screen, then moving downward and away from the left and right sides of the screen, and are displayed frame-out from the lower left side of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the lower right side of the right decorative pattern display area 5R toward the side. The center decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed from the back of the screen in the center decorative pattern display area 5C, moving toward the front, and then displayed frame-out.

Furthermore, when the leading decorative symbol (e.g., a "2" decorative symbol) displayed in frame passes the stop position of the decorative symbol set in the vertical center of the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, the following decorative symbol (e.g., a "3" decorative symbol) is displayed in frame and moves toward the center of the screen. That is, as shown in FIG. 32 (B2), while the leading "2" decorative symbol passes near the stop position, the leading "2" decorative symbol and the following "3" decorative symbol are visible, but after the leading "2" decorative symbol passes the stop position, the following "3" decorative symbol and the following "4" decorative symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative symbols increase in number from "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., returning to "0" after "9," and the display is updated repeatedly from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, resulting in a scrolling display of the decorative symbols.

As shown in Figure 31 (C1), in the third presentation mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a third background image 002SG083 depicting an evening cityscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 31 (C2), the decorative symbols are displayed variably in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by rotating around an axis of rotation pointing in the vertical direction.

In more detail, as shown in Figures 33 (C1) and (C2), the decorative symbols in the third presentation mode have a first surface 5a and a second surface 5b, which is the opposite surface of the first surface 5a, and the preceding decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol "3") is displayed on the first surface 5a. On the other hand, when the first surface 5a faces forward, it is not possible to determine whether the succeeding decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol "4") is displayed on the second surface 5b. In other words, because the base display unit 002SG064 has low transmittance (is opaque), the decorative symbol displayed on the second surface 5b cannot be seen through from the front side (visible from the front side through the decorative symbol).

The decorative symbols are rotatable in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from above), and as they rotate from first surface 5a to second surface 5b, then first surface 5a to second surface 5b, etc., the numbers increase in the order "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., returning to "0" after "9", and then repeatedly updating and displaying numbers from "0" to "9". In other words, the decorative symbols are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, thereby rotating the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 33 (C2), when the first surface 5a is rotated by approximately 90 degrees or more from a state facing the front and the second surface 5b is displayed, the second surface 5b displays a decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern "4") subsequent to the decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern "3") displayed on the first surface 5a. Next, although not specifically shown, when the second surface 5b is rotated by approximately 90 degrees or more from a state facing the front and the first surface 5a is displayed, the first surface 5a displays a decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern "5") subsequent to the decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern "4") displayed on the second surface 5b.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation, and a time-saving remaining display 002SG202 (in this example, the words "XX times remaining", where XX = 0 to 100) indicating the remaining number of times the time-saving control will be executed is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figure 31 (D1), in the fourth presentation mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a fourth background image 002SG084 depicting a nighttime cityscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 31 (C2), the decorative symbols are displayed in a scrolling display (third scrolling display) that moves linearly from top to bottom in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

More specifically, as shown in Figures 33 (D1) and (D2), each decorative symbol is displayed frame-in downward from the top edge of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, then moves downward in a straight line, and is displayed frame-out downward from the bottom edge of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. Furthermore, when the preceding decorative symbol displayed frame-in (e.g., decorative symbol "3") passes the decorative symbol stopping position set in the vertical center of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, the succeeding decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "4") is displayed frame-in and moves downward. That is, as shown in FIG. 33 (D1), while the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "2" decorative symbol and the trailing "4" decorative symbol are not visible. However, as shown in FIG. 33 (D2), after the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "3" decorative symbol and the trailing "4" decorative symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative symbols increase in number in the order of "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., returning to "0" after "9," and repeating the increase from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative symbols are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby scrolling the decorative symbols.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation.

In addition, in the second presentation mode, the name in the information display section 002SG053 of the decorative symbol is always hidden, even when the decorative symbol is stopped. In the third and fourth presentation modes, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner without including the information display section 002SG053. In this way, in the first presentation mode, displaying the information display section 002SG053 draws attention to the character's name, allowing the player to deepen their understanding of the character. Meanwhile, in the second and third presentation modes, keeping the information display section 002SG053 hidden allows players to focus more on the variable display and preview presentations rather than the character. Note that not only the name displayed in the information display section 002SG053, but also the information display section 002SG053 itself may be hidden.

As shown in Figure 33 (E), the decorative symbols and small symbols have different variable display modes. For example, during a period in which decorative symbols are scrolled at high speed, one decorative symbol is displayed frame-in from the top edge of the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, and takes a passing period Ta2 before it is displayed frame-out from the bottom edge. In other words, it takes a period Ta2 from when one decorative symbol is displayed until the decorative symbol display is finished. On the other hand, during the period Ta2, the small symbols of a losing combination are switched (updated) and displayed multiple times (for example, five times).

In more detail, if the frame rate (screen display speed) is set to 30 FPS (30 frames of images displayed per second), 10 frames of images will be displayed from the start of displaying one decorative pattern to the end of that display, and this period Ta2 will be approximately 0.3 seconds.

Meanwhile, the small symbols of different losing combinations (for example, "635," "175," "461," "532," "913," etc.) are displayed every two frames (period Ta1). In other words, during the period Ta2 from when one decorative symbol is displayed until the decorative symbol display ends, the small symbols of losing combinations are switched five times, each displayed for period Ta1 (period Ta1 < period Ta2). Note that although the small symbols of each losing combination are displayed for period Ta1, this is only for a moment (approximately 0.06 seconds), making it difficult to see visually.

Furthermore, if the performance control CPU 120 decides to stop displaying the confirmed decorative pattern of the losing combination (e.g., "326") based on the determination that the display result of the variable display will be a losing display result, after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, and before stopping and displaying the confirmed decorative pattern of the losing combination (e.g., "326"), it switches the display so that the small pattern of the losing combination, "326", which is the same as the decorative pattern, is not displayed. This prevents the small pattern of the losing combination from revealing in advance that the decorative pattern of the losing combination will be stopped and displayed.

In addition, when the decorative symbols are scrolled in the first, second, and fourth presentation modes, or rotated in the third presentation mode, the variable display speed changes from low to high when the variable display starts, and changes from high to low when the variable display stops. In other words, the variable display speed is variable, while the small symbols are displayed variably at a constant speed from the start to the end of the variable display.

(Various decorative actions)
Next, various action displays of decorative symbols will be described with reference to Fig. 34. Fig. 34 shows (A) a decorative symbol variation start action, (B) a variation stop action, and (C) a loop action.

As shown in Figures 34(A) to 34(C), the decorative symbols for the low base state move within the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and rotate within the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, to provide a variable display. However, apart from this variable display movement, various actions (operations) can be performed to change the number display portion 002SG051 and character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative symbol.

(Change start action)
As shown in FIG. 34A, when variable display is initiated in the first and second presentation modes, a "variation start action" is executed in the decorative pattern, in which the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 flips its body orientation from left to right. Specifically, in the variation start action A1, the character is in a normal position facing diagonally forward to the right with both hands on their hips; in the variation start action A2, the character is in a position facing forward with both hands raised and spread; and in the variation start action A3, the character is in a position facing diagonally forward to the left with both hands on their hips. For the sake of convenience, only the states of three frames of the variation start actions A1, A2, and A3 are shown here; however, in reality, the character is displayed over several dozen frames within the variation start action period (A1-A3), and the variation start action (movement) is executed, in which the character's body orientation changes in the order of diagonally forward to the right (A1), forward (A2), and diagonally forward to the left (A3).

Next, after the character's body faces diagonally forward and left, the decorative symbol moves (rises) a predetermined distance from its stopped position in the opposite direction to the scrolling direction (A4), and then begins to move downward, thereby starting the scrolling display. These change start actions A1 to A4 are executed over a change start action period Tb1 (see Figure 35), from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the start of the scrolling display of the decorative symbol (the downward movement of the decorative symbol).

For ease of explanation, only four frames of the change start actions A1, A2, A3, and A4 are shown here, but in reality, the change start action (movement) is performed by displaying the character's movements over several dozen frames during the change start action period Tb1, which is until the character's body orientation is reversed.

In this embodiment, the variation start action is exemplified as one in which the character's body orientation is reversed left and right, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variation start action can be changed to other actions, such as changing the character's hair or facial expression, or moving their body. Furthermore, it is sufficient that at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, and base display unit 002SG054 that form the decorative pattern takes action. In other words, the variation start action is an action that is executed before the decorative pattern begins to scroll or rotate, and is an action that transitions during scrolling, i.e., a separate action that operates in a manner different from scrolling.

In addition, in the first presentation mode, during the variation start action period Tb1, the character name (character-related information) displayed in the information display section 002SG053 is erased (hidden). In this way, the character name is easy to see when it is displayed statically, but once the scrolling display begins, the character name is hidden, drawing attention to the scrolling display.

Specifically, the variable display period of the special symbols includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display of the special symbols and small symbols begins until the scrolling display of the decorative symbols begins, and a post-variable display period after the scrolling display of the decorative symbols begins. The character's name (character-related information) displayed on the information display unit 002SG053 is erased after it is displayed during the pre-variable display period, i.e., when the variable start action is being executed, and before the post-variable display period begins, i.e., before the scrolling display of the decorative symbols begins. In this way, by erasing the name during the variable start action period Tb1, i.e., before the scrolling display begins, attention can be drawn to the variable display and preview effects rather than the name.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pre-variable display period is the period from when the variable display of special symbols and small symbols begins until the scrolling display of decorative symbols begins, but the present invention is not limited to this. The pre-variable display period may be the period from when the conditions for starting the variable display are met until the variable display of decorative symbols begins, that is, the period from when a starting winning occurs or when variable display based on reserved memory begins until the scrolling display of decorative symbols begins.

(Fluctuation stop action)
As shown in Figure 34 (B), when the variable display ends in the first and second presentation modes (when the decorative pattern is displayed in a temporary stop), a ``variable stop action'' is executed in the decorative pattern, in which the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 is enlarged.

Specifically, when the scrolling decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the stop position, the character changes from its normal state, with hands on hips and facing diagonally forward to the right (variation stop action B1), to an enlarged state that extends farther above the base display unit 002SG054 than the normal state (variation stop action B2), and then is reduced in size and restored to its normal state (variation stop action B3).

For ease of explanation, only three frames of the fluctuation stop action B1, B2, and B3 are shown here, but in reality, the fluctuation stop action (movement) is performed by displaying the character in motion over several dozen frames during the fluctuation stop action period Tb2, from when the character is enlarged until it is restored.

In this embodiment, an example of a variation stop action is shown in which a character is enlarged, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variation stop action can be changed to other modes, such as changing the character's hair or facial expression, or moving its body. Furthermore, at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, and base display unit 002SG054 that form the decorative pattern may also take action. In other words, a variation stop action is an action that is executed when the scrolling display of the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, and is a separate action from actions that change, such as scrolling or rotating displays.

(Loop action)
As shown in Figure 34 (C), when the variable display ends in the first and second presentation modes (from the time the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed until it is displayed in a stopped state (pattern confirmed)), the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 in the decorative pattern repeatedly shrinks and restores, and a "loop action" is executed in which the number display unit 002SG051 repeatedly rotates horizontally around a rotation axis facing up and down.

Specifically, in loop action C1, the character places both hands on their hips and faces diagonally forward to the right, with the numeric display unit 002SG051 facing forward in its normal state; in loop action C2, the character is reduced to fit within the pedestal display unit 002SG054, with the numeric display unit 002SG051 rotated approximately 45 degrees to the right; in loop action C3, the reduced character is enlarged and restored, with the numeric display unit 002SG051 facing forward in its normal state; and in loop action C4, the character is reduced to fit within the pedestal display unit 002SG054, with the numeric display unit 002SG051 rotated approximately 45 degrees to the left. In this loop action, loop actions C1, C2, C3, and C4 are executed in order over the loop action period Tb3, and after the loop action period Tb3 ends, the loop action returns to C1, and loop actions C1 to C4 are executed again over the loop action period Tb3. In other words, in the loop action, loop actions C1 to C4 are executed cyclically.

For ease of explanation, only four frames of loop action C1 to C4 are shown here, but in reality, the character is displayed in a reduced size and then restored, and the numeric display unit 002SG051 rotates and restores during loop action period Tb3, during which the character and numeric display unit 002SG051 are displayed over several dozen frames, resulting in a loop action (movement).

In this embodiment, the loop action is exemplified by a form in which the character is displayed in a reduced size and the number display unit 002SG051 rotates, but the present invention is not limited to this. The loop action can be changed to other forms, such as a change in the character's hair or facial expression, or body movement. Furthermore, it is sufficient that at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, and base display unit 002SG054, which form the decorative pattern, undergoes an action. In other words, a loop action is an action that is executed from the time the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in a stopped position until it is displayed as a stopped pattern (pattern confirmation), and is a separate action from the action that changes during scrolling.

(Comparison of various action periods and light emission periods)
Next, various actions of decorative symbols and lamp light emission control will be described with reference to Fig. 35. Fig. 35 (A) is a diagram comparing various actions of decorative symbols and periods of lamp light emission control, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of loop light emission control of lamps.

As shown in Figure 35(A), the decorative symbol fluctuation start actions A1 to A4 (see Figure 34(A)) have an execution period, or fluctuation start action period Tb1, of approximately 1.5 seconds (fluctuation start action period Tb1 = approximately 1.5 seconds), and consist of approximately 45 frames of images. Furthermore, the decorative symbol fluctuation stop actions B1 to B3 (see Figure 34(B)) have an execution period, or fluctuation stop action period Tb2, of approximately 0.8 seconds (fluctuation stop action period Tb2 = approximately 0.8 seconds), and consist of approximately 28 frames of images. Furthermore, the decorative symbol loop actions C1 to C4 (see Figure 34(C)) have a cycle, or loop action period Tb3, of approximately 1.8 seconds (loop action period Tb3 = approximately 1.8 seconds), and consist of approximately 55 frames of images.

Also, as shown in Figure 35 (B), the movable body lamps 9d provided on the movable body 32A provided on the upper part of the image display device 5 and the movable body 32B provided on the lower part of the image display device 5, as well as the main lamp 9a and frame lamp 9b provided on the gaming machine frame 3, emit light based on loop light emission control performed by the performance control CPU 120 when the gaming state is in a low base state.

This loop light emission control, for example, emits light in the order of "white," "blue," and "yellow" over one cycle of loop light emission period Tb4, then returns to "white" after the loop light emission period Tb4 ends, and then emits light in the order of "white," "blue," and "yellow" again during loop light emission period Tb4, and this is repeated cyclically. In other words, with loop light emission control, light emissions of "white," "blue," and "yellow" are executed cyclically.

The loop light emission period Tb4 is longer than the loop action period Tb3 (loop action period Tb3 < loop light emission period Tb4). By doing this, in a low base state, the loop action is repeated to encourage the player to use the variable display of decorative symbols, while in a high base state, where variable display is more easily performed than in a low base state, excessive encouragement of variable display, which could be annoying, is prevented. Furthermore, because the loop action is repeated at a shorter cycle than the loop light emission control, the decorative symbols can be made to stand out in an appropriate way.

In this embodiment, the loop light emission control is exemplified as a form in which "white," "blue," and "yellow" are emitted cyclically, but the present invention is not limited to this. The light emission color and light emission pattern of the lamp in one cycle can be changed in various ways. For example, a light emission pattern in which "white," "blue," and "yellow" are emitted in this order, followed by "yellow," "white," and "blue" in this order may be cyclically emitted, or a light emission pattern in which four or more colors are emitted in sequence may be cyclically emitted.

The various actions of the decorative symbols shown in Figure 35 (A) are executed when the game state is controlled to a low base state and the presentation mode is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, but are not executed when the game state is controlled to a high base state and the presentation mode is the third presentation mode or the fourth presentation mode. Furthermore, the loop lighting control of the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b shown in Figure 35 (B) is executed when the game state is controlled to a low base state and the presentation mode is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, but is not executed when the game state is controlled to a high base state and the presentation mode is the third presentation mode or the fourth presentation mode.

(Pending display)
Next, the hold display will be described with reference to Fig. 36. In Fig. 36, (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams for explaining an example of the operation of the hold display.

As shown in Figure 36 (A1), when waiting to play (number of reserved memories "0"), no reserved display is displayed in the special reserved memory display area 5U and active display area 5F located at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5. The special reserved memory display area 5U consists of four display areas, with the first display area from the left corresponding to buffer number "1-1" in the start winning time reception command buffer 002SG194A, the second display area from the left corresponding to buffer number "1-2", the third display area from the left corresponding to buffer number "1-3", and the fourth display area from the left corresponding to buffer number "1-4".

As shown in Figure 36 (A2), when a start win (e.g., the first start win) occurs while waiting to play, the first hold display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U. Next, the first hold display 002SG101 begins to move diagonally upward to the left (see Figure 36 (A3)), then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc toward the active display area 5F, and when it reaches the active display area 5F, it is enlarged and displayed as the active display 002SG103 (see Figure 36 (A4)).

In other words, as shown in Figure 36 (A2), when a start winning occurs, the first pending display 002SG101 is displayed in the special symbol pending memory display area 5U and is not displayed in the active display area 5F, but when the first pending display 002SG101 is displayed in the special symbol pending memory display area 5U based on the occurrence of the first start winning, the variable display of the small symbol begins in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol.

However, although the variable display has begun, as shown in Figure 36 (A4), the first reserved display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U, has not moved to the active display area 5F and switched to active display 002SG103. In other words, the shift display has not ended. Therefore, if the scrolling display of the decorative pattern begins before the shift display has ended, it will be difficult to tell which first reserved display 002SG101 the scrolling display corresponding to has begun, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

As a result, the first reserved display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U, is moved to the active display area 5F and displayed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern does not begin until the reserved shift display period ends, during which it is switched to and displayed as active display 002SG103.Then, the aforementioned variable start action is executed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern begins after the reserved shift display period ends.

Next, as shown in Figure 36 (B1), when the decorative pattern is being displayed variably and the number of reserved memories is "1" or more (for example, the number of reserved memories is "2"), the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U located at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first reserved display 002SG101 in the first and second display areas from the left, and the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

As shown in Figure 36 (B2), when the variable display corresponding to the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F ends, the active display 002SG103 that was displayed in the active display area 5F is erased, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to highlight that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

The erase effect 002SG110 continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 has been erased, and is erased after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun, as shown below. In this way, by not creating a blank period in the presentation between the end of one variable display and the start of the next, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the presentation. Furthermore, the erase effect 002SG110 allows the player to recognize that the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display has been erased, and the display of a new active display 002SG103 allows the player to recognize that a new variable display has begun.

Next, when the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the first hold display 002SG101 begins to move diagonally upward to the left (see Figure 36 (B3)), then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic curve toward the active display area 5F, and by moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, it is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103 (see Figure 36 (B4)).

In addition, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally to the left (see Figure 36 (B3)) in conjunction with the movement of the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left, and moves from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see Figure 36 (B4)).

In other words, as shown in Figure 36 (B2), after the active display 002SG103 is erased upon completion of the variable display, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has not yet moved to the active display area 5F, as shown in Figure 36 (B3). However, at the point when the moving display of the first pending display 002SG101 begins, the variable display of the small symbol begins in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol.

However, although the variable display has begun, as shown in Figure 36 (B4), the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U has not yet finished moving (shifting display) to the active display area 5F. Therefore, if the scrolling display of the decorative pattern begins in this state, it will be difficult to tell which first reserved display 002SG101 the scrolling display corresponding to has begun, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, until the end of the hold shift display period in which the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special hold memory display area 5U moves to the active display area 5F and is switched to and displayed as active display 002SG103, the aforementioned change start action is executed before the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern begins, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern begins after the hold shift display period ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U and the active display area 5F are configured in a common manner across the first to fourth presentation modes, so the shift display shown in FIG. 36 is executed in a common manner across the first to fourth presentation modes. However, for example, if a special symbol reserved memory display area 5U and an active display area 5F corresponding to each presentation mode are provided, it may be possible to execute a shift display in a manner corresponding to each presentation mode.

Also, as shown in FIG. 36, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 to the active display 002SG103 in an operating mode (for example, a mode in which the hold display moves in a curved trajectory from the special chart hold memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F) that is common to multiple types of variation patterns (for example, non-reach variation patterns and reach variation patterns, etc.), but it may also be possible to execute shift displays of multiple types of operating modes corresponding to each variation pattern and each presentation mode. It may also be possible to execute shift displays that operate in different modes depending on whether the game state is in a low base state or a high base state.

Furthermore, operating modes common to multiple types of variation patterns in shift display include those in which at least one of multiple elements, such as the display mode, display speed, and shift display period until the pending display is switched to the active display, is common.

In this embodiment, when a start winning occurs, the first hold display 002SG101 (or second hold display 002SG102) is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, and then the first hold display 002SG101 (or second hold display 002SG102) is moved (shifted) from the special symbol hold memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of hold memories is "0", when a start winning occurs, the first hold display 002SG101 (or second hold display 002SG102) is not displayed in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, and the active display 002SG103 may be displayed directly in the active display area 5F.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the variable display of the special symbol begins, a switching display (shift display) that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display is exemplified, in which the first pending display 002SG101 moves non-linearly (e.g., in a mountain-like manner) from the first display area from the left in the special symbol pending memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the display may move linearly to the left. Furthermore, the switching display (shift display) is not limited to sliding the pending display, but may also temporarily erase the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F and the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol pending memory display area 5U, and begin displaying the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the new variable display in the active display area 5F.

(Example of operation of each part when variable display starts)
Next, an example of the operation of each part at the start of variable display will be described with reference to Figs. 37 to 46. Fig. 37 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the first presentation mode. Fig. 38 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following Fig. 37. Fig. 39 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the second presentation mode. Fig. 40 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following Fig. 39. Fig. 41 is a diagram showing details of the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in Fig. 39. Fig. 42 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols as Modification 1. Fig. 43 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following Fig. 42. Fig. 44 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the third presentation mode. Fig. 45 is a diagram for explaining how decorative symbols appear. Fig. 46 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the fourth presentation mode.

Note that in the following diagrams showing the display screen of the image display device 5, diagrams using lines other than solid lines (for example, dashed lines or dotted lines) and arrows without symbols do not represent images displayed on the display screen, but are used to explain the movement of images, etc.

(Example of variable display operation in first presentation mode)
First, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols starts in the first presentation mode will be described with reference to Figures 37 and 38.

Figure 37 (A) shows the state in which, in the first presentation mode, the decorative symbols that were scrolling in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at their stop positions. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are being variably displayed. Additionally, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory count "2").

Next, as shown in Figure 37 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 37 (C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins, while the decorative symbol change start action (see Figure 34 (A)) begins in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, right decorative symbol display area 5R, and middle decorative symbol display area, in that order. In addition, a shift display begins in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see Figure 37(D)). Furthermore, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 37(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see Figure 37(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 37 (B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun.

As shown in Figure 37 (E), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the decorative pattern actions A1 to A3 displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L end and the upward action A4 begins, and when the upward movement (action A4) ends, downward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 37 (F).

Next, as shown in Figure 37 (F), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R end, and upward action A4 begins. When the upward movement (action A4) ends, downward movement begins, and scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 37 (G).

Next, as shown in Figure 37 (G), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C end, and upward action A4 begins. When the upward movement (action A4) ends, downward movement begins, and scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 37 (H).

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins and the variable display of the small pattern begins, the variable display of the decorative patterns that are displayed in a static state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, right decorative pattern display area 5R and middle decorative pattern display area begins, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, scrolling display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun. Furthermore, from the time the shift display begins with the start of the variable display until the shift display ends, the decorative symbols do not scroll, but a change start action is performed, allowing the player to recognize that a variable display has begun.

Furthermore, when the scrolling display of the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scrolling display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed. At high speeds, a fade-out display is executed, with the transmittance reaching nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 37(F) and (G), the decorative pattern in left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed at low speed immediately after the start of the variable display, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 37(H), and then at high speed as shown in Figures 38(I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, making it extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern at high speeds. Additionally, as shown in Figures 37(G) to 38(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the center decorative pattern display area 5R are also displayed at a low speed immediately after variable display begins, then at a medium speed, and then at a high speed, and a fade-out display is executed in which the transparency also increases as the speed increases.

(Example of variable display operation in the second presentation mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the second presentation mode will be described with reference to Figures 39 and 40.

Figure 39 (A) shows the state in which, in the second presentation mode, the decorative symbols that were scrolling in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at their respective stop positions. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are being variably displayed. Additionally, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory count "2"). Additionally, in the second presentation mode, the name in the decorative symbol information display section 002SG053 is always hidden, even when the decorative symbols are stopped.

Next, as shown in Figure 39 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 39 (C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins, while the decorative symbol change start action (see Figure 34 (A)) begins in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, right decorative symbol display area 5R, and middle decorative symbol display area, in that order. In addition, a shift display begins in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see Figure 39(D)). Furthermore, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 39(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see Figure 39(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 39 (B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun.

As shown in Figure 39 (E), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the decorative pattern actions A1 to A3 displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L end and the retreating action A4 begins, and when the retreating movement (action A4) to the back of the display screen ends, forward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 39 (F).

Next, as shown in Figure 39 (F), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R end, and backward action A4 begins. When the backward movement (action A4) ends, forward movement begins and scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 39 (G).

Next, as shown in Figure 39 (G), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C end, and backward action A4 begins. When the backward movement (action A4) ends, forward movement begins and scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 39 (H).

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins and the variable display of the small pattern begins, the variable display of the decorative patterns that are displayed in a static state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, right decorative pattern display area 5R and middle decorative pattern display area begins, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, scrolling display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun. Furthermore, from the time the shift display begins with the start of the variable display until the shift display ends, the decorative symbols do not scroll, but a change start action is performed, allowing the player to recognize that a variable display has begun.

Furthermore, when scrolling display of the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scrolling display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to high speed, and the image transmittance (transparency) gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed. At high speeds, a fade-out display is executed, with the transmittance reaching nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 39(F) and (G), the decorative pattern in left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed at low speed immediately after the start of variable display, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 39(H), and then at high speed as shown in Figures 40(I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, making it extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern at high speeds. Additionally, as shown in Figures 39(G) to 40(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the center decorative pattern display area 5R are also displayed at a low speed immediately after variable display begins, then at a medium speed, and then at a high speed, and a fade-out display is executed in which the transparency also increases as the speed increases.

In this way, the scrolling display in the second presentation mode is configured to move and disappear while increasing its transmittance (transparency) from the back of the screen to the front. Specifically, as shown in Figures 41(A) and (B), the scrolling display is configured to cause the decorative symbols to move in a curved manner from the back to the front. Therefore, between the time a decorative symbol is displayed in frame-in mode in decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R and the time it is displayed out of frame, another decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "3") that is positioned so that it partially overlaps with one decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "2") may be visible through decorative symbol "2." At this time, the character in character display section 002SG052 for decorative pattern "3" is displayed, while the number ("3") in number display section 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), and as shown in Figure 41 (C), the decorative pattern "2" is erased, and then the number ("3") in number display section 002SG051 for decorative pattern "3" is displayed.

In addition, the other decorative pattern "3" located behind the first decorative pattern "2" can be seen through the first decorative pattern "2". In this case, the character in the character display unit 002SG052 of the other decorative pattern "3" located behind is displayed, while the number in the number display unit 002SG051 is not displayed. The decorative pattern "2" is erased before the number for the decorative pattern "3" is displayed. This means that the number "2" of the first decorative pattern and the other decorative pattern "3" do not overlap, preventing the decorative pattern "2" located in the foreground from becoming difficult to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 41(A), from the time the decorative patterns are displayed in frame-in mode in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until they are displayed out of frame mode as shown in Figure 41(C), they move and disappear while increasing their transmittance (transparency). However, at the start of the variable display, as mentioned above, the decorative patterns are faded out in proportion to the increase in display speed, so they move from the back of the screen to the front while increasing their transmittance (transparency) as they fade out in accordance with the display speed. Therefore, from the time the scrolling display starts until the high-speed display begins, it appears as shown in Figures 41(A) to 41(C), but after the fade-out display period ends and the high-speed display begins, it becomes extremely difficult to see the decorative patterns even at the back of the screen.

(Example of operation of variable display as modified example 1)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started as Modification 1 will be described with reference to Figures 42 and 43. In Modification 1, the decorative symbols are displayed in a curved scrolling manner as in the second presentation mode, but they move in the opposite direction to the second mode, that is, from the front side of the screen to the back side.

The flow in Figures 42(A) to 42(D) is similar to that in Figures 39(A) to 39(D), so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

As shown in Figure 42 (E), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the decorative pattern actions A1 to A3 displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L end and backward action A4 begins, and when the forward movement (action A4) toward the front of the display screen ends, backward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 42 (F).

Next, as shown in Figure 42 (F), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R end, and forward action A4 begins. When the forward movement (action A4) ends, backward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 42 (G).

Next, as shown in Figure 42 (G), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C end, and forward action A4 begins. When the forward movement (action A4) ends, backward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 42 (H).

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins and the variable display of the small pattern begins, the variable display of the decorative patterns that are displayed in a static state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, right decorative pattern display area 5R and middle decorative pattern display area begins, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, scrolling display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun. Furthermore, from the time the shift display begins with the start of the variable display until the shift display ends, the decorative symbols do not scroll, but a change start action is performed, allowing the player to recognize that a variable display has begun.

Furthermore, when the scrolling display of the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scrolling display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed. At high speeds, a fade-out display is executed, with the transmittance reaching nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 42(F) and (G), the decorative pattern in left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed at low speed immediately after the start of the variable display, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 42(H), and then at high speed as shown in Figures 43(I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, making it extremely difficult to visually discern each decorative pattern at high speeds. Additionally, as shown in Figures 42 (G) to 43 (K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the center decorative pattern display area 5R are also displayed at a slow speed immediately after variable display begins, then at a medium speed, and then at a high speed, with a fade-out display in which the transparency also increases as the speed increases.

In this way, the scrolling display of variant 1 is designed to move and disappear while increasing its transmittance (transparency) from the front to the back of the screen. Specifically, as shown in Figures 42 (G) and (H), the scrolling display is designed to cause the decorative patterns to move in a curved manner from the front to the back. Therefore, between the time when a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") is framed in and the time when it is framed out of the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, or 5R, another decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "2") that is positioned so that it partially overlaps the decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") may become visible through the decorative pattern "3." In this case, the character in character display portion 002SG052 of decorative pattern "2" is displayed, while the number ("2") in number display portion 002SG051 is difficult to see (or is not displayed).

In addition, the other decorative pattern "2" located behind the first decorative pattern "3" can be seen through the first decorative pattern "3". In this case, the character in the character display unit 002SG052 of the other decorative pattern "2" located behind is displayed, while the number in the number display unit 002SG051 is not displayed. The decorative pattern "2" is erased before the number for the decorative pattern "3" is displayed. This means that the number "3" of the first decorative pattern and the other decorative pattern "2" do not overlap and are prevented from making the decorative pattern "3" located in the foreground difficult to see.

In addition, in this variant example 1, the decorative patterns are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a frame-in manner, and then disappear as they move while increasing their transmittance (transparency). However, at the start of the variable display, as mentioned above, the decorative patterns are faded out in proportion to the increase in display speed, so they are moved from the back of the screen to the front while increasing their transmittance (transparency) as they fade out in accordance with the display speed. Therefore, from the start of the scrolling display until the high-speed display begins, it appears as shown in Figures 42(F) to 42(H). However, after the fade-out display period ends and the high-speed display begins, it becomes extremely difficult to see the decorative patterns even at the back of the screen.

(Example of variable display operation in the third presentation mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols starts in the third presentation mode will be described with reference to Figures 44 and 45.

Figure 44 (A) shows the state in which, in the third presentation mode, the decorative symbols that were rotating in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at their rest positions. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are being variably displayed. Additionally, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory count "2"). Additionally, the small symbols and right-hit notification image 002SG201 are displayed superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 44 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 44 (C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins, but because the high base state is in effect, the decorative symbol variation start action (see Figure 34 (A)) is not performed. In addition, a shift display begins in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see Figure 44(D)). Furthermore, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 44(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see Figure 44(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 44 (B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun.

As shown in Figure 44 (F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begin to rotate. In the high base state, the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begin to rotate all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the rotating display of the decorative patterns displayed in a static state in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins all at once, but the rotating display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, the rotating display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun.

In addition, when the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begin to rotate, the rotation display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, until at high speeds a fade-out display is executed with the transmittance reaching nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 44(E) and (F), the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed at slow speed immediately after the start of variable display, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 44(G), before reaching high speed as shown in Figure 44(H). As the transmittance increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern at high speeds.

As shown in Figure 45, the rotating display in the third presentation mode rotates the decorative symbols to repeatedly display them on the first surface 5a and the second surface 5b. The decorative symbols are semi-transparent during the rotating display and become opaque when the rotating display stops. During the rotating display, the number display section 002SG051 on the first surface 5a of the decorative symbols, which are semi-transparent, is displayed, while the number display section 002SG051 on the second surface 5b is not displayed.

For example, as shown in Figure 45 (A), when the decorative pattern is displayed rotating at a slow speed and in a semi-transparent state where the transparency is the first transparency, the decorative pattern displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is such that the number "326" displayed on the first surface 5a can be seen, but the number "437" (to be displayed) displayed on the reverse side, the second surface 5b, is difficult to see.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 45 (B), when the decorative pattern is displayed rotating at a medium speed and in a semi-transparent state where the transmittance is a second transmittance higher than the first transmittance, the decorative pattern displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is such that the number "437" displayed on the second surface 5b is visible, but the number "548" (to be displayed) displayed on the reverse side, the first surface 5a, is difficult to see.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 45 (C), when the decorative patterns are displayed in a semi-transparent state where they are rotated at high speed and have a third transmittance higher than the second transmittance, the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are such that the number "763" displayed on the first surface 5a is difficult to see, while the number "874" (to be displayed) displayed on the reverse, second surface 5b is difficult to see. Furthermore, both the first surface 5a and the second surface 5b are difficult to see during the high-speed rotation display.

In this way, when the decorative pattern is rotated to repeatedly display the front and back sides of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern becomes semi-transparent, making it possible to see not only the front side (e.g., first surface 5a) but also the back side (e.g., second surface 5b). However, since the numbers on the front side (e.g., first surface 5a) are displayed while the numbers on the back side (e.g., second surface 5b) are not, the numbers on the front and back sides of the decorative pattern do not overlap, preventing the numbers on the front side from becoming difficult to read. Furthermore, even when the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable display mode in the high base state, a loop illumination control (see Figure 35(B)) corresponding to the background pattern may be used to repeatedly illuminate the white, blue, and yellow light patterns. This simplifies the control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d.

(Example of variable display operation in the fourth presentation mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols starts in the fourth presentation mode will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 46 (A) shows the state in which, in the fourth presentation mode, the decorative symbols that were scrolling in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily displayed at their respective stop positions. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are still being displayed. Additionally, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory count "2"). Additionally, the small symbols and right-hit notification image 002SG201 are displayed superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols. (See Figure 34 (A))

Next, as shown in Figure 46 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 46 (C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins, but because the high base state is in effect, the decorative symbol variation start action (see Figure 34 (A)) is not performed. In addition, a shift display begins in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see Figure 46(D)). Furthermore, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 46(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see Figure 46(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 46 (B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun.

As shown in Figure 46 (F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins. In the high base state, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in a static state in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins all at once, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, scrolling display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun.

In addition, when scrolling display of the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scrolling display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, until at high speeds a fade-out display is executed where the transmittance reaches nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 46(E) and (F), the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed at low speed immediately after variable display begins, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 46(G), and then at high speed as shown in Figure 46(H). As the transmittance increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern at high speeds.

As explained above, in the low base state, when the effect control CPU 120 is performing a pending shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it performs an action to start changing the decorative pattern, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special pending memory display area 5U to active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F is completed.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol begins, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to that variable display to an active display, and by performing a variable start action to operate the decorative symbol in a manner different from the moving display while the shift display is in progress, the period required for the shift display can be used effectively. Furthermore, because the variable start action is performed when the shift display is in a high base state, which is more advantageous than a low base state, the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the high base state can be made more exciting.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative patterns based on a variable pattern designation command sent from the main board 11 during the performance control process in step S76, and can perform a common shift display when variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when variable display is executed based on a second type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a reach variable pattern designation command).As a common shift display is performed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, the number of shift display patterns can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the low base state, the performance control CPU 120 performs an action to start changing the decorative pattern when a pending shift display is being displayed in response to the start of variable display, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart pending memory display area 5U is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F. On the other hand, in the high base state, an example has been given in which the performance control CPU 120 does not perform an action to start changing the decorative pattern when a pending shift display is being displayed in response to the start of variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 performs an action to start changing the decorative pattern when a pending shift display is being displayed in response to the start of variable display, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart pending memory display area 5U is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol begins, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to that variable display to an active display, and by performing a variable start action to operate the decorative symbol in a manner different from the moving display while the shift display is in progress, the period required for the shift display can be used effectively. Furthermore, because the variable start action is performed when the shift display is in a high base state, which is more advantageous than a low base state, the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the high base state can be made more exciting.

Furthermore, even in the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative symbols based on the variable pattern designation command sent from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76, and a common shift display can be executed when variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when variable display is executed based on a second type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a reach variable pattern designation command).Since a common shift display is executed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, the number of shift display patterns can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 53 and 54, an example has been given in which, upon the start of the variable display of a special symbol, a shift display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to an active display ends, and then scrolling of the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the order of left, right, and center begins. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the scrolling of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R among the left, right, and center begins upon the start of the variable display of a special symbol, a shift display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to an active display ends, then scrolling of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may begin while the shift display is being performed.

(Example of operation of each part when a symbol stops displaying)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when a pattern stops will be explained based on Fig. 47 to Fig. 51. Fig. 47 is a diagram showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). Fig. 48 is a diagram showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns following Fig. 47. Fig. 49 (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns when the number of reserved memories is three in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). Fig. 50 (A) and (B) are diagrams showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns in the fourth presentation mode (third presentation mode).

(Example of the operation of the symbol stop display in the first performance mode [number of reserved memories "2 or less"])
First, an example of the operation of each part when a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable display based on a miss variable pattern when the number of reserved memories is two or less in the first presentation mode will be explained with reference to Figures 47 and 48. Note that the second presentation mode is almost the same as the first presentation mode except for the background image, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 47 (A), when decorative patterns are being scrolled at high speed in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for each decorative pattern to stop approaches, the display speed of the decorative patterns in left decorative pattern display area 5L, which had been displayed at high speed, first slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative patterns (see Figure 47 (B)).

Next, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the left decorative symbol display area 5L (see Figure 47(C)), the transparency of the decorative symbol becomes nearly 0% (opaque), the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 enlarges (see Figure 47(D)), and then a variable stop action (see Figure 34(B)) is executed to restore it to its original size (see Figure 47(E)). Then, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, a loop action (see Figure 34(C)) is initiated and is executed repeatedly until the variable display of the special symbol ends.

When the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped, as shown in Figure 47 (F), the display speed of the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 47 (F)).

Next, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative symbol display area 5R (see Figure 47 (G)), the transparency of the decorative symbol becomes nearly 0% (opaque), the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 enlarges (see Figure 47 (H)), and then a variable stop action (see Figure 34 (B)) is executed to restore it to its original size (see Figure 48 (I)). Then, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, a loop action (see Figure 34 (C)) is initiated and is executed repeatedly until the variable display of the special symbol ends.

When the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily stopped, as shown in Figure 48 (J), the display speed of the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 48 (K)).

Next, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative symbol display area 5R (see Figure 48 (K)), the transparency of the decorative symbol becomes nearly 0% (opaque), the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 enlarges (see Figure 48 (L)), and then a variable stop action (see Figure 34 (B)) is executed to restore it to its original size (see Figure 48 (M)). Then, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, a loop action (see Figure 34 (C)) is initiated and is executed repeatedly until the variable display of the special symbol ends.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbol is displayed as a static symbol, the loop action of the decorative symbol that was temporarily displayed as a static symbol in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R ends, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 48 (M)).

(Example of the operation of the symbol stop display in the first performance mode [number of reserved memories "3"])
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the decorative symbols are displayed in a static state in the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 3 in the first presentation mode will be explained based on Figures 49(A) to 49(G). Note that the second presentation mode is almost the same as the first presentation mode except for the background image, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 49 (A), when decorative patterns are being scrolled at high speed in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for the stopped display of each decorative pattern approaches, the display speed of the decorative patterns in left decorative pattern display area 5L, which had been displayed at high speed, first slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative patterns (see Figure 49 (B)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see Figure 49 (C)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 (see Figure 34 (B)) is not executed. In addition, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see Figure 34 (C)) is executed.

When the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped, the display speed of the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 49 (D)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 47 (E)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 (see Figure 34 (B)) is not executed. In addition, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see Figure 34 (C)) is executed.

When the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily stopped, the display speed of the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 49 (F)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 49 (G)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 (see Figure 34 (B)) is not executed. In addition, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see Figure 34 (C)) is executed.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbol is displayed as a static symbol, the loop action of the decorative symbol that was temporarily displayed as a static symbol in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R ends, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 49 (G)).

(Example of the stop display of symbols in the fourth performance mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the decorative symbols are displayed in a static state in the variable display in the fourth presentation mode will be explained based on Figures 50(A) and 50(B). Note that the third presentation mode is almost the same as the fourth presentation mode except for the background image, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 50 (A), when decorative patterns are being scrolled at high speed in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for each decorative pattern to stop approaching, the display speed of the decorative patterns in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, which were being displayed at high speed, simultaneously decreases, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of each decorative pattern (see Figure 50 (B)).

The left, center, and right decorative symbols are then simultaneously displayed in a temporary stop state at the stop positions of decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, the transparency of the decorative symbols becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in character display section 002SG052 (see Figure 34 (B)) is not executed. Furthermore, the character's loop action (see Figure 34 (C)) after the temporary stop display is not executed either.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbol is displayed as a static symbol, the decorative symbols that were temporarily displayed as static symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed as static symbols, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 50 (C)).

In this way, in a low base state, depending on the number of reserved memories (for example, when the number of reserved memories is two or less and a variable display based on an abbreviated variable pattern is executed), the variable stop action adds variety to the movement of the decorative pattern when it is temporarily stopped, enhancing interest. On the other hand, when the number of reserved memories is three in a low base state, or when a high base state where the average variable display period is short and the decorative pattern is difficult to see, and a variable display based on abbreviated variable patterns is executed regardless of the number of reserved memories, the variable stop action is not executed, and the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped while maintaining its size, allowing it to be stopped without impairing its visibility.

In this embodiment, the animation (moving images) data of the various movements of the decorative patterns can be created by combining materials for each period, such as: 1. From the start of the variable display to just before the high-speed variable display, 2. High-speed variable display, 3. Slow-speed variable display to stop of the variable display, and 4. Stopped pattern. However, with regard to 2. High-speed variable display, as shown in Figures 31 (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2), the transmittance of the decorative patterns is high and they are almost transparent, and while it is possible to see how they are being displayed in a variable manner at high speed, it is extremely difficult to visually determine which decorative patterns have passed by (indicated by arrows in Figures 31 (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2)). Therefore, even if there is high-speed variable display animation data for each type of decorative pattern (a type that corresponds to which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display starts from), it would not be very meaningful and would only take up space in ROM 121, so it is preferable that common data be used for the high-speed variable display animation data regardless of which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display starts from.

(Background change example)
Next, an example of background change operation will be described with reference to Figures 51 and 52. In Figure 51, (A1) shows the first background image, (A2) shows the first predetermined background image, and (B) shows the background change. Figure 52 shows the flow of background change in the first presentation mode.

As shown in Figure 51, in the first presentation mode, the background image can be switched between a first background image 002SG081 (see Figure 51 (A1)), which shows a daytime cityscape seen from afar, and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see Figure 51 (A2)), which shows a daytime cityscape. The background image is switched when a predetermined switching condition is met (for example, when an SP reach miss occurs). In this embodiment, the background image is switched at a predetermined timing in the variable display following an SP reach miss (for example, when the variable display starts).

In this embodiment, an example has been given in which the first presentation mode switches between the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A, but the present invention is not limited to this. Although not specifically shown, it may be possible to selectively switch between three or more types of background images, including the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A. Furthermore, the fulfillment of the switching conditions is not limited to the above, and may also be fulfilled when a specific presentation other than SP Reach is executed, when a single background image is displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time, or when a selection is made by the player's operation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the start timing of the switching display is the start timing of the variable display of the decorative symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be any timing during the variable display period, such as before the decorative symbols reach a reach state.

As shown in FIG. 51(B), when switching from first background image 002SG081 to first predetermined background image 002SG081A (or from first predetermined background image 002SG081A to first background image 002SG081), a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) of first background image 002SG081, which is displayed at 100% opacity, is gradually increased until it disappears, while a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) of first predetermined background image 002SG081A, which is hidden at 0% opacity, is gradually decreased. In other words, a cross-fade display is executed in which the fade-out display period A1 of first background image 002SG081 and the fade-in display period B1 of first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized (fade-out display period A1 = fade-in display period B1). The fade-out display period A1 and fade-in display period B1 are, for example, approximately 6 seconds, during which approximately 210 frames of image are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 52(A), the transmittance (transparency) of the first background image 002SG081 increases over time, making it more difficult to see (see Figure 52(B)), while the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A, which is displayed in a layer below the first background image 002SG081, decreases, gradually becoming more visible (see Figure 52(C)).

Next, the visibility of the first background image 002SG081 decreases further, while the visibility of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A increases (see Figures 52 (D) and (E)). Finally, the transmittance of the first background image 002SG081 reaches 100% and is erased, while the transmittance of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A reaches 0%, making it easily visible (see Figure 52 (F)).

In the present embodiment, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are synchronized, that is, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are the same duration. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a portion of the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 may overlap, or the fade-in display period B1 may start after the fade-out display period A1 ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example has been given in which the transmittance always increases at a constant rate when the background image or decorative pattern is faded out, and the transmittance always decreases at a constant rate when the background image or decorative pattern is faded in, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmittance when the background image is faded out or faded in is not necessarily limited to increasing or decreasing at a constant rate. For example, the transmittance may increase or decrease slowly in a first period, and then increase or decrease rapidly in a second period.

Furthermore, while this embodiment exemplifies a form in which the background image is switched and displayed in one presentation mode (for example, the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode), the present invention is not limited to this and can also be applied to a form in which the background image is switched from a first background image corresponding to the first presentation mode to a second background image corresponding to the second presentation mode, and to a form in which the fade-out display period of the first background image and the fade-in display period of the second background image are synchronized.

(Example of operation of each part in variable display)
Next, examples of the operation of each part in the variable display in each presentation mode will be described with reference to Figs. 53 to 56. Fig. 53 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the first presentation mode. Fig. 54 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the second presentation mode. Fig. 55 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the third and fourth presentation modes. Fig. 56 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in (A) the first presentation mode, (B) the second presentation mode, and (C) the third and fourth presentation modes.

(First presentation mode)
As shown in Figure 53, in the first performance mode, when the number of reserved memories is "2" or less and a variable display based on the non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is executed, as the variable display of the special symbol begins, the small symbol is displayed variably at high speed, and the decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbol in the center decorative symbol display area 5C are displayed in this order, and then a scrolling display is started. In addition, a shift display of the reserved display is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins (see Figure 56 (A)).

In addition, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate after scrolling begins, becoming faster, and as the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative patterns to fade out. This fade-out display period A21 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, if the switching conditions for switching the background image from first background image 002SG081 to first predetermined background image 002SG081A are met at the start of variable display, a fade-out display will begin in which the transmittance (transparency) of first background image 002SG081 gradually increases, while a fade-in display will begin in which the transmittance (transparency) of first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases until it becomes opaque.

As the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C gradually slow down and are displayed at a slower speed, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing them to fade in. This fade-in display period B21 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are temporarily displayed in that order. Furthermore, during the temporary display, a variable stop action is performed, and a loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small pattern is displayed as a static display, the decorative pattern loop action ends and the pattern is displayed as a static display. After that, a pattern determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has passed, and the next variable display can begin.

The fade-out display period A1, during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out, is longer than the fade-out display period A21, which is the period from when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start scrolling until they begin to be displayed at high speed (fade-out display period A1 > fade-out display period A21).

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1 during which the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is faded in is longer than the fade-in display period B21, which is the period from when the display speed of the scrolling decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts to slow down until they are temporarily stopped (fade-in display period B1 > fade-in display period B21).

In addition, when the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed, the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b repeatedly emit light in the order of white, blue, and yellow based on loop light emission control (see Figure 35 (B)) corresponding to the background pattern. In addition, background music (BGM) is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

(Second presentation mode)
Next, as shown in Figure 54, in the second performance mode, when the number of reserved memories is "2" or less and a variable display based on the non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is executed, as the variable display of the special symbol begins, the small symbol is displayed variably at high speed, and the decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbol in the center decorative symbol display area 5C are displayed in this order, and then a scrolling display is started. Also, a shift display of the reserved display is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins (see Figure 56 (B)).

In addition, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate after scrolling begins, becoming faster, and as the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative patterns to fade out. This fade-out display period A22 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, if the switching conditions for switching the background image from first background image 002SG081 to first predetermined background image 002SG081A are met at the start of variable display, a fade-out display will begin in which the transmittance (transparency) of first background image 002SG081 gradually increases, while a fade-in display will begin in which the transmittance (transparency) of first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases until it becomes opaque.

As the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C gradually slow down and are displayed at a slower speed, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing them to fade in. This fade-in display period B22 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are temporarily displayed in that order. Furthermore, during the temporary display, a variable stop action is performed, and a loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small pattern is displayed as a static display, the decorative pattern loop action ends and the pattern is displayed as a static display. After that, a pattern determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has passed, and the next variable display can begin.

The fade-out display period A1 during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out is longer than the fade-out display period A22 from when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start scrolling until they begin displaying at high speed (fade-out display period A1 > fade-out display period A22). In this way, since the shorter the fade-out display, the more abrupt the impression of disappearance. Therefore, for fade-out displays that may be performed at the same time as the variable display of decorative patterns and the background change (for example, at the start of the variable display), the fade-out display of the decorative patterns is performed in a shorter period than the fade-out display of the background image, thereby drawing attention to the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is set to be a longer period than the fade-in display period B22 from when the display speed starts to slow down in the scrolling display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until the display is temporarily stopped (fade-in display period B1 > fade-in display period B22). In this way, since the shorter the fade-in display, the more abrupt the impression it gives, for fade-in displays that may be performed at the same time as the variable display of the decorative pattern and the background change (for example, when the variable display is stopped), the fade-in display of the decorative pattern is performed in a shorter period of time than the fade-in display of the background, drawing attention to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A22 when scrolling display is performed in the second presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when scrolling display is performed in the first presentation mode (fade-out display period A21 < fade-out display period A22; see Figures 56 (A) and (B)). By doing this, not only is the manner in which the decorative symbols are scrolled differently in the second presentation mode compared to the first presentation mode, but the fade-out display period A22 from the start of the scrolling display until the decorative symbols become difficult to see as the display speed increases is longer, allowing the decorative symbols to be noticed for a longer period of time.

In this embodiment, as the variable display of the decorative symbols in the second presentation mode, a second scroll display that moves in a curved manner in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from the back to the front has been exemplified as a special variable display that differs in appearance from the first scroll display that moves in a linear manner from top to bottom in the first presentation mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special variable display that differs in appearance from the first scroll display is not limited to the above-mentioned one that moves in a curved manner in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from the back to the front, but may also be a variety of scroll displays, such as one that moves in a curved manner in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from the front to the back, as described in Variation 1 above, or a scroll display that moves in a linear or curved manner from bottom to top.

Furthermore, the fade-out display periods A21, A22 are different when the non-reach miss variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the first presentation mode and when the non-reach miss variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the second presentation mode. By doing this, the fade-out display period is the same despite the different presentation modes, making it difficult for the player to predict that the determined variation pattern is the non-reach miss variation pattern PA1-1, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A1 during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out is different from the fade-out display period A22 from when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start scrolling until they begin displaying at high speed. In other words, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed (synchronized) at the same time (for example, at the start of the variable display), which prevents it from becoming difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. In more detail, if the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 were synchronized, the decorative pattern and first background image 002SG081 would disappear together, making it difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. Therefore, by erasing the decorative pattern first, the decorative pattern can be made to stand out.

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is different from the fade-in display period B22 from when the display speed starts to slow down in the scrolling display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until the display is temporarily stopped. In other words, the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed (synchronized) at the same time (for example, when the variable display is stopped), which prevents it from becoming difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. In more detail, if the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 were synchronized, the decorative pattern and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A would appear together, making it difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has stopped. Therefore, by making the decorative pattern appear first, the decorative pattern can be made to stand out.

In addition, when the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed, the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b repeatedly emit light in the order of white, blue, and yellow based on loop light emission control (see Figure 35 (B)) corresponding to the background pattern. In addition, background music (BGM) is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

(Third and fourth performance modes)
Next, as shown in Figure 55, in the third and fourth presentation modes, when a variable display based on the shortened non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-3 is executed, as the variable display of the special symbol starts, the small symbol is displayed variably at high speed, and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start rotating or scrolling all at once without any action to start the variation. Also, a shift display of the reserved display is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins (see Figure 56 (C)).

In addition, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate after scrolling display begins, becoming faster, and as the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative patterns to fade out. This fade-out display period A23 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As the stopping timing of decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually slow down in unison and are displayed at a slower speed, and their transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing them to fade in. This fade-in display period B23 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

After that, the decorative symbols in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all displayed statically. In other words, the variable stop action and loop action seen in the first and second presentation modes are not performed, and the variable display ends as is, with the decorative symbols and small symbols displayed statically. After that, a symbol determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has elapsed, and the next variable display can begin.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A21 when a scrolling display is performed in the first presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when a rotating display is performed in the third presentation mode or a scrolling display is performed in the fourth presentation mode, and the fade-out display period A22 when a scrolling display is performed in the second presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when a scrolling display is performed in the first presentation mode (fade-out display period A23 < fade-out display period A21 < fade-out display period A22. See Figures 56 (A) to (C)).

In addition, when the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed, the movable lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b emit light in accordance with the output of the rhythm, melody, beat, etc. of the high-bass music based on light emission control corresponding to the high-bass music pattern. In addition, the high-bass music is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In the present embodiment, when variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in the high base state, the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b are lit in accordance with the output of the rhythm, melody, beat, etc. of the high base music based on light emission control corresponding to the high base music pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even when variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in the high base state, a light emission pattern of white, blue, and yellow may be repeatedly executed in order based on loop light emission control corresponding to the background pattern (see Figure 35 (B)), and background BGM may be output from speakers 8L and 8R. This simplifies the light emission control of the performance control CPU 120.

(Example of customer waiting demo performance)
Next, the customer waiting demo effect will be described with reference to Figures 57 and 58. Figure 57 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the customer waiting demo effect. Figure 58 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a start winning occurs during the customer waiting demo effect.

As shown in Figure 57, the "waiting for customers demo effect" is an effect that notifies the player that they are in a waiting for customers (waiting to play) state, and is initiated by the effect control CPU 120 when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the reception of the waiting for customers demo designation command output from the main board 11 without the reception of a control command such as a variable display start designation command.

Specifically, although not specifically shown, when the power is turned on, initial operations of movable bodies 32A, 32B, etc. are performed in the initial operation control process, and then menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed (see Figure 57 (A)). Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on without any variable display, menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is no longer displayed, customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is displayed, and the customer waiting demo performance begins (see Figure 57 (B)).

In the customer waiting demo performance, after displaying moving images sequentially introducing the multiple ally characters (which may include enemy character images) appearing in various performances and the content itself (see Figures 57(B)-(E)), an image of a group of ally characters remains displayed (see Figure 57(F)), while the movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position, and after a predetermined time has passed, it rises back to the origin position (see Figures 57(G)-(H)), and the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the normal state is displayed as the background image, ending the performance (see Figure 57(I)). When the customer waiting demo performance ends, a menu/volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed (see Figure 57(J)).

If a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the customer waiting demo performance ended without any variable display being performed, the customer waiting demo performance will start again. Even after that, the customer waiting demo performance will be performed periodically as long as the standby state continues. The customer waiting demo performance may be performed repeatedly multiple times in the standby state, or may not be performed after being performed a predetermined number of times. The performance format of the customer waiting demo performance as a standby effect is optional and can be changed in various ways.

In addition, during the execution period of the customer waiting demo effect (see Figures 57 (B) to (H)), small symbols are continuously displayed in a static state in the display area 5S, while decorative symbols are hidden in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, by displaying small symbols even when decorative symbols are hidden, the player is made aware that the variable display is in a static state.

We will explain an example of what happens when a starting win occurs while this kind of customer waiting demo effect is being performed.

As shown in Figure 58 (A), if the first start winning occurs (the conditions for starting the variable display are met) while the customer waiting demo effect is being executed, the variable display of small symbols will begin in the display area 5S while the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is displayed, as shown in Figure 58 (B).

Next, as shown in Figure 58 (C), the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and decorative symbols are displayed statically in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The special symbol reserved memory display area 5U and active display area 5F are also displayed, and the first reserved display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U. Then, the first reserved display 002SG101 begins to move (shift) from the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F, and the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begin to change in the order of left, right, and center.

As shown in Figure 58 (D), when the shift display of the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F ends, as shown in Figure 58 (E), the decorative patterns in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R move upward in sequence, ending the change start action and starting the scrolling display (see Figure 58 (F)).

In this way, if a start win occurs while the customer waiting demo performance is being performed, the variable display of small symbols begins before the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is hidden, and then the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is hidden and switched to the background image corresponding to the performance mode at that time (here, the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the first performance mode), after which the decorative symbols are displayed and the scrolling display begins.

In other words, if the scrolling display of the decorative symbols begins while the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is still displayed, it will be difficult for the player to understand that the scrolling display has begun in response to the occurrence of the first start winning. Therefore, by starting the variable display of the small symbols, switching from the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 to the first background image 002SG081, and then starting the scrolling display after the shift display of the pending display has ended, the player can be made to recognize that the scrolling display has begun in response to the occurrence of the first start winning. On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is switched to the first background image 002SG081 and the scrolling display begins after the shift display has ended, there will be a large time lag between the occurrence of the first start winning and the start of the scrolling display. Therefore, the variable display of the small symbols will begin before the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is hidden, ensuring a display that corresponds to the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 57(A), (I), and (J), when the customer waiting demo performance ends and the decorative symbols are displayed frozen in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, if the first or second performance mode is selected, a loop action (see Figure 34(C)) of the frozen decorative symbols is executed, and loop lighting control (see Figure 35(B)) is executed for the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d. On the other hand, if the third or fourth performance mode is selected, the loop action (see Figure 34(C)) of the frozen decorative symbols is not executed, and lighting control is executed for the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d in accordance with the rhythm, melody, and beat of the high-bass music.

In this way, in a low base state, the decorative symbol loop action is repeatedly executed at a shorter cycle than the loop light emission control, drawing attention to the decorative symbol, thereby encouraging the variable display of the decorative symbol, and thus encouraging the player to resume playing. Meanwhile, in a high base state, neither the decorative symbol loop action nor the loop light emission control is executed, drawing attention to the fact that a high base effect (third or fourth effect mode) is being performed. The decorative symbol loop action does not need to be executed in the first or second effect mode, and the decorative symbol loop action may be executed in the third or fourth effect mode.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern loop action is not executed while the variable display is stopped in the high base state because it is unlikely that a player will end play in the high base state, and it is more likely that they will simply leave their seat. Therefore, there is no need to appeal to the player to take a seat just because the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an inoperable state without a variable display, and appealing with the loop action prevents other players from accidentally sitting down.

In addition, the "loop action" in this embodiment focuses solely on "movement," but for example, the decorative pattern does not change position, sway, or deform, but may instead remain stationary while a highlight moves across the decorative pattern, creating a sparkling animation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the third background image 002SG083, the fourth background image 002SG084, and effect images (not shown) such as character images displayed as background images in the high base state may be animated in time with the high base music, or by moving the background images at a predetermined speed. In this case, as described above, while the variable display is stopped in the high base state, the decorative pattern loop action is not executed, but the animation display of the third background image 002SG083 and the fourth background image 002SG084 may continue.

(Example of pseudo consecutive announcement)
Next, an example of the operation of the pseudo consecutive win notification will be described with reference to Figures 59 and 60. Figure 59 is a diagram showing the flow of the pseudo consecutive win notification. Figure 60 shows (A) an example of the pseudo consecutive win count display and symbol color, (B) a diagram showing the types of pseudo consecutive win count display and symbol color, and (C) a diagram showing a pseudo consecutive win count display color determination table.

As shown in Figure 59, the "pseudo consecutive announcement" is a presentation that teases whether or not the decorative symbols will resume variable display after a temporary stop is displayed at a predetermined timing between the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols and the display result being derived and displayed, in other words, whether or not a single variable display will be made to appear as multiple variable displays.

As shown in Figure 60 (A), the pseudo consecutive prediction can be implemented in two ways: a "pseudo consecutive 1 pattern" in which the initial variable display and one re-variable display result in a total of two variable display times, and a "pseudo consecutive 2 pattern" in which the initial variable display and two re-variable displays result in a total of three variable display times. If the Super Reach (pseudo consecutive 1) variable display pattern is selected, the "pseudo consecutive 1 pattern" is executed, and if the Super Reach (pseudo consecutive 2) variable display pattern is selected, the "pseudo consecutive 2 pattern" is executed. Note that the probability of winning is higher with the "pseudo consecutive 2 pattern" than with the "pseudo consecutive 1 pattern."

Specifically, as shown in Figure 59 (A), when a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive prediction is initiated, a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L at a timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variable display was initiated. Next, a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, entering a reach state (see Figure 59 (B)), after which a pseudo consecutive decorative pattern with the word "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is decelerated and displayed just before its stop position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C (see Figure 59 (C)).

After that, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, a pseudo consecutive decorative symbol is temporarily displayed at the stop position in the center decorative symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 59(D)), and a pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 of "x2" is displayed above the center decorative symbol display area 5C, indicating that the first re-variable display will begin, i.e., the second variable display will begin (see FIG. 59(F)), and variable display of decorative symbols will resume in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, center decorative symbol display area 5C, and right decorative symbol display area 5R (see FIG. 59(G)). Note that in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is not executed, the pseudo consecutive symbol passes the stop position in the center decorative symbol display area 5C, and decorative symbols with a number one larger than the temporarily displayed decorative symbol are temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, and a losing variable display result is displayed (see FIG. 59(E)).

After the variable display of decorative symbols resumes in Figure 59 (G), in the case of a pseudo-consecutive prediction of a "pseudo-consecutive one-time pattern," after a predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative symbol that was variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed as stopped (see Figure 59 (L)), and a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed as stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed as stopped in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, resulting in a reach mode (see Figure 59 (M)), and the performance develops into an SP reach effect.

Furthermore, after the variable display of decorative symbols resumes in Figure 59 (G), in the case of a pseudo-consecutive prediction of a "pseudo-consecutive double pattern," a decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, and then a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, thereby returning to a reach state, after which a pseudo-consecutive decorative symbol with the word "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is decelerated and displayed just before its stop position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C (see Figure 59 (H)).

Next, the pseudo consecutive decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C (see Figure 59 (I)), and the pseudo consecutive number of times display 002SG213, which reads "x3," is displayed above the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, indicating that the second re-variable display will begin, i.e., the third variable display will begin (see Figure 59 (J)). After that, the variable display of the decorative patterns resumes in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 59 (K)).

After that, the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed (see Figure 59 (L)), and a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, resulting in a reach mode (see Figure 59 (M)), and the SP reach performance develops.

The pseudo consecutive announcement includes an introductory part, which is a period during which the variable display is teased as to whether or not it will resume (see Figures 59 (A)-(C), (G), (J), (K), and (L)), and a result announcement part, which is a period during which the result of whether or not the variable display has resumed is announced (see Figures 59 (D)-(F), (H), (I), and (M)).

As shown in Figure 60 (B1), during the pseudo consecutive win preview, when the variable display resumes after the pseudo consecutive win decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the center decorative pattern display area 5C, a pseudo consecutive win count display is displayed that indicates the number of times the variable display has resumed. Specifically, a pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG212 (see Figures 59 (F) (G)) of "x2" is displayed, indicating that the first variable win re-display will begin, i.e., the second variable win display will begin, and a pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG213 (see Figures 59 (J) (K)) of "x3" is displayed, indicating that the second variable win re-display will begin, i.e., the third variable win display will begin.

The pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG212 shown in FIG. 60 (B1) and the pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG213 shown in FIG. 60 (B2) are sometimes displayed in blue and sometimes displayed in red. Also, as explained in FIG. 30, even-numbered regular symbols are displayed in blue, and odd-numbered special symbols are displayed in red. The display color of such pseudo consecutive win count displays is determined using the pseudo consecutive win count display color determination table shown in FIG. 60 (C) in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280 of the variable display count setting process explained in FIG. 29.

Specifically, when determining the display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG212 in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280, if the variable display result is a "probable jackpot," a display color that is not the same as the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, symbol color is blue and pseudo consecutive win count display color is red/symbol color is red and pseudo consecutive win count display color is blue) is determined 10% of the time, and a display color that is the same as the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, symbol color and pseudo consecutive win count display color are blue/symbol color and pseudo consecutive win count display color are red) is determined 90% of the time.

Also, when the variable display result is a "non-probable jackpot," a display color that is not the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color is blue and pseudo consecutive number of times display color is red/pattern color is red and pseudo consecutive number of times display color is blue) is determined 30% of the time, and a display color that is the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color and pseudo consecutive number of times display color are blue/pattern color and pseudo consecutive number of times display color are red) is determined 70% of the time.

Also, when the variable display result is a "miss," a display color that is not the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color is blue and pseudo-consecutive number display color is red/pattern color is red and pseudo-consecutive number display color is blue) is determined 90% of the time, and a display color that is the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color and pseudo-consecutive number display color are blue/pattern color and pseudo-consecutive number display color are red) is determined 10% of the time.

In this way, in the pseudo consecutive win prediction, there are cases where the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive win count display have a first combination of different colors, and cases where the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive win count display have a second combination of the same color, and the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher when the variable display is resumed with the second combination than when the variable display is resumed with the first combination in the pseudo consecutive win prediction.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a jackpot and a normal pattern (blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the rate at which the same color, blue, is determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is higher than the rate at which the non-same color, red, is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a miss and a normal pattern (blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the rate at which the same color, blue, is determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is lower than the rate at which the non-same color, red, is determined.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a jackpot and a probability variable pattern (red) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the probability that the same color red will be determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is higher than the probability that the non-identical color blue will be determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a miss and a probability variable pattern (red) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the probability that the same color red will be determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is lower than the probability that the non-identical color blue will be determined.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a jackpot and a normal pattern ("2", blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276 (see Figure 60 (B1)), for the first pseudo-consecutive spin in which pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 is "x2", the second combination ("x2", blue) in which the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 have the same number and display color, blue, is determined more frequently than the first combination ("x2", red) in which the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 have the same number but a different display color, red.

Furthermore, for the second pseudo-consecutive spin in which the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG213 shows "x3", the third combination ("x3", blue), in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number on the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are different but the display color is the same type, blue, is determined more frequently than the fourth combination ("x3", red), in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number on the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG213 are different, both in color and red.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss and the normal symbol ("2", blue) is determined as the stopping symbol in step 002SGS276, the probability that the same color, blue, will be determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is lower than the probability that the non-same color, red, will be determined.

If the variable display result is a jackpot, and a probability variable symbol ("3", red) is determined as the stopping symbol in step 002SGS276, for the first pseudo-consecutive spin in which pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 is "x2", the third combination ("x2", red) in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number in pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are different but the display color is the same type, red, is determined more frequently than the fourth combination ("x2", blue) in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number in pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are different in color, blue.

Furthermore, for the second pseudo-consecutive spin in which the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG213 shows "x3", the second combination ("x3", red), in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number and display color of the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are the same type, is determined more frequently than the first combination ("x3", blue), in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number of the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are the same type but the display color is different, blue.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, and a normal pattern ("3", blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the probability that the same color, blue, will be determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run will be lower than the probability that a non-identical color, red, will be determined.

In this way, the pseudo consecutive prediction can result in a first combination in which the numbers of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary stop mode and the numbers of the pseudo consecutive number displays 002SG212 and 002SG213 are the same type, but the display colors of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary stop mode and the pseudo consecutive number display are different, or a second combination in which both the numbers and display colors of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary stop mode and the pseudo consecutive number display are the same type. This means that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher when the variable display is resumed in the second combination than when the variable display is resumed in the first combination during the pseudo consecutive prediction. This allows players to focus not only on whether or not the pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, but also, if executed, on the combination of the numbers of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary stop mode and the numbers and colors of the pseudo consecutive number displays 002SG212 and 002SG213, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the pseudo consecutive prediction, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher when a super reach fluctuation pattern of two pseudo consecutive wins is determined as the fluctuation pattern than when a super reach fluctuation pattern of one pseudo consecutive win is determined. Therefore, by making it more likely that the jackpot gaming state will be controlled when the decorative symbol provisionally stopped in the second pseudo consecutive win and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display are the same type of second combination than when the decorative symbol provisionally stopped in the first pseudo consecutive win and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display are the same type of second combination, it is possible to draw more attention to the number of pseudo consecutive wins and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display.

Furthermore, if the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number and display color of the pseudo-consecutive number display during the second pseudo-consecutive match are both of the same type of second combination, the decorative symbol will become a probability variable symbol, so the probability of being controlled to a probability variable jackpot gaming state may be higher if a super reach fluctuation pattern of two pseudo-consecutive matches is determined as the fluctuation pattern than if a super reach fluctuation pattern of one pseudo-consecutive match is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display color of the pseudo-consecutive win count display is determined from among multiple colors depending on the number of decorative symbols temporarily displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display color of the pseudo-consecutive win count display may be a display color that is predetermined for each pseudo-consecutive win count.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display format of the pseudo consecutive number displays 002SG212 and 002SG213 is exemplified as "x2" or "x3", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo consecutive number display can be changed to various formats as long as the number of pseudo consecutive numbers can be specified. For example, it can be displayed in various formats such as "nth consecutive number" (n is an integer of 2 or more), "nth time", "nth re-variation", etc.

In this embodiment, in the pseudo-consecutive prediction, the numbers on the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop and the numbers on the pseudo-consecutive count display are the same type and color in two cases: when the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop is a normal symbol ("2", blue) and the pseudo-consecutive count display 002SG212 ("x2", blue), and when the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop is a normal symbol ("3", red) and the pseudo-consecutive count display 002SG213 (x3, red). However, other patterns are also possible, such as when the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop is a normal symbol ("4", green) and the pseudo-consecutive count display (x4, green). The color of the numbers on the decorative symbol, the color of the numbers on the pseudo-consecutive count display, and the number of pseudo-consecutive times can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in this embodiment, even when the number of the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the pseudo consecutive win prediction is a number other than "2" or "3" corresponding to the number in the pseudo consecutive win count display, a decision is made as to whether or not the pseudo consecutive win count display color will be the same color as the number of the decorative pattern temporarily displayed, and the expectation level is higher if the same color is decided than if a different color is decided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the number of the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the pseudo consecutive win prediction is a number other than "2" or "3" corresponding to the number in the pseudo consecutive win count display, the pseudo consecutive win count display color may not be decided, but may be uniformly decided to be a predetermined display color (for example, white, etc.).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the pseudo consecutive prediction, a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, entering a reach state, and then a pseudo consecutive decorative symbol with the word "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is temporarily displayed in a stopped position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, thereby starting a re-variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the pseudo consecutive decorative symbol can be changed in various ways. Furthermore, after a decorative symbol with a different number than the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the re-variable display may also be started by a decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L or the right decorative symbol display area 5R, or a pseudo consecutive decorative symbol, being temporarily displayed in a stopped position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C.

The decorative symbols provisionally displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R during the pseudo consecutive prediction do not necessarily have to be the same as the final decorative symbols that are displayed when the variable display ends. For example, after a regular symbol is provisionally displayed during the first pseudo consecutive, a special symbol may be displayed during the second pseudo consecutive, i.e., a symbol different from the symbol displayed during the first pseudo consecutive. Furthermore, the number of pseudo consecutive times is not limited to two, and three or more pseudo consecutive times (re-variable display) may be possible.

(Example of reach effect operation)
Next, an example of the operation of the reach effect will be described with reference to Figures 61 to 63. Figure 61 is a diagram showing the flow of the reach effect. Figure 62 is a diagram showing the flow of the reach effect following Figure 61. Figure 63 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of each part in the reach effect. Note that, although an example of the operation of the reach effect in the first effect mode will be described below, similar reach effects may also be executable in the second to fourth effect modes.

As shown in Figure 61 (A), when a variable display based on a normal reach variable pattern or a super reach variable pattern is initiated, a decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variable display began (see Figure 61 (B)). Next, a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined reach mode, and the reach effect begins (see Figure 61 (C)). At this time, decorative symbols are displayed at high speed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C. In addition, the movable body lamps 9d of movable bodies 32A and 32B are illuminated based on the loop light emission control described above (see Figure 35 (B)).

Note that Figures 61(B) and (C) illustrate a form in which the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and then the right decorative symbol display area 5R, but the present invention is not limited to this, and decorative symbols may be temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R simultaneously.

As shown in Figure 61 (D), when the reach effect begins, the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R are enlarged, and the reach line suggestion image, reach line effect display 002SG250, is displayed superimposed on the decorative symbol (which is nearly transparent and invisible) currently being variably displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C, thereby starting the reach line suggestion effect. The reach line effect display 002SG250 is a display that emphasizes the reach line connecting the decorative symbols temporarily displayed at the stop positions in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and is a display that suggests that the decorative symbol in the center decorative symbol display area 5C will be displayed stationary on the reach line.

In Figure 61 (D), the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and right decorative symbol display area 5R are not just enlarged as in the variable stop action described above, but rather the number display section 002SG051, character display section 002SG052, information display section 002SG053, and base display section 002SG054 that form the decorative symbol are all enlarged at the same ratio. In this way, by enlarging the display in a manner different from when the variable display is stopped, it can be recognized that the variable display has not stopped, but has entered a reach mode.

As shown in Figure 61(D), when the reach performance begins, the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed small near the stop position in the center decorative pattern display area 5C, superimposed on the decorative pattern being variably displayed, and then gradually extends linearly toward the stop positions (left and right) of the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R (see Figure 61(E)). After reaching the left and right edges of the display screen (see Figure 61(F)), the display changes so that the vertical dimensions expand (see Figure 61(G)), and the transmittance (transparency) gradually increases through a fade-out display (see Figure 61(H)), and is finally erased and no longer displayed (see Figure 62(I)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 61 (F), in the reach line suggestion performance, it is possible to change the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 (enlarge the display), and when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is being changed, the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A, 32B arranged on the periphery (nearby) of the display screen of the image display device 5 are turned off, making the periphery of the display screen darker than usual, thereby making the reach line effect display 002SG250 stand out more.

Also, as shown in Figure 61 (D), after the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are enlarged and displayed, the left decorative pattern begins to move to the left and the right decorative pattern begins to move to the right, i.e., in directions away from each other (see Figure 61 (E)). They also rotate a predetermined angle around a rotation axis facing up and down while moving away from each other (see Figure 61 (F)), and when they reach the furthest positions on the left and right of the display screen, the movement and rotational display ends and they are temporarily displayed (see Figure 61 (G)).

Then, as shown in Figure 61 (H), the left and right decorative patterns that were displayed enlarged in the separated positions on the left and right are reduced in size and rotated while moving from the separated positions toward the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and are restored to their normal display positions.

Then, as shown in Figure 62 (I), when the decorative patterns are restored to the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R and the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased and no longer displayed, the decorative patterns that were variably displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C gradually decrease in scroll display speed and transmittance (transparency) as they fade in (see Figures 62 (J) to (K)), until the transmittance of the decorative patterns finally becomes 0% (opaque) and they are scrolled at a slow speed (see Figure 62 (L)).

As shown in FIG. 63, when executing a reach line suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute an enlarged display that enlarges the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and a separating display that separates the decorative symbols after executing the enlarged display.The second period te1 from the start to the end of the separating display is longer than the first period td1 from the start to the end of the enlarged display (td1<te1), allowing the player to recognize the decorative symbols that form the reach state.

Furthermore, the period td2 from the start of the enlarged display to the end of the enlarged display is longer than the period tf1 until the enlarged decorative symbol is restored to its original state (td2<tf1), so the player can be made aware of the decorative symbol that forms the reach state, and when restored, it can be quickly reduced in size to prepare for the next performance.

In addition, when the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are enlarged, the left-right dimension of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, which focuses attention on which decorative pattern will be displayed in a stopped state, narrows, making it difficult to see the variable display of the decorative patterns. Therefore, by performing a moving display that separates the left and right decorative patterns, the left and right decorative patterns that have reached a reach state are highlighted by the enlarged display, and then attention is quickly drawn to the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C.

Furthermore, the reach line effect display 002SG250 has been exemplified as being displayed immediately after the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, resulting in a reach state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may also be displayed at the same time as the reach state is reached.

In addition, the movable body lamp 9d is shown as being turned off when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 changes after the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R and the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this and the lamp may be turned off simultaneously with the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250. Furthermore, instead of being turned off, the lamp may be made less bright than when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable body lamp 9d built into the movable bodies 32A and 32B located above and below the image display device 5 is used as the specific light-emitting means that is turned off when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The specific light-emitting means is not limited to lamps located on movable bodies that can operate as described above, as long as they are located around the image display device 5. For example, it may be multiple board-side lamps, including an attacca lamp 9c, located on the gaming board, or a main lamp 9a or frame lamp 9b located on the gaming machine frame 3. In particular, if the lamp is located near the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5, turning it off can make the reach line effect display 002SG250 stand out.

Furthermore, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed, the transmittance (transparency) of the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is set to the second transmittance F2, which is lower than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 was executed, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 has been erased from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, so that the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C does not interfere with the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given in which the transparency of the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C gradually decreases (fade-in display) after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is removed from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, but the present invention is not limited to this. The reach line effect display 002SG250 may change to the second transparency F2 almost simultaneously when it is removed from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, or the reach line effect display 002SG250 may change to the second transparency F2 after a predetermined time has elapsed after it is removed from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C.

(Example of SP reach effect)
Next, an example of operation of the SP reach effect will be described with reference to Figures 64 to 66. Figure 64 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach effect. Figure 65 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach effect following Figure 64. Figure 66 is a diagram showing an example of operation of each part in the SP reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 64(A), in the variable display of the Super Reach fluctuation pattern when controlled to a low base state, after the Reach state described in FIG. 61(C) is reached, the Reach title display 002SG070 indicating the type of SP Reach effect is displayed, thereby announcing the Reach title, and an SP Reach effect (e.g., a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) begins as an indication effect to notify whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot (see FIGS. 64(B) and (C)). In the SP Reach effect, a fifth background image 002SG085 depicting space corresponding to the SP Reach effect is displayed, which is an image different from the first background image 002SG081 and second background image 002SG082, which are normal background images. Note that the fifth background image 002SG085 may be an image with a different appearance depending on the type of SP Reach effect.

Next, from the time the battle is decided until the specified valid operation period has elapsed, an operation prompt display 002SG071 consisting of the text "PRESS!!" encouraging the operation of the push button 31B, and a button display 002SG072 imitating the push button 31B are displayed (see Figure 64 (D)).

When operation of the push button 31B is detected within the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without any operation being detected, the operation prompt display 002SG071 and button display 002SG072 are hidden and the game ends. If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a specified light color, the movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the effect position, the effect display 002SG073 highlighting the movable body 32B is displayed, and a specified effect sound is output, indicating that the game has been controlled to a jackpot gaming state (see Figure 64 (E)).

Next, after a result display (not shown) is displayed indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character, the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, and the combination of symbols that confirms a jackpot (for example, "222") is displayed temporarily (see Figure 64 (F)).

As shown in Figure 64 (G), as the SP reach effect ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 disappears and the first background image 002SG081 appears, and while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, the combination of symbols that confirm a jackpot (e.g., "222") is displayed temporarily. After that, a character 002SG074 appears holding a lit ignition device, frames in from the bottom right side of the display screen, and then runs toward the left, igniting the number display portions 002SG051 of the decorative symbols that are temporarily displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see Figure 64 (H)).

As shown in Figure 66(A), specific image 002SG075, which depicts a flame displayed by igniting a predetermined position on the periphery of the number display section 002SG051 of each symbol, increases along the periphery of the number display section 002SG051 and is displayed near the numbers on the number display section 002SG051, as shown in Figures 66(B)-(D). Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view in Figure 66(D), the flame image that constitutes specific image 002SG075 is displayed in a loop with three different images (specific image 002SG075A, specific image 002SG075B, and specific image 002SG075C) repeatedly displayed, giving the appearance of a flickering flame. Finally, specific image 002SG075 disappears, the small symbols and decorative symbols are statically displayed, and the jackpot result is derived and displayed (see Figure 64(J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the presentation position, and a result notification display 002SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed (see Figure 64 (K)). After that, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach presentation is displayed as the background image in the notification presentation, a miss confirmed pattern combination (e.g., "232") that is not a jackpot combination is displayed temporarily (see Figure 64 (L)).

Then, as shown in Figure 64 (M), as the notification effect (SP reach effect) ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 disappears and the first background image 002SG081 appears, and while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, the winning combination (e.g., "232") is temporarily displayed. After that, the small symbols and decorative symbols are displayed temporarily without displaying the specific image 002SG075, and the losing result is derived and displayed (see Figure 64 (N)).

Furthermore, in the variable display of the Super Reach fluctuation pattern when controlled to a high base state, after a notification effect is produced to notify players that they have been controlled to a jackpot game state (see Figure 64 (E)), a result display (not shown) is displayed indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character, and then, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP Reach effect is displayed as the background image in the notification effect, a combination of symbols that confirms a jackpot (for example, "222") is displayed in a provisionally stopped state (see Figure 65 (O)).

Then, as shown in Figure 65 (P), as the notification effect (SP reach effect) ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, and while the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, the jackpot confirmation symbol combination (e.g., "222") is temporarily displayed. After that, the decorative symbols are displayed statically without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed (see Figure 65 (Q)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the performance position, and a result notification display 002SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed (see Figure 64 (K)). After that, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background image in the notification performance, a miss confirmed pattern combination (for example, "232") that is not a jackpot combination is displayed temporarily (see Figure 65 (R)).

Then, as shown in Figure 65 (S), as the notification effect (SP reach effect) ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, and while the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, the winning combination (e.g., "232") is temporarily displayed. After that, the small symbols and decorative symbols are displayed statically without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the losing display result is derived and displayed (see Figure 65 (T)).

In this way, in a low base state, the specific image 002SG075 is displayed in motion relative to the number display portion 002SG051 of the jackpot confirmation decorative symbol that is displayed after the notification effect has ended, thereby enhancing the presentation effect and creating excitement (see Figures 64 (H) and (I)). However, in a high base state where the average variable display period is short, the specific image 002SG075 is not displayed in motion relative to the number display portion 002SG051 of the decorative symbol that is displayed after the notification effect has ended (see Figure 65 (S)), thereby giving the variable display a sense of speed.

In this embodiment, in a low base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is displayed in close proximity to the number display portion 002SG051 of the jackpot confirmation decorative pattern combination displayed after the SP reach performance ends. However, the specific image is not limited to the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame as described above, and images other than flames (for example, light, water, effects, characters, items, etc.) may also be applied.

In addition, the dynamic display of a specific image may not only refer to the flickering flame as described above, but may also include the specific image rotating around the numeric display unit 002SG051, or changing in shape or display color.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example has been given in which character 002SG074 acts on each decorative pattern that is temporarily displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby causing specific image 002SG075 to be displayed in motion around number display unit 002SG051. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific image may be displayed without character 002SG074 acting on each decorative pattern that is temporarily displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

(Variation 2)
Next, a second modification of the present invention will be described with reference to Fig. 67. In Fig. 67, (A1) to (A7) are diagrams showing the second modification of the present invention.

In the above embodiment, the variable stop action enlarges the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the stop position in the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative symbol may be displayed moving in the opposite direction after passing the stop position in the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R, and then returning to the stop position.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 67 (A1) and (A2), the decorative pattern moves gradually downward in the direction of the white arrow while decelerating towards the stopping position, and when it reaches the stopping position and is displayed as temporarily stopped (see Figure 67 (A3)), the base display unit 002SG054 and information display unit 002SG053 remain displayed as temporarily stopped at the stopping position, while the number display unit 002SG051 and character display unit 002SG052 continue to move downward past the stopping position.

At this time, the distance L2 traveled by the numeric display unit 002SG051 from the time it passes the stop position until it is displayed as temporarily stopped is greater than the distance L1 traveled by the character display unit 002SG052 from the time it passes the stop position until it is displayed as temporarily stopped (L1 < L2).

After that, having passed the stop position, the numeric display unit 002SG051 and character display unit 002SG052 each move upward, and while the character display unit 002SG052 is displayed temporarily stopped at the stop position (see FIG. 67(A5)), the character display unit 002SG052 passes the stop position again and moves upward (see FIG. 67(A6)). In this way, the movement distance L3 from when the numeric display unit 002SG051 passes upward through the stop position to when it is displayed temporarily stopped is smaller than the movement distance L2 from when the numeric display unit 002SG051 passes downward through the stop position to when it is displayed temporarily stopped (L3<L2). Finally, the numeric display unit 002SG051 moves downward and is displayed temporarily stopped at the stop position (see FIG. 67(A7)).

In addition, in Figure 67 (A6), the action in which only the character display part 002SG052 passes through the stopping position and moves upward is an upward action that differs in form from the fluctuation start action A4 shown in Figure 34 (A), and therefore allows the difference from the fluctuation start action to be recognized.

In this way, when the decorative pattern reaches the stopping position, rather than being displayed as temporarily stopped at the exact moment it reaches the stopping position, at least some of the multiple seed display parts that make up the decorative pattern are displayed as if they have passed the stopping position, then moved to the opposite side and returned to the stopping position. This makes it appear as if some of the display parts have passed by with force, adding a sense of realism.

Furthermore, by temporarily stopping the first display unit (e.g., base display unit 002SG054 and information display unit 002SG053) among the multiple display units at a stop position while having the other second display units (e.g., number display unit 002SG051 and character display unit 002SG052) pass through the stop position, movement can be imparted without making the stop position unclear. Furthermore, by varying the movement distances passed by one of the second display units, number display unit 002SG051, and the other, character display unit 002SG052, it is possible to display movement that matches the size and appearance of the display units.

(Variation 3)
Next, a third modification of the present invention will be described with reference to Fig. 68. Fig. 68 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the third modification of the present invention.

In the above embodiment, when a decorative symbol is temporarily displayed at a stop position in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first presentation mode, the decorative symbols before and after the decorative symbol temporarily displayed at that stop position are not temporarily displayed, as shown in Figure 32 (A2). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a variable display based on a miss variation pattern, as shown in Figure 68 (B), when one of the decorative symbols (e.g., decorative symbol "3") is temporarily displayed at a stop position, some of the decorative symbols before and after it (e.g., decorative symbol "2", decorative symbol "4") may also be temporarily displayed.

When one of the decorative symbols that was variably displayed (for example, decorative symbol "3") is temporarily stopped at the stop position (see Figures 68(A) and (B)), if a variable stopping action is performed (see Figures 68(C) and (D)), it is preferable that the variable stopping action is performed on the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped at the stop position, and that the variable stopping action is not performed on decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped in areas other than the stop position.

By doing this, when a losing combination, which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a losing display result, is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols, the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily enlarged, thereby drawing the player's attention to the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and keeping the player's gaze on the area where the decorative symbols are displayed, even when a losing combination that would not normally make sense to the player is derived. Furthermore, when the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged, decorative symbols that are not located in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are not enlarged, allowing the player's gaze to be focused on the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and also reducing the load on display control.

In addition, loop light emission control continues even when the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged (see Figures 53 and 54), simplifying the control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d. Furthermore, if multiple valid stop positions are set, a variable stop action may be executed for the decorative symbols temporarily displayed at each valid stop position.

(Other Modifications)
Furthermore, when the variable display mode becomes a reach mode and then develops into an SP reach performance, only the number display unit 002SG051 may be moved to a predetermined position on the display screen where the SP reach performance is displayed (for example, the upper left or right side of the display screen) by a specific action including a first predetermined action in which the left and right decorative patterns that form the reach mode move toward the front side of the display screen and a second predetermined action in which the decorative patterns move toward the back side of the display screen, and in this case, it is preferable that the moving speed of the decorative patterns is faster in the second predetermined action than in the first predetermined action.

In addition, when the variable display is stopped, the decorative pattern is displayed in the number display section 002SG051 and the information display section 002SG053. When the variable display starts, the number display section 002SG051 may be able to execute a number variable start action that is different from the scrolling display, and the information display section 002SG053 may also be able to execute an information display variable start action in conjunction with the number variable start action of the number display section 002SG051. In this case, the information display variable start action may end before the number variable start action ends, causing the information display section 002SG053 to be erased.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention are also included in the present invention.

For example, in the above embodiment, an example was given in which either the first or second presentation mode can be executed in a low base state, the third presentation mode can be executed in a low-probability high base state, and the fourth presentation mode can be executed in a high-probability high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more presentation modes may be executable in a low base state, or three or more presentation modes may be executable in a high base state.

In addition, the above embodiment illustrates a form in which a first scrolling display in the vertical direction is executed in the first presentation mode, a second scrolling display that curves and moves from the back to the front in the second presentation mode, a rotating display in the third presentation mode, and a third scrolling display in the vertical direction in the fourth presentation mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the manner in which the decorative patterns are variable displayed in each presentation mode can be modified in various ways.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form in which a jackpot game state is applied as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and advantageous states may also be a time-saving state, a probability variable state, a small jackpot game state, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given in which the normal state is a low-probability, low-base state, and the special states, which are more likely to execute variable display than the normal state and have a shorter average variable display period, are a low-probability, high-base state and a high-probability, low-base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal state may be a low-probability state, and the special state may be a high-probability state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the game states are a normal state (low base state), a time-saving state (low probability high base state), and a probability variable state (high probability high base state), and an example is given of applying the present invention to a pachinko game machine 1 that can be controlled to the time-saving state or the probability variable state at the end of a jackpot game.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may also be applied to pachinko game machines that can be controlled to the time-saving state based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result, which is part of the case where the variable display result is not a miss in a low probability state, or that can be controlled to the time-saving state based on the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times without being controlled to the advantageous state in a low probability state after the end of an advantageous state or RAM clear (cold start of pachinko game machine 1). In this case, for example, the time-saving state controlled after a jackpot game can be called time-saving state A, the time-saving state controlled after the end of an advantageous state or in a low-probability state after RAM clearing (a cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1) based on the execution of a predetermined number of variable displays without being controlled to an advantageous state can be called time-saving state B, and the time-saving state controlled based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result in some cases where the variable display result is not a miss in a low-probability state can be called time-saving state C.

Furthermore, in a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to enter the time-saving state C described above, multiple types of variable display results that can result in winning the time-saving state C may be provided, and the number of variable displays for which time-saving control is performed may be varied depending on the type of variable display result that results in winning the time-saving state C.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but this is not limited to spherical gaming media and may also be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, while the above embodiment applies to a pachinko gaming machine as an example of a gaming machine, the present invention can also be applied to slot machines in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is output to a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of individually identifiable symbols, and a prize can be awarded depending on the variable display result output to the variable display device. In the case of slot machines, the normal state corresponds to the non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to the big bonus, regular bonus, or assist time (AT), and the special state corresponds to assist time (AT), etc.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning, as well as slot machines. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows games to be played, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and can also be a general gaming machine.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 2 Game board 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 9 Game effect lamp 11 Main board 12 Performance control board 31B Push button 31B
32 Movable body 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
a display means;
The game control means
It is possible to determine whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state based on the game medium entering the start area,
The specific identification information can be variably displayed,
Based on the result of the determination, it is possible to determine one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command can be transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command can be transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command can be transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command can be transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state will be achieved in a first reach,
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state will be achieved in a second reach,
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The execution time of the title display corresponding to the first reach is different from the execution time of the title display corresponding to the second reach,
The title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach are:
a first part from the start of a title display corresponding to the first reach or a title display corresponding to the second reach to the display in a specific area;
a second part in which a title display corresponding to the first reach or a title display corresponding to the second reach is displayed in the specific area;
a third part that ends the display of the title display corresponding to the first reach or the title display corresponding to the second reach,
The display means
displaying a title display corresponding to the first reach such that the second part is longer than the first part and the third part, and the first part is longer than the third part;
displaying a title display corresponding to the second reach such that the second part is longer than the first part and the third part, and the first part is longer than the third part;
before displaying the title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach, a prompting character display for urging a player to take an action can be displayed,
a title display corresponding to the first reach and a title display corresponding to the second reach being displayed larger than the promotion character display;
the display means is capable of displaying a prompting character display for urging a player to take an action before displaying a title display corresponding to the second reach;
The time period during which the title display corresponding to the second reach is displayed is longer than the time period during which the promotion character display is displayed without the player making any action after the promotion character display is displayed,
the performance control means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variably displayed specific identification information;
In one rendering mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed;
When switching the background image from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display can be executed by gradually increasing the transparency of the first background image, and a background fade-in display can be executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the second background image,
When starting the variable display of the decorative identification information, an identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased,
The identification information fade-out display and the background fade-out display can be executed at the same time,
a period during which the background fade-out display is executed is longer than a period during which the identification information fade-out display is executed;
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, a fade-in display of the decorative identification information can be executed, in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually decreased in accordance with the deceleration of the variable display of the decorative identification information,
The identification information fade-in display and the background fade-in display can be executed at the same time,
The gaming machine has a period during which the background fade-in display is executed longer than a period during which the identification information fade-in display is executed.